PDF Vodavi Infinite DVX I & II Installation

Infinite DVX I & II Install Infinite DVX I & II Install

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 477

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SYSTEMS
/

r
ir;rfini&

DVX’aadDVX”

Di@t.d

ZKey Tcleplxoxte
300.48
300.49

Systems
DIRECT STATION SELECHON ......................................................
DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP ..........................................
...................
A.
Call Pick-up - Station ......................................................
B.

300.50
300.51
300.52
300.53

300.54
300.55
300.56
300.57
300.58
300.59
300.60
300.61
300.62
300.63
300.64
300.65
300.66
300.67
300.68
300.69
300.70
300.71
300.72
300.73
300.74
300.75
300.76
300.77

Call Pick-up

- ACD/UCD

Groups

....................................

DIRECTORY DIALING .................................................................
DISABLE OUTGOING CO LINE ACCESS ........................................
DISTINCTTVE RINGING (User Selectable]
DO NOT DISTURB (DND]
.
One-Time Do Not Dishrb DND) .....................................

300-17
360-17
300-17
.300-17
..:3oo-I 7
30&17
300- 17
‘30@17
300-17

.......................................

...............................................................

DTMF SENDING
300-17
EMERGENCY TRANSFER
300-17
END TO END SIGNALING ..............................................................
300-17
EXCLUSIVE HOLD .......................................................................
300-18
EXECUTNE
OVERRIDE .............................................
................
i..
,3+i8
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY
TRANSFER ...........................................
,300-18
E.XJ.-ERNAI, NIGHFRINGING
...? .............................
.........................
300-18
FLASH ............................................................................................
3(30-‘18
FLASH ON INTERCOM ..................................................................
306’18
FLASH WlTH SPEED DIAL .............................................................
300-k
FLEXIBLEATfENDANT
300-,lB
FLEXIBLEB~NASSIGNMENT
................................................
300-18
FLEXIBLE PORT ASSIGNMENTS ..................................................
-300; 19
FORCEDACCOUNTCODES..
......................................................
..300-19
FORCED LEAST COST ROUTING (LCR) .......................................
..300-19
GROUP CALL, PICK-UP ..................................................................
3occl9
GROUP LTSTENING .......................................................................
300-19
HEADSET COMPATTBILITY ............................................................
36049
HEADSET MODE
3ocb is
HEARING AID COMPATIBLE .........................................................
3ofj-19
HOLD PREFERENCE .....................................................................
3&s
HOLD FiECALL ..............................................................................
300-19
HOT LINE/RING
DOWN ................................................................
300-20
.HUNT GROUPS .............................................................................
300-20
.
Hunt Group Chainhg
300-20
B.
Pilot Hunting
3GCi-20
C.
Station Hunting
300-20
............................................................................

..............................................................

.................................................................

.............................................................

.C..

.........

.....................................................

..................................................................

..............................................................

300.78

300.79
300.80
300.81
300.82
300.83
300.84

ICLID FEATURE ............................................................................
A
Calling Number/Name
Display .......................................
B.
Incoming Number/Name
for SMDR Records.. ..................
C.
Unanswered
Call Management
........................................

3o0-20
300-20.
300-20
3C0-20:’

IDLE SPEAKER MODE ............................................................
. ...... 30ckii
INCOMING CO LINES OFF-NET FORWARD (VIA SPEED DIAL) ...... Srjo-ii ’
INTERCOM C4LLING .....................................................................
3oc+
INTERCOM SIGNALING SELECT ...................................................
300-2 I .
KEYS=
SELFTEST ..........................................................
. ............ 3tiil.
LAsrNUMBERREDIAL(LNR)
.......................................................
300-2 1

_.:_
DQitd
300.85
300.86

fqfinite
DVX I and DVX *
Sty Telephone
Systtms

IA33 II’ITERACT~VE

DISPLAY .........................................................
LEAST COST ROUTING &CR)
A.
3-Digit Table ..................................................................
B.
S-Digit Table (O&e Codes) .............................................
C.
Route List Tables
D.
Insert/Delete
TabIes .......................................................

300-Z 1
300-2 1
300-2 1

.......................................................

300-2 1
300-2 1
300-22

............................................................

‘.TL’.:’

‘-

2 300.87
,,’ r300.88
4300.89
1’-r300.90
3-3 <300,91
-?I 300.92
.-r

E.
F.

Weekly Time Tables ........................................................
Daily Start Time Tables ..................................................

G.
H.

Exception

:I
\-

#--

I
r ;r.,,.. 7.

1‘-<.
.m..
..?‘

300.100
i!l
300.10 1
&Jc:.
300. x02
.?<-: 2 300.103
-. .-. - 300.104
300.105
i: -.
.vi

Tables ............................................................

300-22
300-22

Default

LCR Data Base ...................................................
LCR Routing for Toll Information
...................................

............................................................

300-22
300-22
300-22
3O(F22
300-22
300-22
300-22
300-23

...............

......................................................

Personaked

300-23

Message Code on a Flex Key.. .....................

300-23

MUSIC ON HOLD ..........................................................................
MUTEKEY ....................................................................................
NAME IN DISPLAY ........................................................................
ITIGHT SERVTCE FEATURE ...........................................................
NIGHT SERVICE MODE ................................................................
A
Automatic
Night Mode Operation ....................................
B.
External Night Ringing ...................................................
C.
Manual Operation ..........................................................
D.
Night Class of Sewice (COS) ...........................................
E.
Night RfngingAssignments
.............................................
F.
G.

:e>
I-rz

300-22

LOCALNUMBER/NAMETIUNSI.X~ON
TABLE ............................
LOOP BUTTON CO LINE ACCESS .................................................
MEET ME PAGE
MESSAGE WAITING ......................................................................
MESSAGE WAITING REMINDERTONE
.............. . ..........................
MESSAGES - PERSONALIZED
A.
Date and Time Entry to Personalized Message(s) .............
B.
Messages - Custom.. .......................................................
C.

- .:
300.93
:I !‘ 300.94
-,
-300.95
300.96
4 300.97
,

300-22

Universal
Weekly

300-23
300-23
300-23
300-23
300-23
300-23
300-23
3OU23
300-23
300-24
300-24

NightAnswer

(UNAj .........................................
Night Mode Schedule.. ........................................

300-24

OFF HOOK VOICE OVER ..............................................................
OF-F-HOOK PREFEFUZNCE ............................................................
.
Auto Feature Access .......................................................
B.
Auto Line Access ............................................................
C.
Hot Line/Ring
Dmn .......................................................
D.
E.

Intercom

Access .............................................................
User Fhgrammable
Preference ......................................

300-24
300-24
3OG24
300-24
30&24
300-24
.3oO-i~

OFF-HOOK SIGNALING .................................................................
OFF-PREMISE
EXTENSIONS (OPX) ...............................................
ON-HOOK DlALING .......................................................................
ON LINE PROGRAMMING
.............................................................
PAGE/RELAY
CONTROL ...............................................................
PAGING ........................................................................................

rssut 1,

300-24
300-24
30@24
300-25
300-25
300-25
Jarmary

1993

r
i@Znite
DVX I aad DVX’
D&WI
Key Telephone
Sy&ems

Table

of Contents
1..

’

,::
i,

300.106
300.107
300, LOS
300.109
300.110
300.111

External Paging .....................
.....................................
1nten-d paging.. .............................................................

Paging Access Restriction

300-25

.................................................

300-25

PAUSE TIMER ................................................................................
PERSONAL PARK ..........................................................................
PBX DLALING CODES ....................................................................
POOL EWTIQN OPERATION
PREFERREDLINEANSWER
.........................................................
PRIVACYRELEASE
......................................................................
.
Per CO Line Option .........................................................

30&25
300-25
300-25
300-25
-300-26
.300-26
300-26

..........................................................

Per Station

Option

..........................................................

300-26

300.112
300.113
300.114
300.115

PRIVATE UNE ...............................................................................
PUISE-TO-TONE
SWITCHOVER ....................................................
RANGE PROGRAMMlNG
.........................................................
REMOTEfiDMINISIRATION
.
Database Upload/Download
...........................................

300.116

REMOTE SYSTEM MONITOR AND MAINTENANCE..
......................
.
Remote System Maintenance
..........................................
B.
Remote System Monitor ..................................................

300-26
300-26

300.117
300.118
300.119
300.120
300.121
300.122
300.123
300.124

SAVE NUMBER REDlAL (SNR) .......................................................
SINGLE UN-E ‘DZLEPHONE (SLTI COMPA~ILZIY
........................
SPEAKFRPHONE
STATION CLASS OF SERVICE (COS) .............................................
STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) .......................
STATION REmCATION
FEATURE .................................................
STAI-ION SPEED DIAL ...................................................................
SYSIXM CAPACllY
.....................................................................
A
Up to X4x28 Configuration..
...........................................
B.
Up to 23x56 Configuration
..............................................

300-27
-300-27
300-27
300-27
.300-27
300-27
300-27
-300-28
-300-28

300.125
300.126
300.127
300.128
300.129
300.130

SYSTEM HOLD.. ...........................................................................
SYSTEMSPEEDDIAL
....................................................................
TEXT MESSAGING (Silent Response) .............................................
TOLLRESll?ICTiON
(TABLE DRIVEN) ...........................................
TRANSFER REWLL, ......................................................................
UNIFORM CALL DKfRIBUTiON
(UCD) ..........................................
.
Alternate UCD Group Assignments
.................................

-300-28

..‘......................................,

w/Timer

B.
C.

Auto Wrap-Up

D.
E.

Incoming co Dfrect Ftinghlg.. ..........................................
No-Answer Recall Timer ..................................................

Ntwlnswer

Avafiabe/UnavaiiabIe

300-28
300-28
300-28
300-28
300-28
300-28
3OCk28
300-29

RetryTimer

...................................................
Assignments..
......................................

owx-fhv

i;;

Recorded Announcements
(RAN) .....................................
Agent Queue Status Display ...........................................
NIGHTANSWER

300-28

Mode ............................................

UNIVERSAL

300-27

300-28

,<:

300.131

300-26
360-26
300-26

..................................................

Station

300-26
300-26

....................

..........................................................................

300-29
300-29
-300-29
300-29
300-29

TCMA) ...............................................

300-29
F.

issue

1, Januaxy

1903

- xi’;
i<
I),.. +L~(jgg5~
I-......

vu
-..^

i?fin~eDVX'adDvX"
Table of Contenta
-

300.132

300.133

SECTION

310

310.3
310.2
310.3
310.4
310.5
310.6
310.7
310.8
310.9
310.10
310.11
310.12
310.13
310.14
310.15
310.16
310.17
310.18
310.19
310.20
310.21
SEZTICIN320
320.1
320.2
320.3
320.4
320.5
320.6
320,7
320.8
320.9
320.10
320.11
320.12
320.13

Di@d
VOICE
A.

MAIL GROUPS [VM)
VM CO Disconnect

Key Telephone

Systems

Signal - Pass TYhru ............................

300-80

...........................................................

VM In-Band

Signaling

VM Message

Waiting

VMTone

VMTramfer/Fomard

VM Transfer

Mode Calling

VOLUME

CONTROLS

SINGLE

Integration
Indication

300-29

...................................
......................................

300-30
300-30

Option.. .......................................

300-30
300-30

.....................................................

Wth ID Digits .............................................

300-30

....................................................................

TELEPHONE

FEATURE

300-30

DEWXUPTION

..........

ACCOUNT CODE ............................................................................
AUlDMA~C
LINE ACCESS .............................................................
CALL FORWm
.............................................................................
CAMP ON ........................................................................................
,
CONFERENCE ................................................................................
CONFERENCE
/WlTH PERSONALPARK..
.......................................
DIRECT’ OUTSlDE LINE GROUP ACCESS
DIRECT OUTSIDE LJN-E RINGING ...................................................
DIRECIED
CALL PICK-UP ..............................................................
DO NCrr DXSTURB (‘DND) ................................................................
GROUP CALL PICK-UP
INTERCOM CALTJNG ......................................................................
MESSAGE WAITING/CALL
BACK.. ..................................................
MESSAGES - PERSONALIZED
........................................................
A.
Messages - Custom ...........................................................
........................................

....................................................................

310-l
310-l
310-l
310-l
310-l
310-l
310-l
310-l
310-I
320-l
310-l
310-l
310-3
3 10-3
310-3
310-3

NIGHT SIXVICE .............................................................................
OFF-HOOK PREFERENCE
..............................................................
PERSONAL PARK ............................................................................
gUEtJlNG
STATION SPEED DlAL ....................................................................
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL. .....................................................................
TRANSFER ......................................................................................

310-3
310-3
310-3
310-3
310-3
310-3

ATTENDANT

320-l

3 IO-3

.......................................................................................

FUTURE

DEscRIpTlON

.................................

AXENDANT
DISABLE OUI’GOING ACCESS ...................................
ATIENDANTOVTmFLOW
................................................................
ATTENDANT OVERRIDE .................................................................
ATl-EIYDANT POSITiON ...................................................................
AIITENDANTRECALL
......................................................................
AUTOMA-ITC NIGHT MODE .............................................................
INCOMING CO LINE OFF-NET FORWARD
NIGHT SERVICE FE;ATuRE
TXME AND DATE PROGRAMMING
...................................................
ATI’ENDANTSEARCH
.....................................................................
EKJSY LAMP FIELD INDICATORS
....................................................
DIRECT SlYAnON CALLING .............................................................
MAPPING OPTiONS .........................................................................
.......................................

.............................................................

lsaut

1, &m!ary

320-l
320-l
320- 1
320-l
320-l
320-l
320- 1
320- 1
320-l
320-2
320-2
320-2
320-2
1993

imite

nigital

DVX’

and DVX’

Key T&phone

MESSAGES - CUSTOM .* ,......,.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ,.......I.. . . . . . --........ . . .. .. . . . 320-3
~.,...,....... f.... . . . . .. . . . . . .. **. . . .a*. . . .. -...a..-. ‘320-3
REIJ3ASEKEY ,*.......,.........,,....,.

320.14
320.15

SECTION

400

STATION

FEATURE

OPERATION

..r...**.*.,*,.......*........**....*......

400-l

400-l
INTRODUCTION
400-l
KEY TELEPHONE STATION FEATURES
ANSWERINGAN
OUTSIDECALL........
. . . . .. . . . . ~. . . . . .. . . . .. . ..t.. . . . ..-.....I.... 400-4
PLACiNG AN OUTSIDE CAL& ON HOLD
400-4
ANSWEFZING A RECALL . .. .. .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .* .. . . . I .. . . . .. . . *. . . . . . .. . . . . .. *. . . . 400-4
ACCOUNT CODES.. ,. .a. . . . .. .. . . .. .. .. ,.a, . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .-. . .. . . . . .. _. . . .400-4
DISABLE OUTGOING CO Llm ACCESS a,,.. *,... *. . .. . . *.,.. . ,,,............,...
400-4
PLACING AN OUTSIDE CALL (Automatic Line Selection) . .. .. . . . . . . .. .. . . . 400-4
AUTOMATlC CALL DISTRIBU’IJON
(ACD) . . . .. . . . . . . *..* *....... .. .. . . . . *... . . . . . 400-4
A.
Agent Login/L,ogout
Feature . . . . -..* .. . . .* ..*...**..,.... * . . . . . . . . . . *...* 400-4
B.
ACD Agent ‘wELF” button . . .. . . . . .. . . .. ..~..~.......4 . . . . . . . ..* .,... *.,.*e 400-5

400.1
400.2
400.3
400.4
400.5
400.6
400.7
400.8
400-g

..,......,..

..,..

l ,...

+*.I

. .

. . .

. **..w.a*I

I.,,..,

..*

. . . . . . . .

l . . . . . .

. . . . . . * . .

. . . . . . . . .

. *

,....

. . . .

. . .

. . a...

. -.s

. . . . . e...

. .

. . . . . . . .

l ,,..............

* ,...

ACD CalI QuaXfkxttion . . . .. . . *.,.- . .. . . . . *. . . .. . . .. ***. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -. . . . 400-5
ACD Agent Queue Status Dfsplay . . . . ::.. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400-6

ACD Available/Unmailab~e
Supervisor L.ogfn/Logout

H.
1.
400.10
400.11
400.12
400.13

. .

. . . . . . .

C.
D.
F.
G.

Ifwlt

Table of Contents

Systems

Supervisor

Monitor

Mode . . .. . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . I* . . . . . . . *.a..,, 400-6
Feature ** .. . . . *. . . .. .. . . . ..I ,,........... *... 400-6
With Eiarge-In . .. . . *....* .,.,., 0. . . . . . . . . * .. . . . . . . . 400-7

Supervisor Queue Status Display . ..-...-* . . . . .. ..-..................I.
400-7
ACD Group Member Status.. ..__.._. . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . .400-8

BACKGROUND
MUSIC (Optional) ,...,.,.,...,...................-....
v. . . . . .. . . . . ,., 400-8
AUTOMATIC! SELECTION .. . . . ..,...,....I. *.,a,...... a.,. ..,,.,.... *...*...*.* ..,.,,.... 400-8
CALL BACK . . . . . . -..- . . . . . . . .. *...* .. . . . . . a.*. . . . . . . .. . . *. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . ..*........ 400-8
CALL FORWARD: STATiON .. . . . . . . .-.. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ..a. .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . .._. . . . . ,... ,400-g
k
Cdl Forward - All Calls .* . . . . a..*..........*..* ,............ *. . . . . . .. . . *. . . . 400-g
B.

Cdl Forward

. . . . . . . ..,..,......... * . . . .. . .. *.......-.a .,,,.,. 400-9
- Busy .* f...... *. . . . *. . . . . ..-.-.... *...a .. . . . . . . . . . *.- . . . . . .. . . . 400-9

CdJ Forward

- Busy/No

Call

Forward
Call Forward

- Off-Net (via speed dial) . . .. . . . .*. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 400-10
- ACD or UCD Groups . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . ..-........ 400-10

Call Forward

- Voice Mall Groups . . . . . . . ..*........**..*.............

Call Forward

- Hunt

- No Answer

Answer

,.......

* . .

. . .

. . . . . .

,...**..*...*

.,,...

400-9

400- 10

Groups . . . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . *... .. . . . . . . . . a. . . . . -... 400-l

400.14
400.15

CALL FORWARD: PFXESETa.*.. . . . . . . . *.* . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-..*........ . .,,. 400-l 1
CALL FORWARD: CO LINES . . . . . ..I.......................~.~......~~~.~..~~~........
400-l 1
A.
Incoming CO Lines Of&Net [via speed dial) . .. ..-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4O@ll

400.16
400.17
400.18
400.19
400.20
400.2 1
400.22
400.23
400.24

CALLJNG STATION TONE MODE OPTION . .. . . . s. . . . . .. .** .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400-11
CALLPARK ..a . . . . *..*...*.*...a .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .a. . . . . . . -. . . . . . . . -. . . .. . . .. ..-.... . .,... *.,.... 400-12
CALL PICK-UP: GROUP . . . .. . . . m......,.. .. . . .. . . . . . . . ...I.. . . . . *. . . . . . . . . . . . . aa..,,.... 400-12
cALL?RANSFER
. .. . . *. . . . *.., . . . . . ...*...- . .. .. .. . . . . . . .. . . -. . . . . . . . . . . **. . ..I....... ~..,, 400-12
TRANSFERRING
CO CALLS TO A STATION FORWARDED TO VM.. 4OO- 12
CAMP-ON ..* . . . . .. .. . . f,.. .. .. . . . . . ..I . . . . . . a. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. *... 400-12
CO LINE ACCESS . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . ..*..........................**.......*....~........
400-13
COW&‘-E QUEUING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..*..............*......-.......
400- 13
CONFERENCE
COMBINA‘IlONS
*..........,...........,..***......*..,.,..........*
400- 13

1. January

1983

;zfinite
DVX’tmdDVX”
Digital Key Telephone
Systems

Table of Contents
400.25
400.26
400.27
400.28
400.29
400.30
400.31

DATA FEATLIRJZ ............................................................................
DLAL, BY NAME
DIRECTED CALL PICK-IX
DIRECTORY DIALING - Stations.. ..................................................
DIRECJT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS 113ISA) ...................................
DISTINCTIVE: RINGING .................................................................
DO NOT DISTURB .........................................................................
A.
One-Time Do Not Disturb ...............................................

400.32
400.33
400.34
400.35
400.36
400.37
4Oix3a

EXCLUSIVE HOLD ........................................................................
EXECUTNE
OVERRIDE ................................................................
EXECUTNE/SECREIXFZY
TRANSFER ..........................................
FLASH ..........................................................................................
FLASH ON INTERCOM ..................................................................
F’LEXIBm BUTTON ASSIGNMENT .............................
“I.. ..............
GROUP LISTENING
HEADSEiT MODE ..........................................................................
ICUD UNANSWERlED CALL MANAGEMENT
TABLE ......................
INTERCOM CALLING ....................................................................
INTERCOM TRANSFER .................................................................
KEYSET SELF ‘IESr ......................................................................
A
Keyset LCD/LED Test .....................................................
B.
Keyset Button Test .........................................................
c.
DSS LED/Button
Test ....................................................

400.39
400.40
400.41
400.42
400.43

400.4-4
400.45
400.46
400.47
400.48
400.49
4OQ.50
400.5 1
400.52
400.53
400.54
400.55

400.56
400.57
4uO.58
400.59
400.60
400.61
400.62
400*63
x

.............................................................................

............................................................

.......................................................................

LASTNUMBER
REDIAL ................................................................
LEASI’ COST ROUTING .................................................................
MEET ME PAGE ............................................................................

400-15
400-15
400-17
400-17
400- 18
400- 18
400- 19
400- 19
400-19
400-19
400-19
4OO- 19
400-Z 1
400-2 1
400-2 1
400-22
400-22
400-22
400-22
400-23
400-23
MO-23

MESSAGE WAITING
IvrulzKEY
NIGHT SERVICE FEATLTRE ...........................................................
OFF-HOOK PREFERENCE ............................................................
OFF HOOK VOICE OVER (OHVO) ..................................................
PAGING ........................................................................................
PBX/CENI’REX
TRANSFER ...........................................................
PERSONAL, PARK
PERSONALIZED MESSAGES ........................................................
A
Personalized Message - Date & Time Entry ......................
B.
Personalized Messages - Custom ....................................
C.
Personalized Message Code On A Flex Button .................
......................................................................

....................................................................................

..........................................................................

I’~
FLEX BUITON PROGRAMMING
........................................
PROGRAMMING
YOUR NAbIf3 IN-IO THE LCD DISPLAY ................
PULSE-TO-TONE
SWITCHOVER ...................................................
SAVE NUMBER REDIAL ................................................................
PROGRAMMING
PBX/CENIREx
CODES ONi’ FLEX BUrrON ....
SPEAKERPHONE ..........................................................................
STATION RELOCATION FEATURE ................................................
STAnON SPEED DIAL, ..................................................................
Issue

400-14
400-‘15

1, Jammy

400-23
400-23
400-24
400-24
MO-24
400-24
400-24
400-26
400-26
4OB26
400-27
400-27
400-27
400-27
400-28
400-28
400-28
400-28
400-29
400-29
400-29
400-29
1993

imite
D&itd

Dm’
and DVX ’
Xcy Telephone
Systems

400.70

VOLUME

405

. . . . . . . . .

KEPSET

. . . . .

. . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

FEATURE

. . . .

. . . . ..I

. .

l . .

. . .

. . . .

. . -

. . . . .

. . . . l .*.*

. . .

OPERATION

. .

. . . .

. . . . .

. 1....

. . . . .

l .

. .

. . .

. .

400-32

. .

..* . . . . . ***.* . . . . . . . ...405-I

INTRODUCTION
..a .. . . . . . ..t.. . . .. . 0.. . . . .*.a. . . . . . . **. . . . . . . . *. . . . . ,*,.,..... ~. . . . . ..f . . . . . . 405-l
KEY TELEPHONE STAnON FEATURJZS . . . .. . . . . ...*..... . ..A . . ..I.......... *. . . . 405-I
AUTOMA’lX
CALL DISTRIBUTON
(ACD] .. . . .. . ..L... . . . . . ..I.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405-4
A
Agent Login/Logout
Feature . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . .*. . . . . . . * ..-.... .405-4
B.
ACD Agent “HELP” button ..- . . . . . . . . . . . -.-* . . . . . . . .. . *. . . . . . . . . ~..., ..,... 405-4

405.4

ACD Call Qualification

.I.... . . . . . e.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a... . . . . .. . . . .I... . . . . . . 405-5
ACD Available/Unavailable
Mode . . . . . .. . . ,, . . . .. ..-..................
-405-5

CALL FORWARD: STATION
405-5
A.
CallFomard-AllCalls
.. . ..-.--. _..*- . . . . . .. * . . .. . . . . . A. . . . . . . . . . **.. ,..... 405-5
B.
CallForward
- NoAnswer.
. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405-6
C.
Call Forward - 3usy . .. . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . ..-*...........................*.......
405-6
D.
Call Forward - Busy/No Answer . ..-....................................
405-6
. ..1..1..1.....*.1...*

E.
F.
G,
H.
4055
405.6
405.7
405.8
405.9
405.10
405.1 I
405.12
405.13
405.14
405.15

Call Forward
Call Forward

. .

. m..

. .

. . . a..*.**

. . .

. . l .

. . . .

. . l .

Call Forward

- Off-Net (via speed dial)
405-6
- ACD or UCD Groups . . . . ..-....1...-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405-7
- Voice Mti Groups . . . . . . . .. . . ..~....~...rn............... 405-7

Call Forward

- Hunt

. . . . .

. . . . ..*m.

. . .

. . . . .

. . . .

. . .

. l

Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . , . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-. 405-8

CALLING Sl=A’i-lON TONE MODE OPTION
405-8
CONFERENCE WITH PERSONAL PARK m..... . . . . . . . . .. a..... . . . . . *...a .. . . . . . . . . . 405-8
CO LINE QUEUING .*..........-...-I...............*...~.............,..*....~........*..,,
405-8
DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP .s. . ..I..., I.. . . . . . *. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . *.............l...,..,,.
405-8
DO NOT DISTUF2B .a..*...* . . . . . . . . . . 0.. . . . . a... . . . I .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . ~. . . . . . *...* . . . ...*...*. 405-9
Ml3SSAGE WAMING .I.... . . .. . . . . ..a . . ..-....-........................-....................
405-9
.IvrurEKEY . .. . -. . . . . a..- . . . . .. . a--..-a. . . . . . .-..*..I . . . .. .* .. . . . .. . . .. ..C... .. . ..I..... *. . . . . . . . 405-g
PBX/CENIXEX’IRANSFER
. . . ..I . . . . . . . . . . -. .. . -.-..I. . . . . . .4.. ..I... *..* . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 405-9
PERSONAL PARK (Flip-Flop] .* . . ...I.. --.------...-.I-.... . . . . . v.........;.... . . . . . .. . . . 405-9
PROGRAMMING
YOUR NAME MM THE ED DISPLAY.. <... . . . . . . . . . ..m,405-g
VOLUME CONTROL
405-10
.

. . .

410

SLT

410.1
410.2
410.3

1, January

CONTROLS

S-BUTTON

hn~

Mode . . . . .,.. . . . . .. . . ,... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400-31

UNIVERSAL NIGHTANSWER
(UNA) .L...... . ,..... * .. . . .. ..f ..f........ *,..** . . . . . 400-3 1
VOICE MAIL OPERATION IVM)
400-3 1
A
Voice Mail Thantier with ID .., . . . . . . . . .-.- . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . *. . . . . . *..* . . . . 400-32
VM Tone Mode Calling Option ..* . . . . . * . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . * . . . .. . . .. 400-32
B.

SECTION

UCD Available/Unavaihble

400.68
400.69

405.1
405.2
405.3

of c43ntents

STORlNG SPEED NUMBERS . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .* . . .. . .. . . .~...~.~.. . . .. . . . . . . . . . ,,...... 400-29
SYSTEMSPEEDDIAL
. .. . . ..,........ .~. . . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . ...4&-30
TEXT MESSAGING (Silent Response) .-.-.* . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . a..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 400-30
UNIFORM CALL DISITU3UTlON
fUCD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . ...*.*.*.. 400-3 1
A.
UCD Calls In Queue Display . . . . ..-_ . . . . .. .. . . . . .. . . . . . . _.. . . . . . . .. . . . . 400-3 1

400.64
400.65
400.66
400.67

sEcTroIv

Table

IWWURE

l.NTRODUC’iION

. . ..I.........

. .

OPERATKON

. . .

. . -....

. . .

..*

. .

. . . .

. . .

. . . . .

. .

. . . I.

**.*.*

. .

. . . . . .

. .

. . . .

. .

. ,.....,..,..

l ..,...,..,

~ . . .

. . l

. ..*.*....-........-...............*.........**.....

. . . ...* . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . -*-.-.-.-.._ . ..I............,.,

410-l

..* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410-l

ACCOUNT CODE
410-l
AUT’OMA’IX
CALL DISTRIBUTION
(ACD] . . . . . . b...... .. . . . . . . . . .** .,.....*..,.. * 410- 1
A
Agent Login/Logout
Feature . . . . . ..*..a . . . . . . . .. . . *. ..I.. *. . . . . . ..*.*.... 410-l
.--.-.-.--.*.*

1993

. . . .

--.-.----a

. . . . . l

. . . .

-...a...*

. .

. . . . . . .

. .

. ..*..........

Table of ~ntCntS

410.4
410.5
410.6
410.7
410.8
410.9
410. IO
410.13
410.12
410.13
410.14
410.15
410.16
410.17
410.18
410.19
410.20
410.21
410.22
410.23
410.24
410.25
4 10.26
410.27
410.28
410.29
410.30
410.31
410.32
410.33

SW!I’ION 420
420.1
420.2
420.3
420.4
420.5
420.6
420.7
420.8
420.9
420.10
420.11
420.12
Jdi

Digital
B.

ACD Agent “BELP”

ACD Avdable/Unava&bIe

button

@finite
DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

................................................
Mode .....................................

CALL BACK .....................................................................................
CALL, FORWARDING
CALLING STATION TONE MODE OFRON.. ......................................
CAMP-ON ........................................................................................
CALL PARK (System)
CALLTRANSFER
CLEAR CALL FORWARD, DND, PERSONALJZED MESSAGES ..........
co LINE QUEUING
CONFERENCE
................................................................................
CONFERENCE
WITH PERSGNAL PARK ...........................................
DIRECT OUTSIDE LlNE ACCESS ....................................................
DIRECTED
CALL PICK-UP
DO NGTDISTURB..
.........................................................................
PBX/CENIREX
TRANSFER Flash Command
to CO Line) ...............
GROUP CALL PICK-UP
PLACING CALLS ON EXCLUSIVE HOLD ..........................................
INTERCOM CALLING ......................................................................
LEASTCOSTROUTING..
.................................................................
MESSAGE WAITING.. ......................................................................
OFF-HOOKPREFERENCE
PERSONALJZED MESSAGES ..........................................................
PAGING ..........................................................................................
MEET ME PAGE ..............................................................................
.......................................................................

.......................................................................

...........................................................................

.........................................................................

............................................

................

....................................................................

..............................................................

410-l
41013
410-3
410-3
4 10-3
410-3
410-3
410-3
410-4
410-4
410-4
410-4
410-4
410-4
410-4
410-4
410-4
410-5
410-5
410-5
410-5
410-5
410-5
410-6
410-6
410-6
4 10-6

PERSONALPARK
(Flip-Flop) ...........................................................
PROGRAMMING
YOUR NAME INTO THE LCD DISPLAY ..................
STATION SPEED DIAL ....................................................................
STORING S-TXI’ION SPEED NUMBERS
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL .....................................................................
IJNIWRSAL
NIGHTANSWER
IUNA) ................................................
UCD AVAILABLE/UNAVAILABLE

410-6
410-6
410-7
410-7
410-7

ATTENDANT

420-l

............................................

....................................................

R-ZA-

OPERATION

....................................

INTRODUC’ITON
ATIENDANTKEYTELEPHONE
STATION FEATURE5 ......................
ANSWERINGAN
OUTSIDE CALL .....................................................
PLACING OUTSIDE LJNE ON HOLD ................................................
ANSWERING A RECALUNG OUTSIDE LINE ....................................
ATI’ENDANT DL5ABI.E OUTGOING ACCESS ...................................
A’ITEND~OVERRIDE
.................................................................
ATTENDANTREcALL
......................................................................
DATA FEATURE ............. .................................................................
DIAL3Y
NAME
DIS!JNCUVE
RINGING ...................................................................
EX?CuTNE
OVERRIDE ..................................................................
..............................................................................

...............................................................................

Issue 1. amlary

420- 1
420-l
420-4
420-4
420-4
420-4
420-4
420-4
420-4
420-5
420-6
420-7
1993

iqjidte
Digital

Dvx’andDvxn
Key Telephone

Systems
ICLID UNANSWERED

420.13
420.14

TABLE ........................

.......................................................................

DSS IJZD/Button

Test ......................................................

.420-7
420-a
420-8
420-9
420-9
420-9
420-9

420.17
420.18

MESSAGES - CUSTOM.. ................................................................
DIRECi’0RY
DIALING -Attendant
.................................................
A.
Prog
‘g-Attendant
................................................

420.19
420.20
420.21
420.22
420.23
420.24

NIGHT SERVICE
420-14
OFF HOOK VOICE OVER [OHVO) .................................................
.420- 14
SETITNG SYSTEMTIMEAND
DATE
420-15
STORING SYSlXM SPEED NUMBERS. ......................
. ..................
.420- 15
TEXT MESSAGING (Silent Response) .............................................
420-15
ATTENDANTTRANSFER
SEARCH .................................................
420- 16
PLACING AN OUTSIDE CALL (Automatic
Line SeIection) ............... .420- 16
CAILPARK
...................................................................................
420-17
DO NOT DISTURB INDICATION
420-17
RElWEWNGAPARKED
CALL.. ..................................................
.,.420-l 7
CALLTRANSFER
...........................................................................
420-17
CAMP-ON ......................................................................................
420-17
FLEXIBLE BUIT0N
PROGRAMMING..
...........................................
420-17
MEET ME PAGE ............................................................................
420-17
PAGING .........................................................................................
420-17
.
External Paging ..............................................................
420-17
B.
Internal Paging ...............................................................
420-18
C.
All Call Paging (Intemal/Extemal)
...................................
420-18
..............................................

.....................................................

420.34
430.1

RELEASEBUTI0N
........................................................................
LCD DISPLAYS ................................................................................

INSTALLATION

500
500. I

SITE PLANNING ..............................................................................
A
System Grounding
B.
Iigbtnirig
Protection
..........................................................

500.2
500.3

INSTU~ON
PLANNING FORTHE DVX I SYSTEM .......................
COMMON EQUIPMENT FoRTI%
DVX ’ SYSTEM ...........................
.
Basic Key Sewice Unit with Paver Supply (BKSU) ............
B.
C.
D.
E.

500.4
500.5

Expansion
2x4 *anda

KSU with Power Supply (EKSU) ......................
Module .....................................................

2x4 SLT Expander Module ..............................................
4x8 Expander Module .....................................................

INSTAUATION
PLANNING FORTHE DVX ’ SYSTEM ....................
SYSTEM COMPOIQZ,NTS FORTHE DVX I1 SYSTEM ........................
k
Equipment
Cabinet With Power Supply (KSU) ................
B.
Cabinet In&&&ion
........................................................

1993

420-18
43O- 1

....... ..r..................................~.............* ............. 500-l
............................................................

Issue 1, January

420-10
420-l 1
420-12

............................................................................

420.25
420.26
420.27
420.28
420.29
420.30
420.31
420.32
420.33

CALL MANAGEMENT

of Contenta

INTERCOM CALLING
INCOMlNG CO LINES OFF-NET (via speed dial) ...............................
KEYSET SELF TEST ........................................................................
A.
Keyset LCD/LED Test .......................................................
B.
Keyset Button Test ............................................................

420.15
420.16

SECTION

Table

500-l
500-l
5Qo-1
500-2
.500-2
-500-2
.500-g
500-13
500-16
500-19
500-21
500-21
.500-21
500-22

r
in#inite
Table of contents

Digital

500.6

500&3

4x8 SLT Interface

500-33

600.1
600.2
600.3

SECTI0N

700

(IOMj for the DVX’

System

Digital

Instaktion-

DSS Console

...........................................

Installation:

....................................
Digftal Terminal ................
Wazl Mounting the 8-Button Digital Terminal ..................
.
Singie Line Telephone Installation
..................................
SLTAdapter
/ Off-Premise Extension Module [OPX] ........
Wall Mc~unting

the 33-Button

POWERFAILURETRANSl?ER.
............................
i.‘.........................
A
Relay / Sensor interface Module .....................................
B.
Power Failure Transfer Unit PFTU) .................................

IN-G

sYsT.EMcHEc3-ouT

INTRODUC’IION

......................

PROCEDURES

POWER UP SEQUENCE
DATA

.........................................................
................................................................

BASE

PROGRAWiUNG

............................

700.1

INl-RODUCTION

PROGRAM MODE ENTRY Ney Station] ...........................................
PROGRAM MODE ENTRY (Data Terminal or PC) ...........................
BEGINNING To PROGRAM ...........................................................
IIVIlUUZATION
............................................................................
CUSTOMER DATA WORKSHEETS
................................................
DATA BASE FIELDS
DATABASE UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
ROWlINE ................................
A
Using the PC to UpIoad/Downbad
thou Remote

700.7
700.8

710

..............................................................................

......................................................................

s=b¶

P-RS

.............................................................
PROGRAMMING

.............................

SYSTEMTlMERs
............................................................................
A
System Hold Recall Timer .................................................
B.
Exclusive Hold Recall Timer ..............................................

c.
D.

E.
F.
G.

500-46
500-46
500-46

500-53
500-54

.... 600-l

..............................................................................

PRELiMINARY

CUSTOMER

..*...............................*

500-44

500-48

ANNOUNCEMENT
DEVICE (RAN) ..........
............................................................................

DATA FEATURE

500-44
500-44
500-44

500-48
500-48

RECORDED

700.2
700.3
700.4
700.5
700-6

710.1

xiv

........................................

....................................................................

Administration
SECTION

(CSB)

....... .500-36
1200 Baud Modem Module [MM] ....................................
500-39
Installing the DTMF Receiver Module (RMJ ......................
500-39

Digital Terminal

600

I/O Module

D.
E.

sEcrIoN

Expansion

DIGIT&TERMINALS

500.9
500.10

Board

500-25

APPLICATION MODULE(S) INSTAUA’XO~
....................................
500-36
A
Expansion I/O Module BOM) for the DVX’ System ......... 500-36

13.

500.8

Systems

Central Processor Board (CPBJ ........................................
4x8 Key Interface Board [CKB) ........................................

500.7

DVX I and JIVX I’

Key Telephone

600-l
600- 1
..600- 1
700-l
700- 1
700- 1
700-10
700- 10
700-10
700-11

700-11
70&l

70&l

710-r
710-l
710-2

710-Z

Attendant Recall Timer .....................................................
Transfer Recall Timer .......................................................
Preset Forward Timer .......................................................

710-3

Call Forward No/Answer
Tlmer .........................................
Pause Timer .....................................................................

710-4

Issue 1. January

710-3
710-4
710-5
1993

irIfinfte
D&itd

DVX’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems

Table

of Contents

Call Park Recall Timer .......................................................

7 10-5

Conference/DISA

‘710-6

J.
.

Paging Timeout

Timer ....................................................
Timer .......................................................

CO Ring Detect Timer

......................................................
Receiver Timer .................................................

SLT MMF

M.
N.

Message Waft Reminder

Tone ............................................
SLT Hook Flash Timer .......................................................
SLT Hook Flash Debounce Timer ......................................

SMDR Call Qualification

Timer .......................................

Automatic Call Back Timer
9.
SYSTEM FEATURES PROGRAMMlNG
...........................................
A.
Attendant
Override .........................................................
.............................................

710.2

.710-7
710-7
710-8
710-a
710-9
710-10
710-10
710-l 1
710-13

Hold Preference ...............................................................

710-13

External

710-14

Executive

E.
F.

Page Warning

G.
H.
I.
J.
.
L.
710.3
710.4
710.5
710.6
710.7

710-6

Night Ring
Override

........................................................

Warning

Tone ...................................

Tone .........................................................

Background
Music Channel ............................................
LCR Enable ....................................................................
Account Codes - Forced ..................................................
Group Listening

..............................................................

710-14
710-15
7X0-15
710-16
710-16
710-17

Idle Speaker Mode ..........................................................
Call Cost Display Feature ................................................

710-18

Music On Hold ................................................................

710-18

ATIENDANT
STATION ASSIGNMENT ............................................
SYSTEM TIME AND DATE .............................................................
PBX DIALING CODES ....................................................................
ExEcuTlvE/sEcmARy
PAIRS ..................................................
RELAY/SENSOR
PROGRAMMING
.................................................
A
Progmnmingmlayfor
...........................
-l
B.
Programdng
relay for RAN Starting:. ... (. .........................
C.
Progxx~
relay for Power Failure Transfer: ...............
relay for Loud Bell Control:. ......................
relay for CO Line Control- ...........................

710-17

710-19
710-19
710-20
710-20
710-21
710-22
71U22
-7 1O-23
.7 l&24

D.
E.

progranrming
F%-ogramniq

Assign Relay/Sensor
Interface Module to a statio& ........ .7X&25
Program sensing circuit as a RAN Sensing (RAN END)
CiK!Uk
..........................................................................
710-26

710-25

710.8
710.9

BAUD RATE ASSIGNMENTS ..........................................................
ACCESS CODES ...........................................................................
A
DlSAAccess Code ...........................................................
B.
Database Admin. Password .............................................

71&27
710-28
71e28
710-29

710.10

STAnON
A

MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) ........................
SMDR Enable/Disable
....................................................

710-30
710-30

Long Distanc!e/Local
Asdgnment
....................................
Character Print Assignment ............................................

710-30
710-31

B.
c.

iqjinite

Digital

Table of Contents

D.
E.
710.11

710.12
710.13

720. I

Baud Rate Display ..........................................................
.................................................
SMDR Port Assignments

DIRECTORY DIALING ...................................................................
HUNT GROUPS .............................................................................

710-33
710-36

Hunt Group Prog ramming ..............................................
..................................
Station/Pilot
Hunting Assignment

LOCAL NUMEtER/NAME

TRANSMTlON

CO LJNE AmUTI3S

TABLE

PROGRAMMING

............................

...............................

INTRODUCIION..
..........................................................................
A.
D?xF/D.ialPulseProg
-g ........................................
I
3.
co/PBx
Programming
.....................................................

c.
D.

E.
I?.
G.
H.
1.

J.
.

.
720.2
720.3
smroN

730
730.1

Privacy .............................................................................
Loop Supervision Programming
........................................
DISA Rogmmming
...........................................................
FlashTimer

................................................

Progamming

.................................................
Line Group Programming
CIass of Service (COS) Pro@mntning
CO Line Ringing Assignments..
.........................................
CO Line Identication
Display ........................................
.................................

STATION ATTRIBUTES PROGRAMMUYG ..............................
..............................................................................

710-32

710-36
710-36
710-37
720-l
..720- 1
720-2
720-2
720-3
720-3
720-4
720-5
720-6
720-7
720-7
720-G

720-9
720-10
720-l 1
720-12

750-l

Pagfng Access ...................................................................

730-l
730-2

Do Not Disturb

730-2

Conference

D.
E.

Executive Override ...........................................................

730-3

Privacy (Per Station) .........................................................
System Speed Dial Access

730-4

.................................................................

Enable/Disable

(Per Station]

..........................

.................................................

730-5

Line Queuing

Preferred Line Answer .......................................................

Off-Hook

Call Forwarding ................................................................
Forced Least Cost Roumg (Ux) .......................................

730-7

ACD Supervisor

730-B

lhxutive

....................................................................

730-3

L.
M.

Voice Over .........................................................

Monitor

Override

PAGE ‘B” INTRODUC!‘lION
.

7 IO-32

INTRODUcrlON

mPI

............................................................
UNAProgmnmit~
DISA Trunk-to-Trunk
IPer CO L&e) ..................................

DlALPULSE
PARAMETERS ...........................................................
FLEXIBLE PORT ASSIGNMENT
FEATURE .....................................

730.2

710-31
710-31
710-32

SECTION 720

DVXI and DVX”
Tclephoae
Systems

SCHEDULE.. ............................................
WEEKLY MGHTMODE
Operation.. .......................................
A.
Automatic/Manual
............................................
B.
Day of Week programming..

A.
710.14

Iky

Station Identification

w/Barge-In

Blocking

................................

.............................................

730-5
730-6
730-6
730-7

730-8
730-9

..............................................................

......................................................

Issue 1, Januaq

730-10

1993

iq@ite
Dj@td

DVX’andDVXn
Ecy Telephone

730.3

of Contents

Station Class of Semice (COS) .........................................
B.
Speakerphone/Headset
Programming .............................
C.
D.
Pick-Up Group(s) Programming .......................................
...........................................
Paging Zone(s) Programming
E.
F.
Preset CaIl Forward Prog~
. 3 ...................................
....................................................
CO Line Group Access
G.
LCR Class of Service (COS) ..............................................
H.
Off-Hook Preference Programming
..................................
I.
..........................................
J.
FIexible Button Programming
Display Flexible Buttons .................................................
.
Digital Data Interiace Unit fDDIUl
.
Baud Rate Options .........................................................
B.
Character Length Option ................................................
. ...................
c.
Stop Bit(s) Option .......................................

730-13
730-14
730-14
730-15
730- 16
730-17
730-17
73O- 18
736-19
730-21
730-22
730-22
730-23
730-23

FLEXIBLE

73524

.................................................

730.4
SECTXON

Table

Syetcxm

740

AUTOMATXC

POKl- ASSIGNMENT

CALL

FEA-TUR?Z .....................................

DISTRIBUTKIN

(ACDj’ .............................

740-l

.........................................................
740-l
ACD GROUP PROGRAMMING
Alternate ACD Group Assignment .....................................
740-Z
.
740-Z
B.
ACD Over&low Station Assignment ....................................
C.
ACD Recorded Announcement
Assignment(s)
(RAN) ......... .740-3
ACD Supervisor Programming ..........................................
.74-O-3
D.
E.
ACD Station Assignment(s)
..............................................
.74O-4
ACD TIMERS ...................................................................................
740-5
.
ACD Ring Timer
740-5
B.
ACD Message IntemaI Timer .............................................
740-6
C.
ACD Overflow Timer ..........................................................
740-6
D.
ACD Auto Wrap-Up Timer .................................................
740-7
E.
ACD No-Answer Recall Timer ............................................
74-Q-7
F.
ACD No-Answer Retry Timer .............................................
740-8

740. I

740.2

................................................................

740.3
740.4

ACD RAN ANNOUNCEMBNTTAI3LES
PC/ACD INTERFACE TRACE .........................................................
A.
ES-at Trace Enable/Disable
B.
Trace Port Assignment
C.
Baud Rate Display ..........................................................
..............................................

............................................

....................................................

SECTXON

746

UNIFORM

745.1

CALL

DXSTFtXBUTXON

[UCD) ..................................

UCD GROUP PROGRAMMING .........................................................
.
Alternate UCD Group Assignment .....................................
B.
UCD Overflow Station Assignment
C.
UCD Recorded Announcement
Assignment(s)
(RAN) ..........
D.
UCDStationAssignment(s).
..............................................
UCD TIMERS ...................................................................................
.
UCD Ring Timer ................................................................
B.
UCD Message Interval Timer .............................................
....................................

745.2

h3sue 1. January

1983

740-9

740-10
740-10
74cbll
740-11
746-l

745-1
745-2
745-2
745-3
745-4
745-5
745-5
745-6

irlfinite
Table of contents

745.3
SECTION

750
750.1

Digital

LJCD Overflow

D.
E.

UCD Auto Wrap-Up Tier
UCD No-Answer Recall Timer

UCD No-Answer

755
755.1

VOICE

Unanswered

745-3

............................................

.............................................

...........................................................

Call Management

Port Assignment

MAIL

GROUPS

745-7

.........................................

...............................................................

(VM) ....................................................

745-9
750-I
750- 1
750- 1
750- 1
750-l
750-3
750-5
750-5
750-5
750-6
750-6
765-l

VOICE
.
B.

MA% PROGRAMMING
Alternate Voice Mail Group ...............................................
‘Leave” Mail Index Entry ...................................................

“Retrieve” Mail Index Entry.. .............................................
Station Assignment(s)
.......................................................

755-3

755.2

VOICE MAIL OUTPULSING TASLE ..................................................
.
Voice Mail In-Band Signaling ............................................
B.
Voice Mail Disconnect Table .............................................

755-4
755-4
755-5

755.3

VOICE hML

755-6
755-6
755-7

SECTION

PROGRAMMING

...........................................

Reiry Tier

745-6
74517

................................................

ICLID RINGIIVG ASSIGNMENT .........................................................
ICLID FEATURES.. ..........................................................................
A.
Enable/Disable
..;. ...............
.............................................
B.
Name in Display.. .............................................................
C.
Baud Rate Display.. ..........................................................

D.
SECTION

Systems

INTRODUCTION
..............................................................................
A.
Calling Number/Name
Display .........................................
B.
Incoming Number/Name
SMDR .......................................
C.

750.2
750.3

Key Telephone

Timer .........................................................

UCD RAN ANNOUNCEMENTTABLES

ICLID

DVX’ and DVX”

760
760.1
760.2

.........................................................

IN-BAND FEATURES ..................................................
Voice Mail In-Band Dfgits .................................................

voice. M&I l?Iansfm/Fom

EXCEPTION

TABLES

............................................

PROGRAMMING

.................................

EXCEPI’ION TABLES PROGRAMMING
............................................
RELATED ITEMS TO ‘KILL RESTRICTION .......................................
.
CO/PI3X Lines
..................................................................

760.3

Forced Account

755-1
755-z
755-2
755-3

760-l
760- 1
760-Z
760-2

B.
C.

Codes ......................................................
SLT DTMF Recehrs
.........................................................

760-Z

LCR vs. Toll Restriction

760-3

....................................................

TOLL RESrRIc?ION
PROGRAMMING
.............................................
.
Entering Toll Table Programming
......................................
B.
Allow Table Programming
.................................................
C.
Deny Table Programming
..................................................
D.
E.

Special Table Programmhg
..............................................
Dfsplaylng Toll Table Entries ............................................

Issue 1, January

760-2
760-4
760-4
760-5
760-7
760-8
760-g

1883

r
iqflnite

DVX’cmdDVXn

Diffital~yTdephone

SECTION 765
765.1

IN’I’RODUCZION

C.
D.

E.
F.
G.
Ii*
I.

770.1

...765-1
765- 1
765- 1

..............................................................................

LCR Operation

..................................................................

PROGRAMMING .........................................................
3-Digit Area/OfZice Code Table.. .......................................
s-Digit Ofhe Code Table ...................................................
Exception Code Table
Route List Table ................................................................
Insert/Delete
Table ...........................................................
Daily StartTime Table ....................................................
Weekly Schedule Table ...................................................
LCR Routing for Toll Momnation
.....................................
.....................................................
Default LCR Database

765-3

LCR TBLES

A.
B.

SECTION 770

of contents

LEAST COST ROUTING &CR) PROGRAMMING .................
A.

765.2

Table

Systems

.765-4
765-5
765-6
765-7

........................................................

DATABASE PARAMETERS

765-9
765- 10

765-l 1
765-12

765- 13
770-l

..................................

INTRODUCTION ..............................................................................
A.
Initialize System Paraxnetus .............................................

770- 1
770-Z
-770-4

hi&&e

CO Line Atibutes

.............................................

Initialize
Initialize
Irdthhze
Initialize
initialize

Statfon Attributes

...............................................

Station and CO Port Parameters .........................
Exception Tables.. ..............................................
System Speed Numbers ....................................
LCR Tables .......................................................

77&l

H.
I.
J.

Initialize
Initialize

..........
Entire System and Reset (all parameters)
ICUD Parameters .............................................

770-12
770-13

Initkdize

Directory

EL
L.

Initialize

Hunt Group Parameters ....................................
ACD or UCD Group Parameters .......................

D.
E.
.F.
0.

M.
N.

Ini~

Dialog

Table Parameters

..................

InftfalizeVM
Group Parameters .......................................
System Reset ..................................................................

770-S
770-8

.770-g
770-10
1

-770-14

770-15
.77@ I6
770-17
770-18

SECTION 775

PRINTING SYSTEM DATAEASI3 PARAMETERS ... ..*..............775-

INTRODUCTION ................................
..~......~....................................775.
Print.ingSystemParameters..
............................................
B.
F’rinting CO Line Attributes
C.
Printing Station Attributes ................................................
D.
Printing CO and Station Port Parameter5 .........................
E.
F+intin.g Exception Tables
F.
Fkinting System Speed Bins ............................................
G.
Mting
LCR Tables ........................................................

775.1

...............................................

Fkinting

Printing ICLID Tables ......................................................
Prinling Directory Dialing Table Parameters.. ..................
PrlnUng Hunt Group Parameters ....................................
Printing ACD or LJCD Group Parameters .........................

K
I..

Entire

System Data Base ...................................

775-2
775-4

775-6
.775-8
775-10
775- 12

775-14
775-24

775-25
775-28
775-30

775-32

iqfinite

SECTION

SO0

800.1
800.2

800.3

Syntemn

FYinting Voice Mail Group Parameters ............................
Abort Printing .................................................................

775-34
775-i6

&TA?NTENANCEAeND

..........................

REMOTE

SYSTEM MONITOR ........................................
(......... ........ NO-9
GeneralOverview
.............................................................
800-9
Monitor Password.. ...........................................................
800-9
HdpMenu
(?I ...................................................................
800-9
Dump Memory Data .........................................................
800-9
Event Trace Mode ...........................................................
800-10
Modify Memory command ...............................................
800- 11
Baud Rate Command
.....................................................
800-l 1
Exit the Monitor mode ....................................................
800-l 1

................................................................

............................................................

CUSTOMER

APPENDIX

DIGITAL

APPEND=

ICLID

DATABASE
SYSTEMS

GENERAL

PROGRAMMING

PART

.................................

NUMBERS

DESCIUPT’ION

........................................

................................................

IIWRODUCIION
SYSTEM CONFIGURA~ON
.................................................................
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE
Calling Number/Name
Display .............................................
B.
Lncotig
Number/Name
SMDR
c.
Unanswered
Call Management
.............................................
D.
LocaI Name Translation
E.
ICLID Display Phone Operation ..........................................
IIVIPLEME~A~ONPLAN
.
ICLID KTU Display Phone .....................................................
B.
Table Structures ...................................................................
..................................................................................

............................................................

...........................................

........................................................

800-l

CIRCUIT BOARD IpCB) TROUBLESH0011NG
CHAF3-S .... 800-l
800-5
MAINTENANCE
General Overview .............................................................
800-5
Ovtmiew of Maintenance
Commands ................................
800-5
.....................................................
Maintenance
Password
800-5
Exit Maintenance
.............................................................
800-5
system conAguration
.......................................................
800-6
CO/Station
Confiiuration
................................................
800-7
Event Trace Buffer
800-8

APPENDIX

TROUBLESHOOTIlVG

PRINTED
REMOTE
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
k
B.
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.

1.
2.

and DVXn

Dl@tal Eey Tekphone

Table of Contents
M.
N.

DVX’

....................................................................

Iasuc1,Januarg1f393

A-l
B-1
c-1
C-l

C-l
C-l

c-2
c-2
c-2
c-2
..c- 2
c-4
c-4
c-5

irlfinite
Dfdital

DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

LIST OF FIGulREs

LIST
SECTION 100

INTRODUCTION

SECTION

GENE&XL

200

Figure
Figm
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Fi@m
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
SECTION

200- 10 33-Button
Executive Digital Terminal
200-1133-Button
Enhnced
Digit& Terminal ................................................
20Q 12 S-Button Basic Digital Ttmninal .........................................................
ZOO- 13 48-Button
DSS/DLS Console .............................................................
20@17 W-Premise
Extension
(OPX) ModuIe
200- 18 Relay / Sensor Interface Module .........................................................
200- 19 Power F&me TYansfer Wiring Options ...............................................
200-20 Digital Data Interface Unit (DDIU) wiring ............................................
............................

KEY STATION

320

A’M.“ENDm

SECTION

4-00

STATfoN

Figure 400- 1 33-Button
405

FEATURE

LINE

DESCRIPTION

FEATURE

Digital

Display

Terminal

410

SLT FEATURE

SECTION

420

AZTENDANT
Attendant

INSTAUATION

500

FEATURE

300-l

...........................

DESCRIPTION..

DESCRIPTION

OPEX#YMOH
Terminal

EEYSET

. SECMON

420-133-Button

TELEPHONE
FEATURE

8-BUTTON

Figure 405- 1 S-Button

&m~c 1, January

...................

300-15
300-16

300-l 33-Button
Default Button Map ............................................................
300-2 S-Button Default Button Map ...............................................................

SECTION

FrgUre
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

..................................................

SINGLE

SECTION

200-3
200-5
200-7
200-S
200-9
zoo-1 1
200-12
200-13
200-14
200-18
200-20
200-22
200-24
200-28
200-29
200-30
200-32

.....................................................................

310

Figure

200-l

.................................................

DESCFWTION

.......................................

SECTION

100-l

...............................................................

200- 1 Main Key Service Board of the Basic KSU ...............................................
200-2 Main Key Service Board of the Expansion KSU
200-3 2x4 Expander Module ............................................................................
200-4 2x4 SLT Expander Module
200-5 4x8 Expander Module ............................................................................
200-6 Basic KSU Equipment
Cabinet .............................................................
200-7 Cent-x& Processing Board [CPB) ............................................................
200-S 4z& Key Interface Board (CKB) .............................................................
200-9 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) .............................................................

300
Figure
Figure

OF FIGUREf3

400-l

......................................

400-2

OPE.RATIOiv

......................

......................................................................

OPERATION
FEATURE
Display

Terminal

................................

...................................................

................................................................

50@- 1 Diglti FIatpack Mounting
Ammgements
...............................................
500-2 Digital Flatpack Mounting
Dimen.sions ...................................................
500-3 Main Key &mice Board of the Basic KSU ...............................................
500-4 Digital Flatpack RS-232C Connections ...................................................
500-5 Main Key Service Board of the Expansion KSU .....................................
500-6 2x4 Expander Module ..........................................................................
500-7 2x4 SLT Expander Module ...................................................................
500-S 4x8 Expansion Module .........................................................................

1993

405-l
405-2

410-l

..............................................

OPERATION

310-l
320-l

.............................

........................................................

FEATURE

......

420-l
420-2

600-l
500-3
500-4
500-7
500-S
500-10
500-13
500-16
500- 19

ittfinite DVX’ and DVXn
DigitdKeyTclephoneSystcxns

LIST OF FIGURE3
Figure

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

500-9 Basic KSU Equipment Cabinet .............................................................
500- 10 Basic KSU Cabinet Mounting Dimensions ..........................................
500-I 1 Central Processor Board (CPB) ...........................................................
500-12 Basic KSU CPB RS-232C Connections
...............................................
500-13 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB) ...........................................................
500- 14 Shielded Cable Terminations
.............................................................
500-l 5 4x8 SLT Interface Board [CSB) ...........................................................

Figure
Figure

500- 16 DVX I Expansion
500- I7 DVX ’ Expansion

Figure
Figure

I/O Module Pin-outs
I/O Module pin-outs

500-23
500-24
500-26
500-27

500-29
500-30
500-34
500-37
500-38
500-42

...............................................

..............................................

Figure 500- 18 Basic KSU Application Card Locations ...............................................
Figure 500- 19 Expansion KSU AppIication Card Locations
Figure 500-20 D@tal Terminal Moduhr
Block Wiring ..............................................
Figure 500-21 Digital Terminal Wall Mounting
.........................................................
Figure 500-22 Off-Premise Extension (OPX) Module.. ...............................
v.. .............
Figure 500-23 Relay / Se.nsor Interface Module ........................................................

500-43
500-45

.......................................

Figure

500-24

Power Failure Transfer

Figure

500-25

Figure

500-26

CO and SLT RATVConnections ...........................................................
Digital Data Interface Unit (DDIU) wh-ing ...........................................

SECTION

600

SpsrnM

SECTION

700

CUSTOMER

Wiriug

cm?AxGouT

500-47
500-49
500-50
500-5 1
500-53
500-54

Options ...............................................

...................................

............

....

..........................

700-l

Figure 700- 1 Data Terminal Program Codes Cross Reference ......................................
Fig=
700-2 lnfhite DigitaI Programming
Button Mapping ........................................

700-2
700-3

SECTION

710

SYSTEM

DATA

BASE

PARhMETERS

PROGRAMMING

PROG-G

710-l

...........................

Figure 710- 1 Hook Switch Activity ..............................................................................
SECTION

720

CO LINE

SECTION

730

STATION

SECTION

740

AUTOMATIC

SECTION

745

UNIFORM

SECTION

750

ICLlD

SECTION

755

VOICE

SECTION

760

EXCEPTION

SECTION

765

LEAST

600-l

Figure

765-l

ATTRIBUTES

PROG-G

ATTRIBUTES

..................

PROGRAMMING

CALL DISTRIBUTION
CALL

DISTRIBuTfoN

PROGIUUKWNG
MAIL

COST

GROUPS
TABLES

Fx 3-DigitArea/Office

.....................

(ACD)

...

&CR)

.........

PROGRAMMING..

*.*.

755-l

......

*W.-e.*

..............

Code Table Pgm Form ........................................

.........................................

Information

Routing

750-l

...................

765-2 Ex 6-D@ Office Code Table Pgm Form .................................................
765-3 Ex Exception Code Table P&m Form ......................................................
Fig=e 7fi5-4 Ex: Insert/Delete
Pgm Form ...................................................................
l”%gu.re 765-5 Daily Si%zt Time & Weekly Schedule Tables
Figure 765-6 Ex Daily & Weekly Start The TabIes ..................................................
765-7 Ex LCRToll

740-x

................

.......................

730-l

W.... 745-l

Flgm
Frg=

Fig-e

....

..........................

..t........................-

PROGRAMMING

ROUTING

...* ...... 720-l

@JCD) .........................

..........
[VM)

710-9

Pgru Form ........................................

.....

780-l
..765- 1
765-4
765-5
765-6

765-9
765-10
765-l 1
765-12

~git.d

Key Telephone

SBCTlON

INITlALlZE

770
Figure
Figure

SECTION

770- 1 33-Button
770-2 &Button

775

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

.............................

PARAMETERS

775-I. DB Printout
775-2 DB Printuut
775-3 DB Printout
775-4 DB Printout
775-5 DB Printout
775-6 DB Printout
775-7 DB Printout
7759 DB Printout
775 12 DB Prtntout
775-13 DB Printout
775 14 DB Printout
778 15 DB Printout

SYSTEM

of
of
of
of
of
of
of

DATAEASE

P AEUMEZERS

..........................................................

of ICLJD Table
of
of
of
of

...................................................................

Directory Dial Table ....................................................
Hunt Group Parameters .........................
. ...................
...............................................
ACD Group farameters
Voice MafI Group Parameters ......................................
..

AND

TR0tJBLEZSHOOTING.r..

....................................................

CUSTOMER

APPENDIX

DIGITAL

APPENDIX

ICLID

DATABASE
SYSTEMS

GENERAL
Conf.@ratim

PART

PROGRAMMING
NUMBERS

DESCRIPTXON

775-l
775-3
775-5
775-7
775-9
775- 11
775-13
775-15
775-26
775-29
.775-31
775-33
775-35

....................

800- 1 Remote Maintenance
Help Menu ............................................................
800.2 System Configuration
w/LCR .................................................................
800-3 CO/Station
ConfIguration
......................................................................
800-4 Event Trace as It appears on Display

1993

‘770-6
770-7

....... ...........

System Parameters .........................................................
CO Line Attributes
Station Attributes
...........................................................
CO/Station
Parameters ...................................................
Exception Tables ...........................................................
System Speed Numbers .................................................
...................................................................
LCRTables

-NANCE

1 ICLID System

770- 1

........................................................

ls~uc 1, Januarg

OF FIGURES

Default Button Mapping
Default Button Mapping ..........................................................

APPENDIX

F@re

DATABASE

PFUNTING

800
Ffgure
Figure
Figure
Figulre

LWT

System6

..............................

. ..**.....................*.......*.

............................................

.............................................................................

800-l
800-5
800-6
800-7
800-l

A-l

B-f
c-1

C-l

irifbriie

DVX’andDVX”

Di&alKcyTclephoneSpetems

LIST OF TABLES

LIST OF TABLES
SECTION

LOO

I.NTRODUcTION

SECTION

200

GENERAL

. .

DESCRIPTION

. .

..**

. .

100-I

..r...

200-l

..................................................

200- 1 - Digital System Capacities ....................................................................
200-2 . Electrical Specifications ......................................................................
200-3 - Environmental
Specifications
ZOO-4 - Loop Limits
ZOO-5 - Dialing Specifimtions
200-6 . FCC Registration Numbers ..................................................................
200-7 - Dimensions and Weight ......................................................................
200-8 - Miscellaneous
Specifications
200-9 . DigitaI Terminal Audible Signals .........................................................
2OO- 10 - Single Line Telephone Audible Signals.. ............................
.‘................
200- 11 - OPX Telephone Audible Signals.. ......................................................
ZOO- 12 . DSS/BLF Button Visual Lndieators ...................................................
Table 200- 13 - CO Line Button Visual Indicators ......................................................
Table 200-14 - Function Button Visual Indicators
...................................................

Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Tabie
Table
Table
Table
Table

SECTION

..............................................................

.........................................................................................

..........................................................................

...............................................................

300

KEY STATlON

Table 300- 1 Key Station
SECTION

320

IJNE

ATTENDANT

Table 320- 1 Attendant
SECTION

400

Table 40@1
Table 400-2

‘I‘ELEP3ONE

SECTION

Digital

410

SECTION

Table 420- 1 Digital

Table 430-l
SECTION

500

Liqtid

-200-43
300-l
300-2

DESCRIPTION

........

.3X0-1

Index ...............................................

DESCIUPTION

310-2

320-l

..............................

320-2

OPERATION

Numberjng

Plan.. ...........................................................

programming

System 8-Button

dQ0-1

.......................................

400-3

Codes ...........................................................
FEATURE

Numbering
OPERATION

System SLT Numbering

ATl'ENDANTFEATURE

420

200-43
200-43

............................

FEATURE

SLT FEATURE

Table 4 1O-1 Digital

200-4 1
-200-42

Index ..........................................................................

8-BU‘l'lWN KEYSET

406
Table 405-l

SECTION
.

DigftalTerminal

FEATURE

(SLT) Feature
FEATURE

Feature

STATION
Flex Button

DESCHPTION

200-4 1

Feature Index .......................................................................

SINGLE

310

FEATURE

Table 3 lO- 1 Single Line Telephone
SECTION

200-35
200-37
200-37
200-38
200-38
260-38
200-39
ZOO-40

OPERATION

400-20

....................

...405-

Ran ................................................

Plan ........................................................

4 10-2

420-l

.................................

System Attendant Numbering
Ran
Crystal Displays (LCD) ..................................................................

420-3
430-r

...............................................

INSTaTION

405-3

410-l

...............................................

OPERATION

500-l

.................................................................

Table 500- 1 Basic KSU Jl 1 Station Connections
........................................................
Table 500-2 Expansion KSU Jl 1 Station Connections
..............................................
Table 50&3 2x4 Expander Module Jl 1 BKSU Connections .......................................
Table 5OG4 2x4 Expander Module Jll EKSU Connections.. .....................................
‘hide 500-5 2x4 SLT Expander Module Jl 1 BKSU Connections ................................
Ta?de500-6 2x4 SLT Expander Module Jll EKSU Connections ................................
Table 500-7 4~8 Expander Module EKSU Station Connections
.................................
Iseut

1. January

500-8

500-l

500-14

500-15
500-17
500- 18

500-23
1993

imite
Digital

DVX I and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table

SECTION

OF TABLEG

LET

500-8 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB) ...............................................................
500-9 4x8 SLT Interface 3oard (CSB) ...............................................................
5ClO- 10 PFTU COM A Connecting
Block
500- 11 PFTU Conn B Connecting
Block
5OO- 12 SMDR Printout ....................................................................................

500-32
500-35
500-52
500-52

...........................................................

600

6EcTION700

SYSTEM

cHEcK-ouT

CUSTOMER

DATA

......................................

500-58

BASE PROG RAMMING

600-I

...............

700-1

.........................

700-4

Table 70s 1 Default Values .........................................................................................

SECTION710

SYSTEM

SECTION720

CO IJNEiATTRIBUlm3

Table 720-l

SECTION730

P ARAMETERS

Class ofService

STATION

SEcTloN740

AUTOMATIC

SECTION74Ei

UNIFORM

SECMON750

ICLID

SECTION

75s

SECTION760

............................

720-l

(COS). ............................................................................

PROGRfWMtNG

.......

..,

.720-8
.

750-l

...............

(COS) ............................................................................
Display Designations ......................................................

42U.L DISTRIBUTION
CALL

MAIL

EXCEPTION

@CD)

DISTRIBUTION

PROGRAMlKlNG

VOICE

710-I

..........................

PROGRAMHING

ATTRIBUTES

Table 730-l Class ofService
Table 730-2 FQxibIe Button

PROGRAMMING

.......................

TABLES

fVM)

...

(UCD) . .............................

.............................

GROUPS

730-13
730-Z 1

.,L

...

........

PROG-G

........

750-I

..............

.................

irsfi-l

........

*..., .........................

760-l

Class of Service (COS) ..............................................................................
Table 760-2 Allow/Deny
Toll Table .............................................................................

LEAST

COST ROUTING

&CR)

PROGRAMMING

760-l
760-2
.....

...........

Table 765- 1 LCR Class of Service Table .......................................................................
SECTION

770

INM!MWZ

SECTION

776

PRINTING

S-ON
-

SO0

MAINTENANCE

Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table

DATABASE
SYSTEM

PARAMETERS

DATARASE

.............................

PARAZYIETERS

ANTI TROUBLESHOOTING

...........

...................

80&l DVX’ BKSU Digital System .....................................................................
800-2 DVX ’ Digital System EPROM Memory Size ..............................................
800-3 DVX ’ Static RAM Memory Size ................................................................
800-4 DVX ’ Central Processing Board (CPB) .....................................................
800-5 DVX ’ CPB Static RANl Memory Size ........................................................
800-6 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB) .................................................................
800-7 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) .................................................................
800-8 DVX ’ CPB EPROM Memory Size .............................................................
80&9 DTMF Receiver Module (RM) ....................................................................
800- 10 I/O Module (IOM) ..................................................................................

Table 8OO- 11 Single Line Telephone

Adapter

740-l
748-l

Table 760-l

SECTION766

(OPX) ...................................................

705-l
765-8
770-1

..a ... 775-l
m.... 8Oo- 1
800-l
800- 1
800- 1
800-2
800-2
800-3
800-3
800-3
800-4
800-4
..800- 4

L16T OF

irlfinite DVX’ and DVX’
Digftd Key Telephone Systema

TABLES

CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRABKMING ..............................

APPENDLXA

A-l

A-l
A- 1 System Parameters ...................................................................................
A-3
A-2 Hunt Group, ACD and UCD Group Parameters .........................................
A-4
A-3 Voice Mail Group Parameters
....................................................................
A-5
A-4 CO Lme Progmmming
Wash 40) ...............................................................
COLme FQngingAssignment
Chart ..........................................................
A-7
A-0
A-6 Station Programming
(Flash 50) ................................................................
A-7 Button Assignment
Chart @‘lash 50) .........................................................
A-9
A-8 System Speed Dial Numbers ...................................................................
A-10
A-9 Exception Tables (Flash 70) ....................................................................
A-12
A- 10 Least Cost Routing (Flash 75)
A-14
A- 1 I Route L&t Table
A-15
.............................................................................
A-19
Appendfx A-12 Insert/Delete
Tables
A-21
Appendix A-13 3-Digit Area/CHkt
Code Route L&t Table ............................................
Appendix A-14 digit
#fEke Code Table .......................................................................
A-22
AppendixALCR Exception Code Table ....................................................................
A-23
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
AppendixAAppendix
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Append&
Appendix

APPENDIX

Appendix

APPENDIXC

...............................................................

....................................................................................

DIGITAL SYSTEBt¶S PART NUMBl5RS
B- 1 DlgitaI System Component
List .................................................................
ICLID GENERAL DESCRIPTION
....................................

............................................

El
B-l
C-l

Issue 1, January 1993

iqjlnite
Di&d

DVX*andDVXn
Eey Telephone

Systems

LIST

ISSUE CONTROL
1

lSSuJ3 i

Issue 1

I~auc 1, January

DATE
January.

1993

I
1993

‘Initial
IGeneral

OF TABLE-S

SHEET
CHANGE

Release of the ir&ife DVX’ & Dvx” Digital
Description.
hstallation
and Maintenance

System
MamaI

!
i

iqjinite

D&itd

DVX’ and DVX’
Eey Telephone
Systems

INTRODUCTION

SECTION I.00
INTRODUCTION
100.1
PURPOSE
This manual provides the information
necessary to program, install, operate and maintain
the i&in&z DigitaI Key Telephone System.
100.2

REGULATOFtY INPORMATION
(u.8.A)
The Federal Communications
Commission
(FCC) has established rules which a&w the
direct connection of the injir&eDigital
Key Telephone System to the telephone network. Certain actions must be undertaken or understood
before the connection
of customer provided
equipment is completed.
A.

TdephoneCompanyNotifkatfon
Before cm.neciing
the ir3finfte Digital

Telephone System to the telephone
network, the local serving telephone company
must be given advance notice of intention
to use customer provided equipment
and
prwided with the following information:
l
The telephone numbers to be connected
to the system.
The Ringer Equivalence Number also Iocated on the KSU: 1.9
. The Universal
System Ordering Code
(USOC) jack required for direct interconnection
with the telephone
network
w2 1x
DVX’

FCC Re@tration
Number8:
- For systems comigured as a key system:
lbutton appearances)
DLPHKG-65152~KF-E
- For systems cor@ured as a Hybrid system: (dial access codes)
DLPHKG-65 153~ME-E

DVX = FCC RcgietrafAon
Numbers:
- For systems configured as a key system:
(button appearances)
DWHKG-65102~KF-E
- For systems configured as a Hybrid systern: (dial access codes) *
DLPHKG65101-MF-E
B. Incidence
of warm
If the telephone company determines that
the customer provided equipment is faulty
and p~~~l%ly causing harm or interruption
Issue 1, January

1993

MaintcnanctLimitatio~s

Maintenance
on the infinUe Digital Key
Telephone System is to be performed only
by the manufacturer
or its authorized
agent. The user may not make any changes
and/or repairs except as specifically noted
in this msnuaI. Ifunauthorized
alterations
or repairs are made, any remaining warranty may be voided.

Key

to the telephone network, ft should be disconnected until repairs can be made. If this
is not done, the telephone company may
temporarily disconnect service.
Changce ill service
The loczil telephone company may make
changes in its communications
facilities or
procedures. If these changes should affect
the use of the ~I.I.
DigitaI Key Telephone
System or compatibility
with the network.
the telephone company must give written
notice to the user to &xv uninterrupted
semice.

Notice

of Compliance

The intite
Digital Key Telephone System
complies with rules regarding
radiation
and radio frequency emissions by Class A
computing
devices. In accordance
with
FCC Standard 15 [SubpartJ).
the following
information
must he suppled
to the end
user:

This equipment
generates and uses
RF energy and if not tnstalled
and
used in accordance wftb the Instruction Manual, may cause interference
to Radio Communications.
It has been
tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A computing device,
PursuanttoSubpartJofFart
Eofthe
FCC Rules. which are designed toprovide reasonable
protection
against
such interference, when operated in a
commercial
environment.
Operation
of this equipment in a residential area
is likely to cause interference, fn which
case the user, at his own expense, will

100-I

r
infinite
DVX ’ and DV2L’
Digital Key Telephone
Spstems

INTRODUCTION
be required to take whatever measures
may be required to correct the interference.”
F.

Repairs to certified equipment
should be
made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations made by the user
to this equipment.
or equipment ma&metions. may give the telecommunications
company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections
of the power utility, telephone lines and
internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. ‘Ihis precaution may be particularly
important in rural
areas.

Aid cOmpat?bility
AI1 infinrte Digital Terminals are Bearing
Aid Compatible,
as defined in Section
68.316 of Part 68 FCC Rules and Regulations.
OPX Circutt
The in&&e Digital Key Telephone System
may be equipped with Single Line Adapters
(OF%) modules which provide a 48V FCC
registered 2500~type single line off-premise extension interface port.
l
Each OPX port when used to support an
off-premise
extension
requires
an
OL13C network circuit.
0 An FCC registered interface such as a
RJl lC/W is also required to connect to
the public network
Hearing

REGULATOZWINFORMATION
(CANADM+Jl
l
Department
of CommLmieations
[DOC}
CerHGcation Number: 526 2933 A
l
Load Number: 20
l
Standard Connector: CA1 lA/CA2 lA
l
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
File Number: I357228
A. Notice
The Canadian Department of Communications* label identifies certified equipment.
This certification
means that the equipment meets certain tdec0rnmunic2tions
network protective, operational and safety
requirements.
This Department
does not
guarantee
the equipment
will operate to
- the user’s satisfaction.
Before instalhg
this equipment,
users
should ensure that it is permissible to be
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications
company. The equipment
must also be installed using an acceptable
method of connection. In some cases, the
company’s
inside wiring associated with
single he individual
service may be extended by means of a certified connector
assembly (telephone extension cord]. The
customer should be aware that compliance
with the above condition may not prevent
degradation
of service in some situations.

Users should not attempt
to make
such connections
themselves,
but
should contact the appropriate
Alecirk inspectton
authority.
or electrician, as appropriate.

loo.3

100-Z

Explanation
of ‘Load Number
The Load Number (LN) assigned to each
terminal device denotes the percentage of
the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the dwice to
prevent overloadmg. The termination
on a
loop may eons&t of any combination
of
devices subject only to the requirement
that the total of the load numbers of all the
devices does not exceed 100.
hwntenancc
XAmitatiolla
Maintenance
on the infinite Digital Key
Telephone System is to be performed only
by the manufacturer
or its authorized
agent. The user may not make any changes
and/or repairs except as specif?cally noted
in this manual. If unauthorized
alterations
or repairs are made, any remaining
warranty may be voided.
Notice of Compllarlce
The infintte Digital Key Telephone system
complies with Class A or Class B limits of
the Canadian Radio Interference
Regulations. ln accordance with FCC Standard 15
(Subpart
J). the following
information
must be supplied to the end usen

Issue 1, January

1993

INTKODUCTION

* CAUTION

7Xs equipment generates and uses
RF energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the Instruction Manual, may cause interference
to Radio Communications.
It has been
tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A or Class B computing device, pursuant
to Subpart J or
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. which are
designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference,
when
operated
in a commercial
tnvironrnent. Operation of this equipment in
a residential
area is likely to cause
interference,
in which case the user,
at his own expense. xvillbe required to
take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.”
E.

OPXCirr.x&

The infinite Digital Key Telephone System
maybe equipped with Sfngle Line Adapters
(OPXJ modules which provide a 48V FCC
registered 25OWype single line off-prernise extension interface port.
l

100.4

A DOC registered interface such as a
CA1 1 is also required to connect to the
public network.
IJL/txA

SAFETY

co-CE

The infinite Digital Key Telephone System has
met all safety requirements
and was found be
in compliance with the Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) 1459 Second Edition and Canadian
Standards Association
(CSA] C22.2, No. 225
Standard.
The h_fintte Digital Key Telephone
System is authorized to bear the UL and CSA
. marks.
loo.5
TOLL FRAUD DISCLMMER
‘WHlLE THIS DEVICE IS DESIGNE?D TO BE
WONABLY
SECURE AGAINST
IWI’RUSION5 FROM FRAUDULENT
CAUiER5.
IT 18
BYNO-S
KNVULNERABm
TO FRAUD.
TEEREFORE
NO E XPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY
IS MADE
AGAINST
SUCH
-UD
~CLtJDlNG
lNTERCONNEOTION
TO
THE LONG DISTANCE NETWORKm”

‘WHILE THIS DEVICE IS DESIGNED TO BE
REA5ONABLY
SECURE AGAINST INVASION
OF PRIVACY, IT IS BY NO MEAN5 INVULNERABLE
TO SUCH INVASXONS.
TKEREFORE
NO
EXPRESS
OR
IMPLIED
WARRANTP IS MADE AGAZNST UNL4WFClL
OR UNAUTIIORIZED
UllLIZATXON
WHICH
RESULTS
m THE INVASION
OF ONE’S
RIGHT OF PRIVACY.-

D&itd

Key Telephone

Systen~~

GENERAL

DESCRIPTION

SECTION 200
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
200.X
SYSTEM TECHNOLOGY
?he infinue family of digital key telephone systerns is comprised of two f”$ digital herid key
telephone systems, the DVX and DVX . These
systems are designed to meet the telecommunications needs of a small to medium sized
business
ofihx.s. Both systems incorporate
state of the art digital technology for command
processing and voice switching utilizing a Pulse
Code Modulation/Time
Division Multiplexing
(PCM/TDM) voice control module. The family of
infinite Digital systems are also engineered to
allow mfgration of the family of infinite digital
terminals and terminal accessories throughout
the entire product line. In addition. standard
2500-type telephone devices are supported by
use of a 2x4 SLT Expansion
Module on the
inDVX I System, 4x8 SLT Interface Board
(CSB) on the infinite DVX ’ System, or SLA
(OPXJ adapters.
The DVXI is the smallest member of the &~&i&z
Digital family and fully conf@.n-ed supports
a
maximum of 14 CO/PBX/Centrex
lines and 28
digital station devices. The DVX’ is a “flat pack”,
or single mother board system with plug on
modules expanding the system via expansion
and expander modules configured with either
two CO/PBX/Centrex
lines by four stations or
four CO/PE!X/Centrex
lines by eight stations.
A complete system capacity allows for use of up
to 112 time slots for stations.CCl Lines. DlMF
Receivers. or data switching modules. This extends non-blocking
access to alI system resotll-ces.
-The DVX I Basic KSU comes fully configured
with power supply, Common control processor.
PCM/TDM Voice switching matrix and interface circuits for four CO/PBX/Centrex
lLnes
and interface circuits for eight Digital terminal
stations. The Basic system is also equipped
with one RS-232C I/O port. one DTMF receiver,
a connector for one Music-On-Hold
channel
that also provides for background
music, and
an on-board 300 baud modem that provides
access to the system for data base programming or remote maintenance
and or diagnostics. Modules to provide additional I/O ports,
and an opffona.I 1200 baud modem module can
also be added to the system.
The DVX Ii system is the largest system in a
family of Digital Hybrid Key Telephone systems
Issue I, January

1993

and supports a maximum configuration
of 28
CO/PBX/Centrex
lines and 56 digital station
devices. The DVXn is a typical KSU system with
plug in PCB’s. The system capaciv is expanded
by installing
four circuit CO/PBX/Centrex
lmes by eight circuit station expansion PCB’s.
The complete system capacity allows for use of
up to 112 tjme slots for stations, CO Lines,
EYIMF Receivers, or data switchfng Modules.
This extends virtual non-blocking
access to all
system resources.
A Basic DVX ’ KSU ships complete with an
on-board power supply. The CPB which is the
only common equipment required for operation
provides
the micrbprocessor
for command
processing and Voice PCM/TDM switching. The
CPB is also equipped with one modular RS232C I/O port, a connector for one Music On
Hold charme that also provides for background
music, and an on-board 300 baud modem that
provides access to the system for data base
programming
or remote maintenance
and or
diagnostics. Modules to provide additional I/O
ports. and an optional 1200 baud modem module can also be added to the CPB.
Both systems are installed
using industry
standard blocks, jacks and &&my wire cabling.
This combined with the ability to program the
system using a key terminal
(digital display
termfnal) reduces inshllation
cost and maintenance requirements.
All CO interfaces are equipped with transformer
bar&m.
for system &ssif?cation
as an FCC
fully protected system. Each CO circuit supports rotary (out-pulse) dialing and loop supervision (disconnect
detection1 under softsvare
control. The lYl7vIF tone signals and system
supervisory
tones can be generated
in each
keyset or on the main PCB. Both @nite Digital
systems use a proprietary tone plan for providing intema.l progress tones with the exception
of OPX stations
which are provided with a yprecise” tone plan.
The infintte family of digital terminals include a
33-button
display and non-display
stations,
and an 8-button non-display
station. Optional
station terminals Include a Digital DSS Console, and a Shxgle Line Adapter (Off-Premise
Extension (OPX) adapter) which are all upward
and downward compatible to the entire ti@-~ite
digital product line.
200-I

GENERAL

DESCRWMON

The system architecture
allows system programming
changes to be made without interrupting state event software control of normal
communications.
Call processing
continues
while the customer data base is updated. All
programming
changes to the customer data
base progrwg
are made either 6-om a digital terminal [digital display terminal) connected
to Port 01 or from a data terminal or PC connected to either a If0 port or remotely via the
on-board modem.
The inproduct
line is tailored to meet
immediate and long term customer needs. Most
commonly used features are activated by direct
button selection.
However,
many functions
may be alternately accessed by dialing specific
c-odes or as another option by assigning these
dial codes to a FLEX button on a digital terminaL l%fs permits flexible use of the i~jhite
Dfgital systems.
Future software enhancemuris
and upgrades
are easily retrofitted
and fnstalled in the system. This will in most cases provide backward
compatibility
with existing infinite Digital hardware further reducing the cost to upgrade or
add features to an installed system.
COMMON EQtJfPMENT
FOR TEE
mm I SBTEM
A. Basic Key Semke Unit with Power
SuPPlY 0
The DVX I Basic Key service Unit (‘KSU) is
awall mountable
cabinet that contains the
main key service board WB). power supply and pre-wired connectors for stations
and CO Line interfaces. The DVX ’ DigitaI
Key Telephone System is a microprocessor
P33000) controlled,
solid state electronic
switch which distributes
communications
uskng Pulse Code Modulation/Time
Divi* sion MultipIexing
(PCMJTDM) technology.
Al control. switching
and interface circuitry is condensed onto a sjngle printed
circuit board (PCB], the main key service
board (KSB), located inside the key senoice
unit WXJ).
The Basic Key Service Unit ISKSU) is a
system which comes fully coni3gured for
four CO/PBX/Centrex
lines and eight stations. The Basic KSU also contains one
RS-232C I/O port, one DTMFReceiver,
one
connector for Background
Music and MUsic on Hold. an on-board 300 baud modem
POk and one external page port. The Basic
KSU aIs contains two connectors for adding a 2x4 Expander Module, or a 2x4 SLT
200.2

200-2

Digital

@finite
DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephane
systems

Expander Module on connectors J9 and
J 10. An optional I/O Module that adds dne
additional RS-232C port and one M-422
port, and an optional 1200 baud modem
can be added to increase the speed of
transmission
of the on-board modem port.
A Reset (Halt) switch and a background
music volume control are also mounted on
the PCB. In addition, two connectors are
provided for adding an Expansion
KSU
which will allow the system to expand to a
toti of 14 CO/PEX/Centrex
lines and 28
digital station ports. Refer to Figure 200- 1
Main Key Service Board of the Basic KSU
for the component
layout and location of
coIlnectors.
Power SuppIyz
The power supply, insbed
in the Basic
KSU at the time of manufacture.
has an
input voltage of 117V ac *lO%. The power
supply provides power, a filtered/unregulated rtlZV de. to the main key service
board. A slo-blow 1.5 amp fuse on the AC
side of the transformer
provides the necessary Are and overload protection.
Power is
regulated and distributed
to stations/
circuitry in the system on the main key sewice board. The power supply and cabinet
meet all safety requirements
to comply
with UL 1459 Second Edition
and CSA
C22.2 No. 225 standards.
CPU and Bknorg:
The DVX I system is controlled by a 16-bit
(68000) Enafn micro-processor
which controls all system functions
including
the
PCM/TDM voice switching
under the direction of ROM and RAM software coding.
The main key se&e
board is responsl%le
for all control functions,
execution of all
logic operations
and control
of system
modules incIuding
control over the circuitry necessary for voice switching
and
conference
connections.
The main key
service board is also responsible
for all
system tones. system timing. and station
status control, In addition the mm key
semice board provides software and hardware support of the folhwing:
l
Real ‘Time clock.
l
Watch dog tLmer and recovery.
l
PCB status as to presence/absence
of
modules for automatic software conf?guration setup.
l

State/went

software

design.

lrrsue 1, dally

1993

irlfinite
~~igitd

DVX’aadDVX”
Key Telephone

GENERAL

Systems

Jl2

;::.*
::
:0::i)
is.
F&urc

200-l

Main Key serpicc

Board

of the Baafc KStl

DESCRIPTION

DVX’amiDVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

iqfinite

GElQERAL DESCRIPTIOl?I
4 Backup
of customer
database
RAh4
memory via a ‘Super Cap” (super capacitar) .
System software is provided in EPROM
memory and is installed on the main key
service board. The system contains 512K
of EPROM storage and is equipped with
128K of ‘battery--backed
static RAM. Provisions have been made on the card to
address up to two megabytes of EPROM
memory and up to two megabytes of static
RAM.
LEDS & Indicators:
Four green LEDs are located on the main
key service board along the top of the PCB,
Two of the LEDs (DS2 & DS3) indicate the
presence of +5V h -5V dc. LEDs DSI and
DS5 indicate the present of +12V dc used
to supply power to the key stations (one
LED per four stations). An extinguished
JLED indicates the absence of the associated voltage.
A red LED (DS4) located in the lower right
portion of the main key service board provides a system “heart beat” indication.
co Line/station
lntcrhces:
The Basic Key Service Unit (BKSUJ contabs the necessary circuitry
to connect
four CO/Centrex/P3X
loop start lines and
eight digital key telephones to the system.
This card also contains
one additional
voice ~transmit) path for external paging.
The main key service board contains four
Central Of&e, Centrex or PBX loop start,
line interfaces. The protection circuitry to
allow the system to be classified as a fully
protected system are located on the card
for each CO clrcuit. The CO circuits are
equipped with current sensing circuitry
a that fdentifkzs distant end disconnect Qoop
supervision).
Each CO line interface design
also provides properfusing
or protection to
comply with the rc@rements
of UL 1459
Second F&ion
and CSA C22.2 No. 225
standards.
CO lines are connected to the
system via RI- 11 modular jacks mounted
on the bottom of the main key semce
board.
The main key service board also provides
the interface
for eight Digital Key Tel+
phones using two 64K channel meme&s. Stations connect to the board via
the MDF thrcmgh a 50-pan connector located inside the Basic KSU. Each station

200-4

Digital

connection
requires four wires to connect
to the board.
A Digital DSS Console. Single Line Telephone Adapter (OPX) or other specifically
designed adapter with a digital interface
can be assigned to any one of the interface
circuits. ‘Ihe key station interface circuits
are protected from mis-wiring
and overcurrent.
The main key service board also contains
an on-board
modem that is capable of
transmitting
data at a rate of 300 Baud.
The modem supports and is compatible
with the Hayes command
protocol. The
Bell System (Western Electric] standards
103 and 212A for modem design is incorporated into the design af this modem. The
modem operates on-line in both Full and
Half duplex modes. An optional 1200 Baud
module may be added to the main key
service unit to allow transmission
at the
rate of 1200 Baud.
B. DVX’ Erpansion
ESUwith
Power
SUPflY m=Jl
The Expansion Key Service Unit (EKSU) is
a unit which comes equipped with a pawer
supply and circuitry providing four additional loop start CO/PBX/Centrex
line
ports and eight digital key telephone ports
to the Expansion KSU. All prccessing and
control functions as well as voice connections and switching are controlled by circuitry on the Basic KSU and transmitted
to the Expansion KSU through the ribbon
cables.
The ma.iu key service board on the Expansion KSU allows connection of one optional
application
module (i.e. DTMF Receiver) to
the system and connector(s] for installing
an additional
2x4 Expander Module, 2x4
SLT Expander Module or a 4x8 Expander
Module. Refer to F’igurc 200-2 Main Key
Service Board of the Expansion KSU
Power Supply
The power supply, installed in the Expansion KSU at the time of manufacture,
has
an input voltage of 117V ac *I@?&. The
power supply provides power, a ffltered/
unregulated
+12V dc, to the Expansion Key
Service Board WKSB). A slo-blow 1.5 amp
fuse on the AC side of the transformer
provides the necessary fire and overload
protection.
Power is regulated and distributed to staffons/circui~
in the system on
the main key service board on the ExpantEIsue 1. Janaary

1095

iqjinfte
~&&al

DVX’ and DVX *
Xcy Telephone
Systems

om’
o- ::i8,m,
ODB

Issue

1, January

1993

GENERAL

DESCRIPTION

200-S

i@dte

DVX I and BITE”
Systems

Digital Key Ttlephone
sion KSU. The power supply and cabinet
meet all safety requirements
to comply
with UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA
C22.2 No. 225 standards.
LEDS a IndicatoI8:
Four green LEDs are located on the main
key service board on the Expansion KSU.
Two of the LEDs (DS2 & DS31 indicate the
present of +5V & -5V. LEDs DSZ and DS5
indicate the present of +12V dc used to
supply power to the key stations (one LED
for every four stations). An extinguished
LED indicates the absences of the associated voltage.
co Line/station
Intcrfkcts
The Expansion
KSU contains the necessary circuitry to connect an additional four
CO/Centrex/PBX
loop start lines and
eight dgital key telephones to the system.
‘ibis card also contains one additionaf
voice (lransmit) path for ex.temal paging.
The main key service board on the Expansion KSU contains
four Central Office,
Centrex or PBX loop start, line interfaces
The protection circuttry to allow the system
to be classtied as a fully protected system
are located on the card for each CO circuit.
The CO circuits are equipped with current
sensing circuitry that identJfies distant end
disconnect
(loop supervision).
Each CO
line interface design also provides proper
fusing or protection
to comply with the
requirements
of UL 1459 Second Edition
and CSA C22.2 No. 225 standards.
CO
lines are connected to the system vfa RJ- 11
modular jacks mounted on the bottom of
the main key service board of the &pansion KSU.
The main key service board also provides
- the interface
for eight digital key telephones using two 64K channel arrangements. Stations connect to the board via
the MDF through a ?jO-pin connector located inside the Expansion KSU. Each station connection
requires
four wires to
connect to the board,
A Digital DSS Console, a Single Line Telephone Adapter (OPXI or other spec%eally
designed adapter with a digital titerface
can be assigned to any one of the interface
circuits. ‘Ihe key station interface circuits
are protected from mis-wlrlng
and overcurrent.

Zoo-6

Iaue1,JanumylB93

i&mite
Digital
C.

DVX’andDVX’
Kty Telephone

Systems

GENERAL

2x4 Expander Module
The 2x4 Expander Module is a two CO by
four key station interface
module that
plugs onto the main key service board of
the Basic KSU or the main key service
board of the Expansion
KSU through the
use of two ribbon cables. This module is a
combination
board that contains the necessary circuitry to connect two CO/Centrex/PBK loop start lines and four digital
key telephones to the system. ‘Ibis card
also contains one additional
voice [transraft) path for external paging. and a connector for adding one apphcation module
(i.e. IYIMF Receiver] to the system.

0
0
Dsl
0
Y053Ds
0 dy
0
.Bv

Figure

200-S -4

Expander

Module

LED8

DESCRIETION

& Illdicators:

Three green LEDs are located on the 2x4
Expander Module. ?‘wo of the LEDs (DS3 &
DS2) indicate the presence of +5v & -5v dc.
LED DS1 monitors the +12V dc used to
supply power to the key stations. An extinguished L.ED indicates the absence of the
associated voltage.
co UJle~station
IIItclfaces:
‘Ibe 2x4 Expander Module provides the
interface for two Centi
Of&e, Centrex or
PBX loop start Ifnes. The protection
circuitry necessary to atfow the system to be
classified as a fury protected system are
located on the card for each CO circtit.
The CO circuits are equipped with current
sensing circuitry that identifies distant end
disconnect floop supervfsion). The module
design also provides proper fusing or protection to comply with the requirements
of
UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22,2
No. 225 standards. CO lines are connected
to the system via RI-1 1 modular connectors mounted on the bottom edge of the
board. The 2x4 Expander module also provides the interface for four digital key telephones
using
two
64K
channel
arrangements.
Stations
connect to the
board via the MDF through a 5%pin connector located on the main key service
board inside the Basic KSU or a similar
connector on the main key service board
when installed
in the Expansion
KSU.
Each station connection
requires
four
wires to connect to the board.
A Dig&l DSS Console. a Single Line Telephone Adapter (OFT), or other spec&ally
designed adapter with a digital interface
CZUIbe assigned to any one of the interface
ciradts. The key station interface circuits
are protected fi-om m&wiring
and overcurrtrlt.

hifinite
DVX’ axid DVX”
D&itaI Key Telephone
Spsttme
D.

2x4 SLT Expander Module
The 2x4 SLT Expander Module is a two CO
by four single line telephone Interface module that plugs onto the main key service
board of the Basic KSU or the main key
service board of the Expansion
KSU
through the use of two ribbon cables, This
module is a combination
board that contains the necessary circuiby
to connect
two CO/Centrex/PBX
loop start lines and
four single line telephones to the system.
This card also contains a connector for
adding one application module (i.e. D?MF
Receiver) to the system.
Message Waiting
capability
comes installed on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module.
This circuitry provides message waiting
voltage to single line telephones equipped
with m-waiting
lamps, and supports
up to four single line telephones message
waiting lamps at 9W dc typical across tip

F%Wc 200-Q 2x4 SLT Expaadcr
200-S

LEIM

& Indicators:

Two green LET% indicate the presence of
+5v & -5v dc. An extinguished
LED indicates the absence of the associated voltage.
CO Line/Station
Iritcdaces:
The 2x4 SLT Expander Module provides
the interface for two Central Of3ice. Centrex or PEX loop sbrt, lines. The protection
circuitry necessary to allow the system to
be classified as a fully protected system are
located on the card for each CO circuit. The
CO circuits
are equipped
with current
sensing circuitry that identifies distant end
disconnect (loop supervisionI.
‘Ihe module
design also provides proper fusing or protection to comply with the requirements
of
UL 1459 Second Edit&r and CSA (X2.2
No. 225 standards. CO lines are connected
to the system via RJ-11 modular connectors mounted
on the bottom edge of the
board.
The 2x4 SLT Expander module also provides the interface for four standard
onpremise single line telephones (2500 type).
Four 36v dc single line circuits are provided on the printed circuit board. These
single line telephones canbe equippedwith
a standard
message waiting lamp (9OV
T&R) that operate on the Yip” and ‘ring”
leads. Additionally,
each circuft provides a
loop interrupt (7OOms duration) to the connected SLT or device. The card will support
single line telephones up to 2000 feet fkom
the Basic KSU. Refer toTable 200-4 - Loop
IArMs for additional
wiring information.
On-premise
singie line telephones shoutd
present a load to the port totaling a maximum ringer equivalence of 2.5.
A molex connector. 54 is located in the
upper left comer of the 2x4 SLT Expander
Module to provide ring generator capabilities. It is recommended
that the Tellabs
8101, 30 Hz. SOVAC Ring Generator
be
used with th% board.

Module

Issue 1, Jannary

1-3

i@inite
DVX’andDI&
Dfffital Key T&phone
E.

Systems

GENERAL

4x8 Expander Modalt
The 4x8 Expander Module is a four CO by
eight digital key station Interface module
that may plug onto the main key service
board of the Expansion
KSU only. This
module is a combination
board that contains the necessary eircuit3-y to connect
four CO/Centrex/PEX
loop start lines and
eight digital key telephones to the system.
This card also contains one additional
voice b-ansmit) path for external pagjng.
and a connector for adding one application
module {i.e. DTMF Receiver) to the system.

i.9

FQurc

ZOO-84x8 bpandcr

16sue 1, January

l9B3

DESCRIPTION

LLEDS L Indioators:
Four green LF,Ds are located on the 4x8
Expander Module. Two of the LEDs (IIS4 &
DS3) indicate the presence of +5v & -5v dc.
LEDs DSl and DS2 indicate the presence
of + 12V dc used to supply power to the key
stations (one LED for every four stations).
An extinguished
LED indicates
the absence of the associated voltage.
CO tie/Station
Interfaces
The 4x8 Expander Module provides the
interface for four Central Office. Centrex or
PBX loop start, lines. The protection circuitry necesszy to aLlow the system to be
classified as a fully protected system are
located on the card for each CO circuit. The
CO circuits are eqflpped
with current
sensing tzircuiw that identifies distant end
disconnect (loop supervision).
The module
design also provides proper rUsing or protection to comply with the requirements
of
LIL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22.2
No. 225 standards. CO lines are connected
totbesyst~vfaRJl1mod~arronnectors
mounted on the bottom edge of the board.
The 4x8 Expander module also provides
the interface for eight digital key telephones using two 64K channel arrangements. Stations connect to the hoard via
the MDF through a 50-pin connector locakd on the board. Each station connection requires four wires to connect to the
board.
A Digital DSS Console. a Single Line Telephone Adapter [OPX) or other specifkally
dessigned adapter with a digital interface
can be assigned to any one of the interface
circuits.
The key ‘station interface circuits
are protected f&m mis-wirinp
and overcurrent.

Module

200-B

DVX’

and DVX”

Rev Telephone

Sy&cms

irLfinite

GENERAL
200.3

DEXXUPTION
COMMON EQUIPMENT
DVX = SYSTEM

Digftal
FOR TEE

The following components
are necessary to operate the in..ite Digital Key Telephone System.
Refer to Appendix B for a complete infinite Digital Key Telephone System component list with
Part ws.
l
Equipment
Cabinet
w/Power
Supply
IK=Jl
l
Central Processing Board (CPB)
l
4xS Key Interface Board (CKB)
. 4 SLT Interface Board [CSB)
A

Equipment
Cabinet With Power
SUPplY u=uI
The DVX ’ system main cabinet contains

the power supply and mother board to
support a fully configured system of 28 CO
Lines and 56 Stations. The mot&r board
has eight card slots. Card Slot 58 (the right
most card slot) is used for the CenkaI
Processor Soard (CPB) PCB. Card slots J1
through 57 each support a four CO line by
eight station PCB’s. Cable exits through
the bottom of the KSU through a cable exit
raceway near the back of the KSU. Refer to
Figure
ZOO-6 Basic KSU Equipment
Cabinet
Power Supply

The power supply is installed in the KSU
cabinet at the time of manufacture
and
ships with the KSLJ. The power supply input voltage is 117V ac +10?/6. The power
supply provides power distribution
of filtered f unregulated
12V dc and a regulated
-5V de to the back plane bus. An ON/OFF
switch is located on the front of the power
supply along with a &-blow
5 amp fuse on
the AC side of the transformer.
The power
supply provides an input for a 4SV dc
source for future use. Power is regulated
and distributed
to stations/circuitry
in the
system on each printed
circuit board.
Three fuses located inside the power supply protect the system from over-current
situations.
The Power supply and cabinet
meet aU safety requirements
to comply
with UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA
C22.2 No. 225 standards.
central
Roccssor
Board [CFB)
This plug-in
card is the only common
equipment card required to make the system operational
and controls all system
activity. The CPB contains the main microProcessor a 16-bit [&3000) and a real tLme

200-10

clock which controls all system functions
including the PCM/IDM
voice switching
under direction of ROM and RAM software
coding. The CPB is responsible for alI control functions, execution of all logic operations and control
of system modules
including control over circuiky necessary
for voice switching and conference connections. The CPB is also responsible for all
system tones. system timing, and station
status control. In addition the CPB also
provides software and hardware support to
ensure the following:
l
Watch dog timer and recovery.
l
PCB status as to presence/absence
of
cards for automatic spftwarc configuration setup.
l
Interpret an ID code from each PCB so
that card type can be determined
automatically.
l
State/event
software design.
l
Battery backup of customer
database
RAM memory.
The CPB contains the circuiuy and connection @K!A type] for background
music/music
on hold, and the standard 300
baud modem. An optionaI 1200 baud modem can be installed on the CPB to allow
the on-board modem to transmit at a 1200
baud rate. In addition
there is one RS232C (modular connector)
input/output
port on the CP3 and a connector to support
the use of an optional I/O expansion module. The I/O expansion module adds RS232C I/O port and RS-422 I/O port to the
system for a system total of three I/O ports.
A reset 0
push button switch and a
BGM/MOH
volume control pot is located
on the front of tie PCB. Refer to Figure
200-7 Central Processing Board (CPB) for
the location of the Central. Processing
Board connectors.
System software is provided in EPROM
memory and is fnstalled on the CPB. The
CPB contains 512k of EPROM storage and
is equipped with 256K of battery-backed
static RAM. Provisions have been made on
the card to address up to four megabytes
of EPROM memory and up to two megabytes of static RAM.
dcm Interface

The Central Processor Board (CPB) contains an on-board modem that is capable
of transmitting
data at a rate of 300 baud.

Issue

1. Januarp

1993

I I

.
l.Ei
0

GND

i@rzite
DVX’ and DVXT’
Dtgital Key Telephone
Spetenzs
The modem supports and is compatible
with the Hayes command
protocol. The
Bell System Western Electric) standards
103 and 2l2A for modem design is incorporated into the design of this modem. The

modem operates on-he
in both Full and
Htiduplexmodes.
An optional 1200 batid
module may be added to the CPB to allow
transmission
at the rate of 1200 baud.

r-J&i

1200 bud
---- -1
Modem Modute (MM)
ZiQ
cz=i
L---- -__-_____
---- _-_______-___--_
-_a&

J3Ll t3

l/O Module (KIM)

(_
i
Fl@rc
200-12

200-7

Central

F’roceasfng

Board

(Cm)
It3eae 1, January

1993

iqfinite

DVX’

and DVXn

Di@tal Key Telephone

Systems

GENERAL

Board (CKB)
The 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB) is a four
CO by eight digital key station interface
board. The 4x8 Key Interface Board is a
combination
card that contains the necessary clrcultry to connect four CO/Centrex/PBX loop start lines and eight digital
key telephones to the system. ‘This card
also contains one additional voice (transmit) path for external paging. a multi purpose relay and a connector for adding one
application module to the system. The 4x8
Key Interface Board may be installed into
Basic iGU cabinet back plane using slots
57 through Jl and may be removed or
inserted while power is apphed to the Basic
KSU (power on). Refer to Refer to Figure
200-8 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB) for
location of connectors.
LEDS L Indicators:
Five red LEDs are located along the front
edge of the 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB).
one for each CO Line to indtcate when it is
in use and one I&D that monitors
the
contact operation of the multi use contact
located on the board. l%o green LEDs also
located along the front edge of the CKl3
indicate the presence of +5V & -5V dc.
C.

4 x 8 Key titerface

---a#---~
-a-.=
‘.. ..

z
A
-a.
-aa--cII’
---a=
---.a
s-a

PQurc
Issue 1, January

1993

..
..’ .’
‘:

co Line/station hltedacts:
The 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB) provides the interface for four CentraI Ofhce.
Centiex or PBX loop start. lines. The pmtection circuitry necessary to allow the system to be classified as a fUny protected
system are located on tbe card for each CO
The CO circuits are equipped with
circuit.
current sensing circuitry
that identifies
distant end disconnect (loop supervision).
The card also provides proper fusing or
protection to comply with the requirements
of UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22.2
No. 225 standards.
The 4x8 Key Interface Board also provides
the interface
for eight digital key telephones usa
two f34K channel arrangements. Stations connect to the board via
the MDF through a 50-pin connector located on the fmnt edge of the board. Each
station connection requires four wires to
connect to the board.
A Digital DSS Console, a Single Line Telephone Adapter (Opx), or other specifically
designed adapter with a digital interface
can be assigned to any one of the interface
circuits. The Key Station interface circuits
are protected from m&wiring
and overcurrent.

“:.

w
-m

DE!ERIPTlON

: ,....,
.
..-:,
‘.
..,: -..,
..... .:

..
:. ..‘.
...
: ‘..
.:

.:
...:R :‘: ::
‘. : ,,,
y, ‘.,
: ,’
~
:

200-S 4x8 Key Interface

Board (Cm)

2u0-13

GENERU
,:

DESC~BN?

DQital

SLT Jr&t&&e
Board (CSB)
The 4x8 SLTInterface Board ICSB) is a four
CO Line by eight single line telephone interface board. The card is a combination
card that contains the necessary circuiny
to connect four CO/Centrex/PBX
loop
start lines and eight standard on-premise
single line telephone (2500 fype) to the
system. This card also contains one additional voice [trammitl
path for external
paging and a connector
for adding one
application module (ie. D’l’XlF Receiver or
DuaI IYIMF/TaIk-3ack
Page Module] to
the system. The 4x8 SLT Interface Board
can be removed or inserted with power on
the KSU. Refer to Figure 200-9 4xB SLT
Interface Board (CSB) for location of connectors.
4x8

A molex connector is located on the 4x8
SLT Interface Board (CSB) to provide ring
germator
capabikties.
It is recommended
that the Tell&s 8101.30
Hz, SOVAC Ring
Generator be used with this board.

.. .

Pvgure ZOO-9

200-14

..’

4x8 SLT InterEace
@Ml

iq.j%nite DVX’amiDVXn
IEey Telephone
Systems

Message Waiting
capability
comes installed onto the 4x8 SLT Interface Board.
This circuitry
provides message waiting
lamps to single line telephones equipped
with message waiting lamps and supports
up to eight Single Line Telephone Message
Waiting lamps at BOV dc typical across tip
and ring.
LBDS & Indicators:
Five red LEDs are located along the front
edge of the 4x8 SLT Interface Board. one
for each CO Line to indicate when it is in
use and one LED that monitors the contact
operation of the muhi use relay located on
the board. Two green LEDs also located
along the front edge of the 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) indime
the presence of
+5V & -5V dc.
co Line/station
hesfaces:
The 4x8 SLT Interface Board [CSB] provides the interface for four Central Of&e,
Centrex or PBX loop start, lines. The protectioncircuilxynecessarytoallowthesystem to be classified as a fully protected
system are located on the card for each CO
circuit. The CO circuits are equipped with
current sensing circuitry
that identifies
distant end disconnect (loop supervision),
The card also provides proper fusing or
protection to comply with the requirements
of UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22.2
No. 225 standards. The 4x8 SLT Interface
Board does not support data devices for
data switchfng.
The 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) provides the control and interface for eight
standard
single line telephones
(2500
type). Eight 36V dc single line circuits are
provided
on the printed
circuit board.
These single line telephones
can be
equipped with a standard Message Waiting
Lamp (90VT & RI that operate on the -tip”
and “ring’” leads. Additionally
each circuit
provides a loop interrupt
(7OOms duration)
to the connected SLT or device. The card
will support single line telephones up to
2000 feet from the Basic KSU cabinet. Refer to Table 200-4 - Loop Limits for additional wiring
information.
On-premise
single line telephones
should present a
load to the port totaling a maximum ringer
eqllfvalence of 2.5.

Board

tme

1, Januarg

1-3

i@ite

DVX I and DVX”

Di@ti

ISty Telephone

200.4

API’LICXrION

Erpansion

Systems

GENERAL

MODULES

I/O Module

1200 Baud Modem

under

. I

Expansion
I/O Module
Dvx E sy6ttm

soti

control.

The 1200 baud modem module maintains
the compatibilitywlth
the Hayes command
protocol and uses theBell System (Western
Electric) standards 103 and 212A for modem design. The modem operates on-line
in both Full and Half duplex modes.

QOM) for the

This module provides one RS232C I/O
port (8 pin modular jack) and one RS-422
I/O port (6 pin modular jack). This moduie
is installed on the Central Processor Board
printed circuit board and adds two I/O
ports to the one FS232C I/O port already
on the Central Processor Board for a total
of three I/O ports allowed in the system.
Each port is independently
programmed
for its use and the rate of speed at which it
transmits
and receives data (baud rate).
The options are 300, 1200, 2400, 4800,
and 9600 Baud rates all at 8 data bits, 1
stop bit, with No parity.
0

(MMJ

This optional 1200 baud modem C&-I be
installed on either the DVX ’ or the DVX o
systems to add the capability of communicating with the system from a remote site
or location at the rate of 1200 baud. Both
systems provide as standard an on-board
modem capable of transmitting
data at 300
baud. With this module Installed, a transmission baud rate of 1200 baud can be
selected. A programmable
optton aIlows for
auto baud detection between 300 and 1200
baud.
Connection to the modem is accomplished
by simply calling into the system and connecting to the modem. This can be done by:
ringing directly to the modem, by going
through DISA. or after being answered by
a station user and u-ansferred to the modem port. Connection to the modem port is

(IO&I) for the

DVX r System
The DVX r contains one BS-232C. I/O port
(female. DB-25 type co~ector]
located on
the main key sentice board (J5). This optional l/O module may be added to the
main key sewice board (on connector J 15)
adding one additional
RS232C port (female, DB-25 type connector) and one RS422 port (6 pin modular jack connector).
Each I/O port on this module is capable of
transmitting
and receiving data at 300,
12#.2400,4800
and 9600 Baud rates.
c

ModuIe

DESXIPTION

0
i
D.

DTMF Receiver ModtiIe m
This module is used to provide DTMF mceivers in the system to support singIe line
telephone and DISA applications.
1

lx422
E
I

P
4

Fvs.232
52

Issue 1. January

1993

Currently this module can be added to the
DVX I System Expansion
KSU, 2x4 Expander Module. 2x4 SLTExpander
Module
and the 4x8 Expander Module. This module can also be added to the DVX IT System
on each 4x8 Key Interface Board. and each
4x8 SLT Interface Board. Mach MMF Re200-16

ceiver Module contains 1 DTMF receiver. A
maz&rnrm of three DTMF Receiver Modules
can be installed in the DVX ’ system for a
total of four receivers for the system(one
IYTMF Receiver is located on the main key
service board on the Basic KSU. A maximum of 13 IYIMF Receivers can be installed in the DVX ’ system, depending on
whether the Dl?vlF Receiver Module or the
Dual DTMF/Talk-Back
Page Module is installed.

.1
/:

i
I
/,;

Generally, one receiver will support DISA
and/or eight SLT stations under light to
moderate traffic. If SLT and or DISA trafi%z
is heavy, additional -receivers
should
be added. It is also recommended
to add
additional
DTMF Receivers when a Voice
M&I or Auto Attendant is connected to the
systemThe DTMF Receiver Module plugs onto a
ZO-pin connector on the following printed
circuit boards (one DTMF Receiver Module
may be installed on each card):
. 2x4 Expander Module
. 2x4 SLT Expander Module
l
Main Key Service Board of the Expansion Key Service Unit (EKSU)
l 4x8 Expander
Module
l
4x8 Key Interface board (CKB)
l
4x8 SLT Interface board (CSB)
E. Dlraf DTIUF/Talk-Back
Page Module
-1
This module is used to provide additional
lYIMF receivers Ln the system to support
- sin&e line telephone and DISA apphcations along with two-way external paging
capability. Currently this module can only
be added to the DVX ’ 4x3 SLT Interface
Board (CSB). Each Dual lYl’MF/Talk-Back
Page Module contains two DTMF Receivers. A maximum
of six Dual lX’MF/TalkBack Page Modules can be installed in the
DVX ‘I system, (A CKB must be installed in
Slot 1 for programmin g i?om an Executive
Digital Terminal (only a single DTMF Receiver modu.Ie can be instaIled on the CKB
board), CSB boards can be installed
in
Slots 2 thou 7. Each CSB board havnxg a
Dual DTMF/TaIk-Back
Page Module installed. resulting in 13 DTMF Receivers in
the system.
200-16

Genera@. one receiver will support DISA
and/or eight SLT stations under light‘to
moderate tra%c. If SLT and or DISA traffic
is heavy. additional
DTMF Receivers
should be added. It is also recommended
to add additional DTMF Receivers when a
Voice Mail or Auto Attendant is connected
to the system.

Optional
Dual DTMF/
Talk-Back
Page Module
(FUTURE)

Iw5uel,Jan~lsss

i@.r&e
lM,gitsl

200.5
A.

DVX’andDVX’
Key Tclcphone
DKXTAL

33-Button

Sywtems

GENF,RALDESCRFT’XcIN

TERMINKLS

Extcllt.ive

(Display]

TCrmtnal
The 33button
Digital Terminal is one in a
line of Digital electronic telephone terrninals. The line consists of an Executive @isplay] telephone. an Executive/PC Interface
telephone, an Enhanced (nan-display) teltphone and an 8-hutton
Basic telephone.
These telephones arc designed to operate
with

the new line of h-@-de Digital

Systems and PBX Systems.
The 33-button and &button
I-E& are connected

Key

DigitaITermi-

to the KSU via a four

wire (two twisted pair] connections from an
appropriate
electronic terminal interface
board.
LCD Display:
The 33-button
Dfgital Display Terminal
has a 48 character IAquid Crystal DispIay.
The display pnwides information
such as
station extensions caIling, Line ringing information,
camp-on information,
Message
waiting tionnation
and so on. The LCD
Display is a 48- character display divided
into 3 fields:
- Field 1 - Current Status (top hne, 24characters)
- Field 2 = Date &eft half of bottom line,
12-characters)
- Field 3 = Time of day @Z&t half of bottom line, 12-characters)
These fields are separately maintained
by
the. KSU processing to shaw current and
pending statton activfty. Each field is recreated upon any display change except
additional
digits which are added to the
end of the existing display.
The terminal
communicate5
to the K3.I
tbrougl-~ two 64K digital channel arrangements. One channel is used as the p&xx-y
voice channel, a second is used for terminal to KSU command transmission.
Power
is also provided to the tenninattia
the four
wire connection.
Buttons
and I.BDa:
The 33-button
Digital terminal key boamt
PCB provides long ltfe “sup& bright” I+ht
Emitting Diodes WDs) and button assetblies that profrude through the top housing. The buttons are small rectangular- In
shape with a Clear end for proper LED
visibility
and diffusion,
the 33-button
DWd
Ternhal
has 33-buttons
all conIssue

I, January

1993

taining LEDs except the pickup and Flash
buttons plus a 12-key dial pad.
The 33-button
DigitaJ Terminal scans the
key board for dial pad and button debounces and depressions
for command
transmission
to the KSU. The keyset has
the following buttons defined as follows:
Display and Non-Display
- 12 DialKeyPad*
- 24 Flexible Buttons
- I ON/OFF button [fixed]
- I MLrE button (fKecI)
- 1 SPEED button [fixed)
- 1 FLASH button (fjxedl
- I TRANSfer buttondfixed)
- 1 HOLD button (fured)
- 1 CAMP-ON button (fmed)
- 1 MSG button (f&d)
- 1 PICKUP button (fixed)
l Au
buttons except the 12-key dial pad,
Pickup and Flash button have an LED
assocfated with it. Refer to Figure 200-10

33-ButianE2am.1tfve~gigitai Terminal.
Spmkerphont:
Each 33-button
Digital
Terminal
is
equipped with a unit that enables the telephone to be used handsfree
in two-way
conversations.
The user activates
the
speakerphone
by pressfng the ON[OFF
button &ED hghts steady). To tWt.e
a
speakerphone
call, the ON/OFF button is
toggled
OFF (LED extinguished).
The
MUTE feature is used in conjunction with
the speakerphone
option. To mute the
speakerphone
microphone, the MUTE button is pressed &ED lights steady). To reactivate the mimphone,
the MUTE button is
pushed again (LED extinguished),
Several pro-able
options control the
speakerphone
operation. Each digital terminal can be programmed
for full speakerphone
operation.
or monitor/On-Hook
dialing capabilities
with no full speaker
phone operation.

When Automatic R-e-selection is enabled
at the station when any button is pressed
(i.e. CO, DSS, Page etc...) the station and
speakerphone
is automatically
activated.
v01tmle controlr3:
Separate ‘slide” switches are provided on
the tiont of the G-@-&e Digital Terminal to

2cm17

GENE=

iqfinite
DVX’ andDVXn
Di@aI I& Telephone
Systema

DEMX.IFTION

:.
‘::

m
ZOO-18

200-10

3S-Button

E;xtCUtiQC

Digital

Termimd

i&de

DVX’

Digftal

and DVX’

Key Telephone

Systems

adjust the volume of the voice and tones
presented to the terminal speaker.
- The speaker volume (center switch] will
contro’l all voice signals sent to the
speaker i.e. Speaker Phone conversations, BGM, and Page announcements.
- The ringing volume (right switch] wiU
control all tone signals presented to the
speaker
i.e. Ringing.
splash tones.
Camp-On etc... Muted ringing will also
be conkoIled by the ringing volume slide
switch. ‘l%e muted ringing volume will
be proportionately
quieter than normal
ringing based on the current switch settingHF-W-TN

GENBIZAL

Ray:

e
wall Mounting:
The 33-button
Wall Mount Bracket is designed to allow the 33-button
digital terminal to be waII mounted
on industry
standard 630 @pe wall jacks. A 4-inch line
cord is also provided as a standard item
with each wall bracket.

QCLID)

The 33-button Executive/PC InterfaceTerminal is similar to the 33-button Executive
Display model and all of the information
listed above applies to the Executive/PC
Interface model except this terminal
is
used to deliver specffic data messages
identifying call states to a device attached
to the phone via a serial channel following
the data transmission
requirements
of BS232C. The interface parameters
to be used
arc 2400bps. no parity, 8 data bits, and 1
stop bit. This featurew%l deliver ICLID data
to a Personal Computer
attached to the
phone for look-up of customer records and
subsequent
processing by the individuaI
answering the telephone
call. Calls can
also originate from the Personal Computer
through the digital tenntnat.
The 33-button Executive/PC
Interface terminal provides
transmit,
receive, and
ground data lines from the phone microprocessor which are used on command
i%om the KSU to output information.
The
use of this capability would be to output
the ICLlD information
to a PC attached to
the phone. The VODAVI CalI ‘Tracker software program is available to support these
Caller ID applications.
fiture use couId be
made of this capability for low speed data
provided to equipment
attached
to the
phone.

Switch:

Each 33-button
Digital
Terminal
is
equipped with a slide-out Directory Tray
accessed from the front of the digital terminal.

The 33-button
Digital Terminal. uses an
.e.&tret
type transmitter.
Comp&tible
headsets can be plugged into the Tern%
nals handset jack for headset operation.
33-Button
Bxecutfve/PC
Intuface
Terminal

A three position slide switch is located on
the front of the Digital Display Termhal
that controls the method of receiving intercom cans.
- The “HF” position allows intercom call
am~ounce with hands free reply.
- The “W position allows Call Announce
intercom calls only.
- The TN” position provides Tone only
intercom ringing.
This switch allows users to set and corm-o1
the method in which they receive the&
intercom calls. However. af%aIcodethat
users can dial before placing an intercom
call can override a ealleci station’s switch
setting of HF or PV to force the station to
Tone ring.
Directory

DBSCBJPTION

33-Buttoa

Di@hd

Terminal

The 33-button Enhanced
is similar to the 33button
tal TerminaI and all of
listed above applies except
display.

IEnhapccd)

Digital Terminal
Executive Digithe information
there is no IX3D

EIandset/une
cords:
The 33-button
Digital Terminal
uses a
color coordinated
K-Style handset with a
makb.ing
la-foot handset cord. A g-foot
four conductor base line cord is included
with ewryTermi&.

IBsue I. Jaauarg

1993

209-19

infinite
GENERAL

DEKXIPTION

F’Qurc
200-20

D&bit

206113343utton

Enhanced

Digital

DVX I and

Key Telephone

DVX’

Systemis

TcrminaI

Lssut

1, January

l-3

iqfhfte
Dj#td

DVX I aPd DVXn
Eey Telephone
Systems

&Button
Digital Terminal
The 8-button Digital Terminal is new to the
line of digital electronic telephone terminals. This new telephone is designed to
operate with the line of in$nrte Digital Key
Systems and PBX Systems.
Buttons and LEDs:
The g-button Digital terminal key board
PCB provides long life ‘super bright” Light
Emitting Diodes (LED-s) and button assemblies that protrude through the top housing. The buttons are small rectang&r
tn
shape with a clear end for proper LED
visibility and diflixion.
The &button Digital Tcnninal has eight buttons all containing LEDs plus a 12-key dial pad.
me S-button Digital T erminal scans the
key board for dial pad and button debounces and depressions
for command
transmission
to the KSU. The keyset has
the following buttons defined as follows:
- 12DiaIKeyPad*
- 8 buttons, 4 of which are flexible
- 1 DSS STA 100 button (flexible)
- 1 DSS STA 101 button (flexible)
- 1 Ix)OP button @zxible)
- 1 POOL button (fle~&le)
- 1 SPEED button [fnted)
- 1 ON/OFF button (tied)
- 1 TRANSfer button (fixed)
- 1 HOLD button (fjxecl)
All buttons except the 12 key dial pad,
have an LED associated with it Refer to
Figure200-1033Button
DigitalTerminal.

GENERAL

Several prog rammabie options control the
speakerphone
operation. Each digital terminal can he programmed for full speakerphone operation,
or monitor/On-Book
dialing capabilities
with no full speaker
phone operation.
When Automatic
Pre-selection
is enabled
at the station when any button is pressed
(i.e. CO, DSS, Page etc...) the station and
speakerphone
is automatically
activated.

speakerphoItc:
Each 8-button
Digital
Terminal
is
*
equipped with a unit that enables the telephone to be used handsfree fn two-way
conversations.
The user activates
the
speakerphone
by pressing the ON/OFF
button (LED lights steady). To termmate a
speakerphone
call, the ON/OFF button is
toggled OFF (LED extinguished).
The
MUTE feature is used in conjunction with
the speakerphone
option. To mute the
speakerphone
microphone,
the pre-programmed
MUTE flex button is pressed
&ED Qhts steady). To reactivate the microphone.
the MUTE button is pushed
qain (LED extinguished].

lsfmc

1. January

1993

DESCRIPTION

v01ume controh
A “slide” switch is provided on the front of
the w
8-button
Digital Terminal to
adjust the volume of the voice and tones
presented to the terminal speaker.
- The -slide” switch sontrols the speaker
v&me
which controls all voice signals
sent to the speaker i.e. Speaker Phone
conversations.
BGM. and Page announcements.
- The same ‘slide” switch also controls the
ringing volume which controls a.tl tone
signals presented
to the speaker i.e.
Ringing, splash tones, Camp-On etc...
Muted ringing is also controJled by the
slide switch. The muted ringing volume
wUl be proportionately
quieter than normal ringing based on the current switch
setting.
DirectorgTxar
Each
8-button
Digital
Terminal
is
equipped with a shde-out Directory lYay
accessed from the front of the digital terminal.
wall

Motmthg:
The Bbutton
WAl Mount Bracket is desfgned to allow the &button Digital Tern&
nal to be wall mounted
on industry
standard 630 type walljacks. A 4-inch he
cord is also provided as a standard item
with each bracket.
c!ords:
The &button
Digital Terminal uses a color
coordinated K-Style handsetwith
a matching 12-foot handset cord. A Q-foot four
conductor base line cord is included with
every Terminal.
The 8-button
Digital Terminal
uses an
&&XL
type transmitter.
Compatible
headsets can be plugged into the Terminals handset jack for headset operation.

HaIldsct/line

20&21

DQitaI

Ipigurc

2-12

8-Button

3asic

D&Ml

TerminaI

i@nite
DVX’ taxad DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

@finite
DVX’ and DVX’
~)@t.aI K.ey Telephone S~ttrns
E.

GENERAL

DESCRIPTION

Mgit.al DSS/DLS Consok
The Digital Direct Station Selector /Direct
Line Selector (D.SS/DLS) Consoles can be
installed in place of any digital terminal
circuit. The DSS/DLS Digital Console was
designed in a housing similar in looks to
the 33-button
digital terminal.
The Direct Station Selector/Direct
Line Selector (DSS/DLS) Console to be used witi
the family of infinite digital systems is
modular in nature. The DSS/BLF console
provides 48 buttons (4 columns of 12 buttons) and requires a separatefour-conductor line cord each connected to a digital
terminal station port.
The DSS/DLS
Console unit can access
Stations,
Direct Appe&ng
CO Lines, or
features that may be assigned to any of the
fladble buttons.

A DSS/DLS unit may be assigned to one of
the different MAP configurations
available.
Any one of the three MAP configurations
may be assigned to a DSS/DLS and up to
three maps may be assigned to one station.
However. ‘duplicate” MAPS or appearances
of Stations and/or CO lines between the
MAPS are not allowed.
D8S/DLS
Console Buttan Mappiq$
The buttons on the DSS/DLS console can
be mapped with either a combination
of
fixed and flexible or completely flexible buttons where tbe station user may change
the button
programming
to suit their
needs.
There are three pre-deIined MAPS for the
DSS Console with default Button Aogramming. Refer to Figure 200- 14 DSS Console
Map 1, Figure 200- 15 DSS Console Map 2.
and Figure 200-l 6 DSS Console Map 3 for
a button layout of each DSS Console Button Map.

Issue 1, January

1993

20@23

r
ir#idte
DVX’ and DVX”
D&.&al Key Telephone
Spstcms

(!
'Q;
Ngum
200-24

200-18

48-Button

Dss/DLs

con6ok

Issue 1, Jaaaarp

m93

iqfmite
D@.d

DVX’ and DVX”
Eey Tckphone
Syattma

GENERAL

DESC-ON

MAF#l hasbydefaultthefirst28Stations(Stas
100-127). and 14COLines, threeC!allParklocations.
Release, Attendant Override. and an All Call Page button mapped to the buttons. All buttons except
the 14 CO line buttons and Release button are flexfble and can be changed by the station user.

Fi@m
Issue 1, Janumy

1993

200-14

085

Console

Map

2ocb26

GENE&!&L DESCRIPTION
MAP #2 has by default
park locations, Release.
mapped to the buttons.
and can be changed by

200-26

Di#taI

infinite
DVX’ and DVX ‘I
I.&v Telephone
Systems

all 28 CO lines. and the first 12 stations (Stas 100-l 1 l), followed by four Call
Attendant
Override. an All CaH Page button, and the first Internal Page Zone
AU buttons except the 28 CO line buttons and the Release button are flexible
the station user.

Is5ue1,Jnxmq71993

I .

digital
t

Key Telephone

Systems

GENERAL

DESC!RPl’ION

MAP #S by default is intended to be used with MAP # 2 on an DVX” System, in that it has the remaining
stations (Stas 112- 155) to provide a full CO Une by Station mapping. Additionally,
Internal Page Zones
2. and 3 appear and the last two buttons are unassigned. All of the buttons on MAP #3 are flexible
and can be changed by the user.
CO Line ringing on Map I and Map 2 is determined by CO Line Ringing Assignments.

STA 136

Figure
Imue

1, January

1993

200-16

DS!3 Console

Map 3

-27

iqjhite
GENE=

200.6

DESCRT.PTION

D#td

SLT ADAPTER / OFF-PREMISE
EXTENSION MODULE

key

DVX’autdDVXn
Telephone

Spstcms

The OPXboxmeek
the requirements
of the FCC
for connection to the telephone relco) netwbrk.
Telephones connected to the OPX bax must be
DTMF only (2500 Qpe).
This module also provides for one Power Fail
circuit in the event of an AC power failure.

This external module provides the interface for
one long loop (OPX) single line telephone (2500
type) extension. This module requires a separate&provided
-48V dc power supply to provide
the necessary current for long loop applications
and to support ring generation. This module is
wired to and interfaces with a digital terminal
Fey station)
port from either the DVX ’ or
DVX a systems.

l-r
m

MDF

CONNECTING

OPX

Bbek wim b - of exfernal48Y
supply
Fled wfra to + of external 4Bv supply

BJadcto Trunk
Yellow to Trunk

200-28

bsue

lip
Ring

1. January

1993

irlfinite

;y/.-

n&itaI

DVX’ and DVXn
Key Tdephone

GENERAL

Systems

RELAY / SENSOR INTERFACE
MODULE
The Relay Sensor Interface Module connects to
either the DVX ’ or DVX ‘I systems using one
digital station port and provides three relay
activated contacts and three sensing circuits.
The relays provide for applications
such as
Loud Bell ControI contacts. CO Line control
contacts, FWU Start contacts, Page Relays,
200.7

DESCRIPTION

Power Fail contact and additional applications
as software will permit. The sensing dkuits
provide for such applications as RAN Stop (end
of message) and other applications
as developed and allowed by software.
An external power source is required to drive
equipment connected to the relay contacts. The
contacts are rated at 24V dc max at 1 amp.

xwr
nnp
XMIT RING

mm np
ACVE

RING

Oevim Output Relay
(dry mntacts)
(ie: RAN Device)

.,:
:c.

Customer Provided
Power Supply
(if needad)
NOTE: RAN device does not
require external power supply

Pvgwe
Itssue 1. Janunry

1993

200-18

Rclag

/ 8ensor

Interface

Module
200-29

GEI’iERAL

Digital

DESCRIPTION

switch that activates the PFTU for testing purposes.
With loss of power to the system or a failure of
system processing. the PFTU will automatically
connect up to twelve CO lines to prewired
WI/2500
type telephones. When power is restored, the PFTU will automatically
restore the
CO hunks and stations to normal operation.
These SLT stations do not have to be used for
intercom, but can be if so desired.

POWER FAILURE TRANSFER
=IpFTu)
This unit provides the rely tmnsfer circuits for
up to 22 CO lines in the event of a power or
processor failure. The unit is housed in its own
enclosure and mounts external to the KSU.
Activation of the PFT relays is controlled by a
multi-use relay on any one of t&e CO / Station
Interface boards that is programm ed for PJ3. A
customer provided 12V dc power supply is required to operate the unit. There is a manual
200.8

Method

1 Method #2
I
=z

i
I
.

Power Faibm
Transfer
Unit
(PFmJ)

;
,

j
Mm

in..ite
DVX’ and DVX I1
IKey Telephone
Systems

+-’ 1zvDc
I 1N.w
I

DVX II t&a& KSU China!

irlfinite
DVX * and DVX’
D&&&d Xey Telephone
Systems
200.9

DATA FEATURE

me Data Feature is a time division switched.
point to point data transmission
capability
which perrrdts simultaneous
(on the same system but not the same port) voice and data
communications.
The Data Feature offers the
abUy to transmit data information
between
personal computers,
prh-iters, plotters. modems, CFZT terminals, and main frame computer ports.
To establish a Data call, a Digital Data Interface
Unit [DDIV is required to be connected to each
data communications
device. Data information
can be switched through the system at speeds
of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800. 9600, 19.2K and
38.4Kbaud
asynchronous.
Refer to Figure 20020 Digital Data Interface Unit tDDIU) wiring
The Digital Data Interface Unit (DDIU) is wired
to the in&&e Digital Key Telephone Systems
like a digital telephone. and requires one station port.
All connections to the DDIU are made on the
back panel. The back paneI has a modular jack
andaDB-25Qpeconnector.Themoclularja&
labeled KSLJ. is used to connect the DDIU to the
station port of the system. The DB-25 connector
supports an FLS-232C connection and is used
to connect the data device to the system.
A green LED lights to indicate the DDIU is
properly wired to the system.
Connection of the individual data communication devices requires that the installer be familiarwith
data communications
terms. and has
access to the appropriate tionnation
for connecting the variety of data communications
devices that
may be encountered.
This
information
consists of. but is not knited to:
1.1s the device configmed
as data terminal
equipment [DTE), or data communications
equipment (DCE.
2.What pin on the RS-232C type connector
performs what function?
3.What sfgnal leads are required to make the
device operate?
When planning the installation
of the data feature, use a digital display phone at any location
that is to originate a data connection. A DDIU
can onlybe called, it cannot originate a connection. A digital display phone would typically be
connected to a CRT terminal, or personal computer. A DDIU would typically be connected to
a printer,or a MODEM.
The station wiring for a digital display phone
and a DDIU are identical.

Issue 1. January

1993

GENE&%

DESCRIPTXON

The data connector of the Digit& Data Interface
Unit [DDIW is a 25-pin. type D connector which
is configured as Data Communications
Eqtipment with the following -- pin configurations.
PIN
#

USE

Receive Data

DIRECTION

i into telephone
: DDI

;
(or i
1

-tit

DATA

Request TO Send

Clear To Send

Data Set Ready

SignaIGround

Data wrrier.detect

unassigned

Secondary

Transmit

17 ;

19
20
22

DCD
Clock

Receive Clock
Secondary

riTs

Data Terminal
I

Ready
Rtng indicator

; ;rt;g$phone

ii into telephone (or
I DDIU)
1 out of telephone
i
, or DDIU
7
1 o$$T
1
1
out of telephone
o= DDI
into telephone (or
DDIU)
out of telephone
If or DDIU)
out of telephone
I( or DDIU)
out of telephone
I( or DDIU)
tnto telephone (or
DDIU)
into telephone (or
I DDIU)
out of telephone
(or DDIU)

The following diagram will aid in the design of
cables to connect the many different configurations of data communications
devices.

DigItaX Systems

Data Switching

200-31

Digital

iqjinite
DVK’ and DVX”
Key TeIephone
Systems

GREE
7-r
TR
RT
RR

II -

t STATION
CONNECTING
BLOCK

MODULAR

200-32

(

)

(

KSU

OFF
HoOoK

oo”oo*ooooooooooooooooooo
] Q
To Data Device

i&.&e

DVX’andDVXn
Key Tekphone

Digital

Systems

GENERAL

MODEM
GNDl
RD2
Tm
567
mss

DcDa
DTFl2D
WI6
RI22

Modem

to DDN

Cable

DISPLAY
PHONE

Computer

to Phone Cable

To establish a connection to any idle data pork
1, A user with an associated DDIU dials the
station number of the DDIU or the group
access number of the group that the DDIU
has been inserted into or presses a DSS
button representing the DDIU. The digital
key system wilI then determine the baud
rate setting for the called DDIU and c0nveI-t
the user’s associated DDIU to the same
baud rate. l’he system will then complete
the connection.

DEXRPTION

A second method to establish a connection
between two DDIUs is done by the first &tendant.
1.The first attendant
dials the extension
number of one data unit. Dial tone is received and the display will show the BAUD
RATE.
Z-Then dials the station number of the second data unit, confirmation
tone is heard.
To break down an established connection:
1. ne station user dials his associated DDIU
number or press the DSS button for the
assocfated DDIU followed by pressing the
FLASH button. The first attendant can dial
one of the DDIUs. followed by pressing the
FJ..ASH button.
.
Conditions:
l
The System is transparent
to the devices
being connected. Therefore each DDIU must
be configured with a specific baud rate, number of data bits and number of stop bits. This
configuration
wiIl be done by the iirst attendant or in the case of an associated data unit
can be conf@ured by the user.
l
Data switching
is accomplished
using the
same wMng the telephone station uses for
voice switching.
* Data ports can be arranged in UCD Groups
or Hunt Groups.
l
Data ports do not have to be associated wltb
a keyset, however to connect two DDIU devices one of them must be associated with a
keyset unless the connection is made by the
first attendant.
l
When the data connection
has been completed, the baud rate used in the connection
will be displayed on the keyset.
l
Non associated DDIU connections
can be
broken down by the Brst attendant.
l
A DDIU has a DCE interface. Therefore a
straight through RS-232C cable can be used
connect to a DTE device [printer, PC, etc.).
l
Each DDIU requires a digital terminal port.
Refer
to Station Attributes
Programming,
730.2, Station Identification
for progrmg
the Station ID of the Digital Data interface Unit
(DDiU). Also refer to Sec. 730.3, Digital Data
Interface Unit (DDIU) for progmmming
the parameters
of the Digital Data interface
Unit
(DDIU).

iqfisttte
GENERAI,

200.10

D&WI

DESCRIPTION

SYSTEM

SPECIFICATIOHS

DVX’andDVX”

Key Telephone

Systems

AND

The DVX I Basic KSU is housed in a wallmountable
mbinet that contains the system
power supply and the mother board for stations
and COlines. This Basic KSU supports a loaded
capacity
of 6 CO lines and 12 stations.
DSS/DLSs
can be installed
in place of any
Digital Key terminal. Standard single line telephones (2500 type] can be installed by using
Single Line Telephone Adapters (OPX) boxes, or
the 2x4 SL.T Eqander
Module.
The DVX ’ Basic KSU is housed &-A a wa&
mountable
cabinet that contains the system
power supply and the back plane for station
and CO line boards. This Basic RSU supports
a loaded capacity of 28 CO lines and 56 stations. DSS/DLSs
can be installed in place of
any Di@aI Key terminal. Standard single line
telephones (2500 type) can be installed by replacing the ed3 Key lnterfaee Board(s) (CKB)
with the 4x8 SLT Interface
Board(s) (CSB).
Eight sfngle line telephones can replace eight
Digital Display Terminals
for each board exchanged. An ON/OFF switch is located on the
tiont of the power supply.
The system capacities are listed in Table ZOO-1
- Digital System Capacities. Electrical specifications. environmental
specifkations,
and
Loop limits are listed in Table 20@2 - Elecirical
Specikations,
Table 200-3 - Environmental
Spedfcations
and Table 200-4 - Loop Limits.
Dialing specifications are listed in Table 200-5
- Dialing Specifications.
FCC Registrations
Numbers for DVX I and DVX ’ are listed in Table
200-6 - FCC Registration Numbers. Miscellaneous Specifications
are listed in TabIe 200-8 Miscellaneous
Specifications.
Key telephone,
Single Line Telephone and OPXAudible
lndications are listed in Table 200-S - Digital Terminal
Audible Signals, Table 200-10 - Single Line
Telephone Audible Signals and Table 200- 11 OPXTelephone Audible Signals. Key Telephone
Visual Indications
are l&ted in Table 200-12 DSS/BLF Button Visual Indicators, Table 20013 - CO Line Button Visual Indicators,
and
Table 200-14
- Function
Button
Visual
Indicators.

Issue

1, January

1993

i-&e
D3&w

DVX’andDmn
Key Telephone

GENERAL

Systems

Table 200-l

- Dig&al

System

DESCRIPTION

Capacities

1Time

i 112 PCM/TDM time slots
Slots:
i
Ports: (Dvx’)
14 (max) loop start (2 or 4 per expansion module
! CO/PBX/Centrex
Lines
28 (max] Digital Terminals (4 or 8 per station board)
; Digital Terminal Stations
Standard Single Line Telephone :s 8 (max) Standard Single Line Telephones (4 per board)
27 [max) OPX or SLT Stations (1 per OPX adapter)
Off-Premise Extensions (SLTsl
(Dvxnl
Ii Ports:
CO/PBX/CentreX
!

i
28 (ma) loop start (4 per Station board)
Lines
56 (max) Digital Termfnals (8 per Station board)
Digital Terminal Stations
(2500 type) SLTs (8 per SLT Expander
Standard Single Line Telephone :s 48 (max] Shndard

Off-Premise

b0EU-d)

55 (max) OPX Stations

Extensions

Paging: @wn’
Internal Paging
External Paging
(one my p@fgl
DTMF Receivers: [DVX ‘I

4 [rnax) internal

Page Zones [software
7 [max) One per CO/Station board

(DVX “)

D’TMF Sender: (DVX r & DW
I/O Ports:
Contacts

[multi-purpose)

‘)

(DVX I1

Contacts/Senso15
(Rda~ Sensor
Module) (DVX’ & DWi 1
Conference:
Circuits
Parties per “bridge”
DISA Circuits:

DVX ’ Digital

DSS/DLS

Consoles:

DVX ’ Digital

DSS/DLS

Consoles

Hunt Groups:
Groups:
Members:
Tvues:
1. January

4 (maxI per system (1 provided standard in BKSU, 1 each
optional on additional expander modules)
13 (max) per system (1 each optional on additional
expander
modules)
I per system &me shared)
3 (max) per system (1 RS-232C included on BKSUKPB).
2 on optional I/O module (I-RS232C
and 1 RS-422)
7 (max) per system (1 included on each CO/Station
board)
[additional relavs may be used with the relay sensor module)
4 Relay / Sens& Mock&s per system. Each~Relay/Sensor
Module has 3 relays and 3 sensing circuits.

21 (max) Up to 3 DSS/DLS
function with each station.
station capaeity by 1)
42 (max) Up to 3 DSS/DLS
function with each station.
station capacity by 1)

units can be prq$rammed
ta
Wch DSS/DLS unit reduced
units can be programmed
to
@kch DSS/DLS unit reduced

software supports up to 8 groups.
Software supports up to 8 stations
Station or Pilot Hunting
1993

controlled)

4 Conference “bridges” per system
5 parties per “bridge”
3 CO Lines may be programmed
simultaneously.
Up to 3 stations can be designated as attendant(s).

Attendants:

Issut

(OPX))

4 (max) Internal Page Zones (software controlled)
4 (max) Chx per Station board
‘.

External Paging
(one way pagW

DTMF Receivers:

(1 per single line adapter
.

in each group.

200-35

Digital

Table 200-l
ACD or UCD Groups:
Groups:
Members:
RAN AmlounceInent5:
Calls in Queue:
Voice Mail Groups:
Groups:
Members: (ports)
Integration Method:
V&l Message Wait:
VM Disconnect
Loop Supenrision

200-36

Signal:
Disconnect

- System

Capacities

iqjkite
DVX’ and DVX”
Rcy Telephone
Systems

(Cont’d)

Software support5 8 groups.
Software support5 up to 8 station5 in each group.
Eiiht RAN announcements
per ACD/UCD
Group.
AIlCOLiies[14or28)maybetiqueueforan
ACD/UCD
Group.
Software supports 8 Groups.
Software supports up to 8 stations in each group.
In-Band S@naIing. ID’lMF)
I4201 to turn message waiting on,
[42 1) to turn message wafting off
Programmable
12-digit (DTMF) string. If no digit5
are programmed,
15 seconds of silence followed by
busy tone.
700 ms duration

bsue

1, Jamary

1995

I
Il
i

,
1
[
I

f&fnite
D#td

DVX I and DVX I1
Key Telephone
Systems

GENiCRAT., DESCRIPTION

Table 200-2

- Electrical

117’V ac 110%. 60 Hz single phase
12OV ac @lSAmax
180 watts m-urn
(DVX !]
600 watts m-urn
(DW ‘1

AC Input to Power Supply
I Power Consumption:
I
Power Supply

Gpccificaticu15

j 1.5A. 125V ac (ID- I BKSU and EKSU)
5A, 125V ac (DVX “1

Fuse - AC input

Longitudinal

Balance:

Setter than 60db from 200 Hz to 1,000 Hz
Better than 40db from 1,000 )fi to 4,000 Hz

Idle Channel

Noise:

Less than

15 dbmc

for alI connections

Cross Talk Attenuation:

3reakr than 75dbm
to Station

SingIe Frequency
(1,000 Hz)

Station to CO Ltne &id Station to Station:
Better than 2.0% or 34db
Chtput level -30 dbm to 0 dbm

Ringing

Sensitivity:

Rin@r

Equivalence

CO Line SignaIing

Distortion:

Statiox~ to CO and Station

16Hzto30Hzat40VRMSminimum
3OHzto67Hzat5OVRMSmirhnum
Number:

IREN)

1.9
Frequency
Frequency

- DTMF;

pair at -5 dbm to 0 dbm
tolerance. better than +1.5%

Music Source (input)

0 dBm max at 600 ohms input impedance

Contact Rating
Multi Purpose Relay

l.OA 24V dc

External

Output
Output

-L

Page Port
Impedance
Power w/o compression

6OOohms@OdBm
1 mW Makmum

UL File Number:

El09461

Table 2Mb3

- Environsnental

fi3pedfimthns

Operating Temperature
Recommended
Operatfng Temperature
Storage Temperature
Relative Humidity
Heat Dissipation
(BTU’s) (TWX I and DVX ‘)

Issue 1, January

loa3

200-37

GE-

D&&al

DESCRIPTION

Table 200-4
[ Electronic
( [including

Telephane:
DSS/DL.S Console)

1 Standard

Single Line Telephones

i, Off-Premise

Extensions

iqflniie
DVX’andDVX’
Ecy Telephone
SyAcms

- Loop Limits
1000 feet of 26 AWG Cable
1000 feet of 24 AWG Cable
1000 feet of 22 AWG Cable
I

(OPX) (Adapter

to SLlJ
-

2000 feet of 24 AWG Cable
1400 ohms
telephone.

maximum

loop, not including
i

Table

200-S - Dialing
-i-

DTMFDialing

kequency
RiseTime
Duration
Interdigit

SpccUicatians

Deviation

*10/b

3 msec.
75 msec. minimum
75 msec. minknan

of DTMF Si@
Time

HJLSEDialing
Plilse Dialing Rate
pulse Break/Make
Duration

10 or 20 pps.
60/40 or 66/33

COTvpe

Loop start, 600 ohm, current

Table

20&6

- FCC Rc#stition

Numbers

For Systems configured as a key system
(button appearan ce) use:
For Systems configured as a hybrid system
(dial access codes) use:
infiniteDvXU
For Systems cor&gu.red as a key system
(button appearance) use:

For Systems configured as a hybrid
(dial access codes) use:

DLPHKG-65

153~MF-E

DLPHG-6510%KF-E

system
DLPI-IG-65101-m-E

sensing

irIfinite
DVX’andDVXn
DigitaI Key Telephone

Table 200-7
kVX ’ BASIC KEY SERVICE UNIT
Height
20.0”
Width
14.0”
4.0”
Depth
Weight
13.5 lbs. (unloaded)
DVX I EXPANSION KEY SERVICE TJNIT
Height
20.0”
Width
14.0”
4.0’
Depth
13.5 lbs. (unloaded)
Weight
DVX ’ KEiY SERVICE ?JN?T w/POWER
15.2”
He&$-it
18.5”
Width
14.751
Depth
Weight
60 lbs. (UnIoaded)
OFF-PREMISE
Height
Width
Length
Weight

EXIENSION
1.75’
7.625”
8.0”
3.5 lbs.

RELAY/SENSOR
MODULE
Height
1.75’
Width
7.625”
Len@31
8.0”
Weight
3.5 lbs.

hmue 1, January

1993

GENERAL

8ysttms

MODULE

- Dimensiona

DESCRWMON

and Weight

33-BUITON

display)
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

33-B-N

ENHANCED

TEXMINAL

(non-

3.5”
7.625”
9.625”
3 lbs.
EXECU’ITVE

DISPLAY TERMINAL

Misplay1
Height
Width
Depti
weight
&BUTTON
Height
Width
Depth
weight
DSS/DLS
Height
Width
Depth
Weight

3.5”
7.625”
9.625”
3 lbs.
BASIC TERMlNAi
2.75..
6.25
..
9.25
21 lbs.
CONSOLE
2.75”
5.25”
9.25”
2 lbs.

200-39

i@niteDVX'audDVB;"
Digital

GENERALD=RIPTJON

Table 2OW3 - BUaceUancous
f-

Memory: 03vX I)
F3x@ammable
Read-Only Memory
Random Access Memory (RAM):
Memory:
Random

Telephone

Systems

Specffications
..

(EPROM)

5 1ZK expandable
128K expandable

to 2 Megabytes
to 2 Megabytes

(EPROM)

5 12K expandable
256K expandable

to 4 Megabytes
to 2 Megabytes

(DVX ‘)

I Programmable
!

Key T&phone

Read-Only Memory
Access Memory (RAM):

Eiectret

Transmitter:

Talk Paths:
CO/PEH/Centrex
Intercom Paths:

28 CO/PEX Centrex
Non blocking

paths:

talk paths (non-blocking)

1 channel provides music for &sic-on-hold
and background
music

Music Channels:
Account codes:
Number of digits per account
Number of Account Codes:
Speed Dialing Memory:(DVX’)
Station Speed Rial:
System Speed Dial:
Total speed dial bins:
Speed Dialing Memory:
Station Speed J&k
System Speed Dial:
Total speed dial bins:

mic compatible.

code:

up to 12 unverified digits
unlimited (unverified)

20 bins per station (24-digits)
80 bins per system (24-cligits)
600 speed locations to be divided among ali
telephones.

(DVX ‘)

20 bins per station (24digits)
80 bins per system (24-digits)
1280 speed locations to be &tided
telephones.

among all

i@d.te

DVX’dDVXn

D&$tal

Key Telephone

GENERAL

Systems

Table 200-9

- Digital

1215/1471
1215/1471
1215/1471
771
1215/1471
1215/1471
935

0.8s on/2.4s off
0.2s on/.6s off, repeated
0.4s onf0.4~ 05/0.4s on/2.0s
0.6s on (timed)
0.2s on/O.6s off; repeated
0.2s on (1 burst)
1 sec. (1 burst)
.

Paging Co&n-nation
Propamming
Confirmation
Pro@
* gError
Confhnation
Tone

935
147 1
1471
1471

Line Telephone

‘IYPE OF SIGNAL

FREQUENCy
f

intercom Tone Ringing
Transferred
CO Line
CO Line Recall
CO Queue CaU Back

30
30
30
30
30

Hz.
Hz.
Hz.
Hz.
Hz.

50-90VAC
50-9OVAC
50-90V AC
5Q90V AC
50-9OV AC

Intercom Ringback
Call Announce
Busy Tone
Error Tone
Intercom IXal Tone
DND Tone

440+480
420
480+620
480+620
420
480+620

Paging Time-out
Call FWD Warnhg Tone
Camp-on Tone
Conference Warning Tone
Confkmation
Tone
DND Warning Tone

480+620
420
420
420
420
420

bisue

1. January

1993

I
2
I

SIGNAL DURATlON

0.8s on/2.4s off: repeated
0.4s on/0.4s ofUO.4~ on/2.0s
0.2s on/0.2s off (2 bursts]

701
935
701
701
421
701

- Single

Stgnals

1215/ 1471
1215/ 1471
935

Call Announce
Busy Tone
Error Tone
Intercom IXaI Tone
DND Tone

Table 200-10

Audible

FREQUEiNCY

‘IYPE OF SIGNAL
.
Kw Teli Incoming CO Line
Intercom Tone Ringing
i Intercom Call Announce
; (H-P)
; Transferred CO Lhe
i CO Line RecaIl
/ Message Wait Call Back
Message Wait Reminder Tone
CO gueue CaJl Back
1 Camp-on
, Paging Alert Tone

Terminal

DESCRIPTXOA?

off I:
i

off

0.4s on/OAs off/OAs on/2.Os 0fK
0.2% onfO.2s off (2 bursts)
0.45 on/O.4s off, repeated
0.2s on/O.2s off, repeated
Continuous
0.2s on/o.as off, repeat 32s.
pause, 0.6s repeat
1 set burst
1.4 see burst
0.2s on/O.25 05, 6x’s
1.4 set burst, 1 time
-

Audible

Signals
SIGNAL DURATION

2.0s
1 ,Os on&2s
2.0s
2.0s
2.0s

on/$.Os
off/O.Bs
on/4.0s
on/$.Os
on/4.0s

off
on/4.0s
off
off
off

off

1.0s
0.2s
0.5s
0.25s

on/3.0s off; repeated
on/O.2s off 13 bursts1
on/0.5s off repeated
on/O.25s off; repeated
colltinuous
0.2s on/O.2s off, repeat 32s.
pause, 0.5s; repeated
0.5s on/O.5s off; repeated
0.2s on/0.2s off (six times)
0.2s burst (1 time)
1 set burst (1 time)
1.4 set burst [I time]
0.2s on/0,2s 05 (6 bursts)

201141

tqfinite
GENERAL

Di@W

DESCRIPTION

Table

200-ll-

OPX Telephone
FI?EQUENCY

TYPE OF SIGNAL

CanfidenreTa

I
I

Hz. 50-9OV AC
Hz. 50-9OV AC
Hz. 50-9OV AC
I-k 50s9OVAC
30 Hz. 50-9oV AC

480+620
480+620
350+440
480+620

Paging Time-out

2oo-42

30
30
30
30

440480

Busy Tone
Error Tone
Intercom Dial Tone
DND Tone

Camp-on Tone
Conference Warning
Confirmation
Tone
DND Warning Tone
*Precise Tone Plan

System5

S&nab
SIGNAL DuRAnON
2.0s on/4.Os off
2.0s on/4s off
2.0s on/4.Os off
2.0s on/4.0s off
2.0s on/4.0s off

Rfngback

Call lWD Warning

T
r

Key Telephone

DVX’

Incoming CO Line
Intercom Ringing
! Transferred CO Line
CO Line Recalt
CO Queue Call Back
Intercom

Audible

DVX’and

Tone
Tone

420
420
420
420

420
420

1 s on/3s off
0.5s on/0.5s oti repeated
0.25s on/O.25s off, repeated
Continuous
0.2s onjO.2~ & repeat 3x’s,
pause, 0.5s: repeated
0.59 on/0.5s off
0.2s on/O.2s off (six times)
0.2s burst (1 time)
1 set burst (1 time)
1.4 set burst (1 time)
0.2s on/0.2s off (6 bursts)

Irrenc 1. Janwary

1993

tqfinfte
Digital

DVX’ and DVXn
Key Telephone
Systema

GENERAL

Table 200-12

- DSS/BLF

Button

Vieti

DESCRIPTION

bdiCStO=

INDICATOR

FLASH RATES
Steady
120 fpm flutter
steady
120 ipm flutter
480 ipm triple wink
120 ipm fiash
60 ipm fiash

TYPE OF SIGNAL,
Off-Hook/Busy
(All Stations]
Incoming Intercom Ring (Destination)
Cd Announce (Destination)
Message Waiting Call Back (Destination)
Do Not Disturb (All Stations)
Automatic
Call Back (Destination)
ACDjUCD
Available/Unavailable

.
Table 200-13

TYPE OF SIGNAL
Incoming co Fting
Transferred
CO Ring
Recall
Queued Line
Exclusive Hold
System Hold
I-Hold (only when hold preference
In Use

- CO Line Button

FLASH RA’lES

30 ipm flash

120 ipm flash
480 ipm flutter
480 ipm flutter
120 ipm flash
60 ipm double wink
60 ipm wink
steady

is system)

- Fun&ion

TYPE OF SIGNAL
Call Forward (actWe)
Message Waitfng (active)
Camp-on (active)
Cdl Back (active-initiator)
CO Line Queue (active)
Do Not Disturb (DND active]
Mute (microphone off, handset xmit ofQ
ON/OFF (speakerphone on/on-hook
dialing
Conference (active)
Speed (momentarily
ON untiI bin address dialed)
Personalized Messages
Intercom Call (Hold Button)
hOP
Pool
Ti-ansfer

1993

lndieators

INDICAmR

Table 200-14

Is~~ue 1, January

Vimal

Button

Visual

ladiC8tOIS

INDICATOR

FLASH RATES

30 ipm flash

15 ipm flash
120 ipm flash

120 ipm flash
480 flutter

60 ipm flash
Steady
+
Steady
Steady
Steady
15 ipm flash
15ipmflash
Same as CO Line buttons
Same as CO Line buttons
Steady until transfer complete

20043

i&l&e
Di,@at

DVX’andDVX’
my T&phone

systeme

STATION

FEATURE

DESCRfPTlON

SECTION 300
KEY STATION FEATURE DESCFUPTION
The System and Key Station features of the
tirite
Digiti Key Telephone System are listed
and described below in alphabetical order. An
abbreviated feature index is provided in Table
300- 1 Key Station Feature Index.
300.1
ACCOUNT CODES
An account code is the last field within Station
Message DetaiI Recording (SMDRL that provides the abtity to track spedfc calls by entering a non-verified,
variable
length
(up to
1%digits) identifier. The use of forced Account
Codes is optional, offered on a system wide
basis.
300.2
ATTENDANT
RECALL
When a line has been left on hold for a programmable period of time, the station placing that
line on hold will be recalled. If that station fails
to answer tbe recall, the calI wiU be recalled to
the attendant(s)
for handling.
There can be
three attendants
per system. Transferred,
Parked and Camp-on recalls will also recall the
Attendant.
300,s
AWTOMATIC CALL BACE TIMER
To accommodate
the reduced number of buttons on the irlfinite &button
keyset, an automatic caIl back feature has been implemented.
This feature will invoke a call back anytime a
user listens to busy tone for a preset period of
time. By default, this timer is disabled and is
variable from 00 to 99 seconds.
300.4

AUTOMATIC
TION (ACD)

The Basic ACD Software

CXLL DISTRIBU-

package is an optional
sofhmre package available for the w
Digital Systems. When purchased,
Uniform CalI
Distribution
fIJCD1 is not used and is replaced
by tbe ACD functions identified in the followir$,
EightAutomatic
CaIl Distribution
(ACD) groups
can be programmed,
each containing
up to
eight three-digit station numbers. Each group
is assigned a piiot number. When this number
is dialed. tbe first available agent in that group
is rung. Calls are routed to the station that has
been on-hook for the longest period of time.

Issue I, January

1993

Agent Podtiom3
l
Agent Login/LDgout
w/Agent
ID Feature: The Agent Login/Logout
Feature
will provide a means for an agent to log
into one of the ACD groups and receive
calls. The Agent ID entered in the login
process identifies the agent and places
that agent in the available agent list for
the ACD group specified in the login
process. This feature will alIow an agent
to log into any ACD group from any
station in the system and receive calls.
l Agent
IdqM%zation:
Each ACD Agent
has a unique. Agent ID code (0000-9999)
which he uses during login and logout
procedures. This unique ID code is not
vetied
or stored as part of the system
database.
l
Agent Available/Unavailable
Mode: Stationsprogrammedint.oaACDgroupmay
remove themselves from their assigned
ACD group by dialing the Available/Unavailable code. When an agent is in the
Available mode, that agent will receive
ACD calls in the normal manner. When
an agent is in the Unavailable mode. that
agent will no longer receive ACD type
calls, however he may receive non-ACD
dls vAgents that have gone Unavailable
will receive a visual reminder with a
flashing LED and or a IED display messagel
Agent Help Request: The HELP feature
provides a means for an ACD agent to
signal his assigned supervisor for assistance. The agent while on a call can press
the HELP button to sigrial the assigned
supenrisor. The supervisor may respond
by use of his HELP button and his ACD
Barge-h feature.
l
Agent Call Qualification:
This feature
provides a means for an agent to enter
codes on ACD type calls that ident@ the
call. This feature provides up to four
digitsfortheACD
SMDRreportingwhich
are compatible with the Basic ACD software package. This feature will permit
up to l2-digits to be entered, however,
only the f5rst four digits are provided for
ACD reporting.
300-l

iqjinite
IlEy

STATION

FEATURE

DESC~ON

Table

300-l

D&&al

Key Station

FEATURE

Feature

Index

~VAXAELE

Do Not Disturb [DND) ..............................
One-Time Do Not Disturb (DND}. ..........
DTMF Sending .........................................

300-17
300- 17
300-17

S
S
S

DV2I’

and DVX”

Key Telephone

Systems

[Cont’d)
INTERN&
EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED

ExrERNAI,
EQTJIPMENT
REQUIRED

N
N
N

N
N
N
!
I

E
Emergency Transfer .................................
End to End Signailing ..............................
Exclusive Hold .........................................
Executive Gvcn-ide ...................................
Executive/Secretary
lkmsfer
..................
External Night Ringing ............................

300-17
300-17
300-18
300-18
300-N
300-18

0
S
S
S
S
S

OPX/PFl-LJ
N
N
N
N
N

F
&ash .......................................................
Flash On Intercom ...................................
Flash with Speed Dial ..............................
Fiexible Attendant
...................................
Fletibfe Button A&went
.....................
Fltible
PortAssignrnents..
......................
Forced Account Cock .............................
Forced Least Cost Routing (UZR) ..............

300-18
300-18
300-M
300-18
300- 18
300-19
300-19
300-19

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

G
Group Call Pick-up.. ................................
Group Listening.. .....................................

300-19
300-19

S
S

N
N

300-19
300-19
300-19
300-19
300-19
300-20
300-20
300-20
300-20
300-20

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
s
S
S

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

300-20
300-20

0
S

300-20
300-20
300-21

S
S
S

N
N
N

300-21
300-21
300-21

S
S
S

N
N
N

48v or 12v Supply
N
N
N
paging E&ipment
N
N
N
N
33-Btn/8Btn
N
N
N
N
N

H
Headset Compatibihty
.............................
Headset Mode ..........................................
HezuingAid Compatible..
.........................
Hold Preference .......................................
Hold Recall ..............................................
Hot Line/Ring
Down ................................
Hunt Groups ...........................................
Hunt Group Chaining .........................
- Pilot Hunting .......................................
Station Hunting ..................................
E
ICLID Feature
Calling Number/Name
Display .............
Lncoming Number/Name
for SMDR
ReC0l-h .............................................
Unanmered
Call Management
.............
Idle Speaker Mode ...................................
hcorning CO Lines Off-Net For-w&d via
Speed Dial .........................................
Lntercom CaIling ......................................
Lntercom Signaling Select ........................
..........................................

= Standard

Feature;

O=Opti~nal:

Requires additiona

..
.
naraware

software
N

J=No addftior

Headset
Headset
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
ICED

Keyset
N

Ihard-requirec

iqfinite
Digital

DVX’ and DVX=
Key Telephone
Systems

KEY STATION

Table BOB-1 Key Station

Index

$VAIUBLE

FEATURE
K
keyset

Featnro

FEAX’URE

DEBC~ON

(Cont’d)
INTERNAL
EQUIPMENI
REQUIRED

lzxTmNAL
EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED

Exec Keyset

S
S
. s
:
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

N
Exec Keyset
N
N
N
I?
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Meet Me Page ...........................................
300-22
Message Waiting ......................................
300-22
Message Waiting Reminder Tone.. ........... .300-22
Messages - Personalized.. ........................
.300-22
Custom Messages.. .............................
-300-23
Date and Time Entry to Personalized
Mewgels)
. . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . ....300-23
Message Code on a FlexKey . . . . .. .. .. . . ....300-23
Music On Hold . ...*. . . . . ,.I.*...* . . . . .. . . .. .. .. *a.. .. 1. 300-23
Mute Key
300-23
N
-

S
S
S
S
S

N
N
N
N
N

S
S
S
S

N
N
N
N

N
N
Music Source
N

Name in Display ..P. . . . . I...... .. . . . . . . . . . . .. .- . . .. .. a*300-23
Night Service F&m-c. . . . .. . -,.....m.,., . . . . . . . .. . . . . 300-23
Night service Mode ..................................
300-23
Automatic
Night Mode Operation.. ....... .300-23
External Night Ringing .........................
300-23
Manual Operation ................................
300-23
Night Class of Service (COS) .................
300-23
Night Rtn@ng Assignments..
.................
300-24
Universal Night Answer TcMA) ............... 300-24
Weekly Night Mode Schedule ................
300-24

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Exec Keyset
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Self Test ........................................

300-21

_L
Last Number Rediai &NR] ........................
300-21
LCD interactive Display ...........................
300-21
Least Cost Routing (LfJR) ........................
.300-21
6-Digit Table.. ......................................
300-21
D&ly Start Time Tables.. ......................
300-22
Default LCR Data Base ........................
300-22
Except&m Tables .................................
300-22
Insert/DeJete
Tables ............................
300-22
LCR Routing for Toll Information
......... 300-22
300-2 1
Route List Tables .................................
300-22
Weekly Time Tables .............................
3-D@ Table .........................................
300-21
Local Number/Name
‘IYansIation TabIe . , . .300-22
hop Button CO Line Access.. .................
.300-22
M

.:
1

*...*.

. . .

. .

. . . I*..**

. . .

*,...*

. .

* .

. .

0
% Hook Voice Over (OHVO] ....................
Off-Hook Preference .................................
Auto Feature Access ............................
Auto Line Access .................................
Hot Line/Ring
Down ............................
Intercom Access ..................................
S = Standard Feature; O=OptionaI: Requires
Issue 1, January

1995

. .

300-24
S
300-24
S
300-24
S
300-24
S
300-24
S
300-24
S
addltIonaIhan+are

N
N
N
N
N
N
g=No additia

OHYO Keyset
N
N
N
N
N
1 hardware requim
900-S

xSY STATION

FEATURE

iqfinite
DVX’ and DVX I’
Digital Key Telephone
Sy8tcm.s

DESCRWMON

Table 300-1

Key Station

......................................

.....
pti

................................................
-

ExternalPaging
...................................
intemalPagi.ng
paging Access Restriction.. ..................
Pause Timer ............................................
PBX Dialing Codes ...................................
PA Button Operation .............................
Preferred Line Answer ..............................
Privacy Release
Per CO Line Option
Per Station Option ...............................
PrivateLine
.............................................
Pulse-To-Tone Swltchover ........................
.....................................

........................................

.............................

rat Me=ging
rd.I Restriction

S = St.amhrd
300-6

[Cont’d)
licxTERNAL
EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED

300-24
300-24
300-24
300-24
300-25

N
N
SLA (OPX)
N
N

N
N
48v Supply
N
N

300-25
300-25
300-25
300-25
300-25
300-25
300-25
300-25
300-26
300-26
300-26
300-26
300-26
300-26

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Relay/Sensor
Unil
Paging Equipment
N
4
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N

N
PC/Term/Modem
PC/Term/Modem
PC/Term/Modern
PC/Term/Modem
PC/Term/Modem

E
Range Programmhg
................................
300-26
Remote Adminisiration
............................
300-26
Database UpIoad/Download..
.............. 300-26
Remote System Monitor & Maintenance.
,* 300-26
Remote System Maintenance..
............. 300-26
Remote System Monitor ......................
300-27
s
gave Number Redial (SNR) .......................
300-27
Single Line Telephone (SLT) CompattbWy
300-27
* 2x4 SLT Expander ModuIe, 4x8 SLT Interface
-Board (CSB), or Single L;ine Adapter (OPX)
w/4& Supply can be used for SLT operations.
Speakerphone
.........................................
300-27
Station Chss of !%mice [COS) ..................
300-27
Station Message Detailed Recording.. ....... 300-27
300-27
Station Relocation Feature .......................
300-27
Station Speed Dial ...................................
System Capacity.. ....................................
300-28
Up to 1m8
Cor@$ration
..................
300-28
Up to 28x56 Confiiuratfon
300-28
..................
I
system Hold ............................................
300-28
! system
Speed Dial ...................................
300-28
,
r
I

Index

INTERNAL
EQUIPMEM
EQUIFZED

FEATURE
user Programnl able Preference.. ..........
’ Off-Hook Signauing .................................
i Off-Premise Extensions (OPX) ..................
On Hook Dialing
On Line Programmhg
..............................
IPi Page/Relay Control . . . . . .-.* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ...-.*

Fcabre

(Silent Response). ............ 300-28
(Table Driven) ............. . .... 300-28
Feature; O=Optfonak Requires adduo

N
.:

N
2500 Qpe

N
N
Printer/Terminal
N
.N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Exec KeyseA
N

N
N

I=No additior

hardwarereq~

Iesue 1. January

1983

irlfinite
I)Jgital

DVX’ and DVX’
Ecy Telcphane
Systems

KEY STATION

Table 300-1

Key Station

Fcaturc

Index

FEATURE

DESCRWMON

[Cont’d)
IIvTTsRNAL

4VAILAEU

Transfer
‘u -

Recall . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..e... .. . .. . . . . . ...w 3OCk2E

&form
CalI Distribution
(UCD) ............. .300-28
Agent Queue Status Display ............... -300-2s
Alternate UCD Group Assignments ...... 300-21
Auto wrap-up w/Timer .......................
300-2E
Avaflable/Unavailable
Mode ................ 300-Z
Incomhg CO Dkect Ringing ................ 300-2s
No-Answer Rec.&l Timer .......................
300-2s
No-Answer Retry Timer ........................
300-2C
Overfiow

Station Assignments

.............

300-2E

Recorded Announcements
CRAN) ........ -300-2:
universal NightAnswer
pJNA) .................. 300-25

FQUIPMENI
REQUIRED

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
RAN Device(s)
N

S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

VM System
N
N
N
N
N
N
N

Voice Mail Groups [VM) ............................
CO Disconnect SeaI ..........................
In-Band Signaling Integration..
...........
Message
Waiting Indication ................
Tone Mode Calling Option.. .................
Transfer/Forward
................................
VMTransferwithIDDQits
................
Vohme Controls.. ....................................

= Standard

Feature;

Isauc 1, Jammy

O=Optional:

1993

300-26
300-3c
.300-3C

.300-X
.300-X
300-3c

..300-3 C
300-3c

Requires additional

hardware

I=No addition

hardware

require!
300-7

STATION

FEATURE

DESCRIPTION

13. Alternate
ACD Gmup Aaaignmenta
An alternate
ACD group
can be progmmmed so that if stations in one group
are busy, the alternate
group will be
checked for an available station.
C. Group Member Status
The SupeTYisors
Group Member Status
feature provides a means for an ACD supervisor to view the status of each of the
eight ACD groups in the system individually. This display will teI1 the supervisor
which stations are logged into the group,
and if the station logged in is available,
unavailable, out of service, in DND. or busy
on a call. The supervisor can use this display to determine why there are a lot of
queued calls in a specific group.
D. Incoming
CO Ditect Ripging
CO Lines can be programmed
to ring directly into a ACD group. When ali agents
are busy and RAN is enabled, the system
will answer the caller and present the 1st
RAN announcement
automatically.
E. No-Answer
l&call Timer
If a call routed to a station via ACD is not
answered by the ACD Agent/Station
before
theNo-AnswerRecalltirnerexpires.tbecd
will be returned
to ACD Queue with the
highest priority, in addition,
the station
that failed to answer the ringing ACD call
will be placed into an out of service @OS]
state.
F. No-An8wcr R&q mmcr
When the No-Answer Recall timer cx@m.s.
a station that failed to answer the ringing
ACD call is placed into an out-of-service
(00s) state. The station that was taken
out-of-service
(OOS] will be placed back in
- service if the agent hits hf.51 available flex
button or dials the available flex code. In
addition, the agent will be placed back in
service if the No-Answer Retry timer expires. If the agent does not answer his next
ACD call. he will again be taken out-ofservice. This cycle will continue until the
station answer5 calls, logs out, or goes
unavailable.
G. ovemow
station #l88ignlncnts
An overflow station may be assigned to
route callers in queue to a designated station after a specified time, The ovdow
station may not be one of the ACD group
stations.

300-S

iqfinite
DVX’andDVXn
D$jital Key Telephone
Syntems
R.

Recorded houncementt3
(RANj
Recorded announcement
devices can ‘be
assigned to provide up to eight different
messages. ifall stations in aACD group are
busy. The eight messages are available to
all eight ACD groups in different conf@urations. A RAN device can provide an announcement
to one caller at a time.
Subsequent callers will be queued onto the
message on a first-in basis.
supeld8or
Po8ition8
l
Supervisor Login/Logout
Feature: The
Supervisor
Login/Logout
Feature will
provide a means for a supervisor to log
into one of the ACD groups. ‘The Supervisor ID entered in the login process
identifies the supeti&~br for the specific
ACDgroup he is assigned to. This feature
will allow a supervisor to log into any
ACD group from any station in the systern. However, to have the supervisor
monitorwithbarge-infeatunz,
tbesupervisor must log in at a station with monitor barge-in capability.
l
Supavisor
Identification:
Each ACD Supervisor has a unique Supervisor ID code
(0000-9999) which he uses during login
and logout procedures. This unique ID
code is not verified or stored as part of
the system database.
l
Supervisor Help Request: The HELP feature provides a means for an ACD agent
to signal his assigned supervisor for assistance. The agent while on a call can
press the HELP button to signal the assigned supenisor.
The supexisor
may
respond by use of his HELP button and
his ACD Barge-In feature.
l
Sup&or
Monitor w/Barge-In
Feature:
TheACDSupewisor
MonitorwithBargeIn feature provides a means for an ACD
supervisor to monitor an agent% call in
progress or provide assistance in training ACD personne1. When used, a supervisor may intrude onto an agents call in
a listen onlymode or in a true conference
mode. This feature is available with or
without
a warning tone.
6 Supervisor Station Assignment Feature:
The ACD Supervisor Station Assignment
feature provides a means to assign each
ACD group a supervisor. This supervisor
station
can
receive
the
calls
in queue
display in real time. receives No Answer/Out
of Service, receives TIEW
l8auc 1, January

1093

imite
Digiti

DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Sy&ems
displays from the groups that the supervisor is assigned to and can barge in on
active calls in his ACD group or groups.
Supervifmr/Agent
Calls in Queue
DOPEY
This feature provides a means for an agent
and ACD supervisor to view the status of
their ACD group. This display is an idle
state display and will prompt a supervisor
that his agents in the group are having
problems answering all their calls. The dfsplay will tell the agent and his supervisor
how many ealk are in queue, how many
agents are logged into the ACD group, and
the length of time in minute.5 that the oldest
call ha5 been in queue.
PC/ACD Interface
Tract
This feature is only available when the
Basfc ACD Software package is purchased
separately.
The PC/ACD Interface ‘II-ace
provides a series of events trace output
which
is compatible
with the fn@.&e
PC/ACD Reporting package.

300.6
AUTOMATIC
LINE ACCESS
Each station, key or SLT, may have their phone
programmed
to access a particular
CO Line
such a5 a private line or a line from a Group of
CO line5 upon going off-hook. This IS useful in
Centrex or PBXapplications
when station users
have dedicated or individual lines. Outside line
dial tone is received just by going off-hook,
without the need to dial an access code.
ATJTOMM’IC
MIGHT SERVXE
The system may optionally be programmed
to
go into and out-of night service automatically.
This method does not require the attendant
to
activate or deactivate night senrice on a dnily
basis. The automatic
night service is enabled
and disabled on a programmable
daily schedule
including
Saturday and Sunday schedules. A
time can be set to enable Night Service and to
Disable Night Service on a per day basis.
300.6

KEY STATION
300.8

Issue 1, JammrylBBS

DESCRIPTJON

PRIVACY

Privacy is automaticaliy
provided on all calls. if
one station is conversing, another station cannot intrude on that line. The Automatic Privacy
feature can be disabled, allowing one other
station to join in on fzi5ting CO line conversati0l-E..

AUTOMATlC
SELECTION
300.9
The user can select an outside line, intercom
station, speed dial button, or dial a feature and
automatically
place the phone in the dialing
mode without pressing the ON/OFF button or
lifting the handset.

300.10
BACKGROUND
MUSIC
Each Digital Terminal user may receive music
over their speaker whed an optional music
source is connected to the system. This feature
can be allowed or denied on a system-wide basis
by programming.

300.11 BATTERY BACK-UP @UQdORy)
A ‘Super Cap” is located on the Main Key Service Board WB) of the t$.@n.WDVX I System, and
a NICAD battery is located on the Central Proces&g Board (CPBI of the tn&k!e DVX ’ System
to protect system memory in case of commercial
power outage or the system powerbeing turned
off for a period of time. Battery Back-up Memory
retains all system features including both system and station speed dial durjng a power outage-

300.12 BUSYI.&UPFlEIlD('f3~
When a button on a Digital Terminal is assigned
as a DSS, it also smes as a Busy lamp Field to
display the status of that telephone.
.:

300.13

CAttANNOUNCE-PRIVACY

Each telephone
user can set their titercorn
signaling switch to receive intercom call announcements
without having the calling party
hear any convemations
in progress.
SW.14

AUTOMATIC
PAUSE INSElyITON
WITH SPEED DIAL
If a flash command is placed into system speed
dial numbers, station speed dial numbers, save
number redial or last numbeT redfal, a pause
will automatically
be inserted after the flash. A
pause wfll also be automatically
inserted after
a PBX diakng code has been used.
300.7

AUTOMATIC

FEATURE

CALL

RACK

A station can initiate a call back request to
another busy statton. As soon as that station
becomes idle, the station that left the caU back
request is signaled.
CALL COST DISPLAY FEATURE
The Call Cost Display Feature provides a user
to view the appmximate
cost of each call made.
This approximate
cost will also be printed as
part of the SMDR record.
300.18

300-B

gEp STATION

FEATURE

ir@ite
DVX I and DVX”
D@a.t Key Telephone
Systems

DESCRIPTION

The call Cost Display will replace the call duration display when a call is made using LCR. This
display is enabled in programming.
The cost information
is programmable
by selec!ing one of the 16 route list tables and one of
the four time periods. This allows the user to
program four separate costs based on the time
of day for each of 16 routes. The costs entered
in the tables will be a cost for one minute,
however. costs are calculated using a 1/ 10th of
a minute value. These costs are rounded down
and are based on the start time of the call, even
if the call extends into a different time period.
The SMDR printout will contain a cost calculated using a l/ 10th of a minute increment and
the display will update approximately
every 30
seconds. The user must have LCR enabled to
get the call cost display.
300.16
CALL FORWARD: PRESET
This feature allows the system database to be
configured so that incoming CO Lines, which
are programmed
to ring at a particular station.
can be forwarded elsewhere in the system predetermined
by programming.
This feature is
am
tithe station ringing is not answered in a
specified time. This is particularly
useful in
kverflow”
applications
where a Voice Mail or
Auto Attendant may be in use.
. A station may have one designated preset
forward location defined in the database.
* Preset Cdl Forward is chainable only to other
predetermined
preset forward stations specified in the database up to a chain of 5 sta-

Reset Cdl Forward - Off-Net
CO Lines can be preset forwarded to r&g
Off-Net via speed dial kom any station.
After the expiration of the preset forward
timer, the system will select an idle CO line
and dial the off-net location, then connect
the two CO lines.
Reset Call Forward - Stations
Each Digital Terminal user may have preset in the database Initial Ringing Incoming to be directed to another station in the
system, if the call goes unanswered
for a
predetermined
amount of time.
Reset
Cdl Forward - UCD Groups
CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring
into a UCD Group fro- any station. A CO
line will not preset forward to a busy UCD
group, h owever each time the preset forward timer expiiks (for a total of five attempts1 the group will be checked for an
idle station. If a member of the group is idle
the callwill then be presented to that member.
Preset Call Forward - VM Groups
CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring
into a Voice Mail Group from any station.
A CO Iine will not preset forward to a busy
Voice Mail group, however each time the
preset forward timer expires (for a total of
five attempts) the group will be checked for
an idle Voice Mail port. If a V&f port is idle
the call will then be presented toVoice Mail.

ti0I-B.

Chainable Preset Call Forwarding will force
the incoming CO he to ring at each station
preassigned
in the database for the Beset
Forward Ring Tfmer specffied in the database
_ before forwarding.
l
Each station
in the system may, independently,
have incoming CO calls preset
forwarded to the following destinations:
A. Preset
Call Fommrd - Hunt Groups
CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring
into a Hunt Group from any station. A CO
line will not preset forward to a busy Hunt
group. however each time the preset forward timer expires {for a total of tie attempts) the group ~II be checked for an
idle station. If a member of the group is idle
the ca.li wIl.l then be presented to that member.
l

300-10

300.17
A.

CALL FORWARD:
STATXON
;
CaIlFomard-AUCdb
This feature allows a station the abiLity to
have all their calls (internal
or external)
forwarded immediately to a designated station. a UCD group pilot mxnber. Voice Mail
group number. or Hunt group. (See Note)
CallForward-Busy
This feature allows a station the ability to
have their calls forwarded to a designated
station, a UCD group pilot number, Voice
Mail group number, or Hunt group when
their station is busy. (See Note)
Call Forward - Busy/No An~wcx
Allows a stations the ability to forward a
combination
busy/no
answer calls to a
designated
station.
a UCD group pilot
number, Voice Ma.3 group number, or Hunt
beue

1, January

1893

ifiite
D&itaI

DVX’ amI DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems

group. No answer calls fomard when the
system-wide “no answer timer” expires. Initial CO ringing, transferred
CO ringing
and intercom ringing calls can ak be forwarded. CaUs that ring to an idle station
wfll be call forwarded after expiration of the
No Answer ring timer.(See Note)
CalI Forward - No Answer
This feature allows a station the ability to
have their calls forwarded to a designated
station. a UCD group pilot number, Voice
Mail group number or Hunt group number
when there is no answer at the station. No
answer calls forward when the systemwide *no answer tlmef expires. [See Note)
Call Forward - M-Net
Stations will be allowed to forward intercom and transferred
CO line caUs to an
off-net location This allows a station to
reroute calls that would normally be lost.
Calls can be forwarded to home or another
off-net site. Initially rlngmg CO calls cannot be forwarded
with this feature [see
Incoming CO lines O&Net Forward feature).

300.18
CALLPAEE
An outside line can be placed into one of eight
parking locations and can be retrieved by any
station that has a direct line appearance or an
available loop button. Parked cabs have their
own recall timer and wiII recall the originating
station and if still unanswered,
the attendant(s) .
300.19
A

CALL. PICK-tIPz

Dtccted
call Pick-up
A station can pick up an intercom call,
transferred. incoming, or recalling outside
line call to a specfic unattended
station.
The call must be a tone ringing caL
Group Pick-up
Stations can be placed in one or more of
four pick-up groups. Stations
within a
group can pick up tone ringing intercom
calls, transferred.
incoming.
or recalling
outside line calls for another station in that
&roup .

Issue 1, January

1993

EEY STATION

FFiATURE

DESCRIPTION

300.20 GAIL TRANSFER
AII outside CO line can be transferred f&m one
keyset to another. l3y using the TRWIS button,
screened (announced) or unscreened transfers
can be made. The line being transferred
rings
on the keyset and provides Exclusive Hold
flashing indication
to the receiving party’s
keyset. Any number of attempts can be made to
locate someone by calling different
keysets
without losing the call. Ifa line is transferred to
a busy station, it will receive muted ringing.
300.21

CAWING

STATION

TONE MODE

OPTION

This feature til provide an easy means for a
Calling station to ovenide a desired stations HF
(handsfree)
or PV (call announce)
intercom
switch setting. A dial cod& has been added that
is dialed in front of the extension number to
force the tone ringing.
300.22
CAMP-ON
A station may alert a busy party that an outside
line is on hold and waiting for them by using
the CAMP-ON button. To camp on a call, press
the TRANS button to tisfer
the call to the
desired busy station. then press the CAMP ON
button. The busy party will receive amuted ring
over the keyset speaker, and a visual flashing
CAMP ON LED. By pressing the CAMP ON button, the person called places his existing outside call on hold and is connected to the person
placing the Camp On. He can then pick up the
call on the appropriate
line. Calls cannot be
camped on when a station is in DND or in
COIlk~Ce.
300.23
CAMP-ONREcALt
When a station does not answer a Camp On.
that call will recall the person placing the Camp
Onandif
unanswered by them, will recall the
attendant(s).
900.24
CANNED TOLL RESTRICTION
The system provides an easy means of applying
the most common form of toll restriction where
l+ and 0+ along wftb 976,555. and 4 11 tvpe of
caUsa.rerestrictedwHhalllocalcallsand
l-800.
911, l-911,and
l-611typeofcalIsarealIowed.
This canned toll restriction is applied through
the use of a single pre-built
Class-of-Servfce
and can be assigned to stations using range
pmgmmming.
300.26
CENTREX CODKPA~
The infinite Digital Key Telephone System provides features that are Centrex compatible so
300-11

KEY STATION

FEATURE

DESCRIPMQN

that Centrex users can utilize the infinite Digital
Key Telephone System to enhance their Centrex
capabilities. The system actually simplifies and
provides easier access to many Centrexfeatures
by offering the following features:
A
Flex Button Frog-g
Flexible button programming
allows Centrex users to program complexCentrexdial
codes onto a keyset button for easy one
touch access to Centrex features.
B. Off-Hook Rdcrcnct
Both Digital Terminals and Single line telephones may be programmed
to have their
personal Centrex line accessed automaticaKy just by lifting the handset or pressing
the ON/ OFF button.
Internal features to
the in.
Digital Key Telephone System
are still made available to DigitaITemUnais
by accessing intercom
before going offhook.
C.

Private

Line Agbpearance

The in$.rr.& Digital Key Telephone System
aIlows for private line assignment
on an
unlimited
basis. Each station may have
sole access to a particular
outside line if
desired and may also be assigned to receive
incoming ringing on that line.
D. Programmable
Flash Timer
CO line flash is a momentary
opening on a
CO Iine used for signaling. When usingthe
m&e
Digital Key Telephone System in a
Centrex environment
the CO line flash is to
signal the intention
to transfer a calier
using Centt-cx transfer. The CO line flash
timer is programmable
on a per CO line
bases to facilitate a mixture of Centrexand
CO line5 within the same system.
E: Prow
“W, *#“, and
Hook-Flashes
into Speed Dial
Many Centrex codes utilize a hook-flash
followed by in many cases the digit [*] and
or I#]. The in.@.mYe Digital Key Telephone
System allows these codes to be programmed as a part of system or station
speed dial sequences.
300.28
CENTREX /PBX TRANSFER
WbenCenixxorPEXlines
areconnectedtothe
tifiti
Digital Key Telephone
System, users
may, by using the Flash button, transfer callers
to other Centrex or PBX extensions. Additionally. the Flash command
may be included
within a Speed Bfn and programmed
onto a flex
button for one button transfer.
300-12

Di@tal

i@nite
DVX’ and DVX’
Kqy Telephone
Spetcms

300.27
C HAINXNG SPEED BINS
Speed dial bins may be chained together ‘by
simply pressing one speed bin, then another
and another as required.
This is helpful for accessing Long Distance cartiers or banking services when account codes
may be required.
300.28
CO LlNE ACCESS
Through programming,
telephones are allowed
or denied access to particular
outside lines or
Iine groups.
300.29
CO LINE CUSS OF SERVICE
Each CO Line may be programmed
with a
Class-of-Service
to provide dialing privileges.
The in@ni& Digital Key Telephone System uses
an array between CO Line Class-of-Service
and
Station Class-Of-Service
to offer a wide variety
of dialing privilege possibilities.
300.30
CO IJNE CON!l’ROL (CONTACT)
On the infinite DVX ’ System. there are four
control contacts, and seven control contacts on
the irsfintce DVX ’ System which may be individually programmed
as either CO Line Control
(to control ancillary equipment)
or Loud BeIl
ControI to control a customer provided ringing
device to external areas. When programmed
as
CO Une Control and assigned to a CO line. the
corresponding
contact will close whenever that
CO line is accessed by a station. Since no *onpoard” relay contacts are available on the DVX
for CO Line Conkol. the Relay/Sensor
Interface module is used for this purpose. On the
i#.de
DVX ’ System, there is one contact for
each 4x8 port card.
300.51
CO UNE GROUPS
Outside lines can be placed in one of eight
groups if the customer’s business requires such
grouping.
Stations are. then individually
assigned access to these groups and given the
ability to dial on particular
lines.
300.32
CO LINE IDENTIpIICAmON
This feature allows a name to be entered into
the database progr
* g for each individual
line &tunk) connected to the system. The name
may be entered in any combination
up to 1%
characters in length (this will represent 24digits entered).
Once entered,
LCD digital
terminals includingthe
attendant station(s) WU
receive the programmed
line *name” in place of
the default ‘LINE XX” message. This applies to
all line call processing
conditions
where the
current ‘LINE XX message appears.
bsttc

1, Jsnuary

1993

infinite
Di@taI

DVX ’ and DVX n
Key Telephone
System

SMDR will continue to print out the line numberm place of the programmed name. If the line
name has not been programmed. then the current ‘WNE XX” display will be used as the
default. A programmable
data field is available
for each line in the system.

300.33 co LINE INCOMINGRINGINGAsSIGNMENT
Each CO line may be programmed (in database
admin) so that incoming ringing on the specified CO line[sl may be assigned initial ringing
to one of the following destinations:
l
one or more stations fKeyset or SLTJ
l
To an ACD, UCD, Voice Mail or Hunt
Group
l
Off-Net [via Speed Dial)
The ring-in will follow Day King assignments
unless Njght Service mode is active, in which
case all incoming CO calls will follow Night Ring
aSSigllIll~tS.

When ringing is assigned to a keyset, a direct
line appearance or an idle Loop button must be
available to receive the call. Station call forwarding of initial ringing CO mll is possible and
can be directed to other keysets with an available Loop button or direct appearance,
lf the inMaNy ringing CO call cannot ring at the
destination
assigned. it will ring at the tit
Attendant
station.

300.34
CO LINE LOOP SDPERVISION
- The injh.& Digital Key Telephone System can
be programmed
to monitor CO lines while onhold or connected to RAN devices or Voice Mail
systems or in Trunk-to-M
connections for
disconnect signal provided by the Telco.
After a disconnect signal is detected, the in&We
Digital Key Telephone System will release the
CO lines and automatically
place them back in
service. The Loop Supervision disconnect signal is 700 msec. In duration.
300.35
co LmE QUEUE
When all the outside hnes in a group are busy,
stations can be placed in queue awaiting a line
in the same group to become available. If a
station doesn’t answer the queue signal within

Ieaue 1. rfanurvp

1993

KEY STATION
15 seconds,
queue.

FEATURE

that station

DES-ON

is dropped

from the

300.36
CO RING DETECT
The duration of the ringing signal from the CO
or the PBX is matched with ringing detection
circuitry in the KSU. The ring detect can range
horn 200 to 900 msec. programmed
in 100
msec increments. This timer helps prevent false
ringing.
300.37
CONFERENCE
There are three dffferent types of conferencing:
A
Add On Conftrence
Up to fwe internal parties can engage in a
conference, or four internal parties with a
limit of one external party.
B. Multi-Ldae
Confcrellcc
One internal station can engage in a conference with two outside parties.
c. IJnsupvpieed
Conference
The conference initiator can exit a conference with two outside parties and leave
them in an unsumed
conference. The
initiator can r-e-enter the conference at any
time. The &I
Digital Key Telephone
System can automatically
terminate
the
call whenboth
parties hangup. whenLoop
Supervision
is provided by the telco and
enabled in the database.
A programmable
conference timer will disconnect the unsupervised
conference tithe
initiator does not re-enter.
300.98
CONFERENCE ENAB~/DBAB~
This feature will allow the system conference
feature to be administered
on a per station
basis for the ability of a station to initiate a
conference.
300.39
DATA FEATURE
The Data Feature offers the ability to transmit
data information
between personal computers,
printers, plotters, modems, CI?Tterminals.
and
main frame computer ports. To establish a data
call, a Digital Data Interface Unit (DDIU) is
required to be connected to each data communications device. The Digital Data Interface Unit
(DDIUI allows any serial data communications
device {which conforms to RS-232C) to be connected to the fnjinfte Digital systems. This requires a digital port.

SOB-13

fEEp STATION

FEATURE

DESCRTPTION

WO.40
DATABASE PFUNTOUT (DUMP)
Through
a system programming
command.
either potions of or a complete database dump
can be printed using the FS232C
connector
located on the infinite Digital Key Telephone
System Central Processing Board (CPB).
300.41
DATABASE UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
DataBase Upload/Download
Feature provides a
maintenance
facility which has been added to
the Remote Administration
routine. This routine will permit the database to be downloaded
to a PC. when a software change is made or
when the system needs to be initialized
and
reprogrammed.
In addition. the routine will
facilitate the pro@
* 2 of a database on an
in-house system which can be downloaded to a
PC and then uploaded to a system in the field.
After the system maintenance is completed. the
fiIe saved in the PC can then be uploaded to the
System.

DAY/NIGHT
CLASS OF SEKVICE
WOSI
This feature allows stations that are a c&sin
COS during the day, to be assigned a different
COS when the system is put in the night mode.
The night COS goes into a&& when the system
is placed into the night mode, manually
or
automatically.
This prevents the misuse of
phones after hours.
300.42

300.43
DEFAULT BUTTON MAPPING
‘!h infinite Digital Key Telephone System allows for 24 flexible buttons on each Enhanced
or Executive Digital Terminals
to be flexibly
assigned to CO/PBX lines, DSS buttons, Speed
Dial or Feature buttons. However, the system
will power up witb a default button mapping as
shown in Figure 300-l 3SButton
Default
Button Map . The infinite Digital Key Telephone
System also supports an &button
Digital Terminal with 4 fixed feature buttons,
4 flexible
buttons, a message wait LED and full speakerphone capability. This keyset provides the same
functionality
that the standard non-display
33button keyset provides. The 8-button
keyset
default button map is shown in Figure 300-2
8-Button Default Button Map.
DIAL BYNAME
The system will allow station users to dial extension numbers. or speed bins by entering the
name of a person that has been programmed
for that station. The system database will allow
300.44

entryafa~ehlphanunm-ic)~pto

ii-~ length
300-14

for each station.

h@Gte
DVX ’ aad DVX I1
Dig&al Key Telephone
Systems

24digits

The programmed

name can be used for dial-by-name
users and in directory dialing.

station

DIAL PULSE SENDING
Each CO interface circuit for outside lines can
be progmmm ed to send dial pulse or DTMF
signals. Dialing speed and break/make
ratios
are progrsmmable
.
300.45

300.46
DUG
PRWTLEGES
The systexn provides a flexible means of providing toll or dialing restriction.
Through the assignment of class of service (both station and
outside line) many combinations
of allow and
deny numbers can be set. Both area and office
codes can be screened for allow/deny
privileges.
.
300.47
DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM AD
cE6s mm
Allows as many as three simultaneous
outside
line calls to be programmed
to provide direct
access to the system and the use of features
such as WATS lines. intercom dial tone or the
ability to dial out on outgoing trunks without
going through the attendant.
The duration of a
‘ll-unk to Trunk DisA call can be set by the
system administrator.
A. CO Wne Group Access
Incoming DISA callers may access all line
groups such as FX or WATS lines or other
outgoing services fi-om home orwbile away
horn the offke.
B. Frogrammable
Access
A 3-d@ securlly code can be assigned in
the system database to restict unwanted
use of the DISA circuits. E&h DISA line
can be programmed
independently
for 24
hour DISA use or night DISA use only.
c. station Access
DISA callers may dfal any station directly
without going thru the attendant.
If a DIU caller attempts to call a station
that is busy or does not answer the system
wiU return ICM &al tone at the end of a
programmable
timer
(Preset Forward
Timer). This will allow the DISA caller to try
another station without havfng to dial into
the system again.
D. Trunk-to-Tntnk:
The DISA Trunk-to-Trunk
[or Confkxnce)
option on the CO line governs a DISA callers ability to access other outside Ilnes. CO
lines must have DISA Trunk-to-m
enabled to allow a DISA caller to establish an
Issue 1, Jamxary

1983

j@ntte

D&+II

DVX’

and DVX’

Key Telephone

Syetems

KEY STATION

I-

pvgute

300-l

33-Butt.011

Dcikdt

Button

Map

FEATURE

DESCRFIION

XEY STATION

FEATURE

DE!XRIPTION

Ffgure

MO- 16

i?@nite
DVXTad
DVX”
Di@aI Key Telephone
Systenm

300-Z

S-Button

Ddault

Button

Map

Itmuc1,Jamary1883

in,,ite

~&ital

DVX’ aad DVX’
Eey Telephone
Systems

EEY STATloN

outgoing trunk-to-trunk
connection.
This
allows for specific CO line access restriction on DISA calls.
300.48
DIRECT STATION SELECTION
The user with DSS buttons assigned at their
Dig&d Terminal can call an intercom station by
simply
pressing the appropriate
The called station is automaticaIIy

300.49
k

DIRECTED

DSS button.
signaled.

CALL PICX-UP

cdl Pick-up - station
A station can pick up an intercom caIl,
transferred.
incoming, or recaEng outside
line cab to a specif3c unattended
station.
The call must be a tone ringing caIl.
call Pick-up - ACD/UCD Groups
Stations outside of an ACD or UCD group
can pick up an intercom call, transferred,
incoming,
or recalling outside Iine caIl
ringing to a specific UCD station. The call
must be a tone ringing call.

DIRECTOIW
DIALING
Directory dialing allows station users to obtain
a directory of station users and have the system
dial the extension that is currently on the display. The fr@Me DVX I System provides locations for up to 100 names, while the infinite
DVX ’ System provides locations for up to 200
names.
Directory dialing also allows users to program
a ‘name” along with a speed dial bin for use in
later locating
a speed dial number.
When
promPted to do so, the system will display the
name associated with a speed dial number on
the LCD display so that when the desired name
is shown, the user may then have the system
dial the number.
-Directory dialing also allows users to associate
a *name” with an entry in the local rumher/name
translatfon table. When prompted to
do so, the system wiII display the name associated with the table on the IED dispIay so that
when the desired name is shown, the user may
then have the system dial the number. The
ir@die DVX I System provides locations for up
to 100 names. whiIe the &#ni&z DVX ’ System
provides locations for up to 200 names.
300.50

300.51

DISABIIE OUTGOING CO LUVE ACCESS
This feature allows the first Attendant
station
to dial a code and disable a CO line from outgoiry! CO calls. This applies to all station(s) that
have access to that line. I,IICO~~~ status is not
Issue 1, January

1993

affected. This feature
nance” package.

FEATURE

DESCRIPTION

is a part of the ‘Maim&

DISTINCTIVE
RINGING (User 8electahle)
The tone ring signal used to notify stations of
an incoming call can be changed by each station user to provide distinctive ringing among a
group of stations. Each station user may select
a distinctive ringing tone that will be used to
ring their station. The system provides 81 different ring patterns that the station users may
select tiom.
300.52

DO NOT DISTUM
(DND)
Placing a kqset in DND will ebminate incoming
outside line ringing. intercom calls, transfers
and paging announcements.
A ringing station
may go into DND to silence ringing. The attendant can override a station in DND. The station
in DND can use the telephone to make normal
outgoing calls. A station can be denied this
feature through programming.
A. One-Time Do Not Disturb (DND)
Allcms a station user to turn off muted
ringing that occurs while off hook (handset
or ON/OFF) on another call. Useful when
having an important conversation
and do
not wish to be distur&d
by ringing. The
station, while off hook, ION/OFF or handset) depresses the DND button
which
eliminates muted ringing. When the station goes on-hook the DND button is e&inguished and DND is canceled.
300.53

900.54
DTMF SENDING
Each CO interface circuit for outside lines can
be individually
programmed
to send DTMF
(tone) or diaI pulse si&als.
300.55
EMERGENCY TRANSFER
Each OPX box wfll provide power transfer to
spedfied customer provided SLTs. or up to 12
CO lines using the Power Failure Transfer Unit
PF=Jl.
300.56
END TO END 8IGNAIBVG
This feature indicates the capability of the system to accept DTMF tones from stations, send
them through the public network and have
them received at the distant end for computer
access, or a variety of control functions or inward call completion
at a distant switching
system.

3oa-17

gEy STATION

FEATURE

DESCRIPTIJON

D&ital

iqjinite
DVX’andDVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

300.57
ExcLu8lvE
HOLD
When a line is placed on Exclusive Hold, no
other station in the system canretrieve this call.
Hold may be programmed to be activated on the
first or second depression of the Hold button.
CO Lines whiIe in a transfer hold are ahvays
placed in an Exclusive Hold condition.

500.61
FLASH
Provides telephone users with the abihty. to
terminate an outside call or transfer a call behind a PBX or Centrex and restore dial tone
without hanging up the handset. A FLASH button is located on each Digital Terminal.

XKLSS
EXECUTIVE
OVERRIDE
This feature allows certain stations to be designated as executive stations with the ability to
*override” and “Barge in” on other keysets engaged in conversation on a CO line or intercom

300.62
FLA!3H ON INTERCOM
This feature enables key station users to utilize
the Flash Key to terminate pages and intercom
calls. While connected to a page zone or another
i.ntemaI station pressing the Flash key will terminate the call and return intercom dial tone.

Cdl.

In addition to the station programmable
option,
a system programmable
option will enable or
disable
a warning
tone when the station
marked as an executive is cut-thru to the conversation. This is useful for an ACD agent supervisors or training personnel who require a
service observing option.
A separate condition has been added to this
feature which will allow or d&&low an Executive to override an extension. This prevents an
extension with override capability from oveniding an Execu five’s station.

USE OF THIS FEATURE W3IEN THE
EXECTJTIVE OVERRIDE
WARNING
TONE IS DISABLED MAY BE INTERPRETED AS A VIOLVION
OF FEDERAL OR STATE LAWS,, AND AN
INVASION
OF PRIVACY. CONSULT
COUNSEL WITH RESPECTTG APPLI- CABLE LAW BEFORE INTRUDING ON
CALLS USING THIS FEATURE
EXECUTIVE/8ECBETARY
TBANGFER
There are four sets of Executive/
Secretary
pairings available. When the Executive station
is busy or in DND, the Secretary station will
receive intercom CaTIs and transfers. The Seeretay station can signal the Executive in DND by
using the Camp On feature.

300.63
FLASH WXTH SPEED DIAL
A flash can be programmed
within a speed dial
number. When this is done, a pause will automatically
be inserted
before the remaining
speed dial digits are sent.
300.64
FMZXIBLE ATTENDANT
Any three DigitaI Terminals
in the system can
be assigned as attendant
stations. These stations will receive recalls and can place the system into Night Service. The attendant
stations
must be eitherEr&mced
or Executive stations.
300.6S
FLEXIBLE BUTTON ASSIONMENT
Each 33-button digiti terminal has 24 fle.xible
buttons
which
can be individually
programmed. Each &-button digital terminal has 4
flexible buttons which can be individually
programmed. One of the following operations can
be selected for each button.
Refer to Section
400.37, Flexiile Button Assignment.
l
Outside line: Automatically
accesses assigned kne. (Assigned in database)
l
DSS/BLF:
Automatically
signal
assigned station and provides BLF for offhook and DND. (User programmable)
l

300.89

300.66
EXTERNAL NIGET RINGING
The system can be programmed
so
CO
lines marked for UNA will provide ringing out
the external page ports when the system is
placed fnto Night mode.

that

300-18

Feature: Any feature with a dialing code
(Le.: Personalized Messages. Paging, Account Code. Cdl Park Music, etc.) can
be assigned to a flexible button.
lJJser
programmable)
Group Access: (i.e. ACD. ‘UCD. Hunt,
Voice Md group pilot numbers)
(User
programmabIe)
Speed dial: Automatically
dials a Speed
number. Eystem. Station, Saved Number Redial, Last Number Redial) (User
programmable)
Pooled group access: Some or ail out&de
lines can he grouped: pressing this button accesses the highest numbered
unIsane 1. January

1993

infinite
I
Digital

DVX’ and DVK”
Key Telephone
Systems

.
KEY STATION

used CO hne in that group. [Assigned in
database)
Ioop: Used to answer a transferred call
on a line for which a user does not have
a button assigned. &Mgned
in database)

300.70

FEATURE

DESCRXPTION

GROUP LWI’FMNG

All digital key stations have built-in speakerphones. Station users may use the speaker to
monitor a call while using the handset to conveme with the outside party. This enable5 other
people in the room to listen to both parties in
the conversation.
This . flmm?
is not asaiIubb nh?n the 1
stafwnisirlhta&otmod&

300.71

300.66

FLEXIBLE FORT ASSIGNMENT6
The Flexible Port Assignment feature will pmvide a means to assign stations and CO line

numbers to any station or CO line port in the
system. This provides complete flexibility in
determining
station and CO line numbers
withh the system as long as they stay within
the system numbering plan, Therefore a station
can be assigned any number between 100 and
127 on the infiiteDVX1
system and any number between 160 and 155 on the in&&z DVX”.
A CO line can be assigned any number between
01 and 14onthein#niieDVX’systemandany
CO fine can be assigned any number between
01 and 28 on the infinite DVX I1 system. This

restriction
qutrements

is required to
on the smaller

’ * ’ memory
systems.

re-

300.67
FORCED ACCOUNT CODE6
The f@nite Digital Key Telephone System allows the system to be arranged so that station
USFXSmust enter an account code before pfacing an outside call. Account codes can also be
used as a Traveling Class-of-Service to upgrade
a restricted
stations class-of-service for unrestricted dialing. Account codes must be entered
- before the call when forced.
3 00.68

FORCED
NW

&EA6T

COST ROUTING

HEADSET

COM.PA’I’lBILITY

The in$ni.&? Digital Terminals are designed to
allow the connection
of an industry standard,
electret mic compatible, modular headset. The
user COMECt5
the modular
headset to the
handset jack on the telephone
leaving the
handset in place. The ON/OFF button on the
Digital Terminal is then used to activate the
hcad5et..
300.72

HEAD-

MODE

Each digital terminal can be individually
programmed
for headset operation.
When programmed, an industry standard headset with
it’s adapter box may be connected to a digital
terminal for headset use. This
allows handset
or headset operation by switching the selector
switch on the adapter box. Speakerphone
operation and call announce on intercom are disabled while a station has enabled headset
mode.
Once programmed
in station
progmmming,
the
user may then select between headset mode or
nonnalhandset/speakcrphone
mode by simply
dialing a code or pressing a user programmable
flex button.
300.73

HEARING

+ID COMPA’IIBLE

All Electronic Digital Termin&
and Single Line
Telephones are hearing aid compatible in compliance with the FCC Pti 68. Section 68.316.
This allows the telephone to be used in conjunction with users wearing hearing aids.

The infinfte Digital Key Telephone System may
be programmed
on a per station basis to force
the use of LCR for outgoing accessed. This
allows
the
system
admini5trator
to maintain
greater control over dialing pattern5 and the
lines used for placing outgoing CO calls.

HOLD PREFERENCE
This allcsws either Exclusive or System
hold as
the primary hold on the tit
depression of the
HOLD button, deper&ng on pro@,
* g.

GROUP CALL PICK-UP
Stations can be placed in one or more of four
pick-up groups.
Stations within
a group can
pick up tone ringing intercom calls, recalling
outside line ringing. or transferred outside line
calls for another station in that group.

When an outside call has been on Hold for a
prog&unmabIe
length of time, recall ringhg
tone is sent to the station placing the call on
Hold. If this station does not answer the recall,
a recall tone is sent to the attendant(s).

300.69

Issue

1, January

1993

306.74

300.75

HOLD

RECALL

300-18

KEY STATION

F%ATuRE

DBSCBIPTION

900.76
HOT IJIVEVRING DOWN
~@tal terminals may be programmed
to immediately call or ring down a particular station or
outside number upon going aff hook. This is
done by programming
the stations Off-Hook
preference to activate a DSS or Speed dial feature key. This feature can be overridden if the
station user selects a CO line first when going
off-hook.
300.77
HUNT GROUPS
The system can be arranged for up to eight Hunt
groups. Each Hunt group cari contain up to
eight stations each. Each Hunt group is independently
arranged
to utihze either a pilot
hunting
technique
or station hunting
technique.
k
Hunt GroupChaining
Hunt Groups can be chained or joined
together forming larger Hunt Groups. This
is accomplished by assigning a pilot hunt
group number as the last member of a
groupB. pilot Hunting
Inc~mfng CO, transferred
CO, and intercom calls can be directed to a pilot extension number of a Hunt group. The system
wfIl search sequentially
(in the order the
extensions were entered in the database
programmU@
for an idle station in the
@OUP and will ring that station.
Calls directed directly to stations (by calling the
extension number1 within the hunt group
w-lllnothunt
but receive call progress tones
ofthe extension dialed.
C. Stathu
Hunting
Incoming CO, transferred
CO, and intercom calls that are presented to a busy. or
_ DND statton, that Is a member of a Station
Hunt group. will search sequentially [in the
order the extensions were entered in database programming)
for an idle station in
the group and will ring that station, Calls
can also be dtiected to the groups pilot
number for hunting.
300.78
ICLTD FEATURE
The ICLID 0ncoming
Galling Line IDentlfrcation) feature has been added to the &@-&e
Digital Key Telephone Systems. H owever, these
features are not available unless the Basic
ICLID Software package has been purchased
sew-ately.
In order for this faux-e to operate
Proper@ it must be activated from the central
of&e So that the numbers of the calling party

soo-zo

iqfinite
DVX I and DVX”
Digital Key Telephone
Systems
will be delivered over the individual tip and ring
of the CO lines during the first silent interiral
between ringing. The following features have
been implemented:
A
CalJitq Numbcr/Namc
Dtiplay
This feature is intended as the basic offering of the ICUD service when associated
with the infintte Digital Key Telephone Systern. Whenever an incoming call is received
at the system, the number received along
with the ringing signal will be stored in the
line control tables and used at various
points in the processing of the call.
The primary function will be that the calling number will be displayed [if avaiiable)
at any point at which the “UNE RINGING”
is displayed in the s&m.
In addition. with the aMilability
of the callfng name feature. if the calling name is
provided, the systemwill deliver that to the
display instead of the calling number.
B. Incoming
Numbcr/Nsme
for GMBR
Records
Thfs feature will operate normally in the
absence of ICUD information
or the failure
of the ICLID equipment. If the information
is present at the time that an SMDRrecord
is generated for a caIl. it will alter the
content and format of the SMDR output
record.
If the calling number is available, the nurnber will be output in the Sh4DR record in
the same location as the dialed number is
located in the outgoing calIs.
If the calling name is present, an additional
line will be output in the SMDR record
identifying
the name. This record will immediaMy
follow the normal SMDR record.
The normal SMDR record wilI include an
indicator which identifies that a following
record with name idcntifkatfon
is present.
Unanswered
calts will be recorded on the
SMDR for incoming as a system option to
ahow the identification
of callers for statistical and call-back purposes. These calls
wJlI be fdentit3ed with an indicator in the
SMDR record.
C. Unanswered
call IWuqement
An Unanswered
Call Management
Table
Fth 50 entry capacity for the in@M!e DVX
system, and 100 entxy capacity for the
in$hite DVX II system is mairitajned
in the
system
database.
The calling
number/name
information
pertains
to any
Issue 1, January

1993

frlfinite
DVX1aadDV2Lu
R@.sl Rcy Telephone
Svatems
unanswered call will be placed in this table
at the time the system has determined that
the caIl has been abandoned.
This table may be administered
from appropriately
privileged phones so that the
unanswered
calls may be reviewed and
handled by the customer.
300.79
xDLE8PEmERMODE
This feature allows the system to determine
whether the first digit dialed is heard over the
digital termIna.l speaker. This feature is allowed
or denied on a system-wide basis in programming.
300.80

XNCOMXNG CO LINES OFF-NET
FORWARD m
SPEED DIAL)
Allows the first attendant to forward incoming
CO calls to an off-net location. The attendant
can forward a group of CO lines or all CO lk4es
to a off-net location. The attendant must have
a direct appearance
of the CO line[s) to be
forwarded. Off-net fonvarding
is accomplished
via use of a speed dial bin300.81
XNTERCOMCAURUG
The system’s architecture
allows non-blocking
of intercom calls. A station is reached on intercom by dialing the associated three-digit number.
300.82
INTERCOM SIGNATJIVG SEW
Users can control the method by which they
receive intercom calls and signals. Aconvenient
intercom signal switch is located on each DigitalTcrminal for easy selection. The choims am:
l
Handsfree (HF)(leftposition).
7he station
user, upon hearing a tone burst and
voice announcement
over the speaker,
can reply hand&me.
l
Rivacy (Wl(center position). The station
user receives a burst of tone and a voice
announcement
over his/her
speaker.
The microphone
is deactivated for privacy. The called party must lift the handset or press the MUTEI button to answer
the call.
l
Tone Ringing
[TN)(right
position).
A
standard tone rmg notifies the party of
an incoming intercom call. The called
party answers by lifting the handset or
moving the switch to the handsfree (HF)
position orpressingtheON/OFFbutton.

x5sue 1, January

1993

KEY STATION

FEATURE

DESCRIPTION

300.83
KEYSET SEL3E TEST
The infinite Digital Key Telephone System contains a test mode feature that supports the
ornine
testing of digital terminals and DSS consoles. The term offline means that the unit
under test is disconnected
from the system
during the test operation. Digital terminals not
under test continue to operate in the normal
manner. Tests are provided to verify the keyset
and DSS LED, LCD. and keypad button operaiiOnS*

SOCkEM LAST NulldBER REDIAL [LNR)
Pen-nits the automatic redialing of the last telephone number dialed on an outside line. Up to
32 digits can be stored. Outside line selection
of the same tie used is aujomatic.
300.85
LCD XNTERACTXVE DXSPLAY
The 33-button
Executive Digital Terminal provides the user with visual indication
of call
status, Calls to and f?om other extensions,
number
dialed. line used and camp-on are
some of the features &splayed.
SOO.S6 LEAST COST ROUTLNG &CR)
Allows the system to automaticahy
select the
least costly route available according to the
number dialed, the time of day/day ofweek, the
class of service (COS) assigned to the station/trunk
group priori@ level assigned.
k
smgit
Table
This table is divided into 2 sections: “Leading 1” (” 1” fs dialed before the number) and
“Non Leading 3” (no “1” is dialed before the
number). This g&s the system the ability
to handle c&l routing in areas that require
a ” 1” before a long distauce number as well
as in areas that do not require the “1”.
B. 6-Digit Table (053~~ Codu3)
The 6-Digit Table can include 20 office code
maps. Each map can be programmed
to
route up to 800 of&e codes to one of the
16 possible route lists. Each map must be
associated with a specific area code in the
3-Digit Table. Several dif5zrent office code
maps can be used with the same area code
to provide additional routing flexibility.
C. Route L&t Tables
Up to 16 djfferent
routes can be programmed. J3aeh route can contain up to
four route lists - one for each of the 4 time
periods. Up to seven CO line groups (routing choices] and their corresponding
In-

300-21

BEG STATION

F&%TURE

DE!XRKPMON

sex-t/Delete Tables may be programmed
within each route list.
Insert/Delete
Tables
There are 20 Insert/Delete
Tables. Up to
20-digits,
inchrding
pauses. can he inserted and up to 1Sdigits
deleted. Digits
can be inserted before or after the number
dialed, but can be deleted only from the
beginning of a number diaied.
Weekly Time Tables
The least costlyroute for a particular dialed
number may be different at d&rent times
ofthedayandondif%erentdaysoftheweek.
To accommodate
this situation, there are
two Trme-of-Day tables: a Daily Start Time
Table and a Weekly Schedule Table.
The Week@ Time table determines which
one of the four Routes L.CR should use
based on the Time-of-Day
and Day-of-theWeek.
DaiIy Start ‘Nme Tables
The Daily Start Time tables allow the user
to match the Time Periods discount structure to the carriers rate schedule.
Exception
Tables
This table is used to route operator assisted calls and any other calls which
would use a one- or two-digit
number
rather than a three-digit area code.
Default LCR Data Base
In an efYort to de crease installation and set
up time usually assodated
with LCR a
default LCR database. has been incorporated. The default LCR database will provide basic routing for all local and hmg
distance dialing.

1. - LCR Routing for Toll Information
This feature adds provisions to the LCRcall
processing which wilI allow common call
routing for a.U toll tiormaffon
c&Is.
l-(XXX)555-1212,
(XXXJ555-1212,
l-5551212 and 5551212
calls will all be intercepted and sent to a selected route in the
Route List Table. Numbers dfaled will be
integrated and ifit is determined to bea toll
information
ca.Il. either preceded with an
area code or without or with a leading digit
1 or not. the CdlI will be sent to the route
designated in prom.

Digital

in@xite DVX ’ and DVX I1
Key Telephone
systems

IsXUXU, NIlMBER/NAblE
TRANSLATION TABLE:
An administer-able table provid& a local translation from a received calling number to a name.
This table can be administered by the customer
from the attendant
consoIe location. This table
is also shared by the ICLJD features. In eases of
confkt
between the name delivered from the
CO and that in the local translation
table. the
local translation
table shall rule. 100 entries
are provided in this table for the ti@ni& DVX ’
system, and 200 entries are provided for the
in&&e DVX ’ system.
300.87

300.88
LOOP BUTTON CO LINB ACCESS
A station not having a direct appearance for a
CO line will receive inconling
CO calls and
transferred
CO calls under the loop button.
Only one call at a time can be connected to a
keyset on the loop button. If more than one loop
button is on a key set, the loop buttons may be
conferem&
together. If all programmed
Loop
buttons on a keyset are busy or have a CO call
on hold, the party attempting
to iransfer a CO
line to that station will receive busy tone and
cannot txansfer the call to that station. If a
transfer is attempted, the CO line will recall the
in.iiIator immediately.
CO lines are also presented to a Loop when
dialing out using LCR orwhen using speed dial
to dial out and the line chosen does not appear
on the key station.

300.89
MEET ME PAGE
Users may answer a page call from any phone
in the system by dialing a special code. The
party who initiated the page must remain offhook.
300.90
MESSAGE WARING
Stations that are busy, unattended,
or in DND
can be Eft a message indication by other stations in the system. Up to five messages can be
left at one keyset. Upon return to the station.
the user can press the fIasbing MSG WAIT
b.utton to ring each psrty in sequential order.
300.81

-GE
WAtTXNG REMINDER
TONE
A key station with a message waiting can be
reminded at a programmed
timed intend
with
a tone.
-GES
- PERSONALIZED
Each station (Key and SLq can select a pre-assigned message to be displayed on the LCD of
the digital key tmmfnd
calling that station.
300.92

300-22

Lsue

1, JaIUmly

1993

i@ite

DVX’andDVXn

D&iti

Kev Telephone

There are ten possible messages which
displayed:
- OO= Clears Messages
- 01= ON VACATION
- 02=REruFzNAM
-03=-PM
- 04= RETURN TOMORROW
- 05=RFXURNNEXTWEEK
- 06=ONTRIP
- O?= M MEETING
- O8=AT HOME
- 09=ON BREAK
- lO=ATLUNCH
k
Date and Time Entry to Ptrs-d

- c.

KEY STATION

Systems
can

DESCRIPTION

MUTE=

Pressing the MUTE button while in the speakerphone mode or using the handset will disable
the microphone
but not affect the speech commg over the speaker or handset. Pressing the
ilhuninated
MUTE button again will reactivate
the microphone.
900.96
NAME IN DISPLAY
This feature allows every extension my or SLTI
the capability to program tie users name, for
that station. so that people using display telephones will see the name instead of the station
number
on their display. The name is programmed at each station by the user and may
be up to seven letters In length.

MC&S&g~[6)

300.96

As an enhancement
to the original personalized message(s), staffon users can activate certain messages that will allow the
user to enter a spedtic ttme or a date of
return.ThesemessageswUappearoneaUing stations display to alert tfiem of the
desired party’s return lime or date.
- 11= ON VACATION W
MM/DD
- 12= RETURN: Hfl:MM xm or MM/DD
- 13= ON TRIP UNTIL: MM/DD
- 34= MEE’I’lNG UNTIL: HH:MM xm
- 15=ATHOMEuNTIL:HK:MMxtn
- 16=ONBREAKLJWIL:HHMMxm
- 17=ATLUNCHUN?ILzHH:MMxm
Messages - Custom
This feature allows the system adminislrator to enter up to ten custom messages for
use by station users of the system. These
messages maybe specified and customized
by the customer on a system-wide basis.
PctaoMIized
Message code on a Flex
=Y
This feature allows a key station user to
progmm the personalized
message code
[633#] onto a flex button. This speeds access of the preselected messages.

The Night Service feature will provide a means
toputthesysteminnightmodefromanykeyset
orremovethe
system~omnightmodefromany
keyset as long as the system was put in night
mode by the night service feature flex button. If
the system was placed in night mode by the
attendant using her DND button or if the system was placed in night mode by the automatic
schedule, the nQht setice flex button can not
remove the system from night mode.

300.93
MUSIC ON HOLD
A music source, when connected to the system,
provides music to all lines on Hold, parked
calls, transferred calls and calls waiting to be
answered by Automatic Call Distribution
(ACID)
or Uniform Call Distribution
[UCD). This feature can be allowed or denied on a system-wide
basis in programming.

Issue

390.94

FEATURE

1. January

lSQ3

300.97
A.

NIGHT

Antometic

SERVICE

SERVICE
Night

Mode

FEATURE

MODE
Operation

The inftzife Digital Key Telephone System
can be programmed
so that the system is
automatically
placed mto night mode.
The Attendant(s)
can ovenide the Automatic Night mode schedule
simply by
pressing the NIGHT, (DND) button.
B.

Ertcmal

Night

kIq$ng

The system can be programmed so that CO
lines marked for UNA will ring on the external page speakers.
42, Manllal operation
The Attendant(s)
can control the use of
Night Mode manually
by pressing
the
NIGHT (DND) button. An LED wiil indicate
when the system is in Night Mode operation.
D. Night CIaas of SeAce (COS)
The system allows ea& station to be assigned a different COS for mght operation.
The night COS goes into effect when the
system is put into night mode manually or
via the automatic
schedule. Prevents the
misuse of phones after hours.
300-23

STATION

F,. Night

FEATURE

Ringipg

DESCRIPTION

Universal

Night

Answer

300.98
OFF EOOK VOICE OVER
This feature allows users, off-hook on a call [CO
or Intercom), to receive a voice atmouncernent
through the handset receiver without
jnterrupting the &sling
caU. Ihe Voice Over is
muted so as not to ‘override” or “drown” out the
existing conversation.
The overridden
party
may then respond to the calhng party using
CAMP-ON procedures
to talk to the calling
party or use Silent Text Messaging to reapond
to the dling
partyvia LCD displays. The calling
loriginatin@
station
and receiviug
station
MUST be a digital texmii&.
The receiving station MUST also be programmed
to receive
OHVO calls.

OFF-HOOK

PREFERENCE

Auto Feature Access
In addition to auto line access DigitalTerrnhals have the ability to have their offhook preference select a DSS or feature
button upon going ofi-book or pressing the
ON/OFF button.
Auto

Line

Access

Each station, key or SLT. may have their
phone programmed
to access a particular
CO Line such as a private line or ahnefrom
300-24

Hot I&e/Ring

Down

Electronic Dgitd Terminals
may be programmed to mediately
call or ring down
a particular
station or outside number
upon going off hook This is done by programming
the stations Off-Hook preference to activate a DSS or Speed dial feature
key. This feature can be overridden if the
station user selects a CO line f?rst when
going off-hook.

[muA)

incoming CO lines can be programmed
for
Universal
Night Answer (UN&
Stations
which do not have access to a line during
the day can answer that line while the
System is in the Night Mode by dishrig a
UNA code.
Weekly Ntght Mode Schedule
A programmableweekly
nightmode
schedule provides for 24 hour, 7 day a week
automatic night mode operation. The systern can be put into and out of night mode
automatically
on a daily basis.

300.99

a Group of CO lines upon going off-hook.
This is useful in Centrex or PBX apphcations when station users have dedicated
lines. Outside line dial tone is received just
by going off-hook, without the need to dial
an access code.

A88i@xrntnts

EELCII CO line may be individually
programmed
for Night ringing to other stations, to Hunt groups, ACD groups. UCD
groups. Voice Mail groups, or off-net via
speed dial. When the system is placed into
night mode. manually
or automatically,
ringing will follow the night ringing assignments for each CO line.
F.

iq#inite
DVX * rind DVX’
bigital Key Telephone
Gystcms

Intercom&cuss

’

When off-hook preference is enabled. at a
key station. that statton may still obtain
intercom dial tone for accessing internal
stations or other system features. Tlzis is
done either by pressing an intercom button
or diahng their own intercom station number prior to going off-hook.
User Programmable
Preference
Based on a station programmable
option
Digital Tern&&s
may be given the ability
to enable, disable or change their off-hook
preference by diahng a code. This option
can be denied in station prog
* g on
a per key station basis.

300.100

OFF-HOOK

SIGNALING

If a station has been programmed
to receive
direct outside line ringing and is busy on another call, that station will receive muted ring
to indicate another call is ringing in. Additional& CO calls may be “camped-on”
to a busy
station and receive muted ringing.
300.101
OFF-PREMISE
EXTENSIONS
(OPX)
The Off-Premise Extension Box (OPXJ provides
one FCC registered 25OOQpe single line interface port. ‘Ibis enables the use of one Off-Premise 2500 telephone set. A precise tone plan is
provided to OPX stations. A 48v power supply
is required when installing an OPX box.
300.102
ON-HOOK DIMZNG
The Digital TerminaI user can place calls without Iiftlng the handset. If the speakerphone
is
disabled, the handset must be lifted to converse.

Issue

1, Januury

1993

iqfmite
Dig&d
300.103

DVX * and DVX”
Ecy Telephone
Systems
ON LINE PROGRAMMING

Changes

to the system database can be made
interrupting
normal system operation.
Frm
may be performed
using a key
station terminal connected to tbe system (Station 100) or via a external terminal either onsite or remotely.
without.

300.104

PAGE/REL&Y

CONTROL

The ttfinite Digital Key Telephone Systems offer
relays that may be individuaIly
programmed
for: External Page, Loud Bell Control, CO Line
ControI, Power Failure IYansfer, and Recorded
Announcement
uses. Up to four Relay/Sensor
intdace
modules may be installed on either
system. Each relay/sensor
interface module
contains three independent
relays and three
sensing input circuits. In addition, each 4x8
CO/Station
Interface card of the DVX *I system
contains a Relay Contact [for up to seven *onboard” relays) that may also be assigned to any
of the functions mentioned
above.
300.105
A.

b
B.

KEY STATION
c.

FEATURE

DESCBB’TION

PagLngAcccss Restriction
Programming
on a per-station
basis. can
deny any station the ability to make any
type of page.

300.106 PAUSE TIBKBR
When dialing a speed number. a timed pause
between digit sending can be placed in the
number. The length of this pause can be programmed in the system database.
300.107
PERSONAL PARII
Each digital terminal in the system can place a
call into a personal park location and then later
retrieve that call from the originating
station.
intercom calls and CO line calls can be placed
into the stations’ personaI park location. Calls
parked in a personal pa& location are subject
to the ‘system” catI park recall timer. A station
retrieving a personal parked CO call must have
either a direct CO line appearan ce or an available loop button to retieve the parked call.

PAGING

ExtcnlalPaging
There are four external paging zones avaiIable in the DVX I and seven available in the
DVX I1 systems. External Paging requires a
three-digit
dialing code. External paging
requires an externally
provided amplifier
and paging system. One make and one
break contact are provided with the page
zone on the 4x8 Key Interface Board (Cm).
Since no ‘on-board”
relay contacts are
available on the DVX ’ for external paging,
the Relay/Sensor
Interface module is used
for this purpose.
If the 4x8 SLT Iuterhce
Board (CSB) installed in the DVX ’ System, the r&y
contact used to provide external paging is
provided using the Dual m/Talk-Page
Module.
Internal
Paging
There are four internal paging zones available in the in&!nire Digital Key Telephone
Systems. A station can be in any or all
zones or in no zone at all. Stations
not
assigned to a page group can still make
page announcements.
if allowed in station
Pmgramming.
Stations
can be assigned to
a page group in order to receive pages but
not allowed to make page announcements.

Issue 1, Jan-

lQ93

300.108
PBX DI&ING
CODBS
The System will allow five one or two-digit access codes to be entered into memory. When
one of these codes is dialed, this signals the
KSU that toll restxiction is to be applied at the
next dialed digits after the code. If one of these
codes is not dialed. toll restriction
does not
apply. This allows the dialing of P3X extensions
100, 110, 111, etc. This functions
on lines
marked as PBX type lines in progra
3s
300.109
POOL BUTTON OPBBATION
The Pool Group Key is used primarily to access
CO lines that do not appear on a station so that
outgoing calls may be made. Pooled group keys
are associated to CO line groups and may be
programmed
for use on any of the flexible line
buttons. CO lines are accessed in descending
order of priority starting with the highest numbered available (not busy) CO line in a CO hne
groupStations may have as many POOL buttons as
their are CO line groups. Multiple POOL buttons for the same group are also allowed.

303-25

KEY STATION

FEATURE

DESCRIP’IXGN

300.110 PREF’EFtRED LINE ANSWER
A st,ation with Preferred Line Answer can answer any assigned outside, transferred,
or recalling line. or queue callbacks by lifting the
handset or pressing the ON/OFF button. The
station MUST be physically ringing, to function
properly.
300.111 PRIVACYRELEASE
Privacy is insured on all communkations
in the
system. If desired, the customer may elect to
disable the Automatic
Privacy feature. Thus
aIlowing another station to join in on existing
CO Line conversations.
A Per CO Une Option
This feature allows each CO line to be
individually
programmed
for privacy. This
feature is useful for maintaining
security
on such lines as Data lines, Private lines,
or special circuits requiring privacy. Ifprivacy is disabled on a CO line then. while in
use, another station may enter the conversation simply by pressing the CO line button. A warning tone is presented to all
parties prior to actual cut-thru. The station
attempting to enter the conversation must
also have privacy disabled.
33. Per Station Option
Each station may be programmed
to give
the station the capability to jofn an exkting
conversation
simply by pressing the CO
line button that is in use. A warning tone
is presented to all parties when the statfon
enters the conversation.
The CO line must
also have privacy disabled to allow the
cut-thru.
PRIVAm
UNE
Private line programming
allows certain lines to
ring at a specific station only. When placed on
Hold. these lines are active at the programmed
station only. A private line can be transferred
to other stations, provided the station receivfn.g
the call has a loop button or direct appearance
of that CO lfne.
300.112

300.113
PULSE-TO-TONE
SWITCHOVER
When commanded,
the system ti change the
signaIing on an outside line from dial pulse to
DTMF (tone). allowing the use of common carrim-s behind a dial pulse outside line. This can
be done manually
when dialing, or can be
stored within a speed dial number,

300-26

iqfinite
DVX’ and DVX”
D&&al Key Telephone
SysWns
300.114
RANGE PROGRAMMING
The in$.ni.te Digital Key Telephone System allows for range programming
when programming
CO lines
and
Stations.
Range
programming
allows you to program
all parameters alike for the entire range or you can
change or modify a few items that wiK be copied
to all members in the range.
500.115
REMOTE ADIKINISTRATION
‘I’he Remote Administration
feature
allows
authorized personnel to access the administration programming
via a terminal device (portable terminal device or personal computer with
communkations
software package).
The feature permits the review and entry of the
customer database in the same manner as via
the digital terminal
at *ADMIW Station 100.
The terminal device can be connected directly
to the Rs-232C connector on the CPE3 board, or
can be accessed by a telephone modem linking
the CPB’s R!S-232C connector (via a CO line) to
a remote location. When entering the system
remotely via a termmal device. access to the
on-board modem is accomplished
by accessing
Port 199 either through a direct ringiig assignment or through DISA or by being transferred
to Port 199 by any internal station.
A. Database Upload/Download
Data&se
Upload/Download
provides a
maintenance
facility which ti be added to
the Remote A ’ *, ’ k-ation routfne. This
routine permits the database to be downloaded to a PC. when a software changes is
made or when the system needs to be initialized and re-programmed.
In addition,
the routine facilitates the pro@
’ rg of
a database on an in-house system which
can be downloaded
to a PC and then
uploaded to a system in the field. After the
system maintenance
is completed. the Ble
saved in the PC can then be uploaded to
the system.
300. I16 FiEMOTE SYSTEM MONITOR AND
MAINTENANCE
A
Remote System Maintenance
The Remote Maidenaxe
feature allows
the interconnects’
technical staff to review
the systems configuration
data and individual card slot configuration
data. This
can be done “on site” using a data terminal
or remotely using modem to modem access
to a remote data terminal. When entering
the system remotely via a terminal device,
access to the on-board modem is accomIssue 1, Januaq

1893

infirrite
~&&al

DVX I and DVX”
Key Telephone

Systems

KEY STATION

plished
through
through
Port 199

by accessing
Port 199 either
a direct ringing assignment
or
DISA or by being transferred
to
by any internal station.

Remote

System

Monitor

The Remote Monitor feature provides remote access to the installed system far
diagnostic
purposes.
These capabilities
benefit Service personnel enabling them to
support the end user remotely~ Dgerent
levels of access, via password,
allows
authorized personnel to trace, monitor and
‘up-load” crftical informatton
directly from
the in..&
Dfgftal Key Telephone System.
This provides a more accurate means of
acquiring system information
that leads to
a quick resolution of problems that may
occur. Thfs is all done without interfering
withongoing~processtngornormalsystern operation, and in many cases may be
performed without a site visit
Capabilities
allowed and resvved for tbfs
&High level troubleshooting”
in addition
aIf?:
l
Monitor Mode
l
Enable & Disable Event YlIace”
l
Dump “Trace Bu3er” (up-load)
300.117
SAVE NUMBER RRDIAL (SNR)
Any number dialed on an outside line can be
saved permanently
to be used at any time. This
number is saved until a new number is stored.
30Q.llSSlNGUCIJNETELEPHONE
COBEPATIi3ILWY

(SLT)

The @%I& Digital Key Telephone System supports industry standard 2500 Type (IYl’MF] single line instruments.
When the 2x4 SLT
Expander Module is installed in the DVX * sysJem, a maximum of eight single line telephones
may be supported. When the 4x8 SLT Interface
Board (CSB) is installed in the DVX ’ system, a
maximum
of 48 single line telephones may be
supported.
300.119
sPRAREF@EIoNE
Both Enhanced and Executtve Digital Terminals are equipped with a speakerphone.
However, the speakerphone
can be programmed
to
work in one of three ways:
l
l

Issue

speakerphone
operation.
Disabled for outgoing and incoming co
calls but handsfree on intercom allowed.
Headset operation avowed.
Normal

1. January

1993

FEATURE

DESCRIPI’IUN

CUSS OF SERVICE
(C=4
Each station is assigned a Class of Service
which governs that stations dialing privileges.
Day Class of Service and Night Class of !%xvice
assignments to stations provide the system administrator
additional control over station dialing, preventing misuse of phones after hours.
Six uniquely
defined Classes of Service are
available for assigm-nent to stations on a per
station basis and all six are available for day
and night assignment. Station Class of Service
works in conjunction
with CO line Class of
Service to provide the most flexible means for
offering custom toil restriction. As a part of the
Dfahg
privilege assjgnment through Class of
Service the system offers two programmable
Aliow and Deny tables foq additional customization of a toll restriction plan for a particular
customer. In addition, each station can reference up to four special area code tables.
300.120

STATION

300.121

STATION

ME!WAGE

DETAIL

RE-

CORDING (SMDR)
The &@I& Digital Key Telephone System provides one industry standard RS-232C port for
duaI purpose use and a second port is optionaI
for SMDR output, each allowing connection to
an external printer or call accounting
device.
The system provides details on both incoming
and outgoing calls. This feature is programmable to allow all calls or just outgoing long distance calls to be recorded. The system tracks
calls by outside line, number dialed, time of
day, date, station that placed the call and duration of call. Account codes may also be entered and recorded.
300.122
STATION REWCA’MON
FBATURR
The Station
Relocation
feature provides
a
means to allow a user to unplug their station
and plug it in at another location.
Then by
dialing a code followed by the old statton number, all station attributes, including extension
number, button mapping. speed dial. and class
of servfce are transferred to the new location.
mui

300.123
STATION SPEED DIAL
Each station user can program up to 20 frequently dialed numbers of up to 24-digits in
length. Pauses, flash commands, pulse-to-tone
switchover,
and NO-DISPLAY characters take
up digit spaces. Ln the in@-& DVX I System,

300-27

iqfutite
KEY STATION

FEATURE

DESCRIFTION

there are a total of 600 speed locations,
and
there are a total of 1280 speed locations in the
ti@.r~ti DVX ’ System to be divided among ah
telephones.
Numbers are dialed by use of the SPEED button
and a two-digit code. This feature can additionally be assigned to any of the buttons in the
flexible button field on each keyset for one-button activation.
300.124

SY6TEM

CAPACITY

up to 14x26 Comtion
The DVX’ system WilI support amaximum
of 14 outside CO circuits and 28 station
circufts.
Up to 26~56

Configuration

The DVX ’ system will support a mar&nun
of 28 outside CO circuits and 56 statfon
Cil-CtlitS.

300.125

SYSTEM HOLD

When a line is placed on System Hold, any
station in the system with an appearance of
that line can retieve the call.
300.126

SYSTEM

TEXT

blESSAGING

[Silent

300.130

300-28

UNIFORM
[UC~I

CALL DISTRIBUT’ION

Eight Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD) groups
can be programmed,
each containjng
up to
eight three-digit station numbers. Each group
is assigned a pilot number. When this number
is dialed. the fmt available agent in that group
is rung. Calls are routed to the station that has
been on-hook for the longest: period of time.
A

messages

TOLL RESTRICTION
(TARIE
DDRIVENI
The system provides a flexible means of providing toll restriction
to internal stations of the
infinite Digital Key Telephone
System. Each
station is assigned a Class of Service for day
mode operation and one for night mode opera-

Systems

TRANSFER RECAU
Screened and unscreened transfers will recall
the initiating
party ff unanswered
for a programmable
length of time, and then if unanswered. win recall the attendant.

This fature

300.128

Xey Telephone

300.129

Rc-

allows a station user to use text
to respond to a caller that has either
Camped-On
or has used the Off-Hook Voice
Over lOHVO1 feature to alert a busy station of a
whiiting call or message. The “camped-on” station may respond to the caller via the personalized. custom,
and response
text (LCD)
messages. The text message
appear on the
calling party LCD display. The calling (originating) station and receiving station MUST be a
digital terminal. The receiving station MUST
also be programmed
to allow OHVO cak

and DVX’

tion these station COB work in conjunction
with a CO line Class of service to allow for
customized toll restriction. Two Allow and Deny
tables along with four special tables afford the
system administrator
to devise a variety of complex toll restriction or dialing privilege schemes.

SPEED DIAL

Up to 80 commonly dialed numbers can be
programmed
into System Speed Dial for use by
stations allowed this feature. These numbers
can be up to 24-digits including pauses, flash
commands, pulse-to-tone
switchover, and nodisplay characters. T&he last 40 numbers will
not be monitored by toli restriction.
300.127

Digital

DVX’

Atttnratc

UCD Group

Ass@unents

Au alternate
UCD group can be programmed so that if stations in one group
are busy, the alternate
group will be
checked for an available station.
Auto Wrap-Up w/Timer
After completion
of a UCD call (on-book)
the agent will not be subjected to another
UCD ca.Il for the duratfon of the Auto WrapUp timer (regardless of the number of calls
in queue). allowing the agent to finish call
related work or access other facilities. This
will allow agents to remove themsehres
from the group (i.e.. DND. Unavailable,
Call Forward or originate another &I). The
auto wrapup
timer-is programmed
as part
of the UCD database. (System-wide)
Avaihhle/Unavallable

Mode

Stations programmed
mto a UCD group
may log off and on to their assigned UCD
group by dialing an Auailable/Unavailable
code. When an agent is in the Aeble
mode that agent will receive UCD calls in
the normal manner. When an agent is in
the Unavailable
mode that agent will no
longer receive UCD type calls, however may
receive non-UCD cdlls. Agents that have
logged off by going Unavailable will receive
a visual reminder that they arc logged off
with a flashing LED and or a LCD display
message.

Isaue

1, Jsnuarg

1993

i@&e
Dfgttal
D.

DVX’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Syetems

~ncomhgj

CO Direct

KEY STAmON

Ringing

CO E-ES can be programmed
to ring directly into a UCD group. When all agents
are busy and RAN is enabled, the system
will answer the caller and present the Ist
RAN announcement
automatically.
E. No-Answer Recall Timer
If a call routed to a station via UCD is not
answered by the UCD Agent/Station
before the No-Answer Recall timer expires,
the call will be returned to UCD Queue with
the highest priority. In addition, the station
that failed to answer the ringing UCD call
will be placed into an Out-Of-Service (OOS]
state..
F. No-Answer Retry Timer
When the No-Answer Recall timer expm,
a station that failed to answer the ringing
UCD call is placed into an out of service
(00s) state. The station thatwas taken out
of service (00s) will be placed back in
servfce if the agent hits his avalIable flex
button or diaIs the avaikble flex code. In
addition, the agent will be placed back in
service if the No-Answer Retry timer expires. Iftbe agent does not answer his next
UCD cab, he win again be taken out of
service. This cycle will continue until the
station answers calls, logs out, or goes
unavailable.
G. overflow
station AsfJignments
An overflow station may be assigned to
route callers in queue to a designated station after a specifkd time. The overflow
station may not be one of the UCD group
stations.
EL

Recorded

Announcements

IRAN)

Recorded announcement
devices can be
assigned to provide up to eight d&rent
messages, ifaII stations in a UCD group are
busy. The eight messages are available to
all eight UCD groups in different coniigurations. A RAN table can be the answer port
for unanswered
incoming calls to a UCD
group, while another table can provide the
secondary message. Each RAN device can
provide an announcement
to one caller at
a time. Subsequent
callers will be queued
onto the message on a first-in basis.
I*

Agtnt

Queue

St&us

Display

The Agent Queue Status
a means for an agent and
to view the status of their
display is an idle state
Issue 1, Janwy

1993

feature provides
UCD supervisor
LJCD group. This
display and will

FEATURE

DESCRIPTION

prompt a supervisor that Agents in a group
are having problems answering
all their
calls. The display will tell the agent and his
supervisor how many cabs are in queue,
how many agents are available or logged
into the group. and the length of time in
minutes that the oldest caIl has been in
queue. The agent will receive the calls in
queue display whenever there is a caII in
queue.
There are two methods
of viewing UCD
Group call queue status.
1. In-service UCD agents and the assigned
cwerflow station wiiI see the quantity of
calls in queue on the LCD of their station
for the UCD group of which they are a
member. If every member of a UCD group
is busy and calIs are.* queue, the Supervisor/Agent
Queue Status display will be
seen at all UCD members of that group.

2.Any station not assigned in a UCD group
can view the number of calIs in queue for
any given UCD Group. To view the number
of caIls in queue the station user dials the
Calls In Queue code (or presses a programmed FLEX button with this code) then
enters the UCD group desired. The LCD
will display, on a real time basis, the number of c&s in queue for that group.
300.131

UNNERML

NIGHT

ANSWER

Incoming CO lines can be programmed
for Univewal Night Answer (UNAJ. Stations which do
not have access to a line during the day can
answer that hne while the System in the Night
Mode by dialog a LJNA code. In order to utilize
this feature. a loop button or an appearance of
the trunk must be present on-the station.
300.132

VOICE

MAIL

GROUPS

(V&I)

The Voice Mail feature automatIcally
handles
unanswered
calls. Stations may forward ca.lls
to a voice mail &oup (for leaving mail) or may
CalI the voice mail group directly (to rehieve
mail) with no assistance hm the attendant. Up
to eight voice mail groups can be configured in
the system. Each group can conta.in up to eight
voice mafl stations. each of which interfaces
with a port on either the 2x4 SLT Expander
Module on the DVX I System, or on the 4x8 SLT
Expander Module on the DVX ’ System. Each
voice
mail
%&ion”
can be shared by a number
300-29

STATION

FEA’IXIRE

DEWXD’TION

of actual users. An 2x4 SLT Expander Module
or 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) are required
when utilizing the k$nti Digital Key Telephone
System Voice Mail ‘In-Band”
integration.
A

VM CO Disconnect

Sfgaal

- Pass Thru

To avoid Voice Mail ports from being tied
up, as a result of CO line callers abandoning the caII or not exiting the VM system
properly, a disconnect signal has been provided to notify the VM system that a CO
caIler has hung up or abandon the call.
‘Silence” is provided to the VM port followed by “busy tone” to aid the VM system
to recognize tbat an intercom caller has
abandoned the call.
Disconnect digits may also be programmed
for outside line callers.
B. VM In-Band Srernating lnteg&ion
The in@We Digital Key Telephone System
allows the system to be programmed
so
that if a station programmed
to receive
incoming CO line ringing is forwarded to
Voice Mail they may have direct incoming
callers routed directly into their stations
voice mail boxthrough
the use of X-Band”
signaling. Alternately, when disabled, callers wiU be answered by the Voice Mail or
Auto Attendant Main greeting.
Incoming CO calIers can be Station CalI
Forwarded into voice maiI on& when the
ringing CO line is programmed
to ring at
one station. AdditionaUy
CO lines programmed to ring at an attendant
station
will station call forward into the Voice Mall
system [if p rogrammed to ring only at one
attendant station) and be presented to the
main greeting (not the attendant
stations
mail box) even when ID digits are enabled.
c. VlM Message waiting Indication
* When Voice Mail has received a voice message for a user who has a station on the
infinite Digital Key Telephone System. the
VM connected to the system will leave a
message waiting indication
at the VM users station. When the station user retrieves
their mail, the VM system will cancel the
message waiting indication left at a station
viaaVMport.
The message waiting indication wilI appear
on the programmed Voice Mail (group) button. If such a button has not been programmed,
a voice mail message waiting
indication
will appear on the MSC WI&T
buttonasanormalmessagewai~sq+.

300-30

infinite
DVX I and DVX ’
Digital Key T&phone
Systcxm

VM Tone Mode CaWqj option
Voice mail systems and/or Automated Attendants
can utilize the Calling Station
Tone Mode option. This is useful when
using supervised transfer or call screening
options on voice mail or auto attendant(s)
requiring
ringback tone for proper call
handling.
VM TrrInsfer/Folward
This future
allows Voice MaiI calls, upon
reaching a forwarded to VM station, to
fort%ard back into the Voice Mail unit. This
is useful when VM ports are being used as
both Auto Attendant
and VM ports. This
feature can be enabled/disabled
for all VM
groups.
VM ean!4fcr

with ID Digit5

This feature provides an attendant
or station user a way to transfer a caIIer directly
into a voice mail box This allows the station identification
digits to be entered by
the txansfening
par&. Using this feature,
acalIercanbetransferredtoavoicemaiI
box when I) a station user on the system
is not forwarded to VM or 2) the destination
voice maiI box owner is not a station user.
CO trunks and internal calls may be fransferred into voice mail using this feature. If
no voice ma.iI ID digits are dialed by the
transferring station, then the idezltication
digitsofthetransferrtngstationwillbesent
to the voice mail.
300.13s
voI#ullm
cmlTRoLs
Both speaker and tone ringing volumes can be
separateIy adjusted by utilizing the two slide
switches on the front of the digitaI keyset.
..

Issue 1, January

1993

irlfinite

DVX’ and DVX’
Dj.@tat Key Telephone
System

SINGLE LINE TE$LEPHONE FEATURE

SECTION 310
SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE
FEATURE
Single Line telephones have access to most of
the system and station features listed in the
previous section. however, the additional features listed below are unique to Single Line
Telephones. The 2x4 SLT Expander Module is
required in the DKX I System, and the 4&3 SLT
Interface Board (CS3) is required in the DVX ’
System for proper SLT operation. A Single Line
Adapter (OFX) box and 48v Power Supply may
also provide single line operation. An abbreviated feature index is provided in Table 310-l
Single Line Telephone (SLTI J?eature Index.
310.1
ACCOUNT CODE
SLT stations may enter an account

310.5

CONFERENCE

An SLT user can initiate a conference with an
outside line and one other internal station.
310.6

CONFERENCE
PARE

/WITH

PERSONAL

Single Line Telephones (SLT) can initiate a conference between two ou$sfde (CO) calls. The
Personal Park feature is used in confunction
with the SLT conference code to make this
possible. A combination
of features are derived
from these dial codes (Personal Park. Flip/Flop,
and Multi-line Conference).
310.7

310.2

310.8

LINE ACCESS

DESCRIPTION

station is notified of this by a beep tone. Single
line telephones can receive a camp on indication or initiate one by using an access code.

code, up to
K&digits in length, to identify calls for billing/tracking
purposes. The account code may
be entered either before the call or during the
call (the outside caller is placed on hold while
the account code is entered ri during the call.).
The account code is recorded on the SMDR
printout.
Account codes are non-verified
and
can vary in length from 1 to 12 digits.
AUTOMATlC

DESCRIPTION

DIRECT
ACCE66

OUTSIDE

LINE GROUP

Single line telephones can access outside lines
by dialing CO line group access codes 9 or
81-87.
DIRECT

OUTSIDE

IJNE RINGING

SLTs may have their station programmed
to
access a particular
CO I&e such as a private
line or a line from a Group of CO lines upon
going off-hook. This is useful in Centrex or PBX
applications when station users have dedicated
or individual
lines. Outside tine diat tone is
received just by going off-hook, witbout the
need to dial access codes.

Single line telephones can be set up to receive
direct outside line ringing. SLT& may be programmed to receive incoming
CO Ringing on
more than one CO line. However. an SLT can
answeronlyQNEcaUatatime.IfaSLTisbusy
when a CO call rings in, camp-on tone will be
given to that SLT station.

310.3

Tone ringing intercom calla, Imtial pinging CO
calls and -ierred
outside line calls to specific stations can be picked up by single line
telephones. For this type of pickup, the stations
do not have to be in the same pickup group.

CALLFORWART)

- Single line telephones may direct intercom caIls
and transferred
CO lines to be forwarded to
another station. SLTs have access to all forwarding options that Key station users have:
l
Cdl Forward -All Calls
l
CalI Forward - No Answer [7]
* Call Forward - Busy (81
l
CalI Forward - Busy/No Answer [9]
l
CalI Forward - Off-Net [+E]
l
Preset Call Forward
310.4

CAMPON

310.10

DIRECTED

DO NOT DI-

CALL PICK-UP

@ND)

Each telephone user can be allowed to place
their phone in Do Not Disturb. The user will
receive error tone if they are not allowed this
feature. They will also receive a confidence tone
when lifting the handset to remind them they
are in Do Not Disturb. The attendant
can override a station in DND.
GROUP CALL PER-UP
Tone ringing intercom calls, transferred outside
he calls, and fnitially ringing
calls can be
3 10.11

A busy sMi011 can be notified that an outside
he is on hold and waiting for them. The busy
Issue 1, January

310.9

199s

310-l

infinite
SINGLE

LXNE =L&PIXONE

xi-

Table

PEA-

310-l

D&im

DEWJUPTXON

Single

Line Teltphont

(SLT) Ftabrt

9VALABLE

Account Code ...........................................
Automatic
Line Access.. ............................

Xty

DVX1 and DVX”
Telephone
Sytittms

Index

EXTERNAL

INTERNAL
EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED

310-I
310-I

S
S

N
N

310-l
310-l
310-I
3 lo- 1

S
S
S
S

N
N
N
N

C
&ll Forward .............................................
.................................................
camp-on
COnfer~Ce
...............................................
conferenct
w/F’ersonaI
Park .....................

D
Direct Outside Line Access .......................
Dirtct Outside Line FGnging ......................
Directed Cdl Pick-Up ...............................
Do Not Disturb (DND) ...............................

3 1O-1
310-l
310-l
310-I

S
S
S
S

N
N
N
N

G
Croup call pick-up

310-l

310-3

aa
Message Wailing/Call
Back.. ....................
Messages - Personalized
...........................
Custom Messa@s

310-3
310-3
310-3

S
S
S

N
N
N

N
Night Service

310-3

31ck3

I
intercom

...................................

.......................................

.................................

............................................

0
Off-Hook

preference

I!
Ptrsoti

Park

..................................

.:
310-3

310-3

System Speed Dial ....................................

310-3
310-3

S
S

N
I4

T
n-ansfer

3 LO-3

...........................................

Quelling

...................................................

S
&ion

Speed Dial ....................................

...................................................

L
S = Standard

Feature:

CkOptionak

F&quires

._
additionalmrdware

I=No addition

hardwwerequh-ec

i’

infinite

DVX’

~&&al

and DVX’
Systems

Key Tekphone

SINGLE, LINE TELEPHONE

picked up by single line telephones by dialing a
special pickup code. The telephones must be in
the same pickup group.
310.12
INTERCOM
CALLJNG
Single tie telephones
can make and receive

intercom

calls.

310.13
MESSAGE WAlTlNG/CAU
BACK
Single Line Telephones calling a station that is
busy, idle. or in Do Not Disturb can leave a
message waiting indication to signal the station
to call back.
310.14
MESBAGES - PERSONAclzED
Each SLT station mn select a preassigned
message to be displayed on the I.ZD of the
Digit& Terminal receiving that message. There
are ten possible messages which can be displayed:
- 00= Clears Messages
- Ol= ON VACA’l’?ON
- 02=REmRNAM
- 03=REXURNPM
- 04= FETURN
- 05= RElWRN

TOMORROW
NEXTWEEK

- 06=ONTRIP
- 07=INMEE’IIlVG
- OB=ATHOMB
- 09=ONBR.EAK
- lO= AT LUNCH
Messages - custom
This feature allows the system administrator to enter up to ten custom messages for
use by station users of the system. These
messages maybe specified and customized
by the customer on a system-wide basis,

- 310.15

NIGHT

going off-hook.
codes.

FEATURE

without

DESCRIF’TION

the need to dia3 access

3 10.17
PERSONAL PARK
Single line telephones can be connected to two
calls (Intercom or CO lines) at the same time
and “flip/flop”
between the two calls. This can
be performed with originated or received calls.
This feature is also used with SLT multi-line
conference feature.
3 10.18

QUEUING

Single iine telephones can be placed in a queue
swatting the tit
available outside Une in a
group to become available.
SPEED DIAL
EachSLTusermayprogr&1upto20individual
speed dial numbers. Each speed dial number
can be up to 24-digits in length.
310.19

GTATION

310.20
BYSTEM SPEED DIAL
Each SLTuser can be allowed access to system
speed dial numbers on a programmable
basis.
The last for& system speed numbers override
toll resfxiction.
310.21
TRANSFER
Outside lines may be transferred
line telephones. These transfers
announced or unannounced.

by or to single
can be either

SERVICE

When outside lines are marked UNA and the
system is placed into night service, a single line
telephone can answer incoming calls on lines it
does not norma@ have access to by dialing [#3].
When External Night figlng
is enabled in database progmmming
ringing is outputted on
the external page PO&S.
SlO. 16 OFF-EWK
PREFERENCE
SLTs may have their station programmed
to
access a particular
CO Line such as a private
line or a line from a Group of CO lines upon
going off-hook. This is useful in Centi
or PBX
applications
when station users have dedicated
lines. Outside line dial tone is received just by
Issue

1, January

1993

310-S

i@,nite
DVX I and DVX *
DQital Key Telephone
Spetems

ATTENDANT

ATTENDm
DISABIJ3 OUTGOING ACCESS
The fmt attendant
can disable CO lines, preventing outgoing access to those lines. This is
useful for removing a faulty line from servim.
or for reserving CO lines for important USe. AlI
stations that can normally make caJls on the
lines are affected. but incoming Cans are not
affected. A CO line may be disabled while it is
being used; when the &unk becomes idle, further outgoing access will be prevented.
320.1

ATTENDANT

OVERFLOW

System programmmg
allows the attendant station to be programmed
so that if the attendant
is busy or not there. the call wilI be automatically forwarded to another predetermined
station, VM Group, Hunt Group, ACD or UCD
group after a programmed period of time. (Refer
to Call Forward, Station and Preset)
A~NDANTOVERRIDE
Attendant stations may override a busy station
or ring a station in DND. While busy, pressing
the override key provides override tone and a
five second delay before voice cut-through
to
the called party occurs. automatically
placing
any outside line call on Hold. The Attendant
. Override function may be programmed
on to a
flex button and can be enabled or disabled in
Programmtng320.5

ATTENDANT POSITION
The system identif2es a mrudmum of three programmabk
stations as attendants
for line recalls and attendant
features.
The first
programmed
attendant can enter system date
and time information
as well as System Speed
numbers from this position without entering
the programmfn@ mode. The in@nf& Digital Key
Telephone System is placed in Night Service by
any programmed
attendant
pressing
the
NIGHT DND) button or dialing the NIGHTcode.
320.4

Issue 1, Janurq

X993

DES-ION

SECTION 320
FEATURE DESCRPTION

The Attendant and Attendant(s) with DSS/DLS
features of the infintte Digital Key Telephone
System are listed and described below in alphabetical order. An abbreviated feature index is
provided in Table 320-l Attendant
Feature
Index.

320.2

FEATURE

320.5

ATTENDANTRECALL

A held CO call left unattended
by a station will
recall the attendant(s)
aftxr a programmable
period of time has elapsed. A recalling CO line
flashes at a distinctive
rate and has an LCD
display that identifies tie originating station of
the unanswered
call.
320.6
AUTOMATlC
HIGET MODE
In addition to the attendants
capability to place
the system into and out of night mode manually. by pressing the Night key. an automatic
night mode schedule has been. added to the
system. The automatic
schedule is set in data
base programming
on a week day basis, in&ding Saturday and Sunday. The Attendant
can
override the automatic
schedule by pres$ng
the NIGHT (DND) button.
320.7

INCOMING
FORWARD

LlNE OFF-NET

Allows the first attendant
to forward incoming
CO calls to an Off-Net location. The attendant
must have a direct appearance of the CO line to
be forwarded.
Forwarding
can be established
on a per CO line group basis, or all CO lines may
be simultaneously
forwarded to an off-net location.
320.8
NIGHT SERVICE FEMTJRE
The Night Senriee feature will provide a means
toputthesysteminnigbtmodefromanykeyset
orremovetheqstem.fromnightmodefromany
keyset as long as the system was put in night
mode by the night service featute flex button If
the system was placed in night mode by the
attendant using her DND button or if the systern was placed in night mode by the automatic
schedule, the night service flex button can not
remove the system f&om night mode.
320.9
TIME AND DATE PROGRAMMMG
ThisfeahrreEtllowsthe~tprogrammedatten-

dant to set the time and date without
the programming
mode.

entering

320-l

irlfinffe
DVX’ andDVX”
Digital gey Telephone
Syeteme

Table

320-l

Attendant

Feature

14VAIIMXE

FEATURE

Index

INTERNAL
EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED

EXTERNAL
EQUlPNE;NT
REQUIRED

: Attendant
Attendant
Attendant
( Attendant
1 Attendant
! Attendant
Automatic

Disable Outgoing Access... . . . ,. -..
overflow . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . I .. .. . . . . , , , , . . ,
Override . . . . *.a..-.,* .,,.... *. .. . . . . . . . . . . .
Position .**.........,,*.,...........,.,.....
Recatt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ww..... a. . . . . .
&arch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . *. .. .. . . . . . ..,.Nfght Mode .*..* . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .*...* ,,..

320-l
320-l
320-I
320-l

320-l
320-Z
320-l

S
s
S
S
S
S
S

N
N
N
N
N
N
N

S
S

N
N

hardware

?=No addition

: E

Busy Lamp Field Indicators . . . .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 320-2
D
Dfrect Statfon CalIing . . . . .. . . . . . ..I.... * . . .. a... . . . . 320-2
i 1
, -

Incomfng

CO Line m-Net

Forward

!!!I
Mapping Options
Messages - Custom ..,*.*..........
.*.

.,,,...

. .

. . . *

. . . .

.,.. . .. . .,. 3!20- 1

. . .

. . * . .

. .

. . *

320-2

a. . . . . . . . *. . .. .. . . . 320-3

Night Service Feature ..*.*........-I......*...*......

326 1

Release Key .a. . . . mI....,..,..__...............
*. . . . . . . . .. 320-3
T
?ime and Date Pm grammhg
. . ..*...............
320-l
i
S = Standard

ATTENDANT

Feature:

O=Optionalz

WfDSS/DLS

Requires additional

FEATURES

320.10
AmBJDANT
SEMXCH
Allows a user to make a series of intercom calls
without hanging up the handset. An intercom

connection
is switched
to another
station
whenever a DSS key is pressed. Pressing the
next DSS key terminates
the previous intercom

320.12

DlRECT

STATION

CALUNG

Enables the user to make an intercom voice call
b any Digital TeIlninal in the system. Permits
you to automatically
put an outside caller on
hold and simukaneously
make an intercom call
to an fllterTlal station. Also allows you to transfer an fntercom calI or outside call that is on
hold to another station.

Cdl.

320.11

BUSY LAMP FIELD INDfCA’I’O~
Each station key on the DSS console has a
corresponding
fndfcator whfch shows whether
the station is idle or busy, T&e indicator fs lft
when the station is busy and unlft ff the station
is idle. A station in DND mode fs shown by a
flashing indicator.
320-2

320.13
MAPPING OPTIONS
The DSS/DLS
Console unit can access Sta-

tions, Direct Appearhg
that may be assigned
buttons.

CO Lines. or features
to any of the flexible

hsttt

1. January

1993

iq@ite

DVX I and

~&itd

geY Telephone

DVX”

z7te folbwingfeatum
be

progrcunmed

$e?siblt?

buizons:

8yStemtI

A?TENDANTFEATUREDESCEUFTION

am NOT cdbwai to
mta IWWIJLS
Conaale
ACD Agent or &xl-r

A DSS/DL.S unit may be assigned to one of the
different MAP configurations
available. Any one
of the three M&P conGguraffons
may be assigned to a DSS/DLS and up to three maps may
be assigned to one station. However. “duplicate” MAPS or appearances of Stations and/or
CO lines between the MAPS are not allowed.
There are three pre-defined
MAPS for the
DSS/DLS
console wH.h default button pro’ lg. Refer to Figure 320-l DSS Console
g
Map 1. F’igure 320-2 DSS Console Map 2. and
Frgure 320-3 DSS Console Map 3 for a button
layout of each DSS Console Button Map. Each
Attendant may have up to three DSS/DIS Consoles assigned to work with one Attendant station.

320.14
IHESSAOES - CUSTOM
This feature allows the first programmed
attendant (system admini&at.or)
to enter up to ten
custom messages for use by station users of the

system. Up to 24-characters may be entered as
the custom message (this will represent 48
digits entered). A station user may store any of
the available messages under a fipldble button
assigned as a Message Access button. These
messages may be specified and customized by
the customer on a system-wide basis. Message
status is stored in battery protected
area of
memory for retention in the event of a power
failure or system reset (soft or hard).
320.16

RELEME

KEY

Allows

the user to disconnect calls while oiihook, speeding up call handling
time (MAP f
and MAP 2 only).

Issue 1, &mxary

19533

320-s

DVX ’ aad DVX ’
Key Telephone
Systems

infinite

AITEm

FEATURE

DESCRTPTION

D&it&

B&W #l has by default the first 28 Stations (&as 100-127) and 14 CO lines, three Call Park locations.
Release, Attendant Override, and an All Call Page button mapped to the buttons. AlI buttons except
the 14 CO brie buttons and Release button are flexible and can be changed by the station user.

PVgure 320-l

DSS Coneole

Map 1

itzfiniie

DVX I and DVX ’
ATTENDANT

FEA-

DICSCRIPTlON

r
MAP #2 has by default all 28 CO lines. the first 12 Stations (Stas 1 OO-I I 11, followed bv four Call park
locations, Rel&e.
Attendant
Override, an All Call Page button. and the first He&al
Page Zone
mapped to the buttons. All buttons except the 28 CO line buttons and Release button are flexible and
can be changed by the station user.

Figure
Issue 1. smmaly

I993

320-2

Dss CoPsofe Map 2
320-6

D&ital

iqjinite
DVX’ and DVB;”
Iky Telephone
Sytstexhs

BNP #S by default is intended to be used with Map #2 on a DVX” System, in that it has the remaining
stations (Stas 11 l-1 551 to provide a full CO line by Station mapping. Additiona&.
Internal Page Zonks
2. and 3 appear and the last two buttons are unassigned. Al1 of the buttons on Map #3 are flexible
and can be changed by the user.
CO Line ringing on Map 1 and Map 2 is d&x-mined
by CO Line Ringing Assignments.

320-S

Lsne

1. Janumy

1993

imite
Dj@taI

DVK ’ and DVK ’
Key Telephone
Systems

STATION

KEYTELEPHONE

STATION

FKA-

Each irz,finffeDigitaIKeyTelephone
Systemprovides the following keys, indicators
and features:
HANDSET AND SPEABER are located at the
left side of the front panel. A handset is provided
to allow confidential
conversation
when desired. Lifting the handset f+om its cradle (going
off-hook)
disengages
the station’s
built-in
speaker.
The speaker is located direct& below the center
portion of the handset. The station may be
operated with the handset on-hook. When this
* occurs, audio is transmitted
to the station user
through the station’s speaker.
FLEXIBLE
BUTTONS are used to access idle
outside lines, provide DSS/HLF
for internal
stations. access speed dial number and activate
features. These buttons are programmed by the
individual station user. The default flex feature
buttons are described below:
CAU BACg (flex) button allows you to
initiate an automatic call back request to
another busy station. As soon as that station becomes idle, the station that left the
call back request is signaled. A fiex button
must be assigned to use this feature.

Issue 1, Jan-

1993

OI?KHATION

SECTION 400
FEATURE OPERATION

400.1
INTRODUCTION
The in.tte Digiti Key Telephone System has a
wide variety of features and flexible programming, allowing each telephone user to program
his/her telephone to meet his/her oxen individual needs.
This section of the manual contains the operating instructions
for Digital Key Terminals and
includes an illustxation
of the key telephone
used in the ti@aite Digital Key Telephone System and description of the keys on the telephones and their functions.
It is designed to
provide step-by-step instructions
for operating
the Digital Key Terminals in the system. Visual
and audible cues which accompany the various
steps in the operation of the features are also
included.
Literature
similar to these operating instructions has beenpreparedforusebythecustomer
in the form of a Station Users Guides.
400.2

FI%m

CALL FWD (flex] button allows you to forward your calls to another station.
DO NOT DISTURB (DND] (flex) button allows the user to phce his/her
telephone
into a Do Not Disturb mode to eliminate
incoming
outside line tigjng.
intercom
calls,
transfers
and
paging
announcements.
The station in Dm can use
the telephone
to make normal outgoing
calls. On Attendant
stations, this button
becomes the system Night Mode button. A
flex button must be ,=signed to use this
feature.
CONI%-NCE
(CONF) (flex] button
is
used to establish and build conference
calls.
FIXED FEATURE BUTTONS:
PICK-UP button allows you to pickup a
tone ringing intercom call, transferred,
incomtng, or recalling outside line call to a
spedic unattended station eitberby group
or directed call pick-up.
FLASH button is used to terminate
an
outside call and restore dial tone without
having to hang up the handset
It is also
used to transfer calls behind a PBX or
Centrex within those systems.
MESSAGE WAIT (BESG)button allows you
to initiate a message waiting indication
at
stations that are busy, unattended,
or in
Do Not Disturb. Message Waiting Callback
request left at your station is indicated by
a &shing Msg wait LED.
TRANSFER
(TRAMI) button
is used to
harder an outside call from one station to
another.
SPEED button provides you with access to
speed dialing, save number redial and last
number redial. This button is also used to
access speed dial and flex button programming.
CAMP-ON button enables you to alert a
busy party that an outside line is on hold
and waiting for them.
MUTE button allows you to switch the
built-in microphone
on or off when using
the speakerphone,
or the handset microphone when using the handset.

400-l

ir?j%Ste
STATION

FEATURE

Digital

OPERATION

button
enables you to make a
telephone call without lifting the handset.
It turns the telephone on and off when
using the speakerphone.
HOLD button enables you to place an outside caller on hold.
OUTSIDE CALLS are announced
by a tone
signal repeated every 3.2 seconds. The con-eON/OFF

Ffgurt

400-l

33-Button

sponding
slowly.

outside

DVX’andDVXn

Key Telephone

line

indicator

Sptems

will

flash

INTERCOM
CALLS can be tone ringing or voice
announce.
lf it is voice announced, the receiving station will receive 2 bursts of tone prior to
the announcement.
If it is a tone ringing call,
the receiving station will hear a tone ring every
2.4 seconds.

Digital

Diqday

Termbud

infinite
~fgital

DVX I and DVX II
Key Telephone
Smtuns

Table 400-l
1 loo-127
100-155
I 199

STATION

Digital

Tennind

Station Intercom Numbers (DVX ‘)
Station Intercom Numbers (DVX *)
Modem via DISA access or tmnsfcr
call Park Location 0-7 [system)
f 22 [Cl
228
Personal Park
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers O-7
: 33 IHI
Voice Mail enable MSG Wait
420 m
Voice Mail cancel MSG Wait
421 Ixxrq
Voice Mail Group Wet Numbers O-7
MM
ACD+ or UCD Group pilot Numbers O-7
55 WI
566
ACD+ or UCD Available/Unavailable
i 56755pJj
ACD* or UCD Calls in Queue Display
570 [BB]
ACD* Call Qualihr
571
ACD* Agent Logout
572 55 IV] ACIY Agent Lctgh
573
ACD’ Group Member Status
574
ACD, Agent Help
575
ACD, Supervisor Logout
576 55 rul ACDL Supervisor Lz@n
577 55 fUJ ACD* Supervisor Queue Status Display
Tone Mode Ring Option
~paoq
f5*
Dial w Name
601
Attendant Override
602
Disable Outgoing CO Line Access
603
CO Line Off-Net Forward
604
Night Scwice
620
Camp-On
621
Line Queue
622
Call Back
623
Message Wait
624
conference
625
Exeeulive Override/
ACD’ Supervisor Monitor Barge-In
626
LAZRQueue Cancel
627
Account Code Enter
628
oHvo Enable
631
Do Not Disturb
632
Fiackgrwnd Music
633 [#]
Personalized Message on a Flex Button
633 [ZZJ
Personalized Messages
633 iOO]
Clear Pcrsonaltxd Messages
634
Headset Mode
635
ICLJD Display - [unanswered CaIls]
636 pwrl
Station Relocatt
All Cdl Forward
II-=4
mQl+[71
No Answer - CalI Forwami
ImI+H
Busy - Call Forward
I~l+I91
Busy/No Answer - Call Forward

Numbering

I~l+V+l
680
690

691 [BB]
692
695
70
71
72
73
74
75
76 IO1

77
81
a2
83
84
85
86
87
88

FEATURE

OPERATION

Elan

Off-Net - Call Fonvard
Dial Speed Directory
Name in Display Programming
Off-Hook Preference Programming
Time & Date Rogrammm
[ist prograrnrncd Atten&&
Distinctive Ringing
All Cdl Page IIntemal & External)
Internal Page Zone 1
Internal Page Zone 2
Internal Page Zone 3
Internal Page Zane 4
Internal All Call Page
External AU Cd Page (AU Zunes)
External Page Zones l-7
Meet-Me-me
Answer
CO Uric Group 1
{if LCR is enabled)
CO Lint

Group

CO Line Group 3
CO Line Group 4
CO Line Group 5
CO lhe Group 6
CO Line Group 7
All CO Iine Groups
(CO Line Off-Net Fon%ard]
9
LCR or CO Line Group 1
(if L-CR is disabled)
0
Attendant
#O
Group Call Pick Up (Key & SLZI
x22 ICI
Cal h-k Pickup f.Key and SLT)
#3
universal NigbtAnswer
[SPEED] ~Spccd
Dial Access
(cm- 19 StationJ

(20-99

system)

[SPEEDl+[+$%avc Number Redial
(SPEED]+I#]Last Number &dial
[*][~]+(3226jData

Base Aclmin

lk%na@

(default IDBAMI)
Xxx = Intercom Station Numbas
W=SpcedDialBlnnumbcrs
22 = Personalized Messages
BB = Button Number
U = ACD* or UCD Group Number O-7
C = CaII Park Location O-7
I-l = Hunt Group Number O-7
V = Voice Mail Group Number O-7
P = External Page Zone Number J-7
* Features
only if ACD system features
ware is purchased
separately.

soft

i
Issue 1, January

lSa3

40043

STATION

FEATURE

ANSWERDIG AN OU’IWDE CALL
a. Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.
b. Press slow flashing outside line button, or
Loop button.
(If your telephone is programmed with Preferred Line Answer. you
may answer an outside line by lifting the
handset, or pressing the ON/OFF button.)

4~).3

AN OUTSIDE CALL ON
HOLD
a. If your system is programm ed for Exclusive
Hold preference, press HOLD button once
for Exclusive Hold and twice for System
Hold.
b. If your system is programmed
for System
Hold Preference, press HOLD button once
for System Hold and twice for Exclusive
Hold.

400.4

PLACING

400.5
ANSWERING A RECALL
When an outside line has rematned on hold for
an extended period of time, you will be reminded with a recalling ring. [If Preferred Line
Answer is enabled. skip step a)
a.Press outside line, L.oop or Pool button
flashinog at very fast rate.
b. Lit? handset or press ON/OFF button to
converse.
400.6

ACCOUNT

CODES

When connected to an outside line call:
a. Press pre-programmed’
ACCOUNT CODE
button.
b-Dial account code up to l2-digits,
(‘I’he
other party will not hear the digits being
dialed).
- If account code is less than I2-digits. an
W) must be entered to return to the call.
- If account codes are forced the account
code must be entered prior to dialing the
outside number.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
DISABLE OUTGOING CD LINE ACCESS
The first attendant station can disable CO lines,
preventing outgoing CO calls.
a. Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.
b. Dial (6W on the dial pad, Con&maton
tone is heard
c. Depress the line button(s) of the CO Line(s)
to be disabled. Confiiation
tone is heard
and the CO Line Button LED is flashing.
400.7

4004

iqfinite
DVX I amd DvI[: A
Dipital Key Telephone
!$y&ems

OPERATION

To re-activate the CO Line(s). repeat the steps
followed to disable it.
AN OUTSIDE CAL&
[Automatic
Line !Mection]
a. Press outside line or Pool button. ON/OFF
button LED will light and dial tone will be
heard.
b. Dial the desired party.
c. When called party answers. lift handset to
converse or use speakerphone.
Station user may also dial the individual trunk
group access code to access an outside line.
400,8

PLACING

400.9

AUTOmmC
CALL DISTRIBU!I’lON (ACD]
The Basic ACD Softmre package is an optional
software package avatlable for the infinite Digital Systems. When purchased,
Uniform CaIl
Diskibution
[UCD) is not used and is replaced
by the ACD functions identified in the following.
Eight Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD) groups
can be programmed,
each containing
up to
eight three-digit station numbers.
A. Agent Lq#n/Logout
Feature
The Agent tO@n/logout
feature Provides a
means for an agent to log into one of the
ACD groups and receive calls. For an agent
to be placed into an active ACD state, the
agent must first login. The agent logs in by
perfo-rming the following steps:
I-Dial the LOGIN CODE I5721 on the dial
pad, followed by the ACD group number
(55x) that the agent is going to log into.
or
Press a pre-programm
ed* LOGIN flex button.
2.Tbe agent enters his unique AGENT ID
code (00009999).
The LOGIN flex button
LED will be lit steady. Conffnnation
tone is
heard and the agent is logged onto the ACD
group. The ON/OFF LED will-extinguish
ti
the agent started the sequence in the
handsfree mode. When the agent logs in,
an ACD login event is sent to the ACD
SMDR port, if active.

Issue

1, Jmuaqr

1993

infinite
D&$ti

DVX ’ and DVX ’
Xey Telephone
Systems

FOG an agent to remove himself from the ACD
group as an active agent:
l.Dial the LOGOUT CODE [571] on the dial
pad.
or
Press a pre-programm
ed* LOGOUT flex
button. LOGIN ficx button LED will extinguish. When the agent logs out and removes himself from the ACD group, an
ACD logout event is sent to the ACD SMDR
port, if active.
Conditions:
l
If an agent logs into an ACD group from
a station that is logged into anotherACD
group, the station will be automati&ly
removed &om the previous ACD group.
l
An agent may log out while in wrap-up,
or unavailable.
l
An agent logging in will ihst be placed in
wrap-up mode before receiving an ACD
CalI.
l
If an agent attempts to log into an ACD
group that already has eight members,
that agent will receive error tone.
l
The infinite Digital System will not verify
agent’s ID codes, other than requiring
four digits to be entered.
‘Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
B.

ACD Agent

‘HELP”

button

The ACD Agent “HELP” feature provides a
means for an ACD agent to signat his assigned supervisor
for assistance. A fkx
button must be programmed
for this feature to operate.
Refer to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible Button Assignment.
While on a call in progress. the agent:
‘HELP” flex
* l.Presses his pre-programmed’
button. Confirmation
tone will be heard by
the agent. The agent will see his ‘HELP”
button illuminate
if a supervisor is logged
into his ACD group. If no supervisor
is
logged in. the agent will receive a burst of
enor tone and his “HELP” button will not
illuminate.
The ACD supervisor
station receives a
“HELP” message if a member of one of the
ACD groups he is assigned to Lnitiates a
‘HE&P” request. lhe ‘HELP” function also
sends a Camp-On tone to the speaker of
the supenrisors keyset. The ‘HE&P” message takes precedence over any other message and can he cleared by the supervisor

STATION

FEATURE

OPERATION

by pressing his ‘HELP” button.
At the time the supervisor
receives a
‘HELP” request, he can press his ‘HELP”
flex button foIlowed by his override feature
button to bridge onto the ACD group members call. The ‘HELP” button will place an
intercom
call to the station requesting
“HELP”.
The “HELP” message
wiI1 be
cleared after the supervisor’s *HELP” but-

ton is depressed. In addition. the “HELP”
message will be cleared ifthe agent was on
a call and went back on hook before the
supervisor could respond. In this case, the
“HELP” message wilI be converted to a message wait indication.
The agent can also
clear the ‘HELP” request by hitting his
“HELP” button a second time.
I
Conditions:
. Up to five messages can be left at any
supenrisor station.
l
The supervisor can cancel the “HELP”
request signal hy depressing his flashing
‘HELP” button. In addition. a tail will be
placed to the agent requesting ‘BELT. If
the agent is on a call, the supervisor can
press his barge-in button to monitor the
call or give assistance on the call.

ACD Call Quali5caiion

The CALL QUAIJFICATION
feature provides a means for an Agent to enter codes
on ACD type calls that identifies the call.
This feature provides up to four digits for
the ACD SMDR reporting function.
This
feature permits up to 12 digits to be entered. however only the first. four digits are
provided for ACD reporting.
The QUALIFYbutton
is programmed
using
flex code [57#1.

Iftbe agent wishes to enter

his qualify code in a speed bin. he can do
so using the standard speed bin programming sequence. Then when he programs
his flex button, he can enter 570 followed
by the bin number. This will provide an
agent with a series of buttons with qualify
codes under them. Refer to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible Button Assignment.
While on a call, the agent:
1. Presses the pre-programmed
CALL QUAG
IFY flex button, followed by the four-digit
qualify code. Enter a [*I to complete the
sequence.

infinite
STAT’ION FE.t%TWtE OPERATION

DQitaI

Conditions:
l
The outside party will not hear the (qualify code) account code being entered.
l
The qualify code uses the Grst four digits
of the account code. Therefore the account code record in the SMDRwill contain the quaI@ code in the first four
digits.
l
The quaI@ code must be entered during
CO talk state.
. A [#] can be entered in the qualify code,
however it will not be recognized by the
ACD reporting package.
l

speed

dial

entries

can

contain

all

digits

including the [%I. which will terminate
the entry and return the ACD agent to
his co party.
D. ACD Agent *cue
Matus Display
From an idle display key telephone:
1. Dial (5673 on the dial pad, followed by the
three-digit ACD group number (55x).
Or

press pre-programmed*
flex button,
ON/OFF button LED lights steady.
This display is an idle state display and will
prompt a Supervisor that a group is having
problems answering ail their calls. The display will tell the agent and his supervisor
how many calls are in queue. how many
agent are available
or logged into the
group, and the length of time. in minutes
that the oldest call has been in queue. The
agent will automatically
receive the calls in
queue display whenever their is a call in
queue.
2. Hang up the handset or press the ON/OFF
button to terminate the display.
mui
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
E. ACD Available/Un~&able
Mode
If you are a ACD agent, you may place your
station in tbe Avaflable mode to receive
ACD type of ca& or you may place your
station in the Unavailable
mode to block
ACD type calls from ringing your station.
To go Available:
1. Dial (566) on the dial pad,
or
press the pre-programmed*
AvailabIe/Un400-6

DVX I aad DVX II

Key Telephone

Systems

available
button. You may now receive
ACD eaIls.
To go Unavailable:
1. Dial 1566) on the dial pad,
;ess the pre-programmed*
Available/Unavailable button. You are now blocked from
receiving ACD calls.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
F.
Supemisor
Login/Lagout
Feature
The Supervisor Login/Logout
feature provides a means for an supervisor to log fnto
one of the ACD groups and monitor calls.
1. Dial the LUGIN CODE (576) on the dial
pad, followed by the ACD group number
[55x) that the supdor
is going to log
into,
or
Press a pre-programmed*
LUGIN flex button. (‘Hex button must have 576+55x programmed onto it.)
2.‘I’he supervisor enters his unique SUPERVISOR ID code (000@9999).
The LOGIN
flex button LED will be lit steady. Confirmation tone is heard and the supervfsor is
logged onto the ACD group. ‘Ihe ON/OFF
LED wiI1 extinguish
if the supervisor
started
the sequence in the handsfree
mode. When the supervisor logs in, an ACD
logtn event is sent to the ACD SMDR port,
if active.
For an supervisor to remove himself from the
ACD group as an active supervisor:
1. Dial the LOGOUT CODE [57!51on the dial
pad, followed by the ACD group number
[55x) that the supervisor is going to log out
of,
Eess a pre-programmed*
LOGOUT flex
button.
(Flex button must have 575+55x
progmmmed
onto it). ‘Ihe LCKXN flex button LED will extinguish. When the supervisorlogs out andremoves himselffromthe
ACD group, an ACD logout event is sent to
the ACD SMDR port, if active.
ThcAWt3qmhorLqgin~~.~
fi@tJi?rtfteAQ)fpvipthaisiassipdEo

Conditions:
l

If a supervisor logs into an ACD group
tiorn a station that is logged into another
ACD group. the station will be automat-

Issue 1, January

1893

i@tite

digital

DVX * and DVX ’
Key Telephone
Systems

icaI,ly removed from the previous ACD
group*
l
A supervisor may log out while in wrapup, or unavailable.
l
A supervisor
logging in will fist be
placed in wrap-up mode before receiving
an ACD call.
l
K a supervisor attempts to log into an
ACD group that already has eight members, that supervisor will receive error
tone.
l
The in.@& Digital System will not verify
supervisor’s ID codes, other than requiring four digits to be entered.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible Button
Assignment.
G. S-r
Monitor With Barge-In
The Supervisor Monitor wfth Barge-In feature will provide a means for a ACD supervisor to monitor an agent’s call in progress
or provide assistance in training ACD personnel. When used, a supervisor may intrude onto an agent’s call in a listen only
mode or in a true conference mode. This
feature is available with or without a warning tone.
The ACD supervisor
can intrude on an
agent’s call in the listen only mode by:
1.Dia.l the three-digit station number of the
agent’s station. Upon bearing busy tone,
press the pre-progmmmed*
Barge% flex
button. The conversation
in progress will
be heard by the Supervisor on the handset
receiverand the Supervisor’s MUTE button
LED is lit indicating
that the Supervisor’s
transmit is muted. If the Supervisor wishes
to participate in the conversation in a true
conference
mode, he can depress his
MUTE button which removes mute.

Conditions:
l
SupervIsors are granted the Barge-In option if they log in at a station with the
Supervisor Barge-In flag enabled.
l
Supervisors can only Barge-In on calls of
members of the ACD group(s) that they
are logged into.

Iseue I, January

1993

STATION

FEATURE

OPERATION

Warning tone is enabled and disabled
using the Executive override warning
tone option (FLASH 05, button 4).
l
Supervisor stations must be digital ternlinals.
H. SupcMsor
Queue Status Display
The Supervisor Queue Status feature wtll
provide a means for an ACD supervisor to
view the status of their ACD group. This
display is an idle state display and wiIl
prompt a Supervisor that a group is having
problems answering all their calls. The display will tell the supervisor how many calls
are in queue, how many agents are logged
into the ACD group, and the length of time
in minutes that the oldest call has been in
queue.
The supenrisor statiofi logged onto the ACD
group can obt.a$ the Queue Status display
by:
1. Dialing the Queue Status code I5771 on the
dial pad. followed by the ACT, group (55x)
the supervisor wants to observe,
l

press the pre-programmed’
flex button.
If the supervisor wants to change the display to
a different goup:
1. Dials the Queue Status code [577] on the
dial pad, followed by the ACD group that
he wishes to observe.
or
2. presses the pre-programmed+
flex button
Conditions:
l
To receive the Supervisor’s
Queue
Status display, the station must be
IoggedinasaSupervisorand
dfaltheflex
code for the appropriate group.
l
ACD SupervIsors will receive the Queue
Status display in real time.
l
The Queue Status display is only given
when the ACD group member or Supervisor’s station is not receivjng a higher
prfority display, such as ‘HELP” or OutOf-Service. or other applicable off-hook
events are taking place at the station.
l
The Supervisor’s Queue Status display
is saved in battery backed memory.
l
When a Supervisor logs out of the group
he is presently displaying, he must enter
a new request for Queue Status display.
l
The Supervisor’s Queue Status display
can be removed by dialing the Queue
400-7

iqj?nite DVX 1and DVX ’
STATION

FEATURE

Status

O=‘TTON

display

code folIowed by the
Dialing a different
group will change the Queue Status display to a different group.
The Queue Status dispIay show the followfng information:
group being observed.

- 55x = ACD Group (550-557)
- CIQ:xx = Calls in queue
- &xx
= Agents logged in
- 0C:rmnrn = Oldest call in minutes
ACD
Group Member Status
I.
The ACD Group Member Status feature
provides a means for an ACD Supervisor/Agent to view the status of the eight
ACD groups in the system. This displaywilI
tell the Supervisor/Agent
which stations
are logged into the group, and ifthe station
logged in is Available/
Unavailable,
OutOf-Servfce, fn DND. or busy on a call. The
Supervisor/Agent
couId use this display to
determine why there are a lot of queued
calls in a specific group.
Any station (Supetisor
or Agent) logged onto
the ACD group can bring up the group members
display by:
1. Dial the ACD Group Member Status code
15731 on the dial pad.
or
Press the preprogrammed*
ilex button.
The display now shows ACD Group 550.
2,Dial an [%I on the diaI pad to scroll up to
the next ACD Group.
or
Dial a WI on the dial pad to scroll down to
- the previous ACD Group. To return to an
We display, the station (Supervisor/Agent)
returns to on-hook condition.
Conditions:
l
The ACD Group Members Status display
will be updated at the time the code is
dialed.
l
The status of the ACD agent will be displayed with a letter foIIow%ng the station
number that the agent is log&
in at.
The status wiII be displayed with the
following priority:
- (IV) = Not Equipped
- [D) = Do not Disturb
4ocb8

Digital

Xey Telephone

Gystems

- (0) = Out of se&es
- (U) = Unavailable
- (B)=BusyonacaIl
- (A) = Available
i.e.: If an agent made a call while out of service
his status would be out of service. not busy,

400.10
EAcxG~amD
MUSIC
a. D&l16321 on the dial pad,

(optional)

Eess the pre-programmed*
flexible
ton. [music is heard)
b. Dial 1632) on the dial pqd again,

but-

gess the pre-programmed*
flexible button
again, and music is discontinued.
c. When you pick up the handset
or
Press the ON/OFF button, music is discontinued automatically.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible
Button
ASSigIUDtXlt.

400.11
AUTOkWI’IC
SELECTION
Pressing an outside Iine button, or pool button;
a speed button; a station button: or diahng a
number
in the infinite D@al Key Telephone
system numbering plan, will automaticaIly
activate the speakerphone
and light the ON/OFF
button,
If your keyset is programmed
as a
speakerphone.
4u0.12
CALLaAcs
If you dial a tekpbone tlmt is busy and want to
activate Call Back
a-Press the pre-programmed*
CAL& BACK
button.
b. Hang up.
c. When busy station hangs up. you wiII be
signaled.
d. Answer the call; station you called will then
be signtied. W your station is busy when
signaled, an automatic MSG wiU be Ieft at
your phone.)

Issue 1. Jan-

1995

ir@ife
digital

DVX ’ ad DVX ’
Key Telephone
Systems
Or@oneC%ZLBuckrequestcunbeZ@uta
station;
the
second
converted
to a message

STATION

request
wait

will
be
call
back

*A flex button must be programmed
for this
feature to operate. Refer to Sec. 400.37. FI&ble
Button Assignment.
400.13
A.

GALZ, FORWARD:

STATION

CallForward-AllCalls

If you have been given the abiity to forward
your calls:
1, Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.
2. Fess the pre-programmed*

FWD button.

3. Press DSS button of desired station,
or
Dial the three-digit
extension number
where calls are to be forwarded, including
ACD or UCD. Voice Mail, and Hunt group
pilot numbers.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
Refer to Sec. 405.4, Call Forward-Stations
for
&button operation of this feature.
Conditions:
l
Line Queue. Call back requests, message wait requests.
and pre-selected
messages are canceled when a station
activates call forward.
l
Call back requests are not allowed at a
station where a call is forwarded.
l
COLinecallscanbetransf&bythe
receiving station back to the original forwarded station.
1 A station in the call forward mode may
still make outgoing calls.
- To remove Call Forwarding:
1. Lift handset or press ON/OFF

button.

2. Press the pre-proved*
FWD flex button. Confirmation
tone will be heard and
the CALL FWD LED is extinguished.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible Button
Assignment.
B. CallForward-NoAnswer
If you have been given the abiuty to forward
your calls:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFJ? button.
2. Press the pre-programmed*
3.Dial the Call Forward
on the dial pad.
zssue 1, Jall~

1903

FWD button.

No-Answer

code [71

FEATURE

OPEMTION

4.Dial
the three-digit
extension
number
where calls are to be forwarded. Confirmation tone will be heard.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
Refer to Sec. 405.4, Call Forward-Stations
for
B-button operation of this feature.
To remove Call Forwarding:
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
2.Press the pre-programm
ed* IWD button.
Confirmation
tone will be heard and the
CALL FWD LED is extinguished.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
C. Call Forward - Busy,
If you have been given the ability to forward
your cam
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.
2. Press the pre-programmed*

FWD hutton.

3. Dial the Call Forward Busy code 181 on the
dial pad.
4.Dia.l the three-digit
extension
number
where calls are to be forwarded. ConfIrmation tone will be heard.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
Refer to Sec. 405.4, Call Forward-Stations
for
8-button operation of this feature.
To remove Calf Forwarding:
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
2.Fkess the pre-progmmmed*
lWD button.
Confirmation
tone will be heard and the
CALLIWD
LED is extinguished,
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
D. CaJJ Foxward - Busy/No Answer
If you have been given the ability to forward
your calls!
1. I.Jft the handset or press ON/OFF button.
2. Press the prc-programmed*

FWD button.

3.Dial the Calz Forward Busy/No
Answer
code I91 on the dial pad.
4.DM
the three-digit
extension
number
where calls are to be forwarded. Confiition tone will be heard.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.

400-B

STATXON FEATURE

infinite
DVX ’ and Dvx n
Diffital Key Telephone
Systems

OPERATlON

Refer to Sec. 405.4, Call Forward-Stations
&button operatiOn
Of this feature.
To remove Call Forwarding:
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF

for

but-

ton.

2. Press the pre-programmed*

2.Press the pre-programmed*
FWD button.
Confi!iation
tone will be heard and the
CALL FWD LED is extinguished.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
ASSignmWt.

E. CalI Forward - Of&Net (via speed dial)
This feature allows stations to forward intercom
and transferred CO calls to an off-net location.
In a speed dial bin, store the number of the
off-net location where calls are to be forwarded.
Follow insticl9ons
provided for storing station
or system speed dial numbers.
1. Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.
2. Press the pre-programmed’

FWD button.

3. Dial IS+]on the dial pad. Dial the speed bin
number that contains the number where
calls are to be forwarded,
or
FYess the pre-programmed*
flex button for
the speed bin.
4. Confirmation
tone is heard. FWD button
LED fs flashing.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
Refer to Sec. 405.4, Call Forward-Stations
for
&button operation of this feature.
Conditions:
l

Lfne Queue, Call back requests, message waft requests,
and pre-selected
messages are canceled when a station
activates call forward.

Call back requests are not allowed at a
station where a call is forwarded.
l
COLinecaIlscanbetransfm-redbythe
receiving station back to the O~QIIIA forwarded station.
. A station in the call forward mode may
still make outgoing calls.
l

To remove Off-Net ForwardLTlg
1. IJft handset or press ON/OFF

button,

2.Press the pre-programmed*
FW’D button.
Confirmation
tone will be heard and the
Q%JL FWD button LED is extinguished.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Fl&ble
Button
AsQnment.
400-10

F. Call Forward - ACD or UCD Groups
If you have been given the ability to fomai-d
your calls:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.
FWD button.

3. Dial
171 =
18]=
191=

the desired code:
no answer calls
busy calls
busy and no answer calls.
skip thepnceding
step for immediate
fding.

4. Dialthe three-digttACD
or UCD group pilot
number
(550-557)
for the group (l-8)
where calls are to be forwarded. Confknation tone will be heard.,
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
Refer to Sec. 405.4, Call Forward-Stations
for
8-button
operation of this feature.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
To remove Call Forwarding:
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
2.Press the pre-programmed*
FWD button.
Confirmation
tone will be heard and the
CALL FWD LED is extinguished.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
G. Call Forward - Voice Mdl Groups
Lntercom and Transferred CO callers may
be routed ditectiy to your mail box by forwarding your phone to a voice mail group.
Callers will then b? greeted by your personal voice mail greeting ff available.
If you have been given the abtity to forward
your calls:
1. LAft the handset or press ON/QFl? button.
2. Press the pre-programmed*

FWD button.

3. Dial the desired code:
I7l=noanswercalls
IS] = busy cak
[9]= busy and no answer calls,
skip
-I?.

ftac precdfng

step for

iIrtmdm

4. Dial the three-digit Voice Mail group pilot
number
(440-447)
for the group (l-81
where calls are to be forwarded. Confirmation tone will be heard.

Iseue 1. January

1993

irzfznite
Digital

DVX I and DVX ’
IKey Telephone

STATION

Syetm

5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFI”
button.
Refer to Sec. 405.4, Call Forward-Stations
for
S-button operation of this feature
To remove Call Forwarding:
1. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
ZPress the pre-programm
ed* FWD button.
Confirmation
tone will be heard and the
CALL FWT, LED is extinguished.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
ASSigIlRlWlt.

Call

Forward

- Hunt

Groups

If you have been gWn the abtity to forward
your calls:
1. L.ift the handset or press ON/OFF button.
2. Press the pre-programmed*

FWD button.

3.Dial the desired code:
- 171 =noanswcrcaUs
[S] = busy calls
(9]= busy and no answer calls.

4. Dial the three-digit

Hunt group pilot number (330337)
for the group (l-8) where
calls are to be forwarded.
Confirmation
tone wfll be heard.
5. Replace the handset
or press the ON/OFF
button.
Refer to Sec. 405.4, Call Forward-Stations
for
B-button operation of this feature.
To remove Call Fommrding:
1. Lii? the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
2.Fres.s the preprogrammed*
lWD button.
Confirmation
tone will be heard and tie
.
CAL& lWD LED is errtinguished.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible
Button
Ass@lment.
400.14
CALL FORWARD: PREsm
If a CO Line fomarded
by Preset Call Forward
encounters a manually forwarded station (Call
Forward - Station], or a station in DND, then
the ir~~rnjng CO Line will bypass that station
and forward to the next in the chain. lfthat
station is the last in the chain, then the call WU
not forward any further
and will continue to
Wg at that station until answered
or terminated.

Issue 1. January

1999

400.15
A.

FEATURE

CALL FORWARD:

Incoming
dW

CO fJn#i

OPERATION

CO LINES

Off-Net

(via speed

This feature allows the first attendant station to forward incoming CO calls to an
off-net location.
In a speed dial bin. store the number of the
off-net location where calIs are to be forwarded. Follow instructions
provided for
storing station or system speed dial numbers.
1. Dial [603] on the dial pad.
2. Dial the CO group access code for the CO
Une group to be forwarded,
or
Press an individual CQ Line button.
m=co Group 1
82=CO Group 2
83=CO Group 3
84=CO Group 4
85=CO Group 5
86=CO Group 6
87=CO Group 7
88=All CO Line
3.Dial the speed bin number that contains
the number where calls are to be forwarded,
or
Press the pre-programtned*
flex button for
the speed bin. Confirmation
tone is heard.
To remove Off-Net Forwarding
a. Dial [603] on the dial pad.
b. Dial the CO group access code,
or
press an individual CO Line button.
c. Dial [#I on the dial pad. Confkmation
tone
is heard.
400.16

CAIUNG
OPTION

STATION

TONE MODE

a calling
station to override a called
stations HF or W intercom switch settings.
When pladng a call to a station and Tone ringing is desired:
a Dial [6#] on the dial pad.
b. Dial the three-digit extension number,
Allows

gess DSS button of desired
tone rings station).

station.

(call

MO-11

infinite
DVX I and DVX ’
Di@talKeyTdephoneSystems
400.17
CAJL PARK
To place an outside call in park and consult
with, page, or call an internal party
While connected to an outside line:
a. Press TRANS button. The caller is put on
Exclusive hold.
b. Dial parking location (220 to 227). Co&umation tone is heard.
c. If you hear busy tone. press TRANS and
dial another parking location.
Relieving
a Parked Call
a. Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.
b. Press the pound I#] button.
c. Dial parking
location (220 to 227) where
the call was parked.

400.18

CAtLPICIc-up:

GROUP

When intercom tone rMging, transferred
outside line ringjng, redl
ringing or iniUaIIy ringing call is heard at an unattended
telephone:
a. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
b. Dial I#O] on the dial pad,
Ol-

press the pre-programmed*
PICK UP butto the calling -- party._

ton to be connected
Yolrnuutbeinthc

4-00.19
CALI.+ TRANSFER
Outside lines can be transferred
from one
phone to another within the system. The transfer can be either srxeened (announced)
or un-

screened to either an idle or busy station.
or UCD Group.

Unscreened

Transfer

When the called extension
begins to sign&
hang up to transfer the call (Recall timer starts].
Transfer Search
When attempting
to locate a party:
a. Press a station button to signal the desired
station.
b.If the party is not located. press another
station button to continue the search.
If the party is not located:
c. Press another station button
to continue
the search.
d.When the called party answers, hang up to
complete the transfer.
Answering a Screened tiler
a. Your intercom will be signaling according
to the intercom signal swjtch position.
b. Answer the intercom and receive the transfer notice.
c. Press the outside line button orloop button

flashing

on hold.

400.20

TRANSFERRING
CO CALLS TO A
STATION FORWARDEXB TO VM
While connected to a CO line:
a.Press the TRANS button and dial the extension number of the station forwarded
to
voice mail.
b. The transferring
station hangs up. The CO

calI will be directed
forwarded station.

to the mailbox

of the

ACT.3

or I-hurt Group.

ScreenedTransfer

While connected to an outside line:
Prks station button where call is to be Wursfen-cd (if prog rammed on your telephone),
or

press TRANS button and dial three-digit station
number (100 to 155).
a.The called extension signals according to
the intercom signal switch position.
b. When that extension answers, announce
the transfer.
c. Hang up to complete transfer.

400.21
CAM&ON
Ifyou cdl a station that is busy and wish to alert
them to your call:
a. Press the pre-programmed*
CAMP ON button. Called station will receive one-burst
of
ringing. Wait for their response
b.When calted party answers, consult with
them or hang up to transfer the call.
Ifa8WtIm~s.kDND,unIgtheatiendant
ccmi7amponauingtheattendtmtfeature.

400-12

Issue 1, January

1993

iqfmite
D&ital

DVX ’ and DVX II
Key Telephone
Systems

Answering a Camp On
If you are on a connected call, hear one burst
of muted ringing, and your CAMP ON button is
flashing, you have a call waiting for you.
To answer:
a. Press the CAMP ON button. Any outside
Iine you are connected to wiU be placed on
hold. You may converse with the station
placing the call.
b. Press flashing outside line button. ff a call
is being transferred.
If you do not have a pre-programmed*
CampOn button either:
a. Go on-hook with present eaIL Camp-On
will ring through,
Or

place present call on hold. Then go onhook. Camp-On will ring through.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible Button
A5?qnment.
400.22
CO LINE ACCESS
To access outside Iine:
a. Press idle CO line button,

Pool button,

&
CO line group access code or LCR
access code.
b. Dial number desired for outside call.
c. Lift handset to converse or use speakerphone.
400.23
CO LINE QUEUlNG
A station can queue only one he at a time. If
you see that a particular
outside line is busy
and you wish to be placed on a list waiting for
that line to become available:
To Place a Queue
. a. Press desired busy outside line button,
Twl button. (Busy tone is heard)
b. Press pre-programmed*
IJNE QUEUE button.
c. Hang up.
To Answer a Queue
If you hear ringing and an outside line of the
line group {or a Loop or Group Key), you queued
onto is rapidly flashing:
a. Lift handset or press ON/OFF button,
b. Press flashing outside line button to answer.

hue

1, January

lS93

STATION

FEMURE

OPERATION

*A flex button must be programmed
feature to operate. Refer to Sec. 400.37,
Button Assignment.

for this
Flexible

400.24
CONFERENCE COMBINATIONS
Only stations that have conference enabled will
be able to institute a conference.
l
Add-on Conference: Four internal and one
external or f3ve party internal
l
Multi-Line Conference: One titemal and two
external.

Establishing
a Conference
a. Lift handset.
b. Select intercom station or dial desired outside party.
c. When called party answers. press the preprogrammed*
COW button.
d.Add next conference party by selecting another outside line or intercom station.
e.When party answers, press the pre-programmed* CONF button twice.
f. All parties are connected.
Exiting a Conference (Controller only)
There are three methods of exiting a conference:
1. Press the ON/OFF button to ON, press the
MUTE button, and replace the handset (to
monitor a conference).
Use the following method only if multi-line conference is in progress:
2. Press HOLD button to place outside parties
on hold. Hold timer starts. If one of the two
parties is internal.
that party will be
drvped.
3.Press the pre-programmed*
COW and
hang up or press the ON/OFF button to
leave the other conference parties still connected In an unsupervised
conference.
CONF button will flash and ttmerwill start.
There wiU be a warning tone before the
other parties are dropped.
Re-entering a Conference
When the controller re-enters the conference,
the disconnect timer is reset.
a. I&2 handset to re-enter a monitored conference.
b.To re-enter a conference placed on hold,
repeat steps for establishing
a conference.
4Qo-13

sTATiON

P’i!Si’l”URE OPEZWMON

C. To re-enter an unsupervised
conference.
lift handset and press flashing pre-prograrmned* CONFbutton.
The CONEbutton
lights steady and confkmation
tone will be
heard.
Termktating
a Conference
To terminate a conference the conference initiator who is actively in the conference repfaces
handset or push ON/OFF button to OFF. To
terminate an unsupervised
conference, press
the flashing pre-programmed*
CONF button
while on hook, all parties wilI be dropped.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
PlexibJe Button
Assignment.
400.2s
DATA FEATURE
The Data Feature is a time division switched,
point to point data transmission
capability
which permits simultaneous
voice and data
communications
(within the same system but
not the same port). The Data Feature offers the
ability to transmit
data information
between
personal computers,
printers,
plotters, modems. CRT tennids.
and main frame computer ports.
To establish a Data call a Digital Data Interface
Unit (DDIUj is required to be connected to each
data communications
device. Data information
can be switched through the system at speeds
of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9606, 19.2K and
38.4K baud asynchronous,
To establish a connection to any idle data port:
a.A user with an associated DDIU dials the
station number of the DDIU or the group
accessnumberofthegroupsthattheDDIU
has been inserted into or depresses a DSS
button
representing
the DDIU. The key
system will then determine the baud rate
setting for the called DDIU and convert the
- user’s associated DDIU to the same baud
rate. The system will then complete the
connection.
A second method to establish a connection
between two DDIU is done by the Srst attendant.
a.The first attendant
dfals the extension
number of one data unit. Dial tone is received and the display will show the BAUD
RATE.
b.The first attendant
then dials the station
number of the second data unit. Confirmation tone is heard. This connection will be
maintained
until the first attendant
dials

the station number of one DDIU followed
by pressing the FLASH button.
To break down an established connection:
a.The user dials his associated DDIU number or depress the DSS button for the associated DDITJ.
b. Press the “FLASH” button.
A station user can configure his associated
DDIU by:
a. Dialing the DDIU access code [637] on the
dial pad.
b. Enter the three-digit
extension number of
the DDTU. The display will show the Baud
Rate setting. the character length (8 or 9).
and the number of stop bits (I or 2).
To change the Baud Rate:

’

a. Press the HOLD button
Then enter the
desired one-digit Baud Rate.
- 1=300
- 2= I200
- 3=2400
- 4=4800
- 5=9600
- 6= 19.2K
- 7=38.4K
b.Press the SPEED button
to save any
changes made.
To change the character length:
a-Press the TRAN button. Then enter the
desired one-digit character length, either 8
or 9.
b.Press the SPEED button
to save any
changes made.
To change the number of stop bits:
a. Press the MUTE button. Then enter the
desired one-digit stop bit, 1 or 2.
b.Press the SPEED button
to save any
changes made.
Refer to Station Attributes
Programming,
730.2. Station Identfffcation
for programming
the Station ID of the Digital Data Interface Unit
(DDIU). AlSo refer to Sec. 730.3, D!gititik$
Interface Unit fDDlUl for programmmg
rameters
of the Digital Data Interface
Unit
(DDIU).
Conditions:
0 The system is transparent
to the devices
being connected. Therefore each DDIU
must be configured with a specific baud

r
i@ite

Dfffital

DVX ’ and DVX ’
Key Telephone
Systems

STATION

rate, number of data bits and number of
stop bits. This configuration
will be done
by the first attendant or in the caSe of an
associated data unit can be confiied
by the user.
l
Data ports can be arranged in ACD/UCD
Groups or Hunt Groups.
l
Data ports do not have to be associated
with a keyset. however to connect two
DDIU devices one of them must be associated with a key& unless the connection is made by the first attendant.
l
When the data connection
has been
completed, the baud rate used in the
connection
will be displayed
on the
keyset.
. Non associated DDIU connections
can
be broken down by the Rrst attendant.
l
A DDfU has a IK!E interface. Therefore
a straight through RS-232C cable can be
used connect to a IYIE device (printer,
PC, etc.).
l

Each

DDIU

requires

a digital

zess
the pre-programmed*
DIAL-BYNAME flex button.
b.Dial the desired person’s name using the
keys on the key pad. For example: if you
wanted to calI Linda Murphy,
and last
names were entering into the directory dialing list. you would press the digit 6 &I).
then the digit 8 Wl. then the digit 7 (RI, the
digit 7 again PI. the digit 4 (Hj and finally
the digit 9 (Y).

I
I

W.X.YZ
*does not appear

OPERATION

i
-:

5
6
7

1
I

8
9

1
I

on dial pad.

When the system finds a unique numeric
match (MURPHE687749)
to the name being
dialed, the caIl will be placed to the station
matching the name. The intercom call will
signal the station according to the HF-TN-W
switch setting. if fewer than 8 digits are dialed. the numeric mat& will be dialed after
a 10 sec. interdigittime-out
occurs, orifa’#”
(pound], is pressed.
‘Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible
Button
.
ASS@lIIlUlt.
l

Conditions:
. The system will dial the station that
matches the dialed name when a unique
match is found. If multiple names are
located (found) after 8 digits, the first one
is dialed.
. Thenameswillbeenteredasapartof
the system attributes
database. Numbers may be entered as part of a name.
To avoid conflicts, all names must have
a unique numerical sequence.

terminsl

To dial a station user by name:
a. Dial the Dial-By-Name
code (6’1 on the dial
pad,

JKL
MN.0
P,QL.RS
T.U.V

Port400.26
DIAL By NAME
The system will allow station users to dial extension numbers by entering a name of a person that has been programmed
for that station.
‘Ihe system database will allow entry of a name
(alphanumeric)
up to 24-characters
in length
for each station. This progxammed name can be
used for dialtng-by-name
station users and in
some cases LCD displays.

BWU’URE

MO.27

D IRECTED

GAIL

PICK-UP

When incoming. transferred.
or rec&ing
outside line ringing, intercom ringing, or Camp On
ringing is heard at an unattended
telephone:
a. Dial the station number of the known ringing telephone.
Receive ringback tone, or
call announce tone.
b. Press the pre-programmed*
PICK UP button to answer the call.
*A flex button must be programmed
for this
feature to operate. Refer to Sec. 400.37. Flexible
Button AssigmnenL
Conditions:
l
User must have access to the specific
outside line or a Loop button to do a
directed call pickup.
400.28

DIREcTG

Kp DIALING

- Statfons

Directory dialing allows station users to obtain
a directory of station users and have the system
dial the extension that is currently on the display. The @.@-r0?eDVX ’ System provides loeations for up to 100 names. while the i.r$dk
I.szmc 1, January

1993

400-W

iqjlnite

DW II System provides loCatiOnS
for up to 2OCl
names.
Directory dialing also allows
users to program
a ‘name” along with a speed dial bin for use in
later locating a speed dial number.
When
prompted to do so. the system will display the
name associated with a speed dial number on
the LCD display so that when the desired name
is shown, the user may then have the system
dial the number.
Directory dialing also aIlows users to associate
a Ynamec with an entry in the local number/name translation table. When prompted to
do so, the system wiII display the name associated with the table on the LCD display so that
when the desired name is shown, the user may
then have the system dial the number. The
ir@.W DVX I System provkks locations for up
to 100 names. while the inftzrte DVX ’ System
provides locations for up to 200 names.
The Directory DiaIing list may be programmed
and maintained
at the f&t assigned attendant
station in one of two ways, however this admin
routine provides a means for the directory list
to be maintained
by the system programmer
either locally (at Station 300) or remotely via
modem access.
Directory dialing may also be used to transfer
a caIl from one station to another.
To view the directory

list:
a. Dial the Directory List dial code [680) on
the dial pad,
Ol-

press the pre-progrxmmed*
flex button
programmed
as a directory dialing button.
b. Press a button on the key pad, once, twice
or three times, to represent
the letter of the
alphabet,
to begin viewing
the list of
names. (i.e. the f%st depression of the digit
+ “2” produces the names beginning with an
“A”. The second depression of the digit “2”
produces the names beginning with a -B”,
while the third depression of the digit ‘2”
produces the names beginning wkh a “C”.)
The letters of the alphabet are represented
on the key pad as follows:
ALPHANUMERIC!
CHARACI’ER
ABX
D&F
G.H.1
J.KL
M,N,O
P,Q)*.RS
400-16

DIGIT
2
3

4
5
6

DVX I and DVX '

Digital

Key Telephone

T.U.V

W.x.YZ

8
9

Sy&c.ms
i
:

I *does not appear on dial pad.
i
c. Names beginning with the letter chosen
will appear on the LCD display.
I
Jfthmtarerw
zaam?siltthe~
7
beginning with th.e desired letter. a name
with~RetthigherkttcrwinbesJwnm~
t&LCD dlplq
d. Dial an [*I on the dial pad to scroll up ~next

entry) through the list,
or
Dial a [#I on the dial pad to scroll down
(previous entry) through the list,
or
press another button to view the list for a
different letter of the s&&abet.
e.When the desired name is shown on the
LCD dispIay, pressing the SPEED button
will automatically
dial the destination
station or outside phone number (via speed
dial).
Conditions:
l
If the desired party is an intercom station. that station will be signaled acmrding to that station’s intercom
selector
switch (SLT stations WilI tone ring).
l
If the desired party is associated to a
speed dial bin, the system will select a
CO line and dial the number
programmed into the speed dial bin. Call
progress tones will then be heard.
To Transfer a Call using Directory IXalfng:
Whileonacalk
a. Press the TRAN button.
b.Dial the Directory &I Code (6801 on the
dial pad,
or
press a pre-programmed+
flex button programmed for directory dialing.
c. Press the SPEED button to automaticaky
dial the destination station.
d. Hang up to complete the transfer.
tlvz+mdtoinLernal
-J~moyonty~
stattrnso9aIy.Andiwpttvtnrn@brawU

QJyML ti6aaglx2td cud.-MnJ am reouu in
thealullxai~~goingoltheok.
*Refer
to
Assignment.

Sec.

400.37,

Flexible

Button

7
&ume 1, Jaymary

1883

&finite
~i@tal

400.29

DVX’undDVX’
Key Telephone

Systems

STATION

DIRECT XNWARD SYSTxcM ACCESS [DISAI

a. Call the phone number the system admkistrator specifkd as the DISA line. The
system answers and returns intercom dial
tone.
b. Enter the DISA access code also specified
by the system administrator,
if applimble.
Dial tone is returned.
To place
a. Dial
Diat
b. Dial

The 81 ringtng

I
I

TONE#
00
01

FEATURE

OPERATION

choices are as follows:
:
FRJ3Q
i DURATION
i 120!3/1477
i 5Orns/50ms
I 697/770
! 50rns/5oms

an outgoing call:
a group access code: 9. 82 - 87, CO
tone is returned.
the desired telephone number.
JxucanRDthe

-fram=uL[=R

hnablaLDIZWwe~mnydiaiSlto-

linBininmkg?vupl.

To reach an internal statfon:
a. Dial the three-digit station number.
back tone will be heard.
b. Converse when party answers.

4430.30

DISTJNCTiVE

Ring-

RINGING

The tone ring signal used to not@ stations of
an incoming call can be changed by each station user to provide dM.incttve ringing among a
group of stations. Each station user may select
a distinctive ringing tone that will be used to
ring their station. The system provides 81 different ring patkms that each station user may
select from.
hTo select a distinctive ring tone for a station:
a. Dial the Tone Ring program code. [695] on
the dial pad.
b. Enter the two-digit

tone number. The telephone speaker will sound a steady tone
that correlates to the two digit entry.
c. When the desired tone is selected, press
the SPEED button to save this as the tone
to be presented when the station is tone
rung. Confirmation
tone wiU be heard. This
tone will be presented as a result of an
incoming CO or intercom call, recalling CO
line or Transferred CO line or at any other
time the station is tone rung (refer to conditions below).

Ifislle 1, &l.nuary

1993

4oGl7

DVX ’ and DVX ’

infinite

STATION

FEA’XPRE

OPER4TION

Digit4

Telephone

Systems

conf&mation
tone or other specific tones
that are not considered YKXVE” ringirig.]
l
The selected tone will be used to notify
the station in the following cases:
- Incoming CO Call
-

Incoming

Transferred
CO Line
Re&GngCOLine
Call Back Notification
Message Wait Call Back
All types of forwarded calls
Executive/Secretary
calls
Message Wait Reminder Tone
Ala.tm/Reminder
Signaling
Line Queue Call Back
LCR Queue Call Back

Intercom

Call

400.31
DO NOT DkJRB
If you have been given the ability to place your
phone in Do Not Disturb:
a. Press the pm.-programmed*
DND button.
DND button lights steady.
The DND button
can be pressed while the
phone is ringing to stop the ringing. (Refer to
One-Time Do Not Disturb below.)

Conditions:
l
Station users may listen to alI tones by
dialing the two-digft codes one after another. The tone that is sounding when
the SPEED button
is pressed will be
saved as that station’s tone ringing selection.
l
A station’s tone rhxging selection will be
maintained
in a battery protected area of
memory. Therefore if a system experiences a power fa&xe, or a soft or hard
restart, a station’s tone ringing selection
will be restored.
l
The tone selected will be used to provide
TONE” ringfng normal or muted to the
station whenever
the staffon is commanded to tone ring. (i.e. this does not
apply to camp-on tone programming

Removing Do Not Disturb
a. F?ress the pre-promed*
DND button.
The button LED extinguishes
and DND is
canceled.
*A flex button must be progkxnmed
for this
feature to operate. Refer to Sec. 400.37, Flexible
Button Assignment
A. One-Time Do Not Disturb
Allows you to prevkt calls from ringing at
your station while you’re on a call. The
One-Time DND condition
will automatically cancel when you end your call.
aPress the pre-promed*
DND button
while you’re off-hook and connected to a
CO line or intercom call. The DND button
LED lights and off-hook tones at your station are canceled.
To cancel:
a. Replace the handset The DND button LED
exkinguishes and DND is canceled.
*A flex button must be programmed
for this
feature to operate. Refer to Sec. 400.37, Flexible
Button Assignment

irlfSnite DVX’andDVXn
~j.@taI

Key Telephone

Systema

466.32
EXCLUSIVE HOLD
When a line is placed on Exclusive

STATION

FEATURE

OPERATION

piGiG-

Hold. no

otherstationfnthesystemmnretrievethiscall.

Exclusive Hold may be programmed to be activated on the fist or second depression of the
Hold button. CO Lines while in a transfer hold
are always placed in an Exclusive Hold condition.
400.33
EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE
Allows stations designated as “Executive” the
ability to override and ‘barge in” on other
keysets engaged in conversation.
lfyoucallabusy
station:
a.Pres.5 the pre-progrzunmed’
EXECUTIVE
OVERRIDE button. Executive station will
be bridged onto the CO line conversation
in progress at the calted station. Optional
wamjng tone is heard and presented to all
parties prior to cut-thru.
b.Replace handset at Executfve station to
terminatethe
override.
Condftions:
0 An error tone will
- if the called party
- if the called party
call.
- tithe called party

occurs
is in a conference.
is already on an OHVO
has a Camp-On

at his

station

If the Executive joins a call and one of
the members does a hook-flash or depresses his transfer button, the Executive wiU be dropped.
l
If the Executtve does a hook-flash
or
depresses his &ansfer button, it will be
ignored.
l
When the Executfve jumps in on an intercom call or CO call and the Executive
is not in amute condition, and anymemberofthepa.rtyhangsup,tbecallwillbe
converted to a two-party conversation.
l
When the Executive jumps in on an intercom call or CO call and the Executive
is in the mute condition and either of the
two parties in the intercom call hang up,
the call will be dropped. Ifthe Executive
hangsup,tbeeallwillremainasatwoparty conversation.
‘A Flex button must be progmmmed
for this
feature to operate. Refer to Sec. 400.37. Flexible
Button Assignment.

1, dammy

400.34
l

ExE-/ymY
TRANSFER
If you are designated the Executive station
and your phone is busy or in DND. all calls
will be routed to the Secre&y
station.
If you are the designated Secretary station.
you can signal the Executive that is busy or
in DND by using the Camp On feature.

400.35
FUSH
When connected to an outside he:
a. Press FLASH button to disconnect
line and re-seize outside line dial

outside
tone.

400.96

km@

USE OF THIS FEATURE WHEh’ THE
EXECllTIVE
OVERRIDE
WARNING
TONE IS DISABLED MAY BE INTERPRETED AS A VIOLATION
OF FEDEm
OR STATE LAWS, AND AN
INVASION OF PFUVACY. CONSULT
COUNSELWllX
RESPECTTO APPLICABLE MWS BEFORE INTRUDING
ON CALLS USING THIS FEATURE.

lBB3

FLASH ON INTERCOM
When connected
to a page zone
or another
internal party. press FLASH button to disconnect page or intercom call. Intercom dial tone
will be heard.
406.37
FUXBLE
BUTTON ASSIGNMENT
If you have buttons on your telephone which
have NOT been assigned as CO lines, Pooled
group, or Loop buttons, you may program them
to suit your own individual needs. There are fwe
possible functions you may +ssign to these
buttons;
l
DSS/BLF: ‘Ibis button. when pressed, Ml
automatically
signal the assigned fntercom
station. DSS/BLF buttons a~ programmed
by the station user.
l
FBWURES: This button can be programmed
so that when pressed it Ww activate a particular feature, thus elimimithe need for
dialing the feature code. Some features recpire a flexbutton
to be programmed
for
feature to be accessible to the station user.
Where this is the case it is so designated in
this Feature Operation
Section and user
guide. Feature buttons arc programmed
by

that

400-19

iqfinite

the station user. Refer to Table 400-2 Flex
Button Prog ramming Codes for a complete
Ming
of code/features
that may be programmed onto a flexible button.
SPEED DIAL: This button
can be programmed to automaticaS@ access a speed
number location for one-step operation. PBX
and Centrex codes can be programs ed into
a speed dial bin and accessed by one button
depression.
POOLED GROUP ACCESS: A group of outside lines can be placed under one button.
When this button is pressed, the system will
select an available line from this group for the
user to piace a calI on. Pool buttons
are
assigned in database administration.
LOOP: This button will act as the direct appearing button for outside lines that do not
appear on the user’s individual
telephone.
Table 400-2
loo- I27
100-155
22 ICI

228
33 IHI
MM
55 WI
566
567
571
572 55
573
574
575
576 55
577 55
691

602
603
604
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629

Station
Station

hterwm

Numbers

Flex B&on
(DVX’)

Numbers (DWtq
Call Park Location 1-7 (systcmj
PersonalPark
Hunt Group Pilot Numbers O-7
Voice Mafl Group Pilot Numbtrs O-7
ACD/UCD Group Pilot Nlunbers O-7
ACDfUCD Available/Unavailable
ACD/UCD Calls in Queue Display
ACD A#nt Logout
IV] ACD Agent Lu@n
ACD Group Member Status
ACD Agent Hi+
ACD Supervisor lagout
[UJ ACD Supehrisor
Login
[u] ACD Supervisor
Queue Status
Attendant Override
Disable Outgoing CO line Access
CO Llne Off-Net Forward
Night Service
camp-on
Line Queue
CauEack
Intercom

Message Wait
collfkrcncc

Executive Override/Monitor
LCR Queue Cancel
Account Code Enter
OHVO on
MUIEfeatum

Barge-In

DVX I and DVX ’

Any phone that doesn’t have all lines appear
on it must have a loop button. There is NO
limit to the number of LOOP buttons a sbtion may have. Loop buttons are assigned in
database administration.
To program flexible buttons:
a. Press the SPEED button twice.
b.Press the assigned
button
to be programmed (it must be programmed
in database as a multi-function
button).
c. Dial the desired code. Refer to Table 400-2
Flex Button Programming
Codes.
To erase a flexible button:
a. Press the SPEED button twice.
b. F’ress the button to be erase
c. Press the FLASH button!
d, Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
Rogrammipg
631
632
633 WI
63300
634
635
640
695
70
71
72
73
74
75
76 IO1
76 IR
77
9
#O
#3
[SPEED] YY

CodDo-Not Disturb
Music
Messages
CIear Pa-sonalked Messages
Headset Mode
ICI-ID Display (unanswered calls)
Au Cdl Forward
Distinctive Ringing
All cdl page fIntcn.ld ei Extema.l)
Internal Page Zone 1
fntcmal Page Zone 2
Internal Page Zane 3
fntcmal Page Zone 4
Intclnal All cd Page
Ektcmal All Call Fag&Ml Fkt Zones)
Exkmal Page l-7
Meet-Me-Page Answer
Last cost RDutingAccess
Group call pick Up
Background
Personalized

Universal

Night

hswcr

(UN&

Speed Dial Access
(00-19 Statton) (20-99 Systczn)
ISPEED]+[+%lSaveNumber Redial
WEED]+I#Iht
Number I?edial
W=Sp!?edLml3inn,
22 = Personaiized Messiqes.
U=UWGraupNumberO-7,
c=cdPtlrkLocatfon~?
H = Hunt Gmup Number O-7,
V = Voice Mafl Gnntp

NLmLber 07

P=Eitem&&gezOneNwr&r1-7
4M)-20

lmue

1. Jalllxfq?

1993

i@nite
DVX I and DVB: ’
~M@al IKey Telephone
Systems

STATfON

400.38
GROUP LISTENING
All digital key stations have built in speakerphones. Station users may use the speaker to
monitor a calI while using the handset to converse with the outside party. This enables other
people in the room to listen to both parties in
the conversation.
a.While conversing. on the handset. press
the ON/OFF button. Both parties of the
conversation
can then be heard on the
digital station’s
speaker. The spealcerphone microphone wiII be muted while the
handset is off-hook.
To deactivate Group Listening while off-hook,
the ON/OFF button must be depressed.
Conditions:

While talking using the speaker phone,
then Iifting the handset will turn off of
the speakerphone.
To activate group Iistening, the ON/OFF button
must be
pressed (to ON) while the handset is offhook.
l
WhiIe in group listening mode, pressing
the MUTE button will cause the transmit
from the handset to bemuted [the speakerphone microphone
is already muted).
However the distant end can stiII be
heard over both the handsetreceiver
and
the station speaker.
. Iffull speakerphone operation is desired
while in group listening mode, simply set
the handset on-hook
l
Group listening is not available when the
station is in headset mode.
l
when placing the handset on-hook to go
to full speakerphone
operation. it is normal for a %queal” caused by audio feedback to be heard.
l

MODE
Ifyouwishtouseaheadsetand
havebeengiven
the abflity to do so in progmmming.
To activate Headset Mode:
a. Da [6341 on the dkl pad,
-400.39

FEATUW% OPEBA~ON

To de-activate Headset Mode:
a. Dial 16341 on the dial pad,
$ss
the pre-programmed*
HEADSET
MODE button. LED will extinguish.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
400.40

ICLID uNAlvswERED
CALLMANAGEMENT TABLE
The ICIJD Software Package is an optional software package available for the infin2e Digital
Systems which must be purchased separately
for this feature to be available. Au Unanswered
Calf Management Table with 50 eniry capacity
for the in&.&e DVX I system, and 100 entry
capacfty for the in#.r& DVX ’ system is maintained in the system.Tbe caIlingnumber/name
information
pertaining to any unanswered
caII
wilI be pkced in this table at the time the
system has determined that the call has been
abandoned.
This table may be interrogated from any station
user so that the unanswered
calls may be reviewed and handled by the end user. Upon
entry into the review process, the functions
available to a phone are:
Function

Function
Button

1. Gotobeginningoflist

HEADSET

>ss pre-programmed+
HEADSET
button. LED WLzlIi&t steady.

MODE

To interrogate the ICIJD Unanswered Call Management ‘Fable from any station in the system:
a. Dial the access code [635) bn the dial pad.
b. When the desired list entry is displayed on
the LCD, press the SPEED button to automatidly
dial the hst entxy.
To review the next item in this entry:
a. Press the MUTE button to toggle to the next
item.
b. Press the ON/OFF button to &t the review
function.

Iaaue 1, January

1983

400-21

infinite
STATION

FEATURE

DigWal Key Telephone

OPERATION

TO review the next l&t entry:
a. Press the HOLD button.
To

400.41
RVTERCOM CALTJNG
Placing an Intercom Call
a. Press the DSS button of the party to be
called (if prograrnm ed at your phone).

extension

number

(100

b.You witi hear ringing if called station is in
the TN” answering mode; or two bursts of
tone ff called statfan is in the “HF” or “PV”
position.
c. Uft the handset or use the speakerphone,
after the i3vo tone bursts stop.
d. Iiang up to end the call.
Answering an Intercom Call
With your intercom signal switch in the TN
(right) mode, you will hear repeated bursts of
intercom tone ringing and the HOLD button wU1
slow flash.
a. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button to answer.
or
Move the intercom signal switch to the
‘HJ? mode to reply.
b. Replace the handset to end the call.
In the “W mode, you will hear two bursts of
tone and one-way announcement.
The HOLD
button will slow flash and the calling party
cannot hear conversations in progress.
a. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button to answer,

Intercom transfer using DSS buttons:
a. Receive or make an intercom calI using a
DSS button.
b.Press the TRANS button.
Intercom
dial
tone is heard.
c. Press the DSS button where call is to be
transferred.
d. Hang up (station 1 and 2 are connected).
400.43

signal

switch

to the

In the WI?” mode. you wi.Il hear two bursts
tone and an announcement.
Replyhandsfree
lift the handset for privacy,
MO.42

INTERCOM

of
or

TRANSFER

Intercom transfer without DSS buttons:
a. Receive or make an intercom call,
b.Press the TRAM button,
Intercom
tone is heard.

Test Mode Menu: The menu allows the
operator to select a test mode by pressing
the mode number at the dial pad. The
operator can always return to the main test
menu by pressing I##].
Eeyset LCD/LED
Tc&
This test outputs a series of continuously
repeated LCD string messages to LCD lines
I and 2. The set of strings consists of the
letters ‘A’ through X and ‘a’ through
‘x’.
The next set of sirkrgs are:

dial
l

400-22

KEY?SET SELF Tl@T

The infinite Digital Key System contains a test
mode feature that Supports the off line testing
of digital keysets and ‘DSS units. The term off
line means that the unit under test is discoanetted from the switch during the test operation. Keysets not under test continue to operate
in the normal manner. Tests are provided to
verify the keyset and DSS LED, LCD, and keyboard button operations.
a.The test mode is entered by taking
a
keyset’s handset off hook.
b. Press the SPEED button and dial I7#] on
the dial pad. This keystroke sequence disconnects the keyset from the system and
brings up the Test Mode Menu on the
keyset’s LCD. The test mode is exited by
putting the handset back on hook. This
reconnects the keyset to the system.

Move the intercom
“HF mode to reply.

Systems

c. Dial the station where the call is to be
transferred.
d. When the 2nd station answers, you are in
a supervised transfer mode [lst station is
staged for transfer].
e. Hang up (station 1 and 2 are connected].

review the prwious list ena. Press the TRANS button.

& the three-digit
to 155).

DVX ’ and DVX ’

The strings are alternately displayed
lines 1 and 2 of the LCD display.
r8slle

1. JaIluEry

1993

iqfinite
~jgital

DVX’andDVKn
Key Telephone

Systems

STATION

In addition, all the LEDs are flashed at
the rate of 15 IPM.
B. Keyset Button Test
1. Pressing a keyset button turns on the LED
and displays an LCD message identifying
the button number.
l

Pm m
+**+t**

mTm.s
*******

In addition swWhing the I-TIP switch from
one position to another will cause the letter
‘HJOS”,
T-POS”, or “PPOS” to be ciisplayed.
2.Pressing
dial pad keys dispIays an LCD
message that indicates which digit was
pressed.
3.LEDs can be tested independent@
of the
KEYS by pressing the flex LEJD number at
thedialpad.Fore.xample,LED
lOisturned
on by pressing dial Pad digits “1” “0”. As
each set of new numbers Is entered the
previously lit LED is turned off and tbenew
LED is turned on. Invalid flex values [ex
00.99) turn off currently lit LED.
C. DSS ISD/Button
Test
When the DSS test is selected and a DSS
test is invoked ALL DSSs associated with
the keyset running the test are placed in
test mode.

Conditions
l
Test mode interrupts the normal
tion of a keyset or DSS.

opera-

400.44
LAST NUMSER REDIAL
a. Press the SPEED button.
b-Press the pound I#] key. T’he last number
dialed over an outside line will be automatic&y re-dialed.

~asue 1, January

1993

OPERATION

- The system will automatically
select the
original line used to place the calI and
redial the number.
- If that line is busy, the system will automatically select another Line from the
same group and redial the number.
- If no lines are available in the same
group, station will receive busy tone and
can queue for a line.
- If the station user preselects a line before
activating
LNR the preselection
will
override the line which was used originauv400.45
LEAST COST ROUTING
To place an outside call when LCR has been
enabJed in the system:
a. Dial [9] on the dial pa;.
b. Dial the desired seven-digit
telephone
number (Le.: 1+ area code+7-&git
number).
c. Wait for an answer. Uft the handset or use
the speakerphone
to converse.
If all hnes available to you are busy, remain
off-hook for four seconds to automatically
be
queued onto LCR for an available line.
If an LCR Queue Callback has been activated:
a When telephone is signaled, answer the
Call.

b-Desired telephone
idly be re-dialed.
Ifno DSS unit is associated tit the keyset,
the keyset display wilI indicate “NO DES.
The DSS LED test will cause all the LEDs
to flash at a 15 IPM rate. Once started the
DSS LED test will continue until a DSS flex
button is depressed. Pressing a DSS flex
button turns on the flex key LED and displays an LCD message on the associated
keyset fdenfi@ng the flex button number
(01 to 48). In addition.
it turns off the
previously selected flex LED.

FEM’URK

number

will

automat-

If an LCR Queue Callback has been a-ted
and you wish to cancel that callback request:
a. Dial the LCR Queue Cancel code, 16261 on
the dial pad.
b. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
400.46
MEET ME PAGE
To request another party to meet you on a page:
a.Dial the desired two-c&it
or three-digit
pa.gQ code,
ypre-programmed*
PAGING but&n.
b. Request that party meet you on the page.
c. Do not hang up: wait for the requested
parSto ansWer.Assoonasthepagedparty
answers and is connected to you, the page
circuit is released.
400-23

infinite
DVX ’ and DVX ’
Digital Key Telephone
Systems
hswering
a Meet Me Page
a. Go to the nearest telephone
on the dial pad,

and dial 1771

Eess the pm-programmed*
MEET ME
PAGE ANSWER button. You will be connected to the party that paged you.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible Button
Assignment.
400.47
IlEES%GE WAlTING
Leaving a Message Waiting Indication:
If you dial a station that is busy, unattended,
or in DND, you can leave a message waiting
indication.
a. Dial the Message Waiting Code I6231 on the
dial pad,
Eea.s the MSG button. Called party’s MSG
button wiIl siow flash.
b. Replace the handset to end the call,

Answering a Message Waiting Indication
If your MSG button is flashing at a slow rate,
you have a message waiting for you. The i%rst
message left will be the tit
one c&ed.
a. Press flashing MSG button. Station that
Ieftmessagewill
be signaled with tone ringing*
b. If called station does not answer, press
MSG button once to leave message.
400.48
MUTEKEY
The MUTE button
provides privacy during
speakerphone
or handset
operation by disabling the microphone.
a. Press the MUTE button while off-hook on
- speakerphone
or handset to activate,
b. Press the MUTE button again to deactivate,
The mute feature automatically
deacttvates
upon call tertmnation.
400.48
NIGHT SERVICE FEATURE
The Night Service feature will provide a means
to put the system in night mode ffrom any keyset
or remove the system from night mode from any
keyset as long as the system was put in night
mode by the Night Service feature flex button.
If the system was placed in night mode by the
attendant using her Night Sentice (DND) button
or ifthe systemwas placed in night mode bythe
automatic schedule, the Night Service flex but-

400-24

ton can not remove the system from night
mode.
From an idle station:
a Dial the Night Service feature code [604] on
the dial pad.
or
Press the pre-programmed*
Night Service
flex button. The system is now in the Night
Service Mode.
To remove the Night Sewice Mode:
b. Dial the Night Service feature code 16041 on
the did pad again,
or
Press the pre-programmed’
Night Service
flex button again. The system is now removed fkom the Night Service Mode.
400.50
OFF-EXKIK PREF&ENCE
If your phone has been programmed
for 0ffHook Preference, you will access an outside
line, or a feature by going off-hook or pressing
the ON/OFF button.
While OfHIook Preference is enabled. you may
access LnternaI intercom dial tone by:
a. Pressing your pre-programmed*
ICM button,
or
dial your own three-digit intercom number. (Do not lift handset or press ON/OFF
button before diaXng intercom number.)
LED lights steady and intercom dial tone
wiIl be heard.
b.You may now dial an internal station or
Feature Access code.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
400.61
OFF HOOK V&E
OVER (OHVO)
This feature allows users, off-hook on a call [CO
or Intercom). to receive a voice announcement
through
the handset receiver without
interrupting
the exisiing call. The V&e Over is
muted so as not to ‘override” or ‘drown” out the
&sting
conversation.
The overridden
party
may then respond to the calling party using
CAMP-ON procedures
to talk to the calling
party or may use Silent Text Messto IXspend to the calling partyvia U3D Displays.
Placing an Off-Hook Voice Over [OHVO) call:
When an OHVO station calls a busy OHVO
station, and busy tone is received.
a. The calling OHVO station dials the OHVO
code (6283 on the dial pad,
or
presses a pre-progrred*
OHVO button
Issue 1. January

1993

*tie
D&ftal

DVX’andDvX’
Key Telephone

Systems

STATION

to initiate an OHVO announcement.
The
HOLD button LED will flash at the called
CR-IV0 station.
b . Both OHVO stations will receive a one-beep
warning tone. The station receiving the
OHVO call must be off-hook and in the
“HF” mode, and then the calling OHVO
party may begin the voice announcement
to the called OHVO party. The called OHVO
station’s existing conversation
will not be
interrupted
and the voice over annourxement
will not “drowned”
out the
existing conversation.
The calling OHVO
station will not be connected to or otherwise be able to hear the called station’s
conversation (the connection will only allow the calling station to transmit to the
called station).

I-.

The calling (originating] station and receiving station (STA B) must be OHVO
digital terminals.
ti When the dialed station responds via
Camp-On
all conditions
and options
available to Camp-Gn apply (refer to the
feature description for Camp-On).
l
OHVO may be used to notify the called
party of a transferred
call (CO Line or
Lntercom) by announcing
the call. then
releasing to complete the transfer. When
t+is occurs, the receiving station does
not need to respond to the OHVO.
l
When a call is transferred via OHVO. the
receiving station will not receive muted
ringing after the transfer is complete.
l
Any messages including
‘CANNED”,
‘CUSTGM”, or ‘SIL?ZNTRESPONSE” text
messaging may be used to respond to an
OHVO call. The message will appear on
the calling station and called station
LCD displays.
l
If the calling station is a non-LCD term&
nal, the called station will receive error
tone when responding via text messaging.

Responding to an Off-HookVoice
Over (OHVO):
After receiving an OHVO announcement,
two
options are available to respond to the calling
Partu;
l.The called OHVO station may respond to
the calling OHVO station by using the
Camp-On feature. The called OHVO station presses the flashing HOLD button to
consult with the calling station. The existing call (CO line) goes on Exclusive Hold
automatically.
This method, then follows
Carnp-On procedures and operation.
2. The called station may respond to the calling station by using the Silent Text MIX+
sagtng [this feature is only available to
digital key terminals, and the calling station mustbe a dfgftal display terminal.) The
c&xi OHVO station may press pre-programmed Message button to respond to the
voice over announcement
without
being
released from the current call, (i.e. by
pressing a flex button pre-programmed
for
the message “IN MEETING”), the calling
station will receive this message on the
calling station’s LCD display.

Conditions
l
The station receiving the OHVO call
MUST be off-hook and in the ‘HF mode.
Issue I. &muary

1993

OPERATION

i
‘k..._

FEATURE

The called station may press a flex button programmed
as a Text Message button, (633#+XXl. This flex button may
then be pressed to respond to the calling
station. MMF digits will not be heard by
eftber party.
The receiving
station must be programmed to allow OHVO MRS.
When silent messaging is used to rezspond to an OHVO call, the r&sting call
on the called station will not be disconnected. while the messages are being
sent to the caUng station.
The calling station of an OHVO caIl must
remain off-hook to receive silent measages. The calling station’s voice transmitwill
remain connected to the called
station and may respond verbally to the
text
messages. The OHVO call ends
when the calling station goes on-hmk.
lf the receiving station is on-hook in
speakerphone
mode and a calling party
initiates OHVO. the receiving station will
receive a Camp-On warning
tone and
normal Camp-On procedures
are followed.

400-25

iqfinite
STATION
.

FEA’WRE

OPERATION

DigItal

The calfed station may send (multiple
messages) and even after sending a message, may press the Camp-On button to
talk to the calling station, Each time a
message is sent, the spksh tone will be
heard and both displays will be updated.
l
LED’s will follow Camp-On iJ3D lamping
sequences.
Each station can be programmed
to allow receiving
OHVO cds as part of Station Programming. Each station may be programmed
for
OHVO in one of two ways, as follows:
- OHVO disaIlowed
(may not receive
OH-v0 calls).
- May receive OHVO calls.
l

400.52
PAGIWG
If you have been given the ability to make page
armouncements:
a. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
b.lI)ze “,’ two-digit
or three-digit
paging
p&
pre-programmed5
PAGE button.
7O=AlI Call - Internal & l3xterna.I
7 l= Internal Zone 1
72= 1ntema.I Zone 2
73= Internal Zone 3
74= Internal Zone 4
75= Internal AU CaU
76[0]= External All CaIl (AU Ext tines]
?SIZ]= External Zone
(DVX I 1-4. DVX ’ l-7)
c. Speak in normal tone of voice to deliver
message.

reweave

.ringback

tone

until

the zone

400.53
PBX/CENTREX
TRANSFER
While connected to an outside line IpBX/Centrex):
a. Press the FUSH button. Receive transfer
dial tone.
b. Dial a PBX/Centrex
station number.
C. Hang up to complete transfer.

Key

DVX’andDVX*
Telephone
Systems

400.54
PERSONAL PARK
Each station in the system (digital terminals
and SLTs can piace a call into a personal park
looation and then later retrieve that call from
the originating station.
While connected to an outside line:
a. Press the TRANS button. The caller is put
on Exclusive Hold.
b. Dial the Personal Parklocation
(2281 on the
dial pad. Confirmation
tone will be heard.
Retrieving a Parked Call:
a. From the station that parked the call, dial
the Personal CalI Park Iocation code 12281
on the dial pad. Both the station and the
call wiIl receive a warning tone and then a
talk path is established between the two
parties.
Conditions:
..
l
Only one call can be parked in a Personal
Call Park location at cme time. When
dialing the personal park location and
that location is already occupied, the
initiating party receives a busy tone. The
user may then press the TRANsfer button to return to intercom dial tone to try
a system park location
l
Intercom calls and CO line calls can be
placed into the station’s personal park
location.
Calls parked in a personal park location
are subject to the “system” call park
recall timer.
* A call parked in a personal call park
locatfon will recall to the station that
parked the caIl when the call park recall
timer expires. The call win ring fnto this
station until the system hold timer expires. The call will then reoaIl to the
attendant(s) (at this point, the attendant
station and the initiating
station arc
rh@r@. and the attendant
recall timer
is initiated. When the attendant
recall
timer expires. the eaU will be disconnected.
* A digital terminal user can program a
flexible button as a Personal CaIl Park
feature button which when pressed WIU
park the call. Call Park retrieval can be
performed by going off-hook, dialing the
pound
[#I key. then press the programmed Personal Call Park button.
l

i@nLte
DVX ’ and DVX J-I
D&it,aI Ecy Telephone
Spsteme

STATION

400.55
PERSONALIZED
-GES
Each station can select a preassigned
message
to be displayed on the LCD of any key telephone
calhg that station.
There are ten possible messages which can be
left.
a. Dial 16331 on the dial pad,
Or

press a pre-programmed*
MSG button.
b.Dial the two-digit code for the meSSage
which will appear.
00
01
t

02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09

clears message
ON VACATION
RETURNAM
RETURNPM
RETURNTOMORROW
REruRNNExTwEER
ON TRIP
IN MElEnNG
AT HOME
ON BREAK
AT LUNCH

I
As an enhancement
to the original canned
messages, station users can actiwte certain messages that xxill allow the user to
enter a spedfc time or a date of return.
These messages will appear on calling station’s display to alert them of the de&red
par&% return time or date.
Users may activate the following messages
and be prompted to enter a time or date of
return:

11
12

VACATION UNTIL: h4M/DD
RETURNz I3WMM xrn or MM/DD
13
ON TRIP UNTUz MM/DD
14
MEEnNG UNTIL HHrMMxm
15
AT HOME UIVlE HH:MMxm
16
ONBREAKUNTIL:
HZ%IiWxm
17
AT LUNCH LINT& HFI:M?vf xm
To activate a message with a custom return
time or date, the station user:
a. Dials the Message Access code {6X3] on the
dial pad.
b.Then dial the desired message number
Ill

- 171.

c. Enter the date/time
by using buttons
the dial pad a~ follows:

A-21

B=22
c =23
D =31
E =32
F =33
G =41
H =42

’

FEATURE

M =61

1 =l#

(

“qO1

IV=62
0~63

i
]
:

2=2#
3=3#
4=4#
5=5#

1
]
j

.=02
?=03
/=04

Rs72

;

6=6#

I
’

I=*1
$=*2

s =73

7 =7#

o/b =*3

P =71
Q =74
1

OPERATION

T=Bl
U ~82
V =83
w=91

8 =8#
I =43
9 =9#
J -51
o=MI
K =52
Space =ll
X ~92
: 212
L=!53
Y =93
- =13
Z=94
’ =14
d.Press HOLD to enter message.
tion tone is received. ’

& =*4

I
1

I=#1

] =#2
+ =#3
= =#4
# =##

Confi-

To cancel the message:
a. The station user dials the Message Access
Code (6331+ IO01 and hangs up.
B. Pe.rsonaziz;ed Mtzrsages - Custom
Each station can select fi-om ten possible
custom messages to be displayed on the
LCD of any key telephone calling that station. These messages are programmed
from the first attendant station,
1. Dial 1633) on the dial pad,
or
press a pre-programmed*
MSG button.
2. Digl the desired two-digit code (2 l-30) for
the custom message desired. ‘Ihe first attendant should provide a list of messages
to each station user.
C. Ftrsonalizcd
M-e
Codt On AFkx
Button
You c2in pqrani
the code [633) onto a
flexible button to speed access of pre-selected messages.
1. Press the SPEED button twice.
2. Press the desired flex button.

L3ZD flashes.

3. Dial I6331 + I#] on the dial pad. ConfIrmation tone is heard. The user can now press
that flex button and dial the two-digit
canned message number @O-10), or the
two-digit custom message number (21-30)
to activate or deactivate the message. ConfInnation tone will be heard.
Conditions:
* The telephone
receiving the message
must be a display telephone.

~mYI”ION

OPERA’i’TON

Digital

Both key telephones and SLTs may activate the message. SLTs are notified
that they have an active message with a
warning tone when going off-hook,
l
Incoming and outgoing calls are not inhibited in any way with a message disPlaYed.
l
When a message is displayed by a key
telephone. the DND button LED flashes
at 15ipm.
l
When DND is invoked on the telephone
the message is canceled.
l
Message Access (with a desired message)
may be assigned to a flex button.
. Messages may be entered while off-hook
0nacallffanintercomcalIisringingin
or has camped-on to the station. This
will cause the station calling to see the
message.
. Messages are retained in battery protected area of memory In the event of
power failure or system reset.
l

400.66

PRIME
MING

FLEX BUTTON

400.57

PROG RAMMING
YOUR NAME
INTO THE LCD DISPLAY
Every extension [key and SLT) has the capability to program the users name so that people

using display telephones wiIl see the name instead of the station number.
a. Dial ISSO] on the dial pad.
b. Enter the name [up to 7 characters may be
entered) by using keys on the dial pad as
follows:
A=21
B=22
C=23

M =61
N =62
0 =63

D =31

P =?I

E =32

F=33
G =41

Q =74
R =?2
s=73

H =42
I =43

T&1
,.
U =82

J =51
K =52
L=53

v =83

PROGRAM-

If your phone is programmed
for Of&Hook Preference and have been given the ability to enable
or change the prime flex button.
a. Dial 16911 on the dial Pad
b. Dial the two-digit button number. Refer to
following chart”

infinite
DV22’ and DVX ’
Key Telephone
Systems

w=91

l=l#

Z=2#
3 =3#
4 =4#
5 =5#
6r6#
7 =7#
8 =8#
9 =9#
Q=O##

i
1

space = 11

X =92
Y =93
z =94

: =12
- =13
’ =14

c. Press the SPEED button
programmbg
process.

“-01
,=02
3 =03
/=04

I =*1
$ =*2
% =‘3
& =*4
;==#‘;
) =#2
+ =#3
= 3#4
# =##

to complete

the

To erase your name:
a. Dial [690] on the dial pad.
b. Press the SPEED button.
400.5S

PULSE-TO-TONE
SWM’CHOVER
The signabng on an outside lfne can be changed
Corn dial pulse to tone (DTMF) manually while

dialing out
To perform the change-over
a. Dial an I*] on the dial pad. The remaining
digit(s) will be sent using DTMF.
The Pulse to Tone Switchover command
may
also be included into a speed dial bin. Refer to
Sec. 400.63, Storing Speed Numbers for Speed
Dial programming.

~~~Jq-y---]
To disable Off-Hook Preference:
a. Dial [691] on the dial pad.
b. Dial IO01 on the dial pad.

400.88
SAVE NUMBER REDIAL’
If you wish to save the last number

you dfalecl
for use later:
a. After placing an outside call, keep,handset
off-hook
b. Press the SPEED button twice.
To Dial a number
that was saved using
steps above:
a. Press the SPEED button.

400-213

hsue

1. JamaIy

the

1993

i@nite
~i@taI

DVX’~dDVX’
Key Telephone

Systems

b. Dial the asterisk [*I button.
- System will automatically
select the
original line used to place the call and
r&al the number.
- If that line is busy. the system will automatically select another line from the
same group and redial the number.
- If no lines are avaiiable in the same
group. station wfll receive busy tone and
c3.n queue for a line.
- If the station user preselects a line before
activating
SNR. the preselection
will
override the line which was used origin*400.60

PRoGRAMhaN
G ~/CENTREX
CODES ONTO F=
BUTTON
For easy one-button
access to Centrex or PBX
features, perform the following steps:
a.Program the Centrex or PBX code into a
station or system speed dial bin, including
hook-flash
(flash key], I*], and [#I commands. Refer to station or system speed
dial prom.
b.Program
that speed bin onto a flexible*
button.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible 3utton
Assignment.
400,61
SPEAKER.EIONE
a.Press ON/OFF button to “ON”. Intercom
dial tone w-ill be heard.
b.F’ress the DSS button of the desired party,
or press an available outside line button
and dial number.
Speakerphone
is actic. Press ON/OFF

button

to “OFF” to end the

STATION
b.Dial 16361 on the
extension number
located. Once this
tributes are copied

FEATURE

OPERA’ITO~V

dial pad. Then dial the
of the station beingreis done, ah station atto the current station.

mm
Conditions:
l
The station number that is dialed as the
relocated station must be currently out
of service.
l
The relocated station will be given the
station attrIbutes of the station doing the
relocating. The two stations have traded
station numbers aqd station attributes.
. If a keyset is piugged into the relocated
position it will have all the station attrib
utes of the relocating station.
l
This feature onIyis appkcable to keysets.
l
If a call is on hold at the relocating station or the relocated station is in service,
error tone will be received.
400.63
STATION WEED DIAL
Ifno outside line has been speclfied in programming, one w-ill be chosen automatically
or you
can choose one now.
a. Press the SPEED button and dial bin location.
Eess the pre-programmed*
speed bin button. Station Speed numbers are 00 to 19.
b. when the called party answers. pickup the
handset or use the speakerphone
to conJ
verse.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Dutton
Assignment.

400.62
STATION RELOCATION
lVi2iTURE
The Station Relocation Feature will provide a
means to allow a user to unplug their station
and plug it in at another location. Then by
dialing a simple code followed by his old station
number, bring all the station attributes including extension number, button mapping, speed
dfal, and class of service to the new location.
a. A station can be relocated by unplugging
it
and then ph@ng
it in at a new location.

400.64
STORING SPEED NUMBERS
Station Speed numbers
can be entered by
keyset users. System Speed numbers must be
entered by the first programmed
attendant.
If
no attendant is specified, enter at Station 199.
a. Press the SPEED button once.
b. Press a desired outside tie button or pool
button
or
select an outside line automat.icaIly
by
pressing the SPEED button a second time.
c. Dial the speed bin location.
- 00 to 19 for Station Speed numbers:

Digrti
- 20 to 99 for System

Speed numbers.
d.Dj& the desired telephone number.
(including special codes described below)
- TRANS - Pressing the TRANS button
during number entry initiates a PulseTo-Tone switchover.
- HOLD - Pressing the HOLD button dwing number entry inserts a Pause.
- FLASH - Pressing the FLASH button inserts a Flash into the speed number.
- TRANS - Pressing the TRANS button as
the first entry in the speed bin inserts a
no-display character causing the numbers stored in the bin not to appear on
the Digital Terminals display when the
bin is accessed.
e. Press the SPEED button.
f. Replace the handset to end the speed bin
p=)gramming*
To program several speed numbers In a row,
press the SPEED button twice to conclude programming a number and then just enter the
next speed number bin to be programmed.
zf
the station has no line appearance for the line
programmed
into the speed bin. that line will
come up under the Loop button or Pool button
when accessed.
400.65
SYSTEM SPEED DIAL
If no outside line has been spec3fied in programming, one will be chosen automatically
or you
can choose one now.
a. Press the SPEED button.
b. Did the speed bin location,
or
press pre- programmed8
speed bin button.
- System Speed numbers are 20 to 99.
c. When the called party answers, pickup tbe
- handset or use the speakerphone
to converse.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
400.66

TEXT

MESSAGING

(Went

Rc-

While receiving a Camp-On, or OHVO call:
a.The called party may press a pre-progranxned* Text Message button with a specific message (633+xx]. Example : (6331 +
[3S] means that a telephone
calling the
station wiIl receive the message WHO IS
ITT.
The additional
messages (with their codes)
listed below can also be sent as a text response:
31
!IWILLTAKECALL
32
T-MESSAGE
33
TRANSFER TO SECRETARY
PUT CALL ON HOLD
34
35
CALL BACK
36
ONE MOMENTPLZASE
37
I WILL CALL BACK
38
wH01sm
39
IS ITLONG DISTANCE?
40
IS lT PERSONAL?
41
IS ITAN EMERGENCY?
42
IS IT IMPORTANT?
43
IS IT URGENT?
44
SEND CALL TO VOICE MAIL
45
PARKCALL
46
OUT OF OFFICE
47
PUT CALL THROUGH
48
I AM BUSY
49
O.K.
50
NO
51
Conditions:
l

BP-4

This a feature allows a staUon user to use text
messages to respond to a caller that has either
Camped-On
or has used the m-Hook
Voice
Over feature to alert a busy station user of a
waiting call or message. The ‘camped-on”
statian may respond to the caller via the canned,
custom, and silent response text WD) me+
sacSes. The text messages appear on the calling
PW
LCD Display.

iqfmite
DVX * and DVX I1
Key Telephone
Sy&ems

the

station

receiving

the

text

message

response was doing a camp-on, he will
first receive a short burst of tone on the
speaker, then the display will show the
message that has been activated by the
called station.
If the station reee.iving the text message
response is on an OHVO call, no tone will
be received.
All canned and custom messages may be
used to respond to a calling party.
Text
response messages will automatically clear when the calling station (station receiving
the messages]
goes
on-hook.
A station can receive only one message
at a time.
T&messages
may be chained (i.e. multiple messages sent to one caller).

..:
‘\,.

\..

:cc
f.:’
-..-.

iqfinib
~i#z.al

DV2Z’andDVX’
Key Telephone

Systems

STATION

4 Text message responses may only be
activated by digital terminals
and the
receiving station must be a Digital Display telephone.
4 The text message responses will appear
on both the calling station and the called
station
(station
activating)
text responses] LCD displays.
l
If the cdlfng station is a non-LCD tetmiml. the called station will receive error
tone when responding via text messaging.
l
The &led station may press a flex button programmed as a Text Message button, j633#+xx).
This flex button may
then be pressed to respond to the calling
station. DIM? digits will not be heard by
either party.
4 When silent messaging is used to respond to a ca.U. the existbg call of the
called station will not be disconnected
while the messages are being sent to the
calling station.
4 The calling station must remain off-hook
to receive silent messages.
l
If the called station responds with a text
message, the text message will appear on
the LCD.
l
LED’s will follow that of the CAMP-ON or
OH-W.
l
Each individual
message may be programmed onto a fIexIble button Lnchding a flex button on a DSS/BLF console.

400.67
UNIFOEM CfU, DISTRIBUTION
*
[UCD)
Eight Uniform CalI Distribution
WCD) groups
can be programmed,
each containing
up to
eight three-digit station numbers.
Each group
is assigned a pilot number. When this number
is dialed, the first available agent in that group
is rung. Calls are routed to the station that has
been on-hook for the longest period of time.
A
TJCDCdsIn@ucueDieplay
From an idle display key telephone:
1. Dial 15671 on the dial pad, followed by the
three-digit UCD group number (SW.
or
press preprogrammed*
flex button.
ON/OFF button LED lights steady.
Issue 1, January

lQB3

FEATURE

OPERA’IYON

This display is an idle state display and will
prompt a Supervisor that a group is having
problems answering all their calls. The display will tell the agent and his supervisor
how many calls are in queue, how many
agent are available
or logged into the
group, and the Iengtb of time in minutes
that the oldest caIl has been in queue. The
agent will automatically
receive the calls in
queue display whenever their is a call in
queue.
2. Hang up the handset or press the ON/OFF
button to terminate the display.
Thisfeab-cuuwtotbcaedrrtWtaarllin~

pfvgnssaltdtfro-tpittbcw
*Refer

busy

for

Sec.

incoming

400.3?.

calls

during

Flexible

this

Button

Assignment.

UCD Availa?de/Unavdable
Mode
If you are a UCD agent, you may place your
station in the Available mode to receive
UCD type of calls or you may place your
station in the UnaWIable
mode to block
UCD type calls from ringing your station.
To go Available:
1. Dial 15661 on the dial pad,
or
press the pre-programmed*
AvailabIe/Unavailable button. You may now receive
UCD calls.
To go Unavailable:
1. Dial [566] on the dial pad,
or
press the pre-programmed*
Available/Unavailable button. You are now blocked from
receivfng UCD calls.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
400.68

UNIVEiRSAL

NIGB’T ANSWER

If you hear out&de line WI&~
at another station and wish to answer it, dial [#3] on the dial
pad. The connected outside line can be transferred or disconnected.
Each telephone
utillzfng Universal Night Answer must have a loop
button appearance if the ringing out&de hne
does not appear at their phone,
400.69
VOICE MAIL ~PERA’MON
[vaa)
Forward Callers to your Mall box
Intercom and T’kansferred CO callers may be
routed dfrectiy to your maiI box by fomding
your phone to a voice mail group. Callers will
400-31

irlfinite Dvx’andDvxn
Dwtal
then be greeted by your personal voice mail
greeting
if available (Refer to CalI Forward Voice Mail ~t?rationl
Retrieving Voice Messages
If your Message Waiting button or programmed
Voice Mail group button is flashing. you may
have a voice message waiting for you.
To enter the voice mail system to check formail:
a. Dial the Voice Mail group number,
or
press the pre-programmed*
voice mail
group button or flashing Message Wait
button.
b.You will immediately be prompted to enter
your password for your maiI box.
Receiving a Voice Mail Message Wait
To receive a message waiting indication that a
voice message has been taken for you, the Voice
Mail system must be programmed
to provide
such an indication.
After the voice mail system receives a voice
message for a station user:
a.The voice mail must go off-hook and dial
the voice mail message wait code I4201 on
the dial pad.
b.Dial the three-digit
extension number of
the station user who received a voice message.
Turning the Message Waiting Lamp m
When a station user retrieves the voice messages from the voice mail system, the voice mail
system must;
a. Be programmed
to go off-hook and dial the
message cancel code [421] on the dial pad.
b. Dial the three-digit
extension number of
the station user who retrieved the voice
message.
l Kefer to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
A Voice Mail Trapefer with ID
This feature provides an Attendant
or station user a way to transfer a caller dfretiy
mto a vofce mail box TI&3 allows the statfon identif?cation
digits to be entered by
the tmnsfening
party. Using this feature a
caller can be transferred to a voice mail box
when: 1) a station user on the system is not
forwarded
to VM, or 2) the destination
Voice Mail Bcoc owner is not a station user.
When a caller wishes to be transferred into
a usefs Voice Mail box and the desired
user’s station is not forwarded into voice
400-32

Key Telephone

Systems

mail, then the attendant or a station user
may initiate a Voice Md Transfer.
’
While on a calI and the distant end wishes to
leave a Voice Message for a VM user
a. The initiating
station presses the TRAIVS
button.
b. Dial the Voice Mail Group number,
or
press the pre-programmed’
VM group button.
c. Dial the VMID (Mail Box location) of the
desired party and go on-hook. The system
will then make the connection to an available Voice Mail port and send the Leave
Mail Refix (if any) + the digits dialed as the
VM ID number + then the Leave Mail Suffix
djgits (if any). The system wiIl then cut
through the transferred caIler.

Conditions:
0 CO Trunks and Internal Calls may be
transferred
into Voice Mail using this
feature.
l
Ifno VM ID digits are dialed by the transfer-ring station then the identification
digits of the IransfwrLng
station will be
sent to the VM.

VMToneModeCalhgOption

Allows the Voice Mail system to override a
called stations
“H??” or ‘RV” intercom
switch settings.
When pladng a call to a station and Tone rfnging is desire (the Voice Mail system MUST be
programmed
to:
a Did i6#1 on the dik pad.
b. Dial the three-digit station extension (call
tone rings station).
400.70
VOLUME cONrBoU3
There are two volume control slide switches on
the front of the 33-button
digital key terminal.
Sliding the switch to the left decreases the
volume. The middle slide switch controls the
volume
for voice, background
music,
and
speakerphone
volume. The right slide SwiLch
controls the volume for tone ringing volume.

mnle

1, January

less

i*ite

D@al

DVX ’ and DVX ’
Key Telephone
Sjmtemfi

S-BUTTON

BXYSET FEATURE

OPERATION

SECTlON4Otj

&BUTTON

KEYSET

405.1
INTRODUCMON
The infinite Digital Key Telephone System has a
wide var3ety of features and fl&ble
programming, allowing each telephone user to program
his/her telephone to meet his/her own individual needs.
This section of the manual contains the operating insk~~ctions for features that work different&on the &button digital key telephone than
on the 33-button
display key telephone. Also
included is an Illustration
of the B-button digital key telephone used in the in&&e Digital Key
Telephone System and description of the keys
on the telephone and its functions.
It is intended that this section be used in conjunction
with the Station Operation section to p&de
a
complete. set of fnstructions
to all features in
the system. Visual and audible cues which
accompany tie various steps in the operation
of the features are also inchaded.
Literature
simUar to these operating instructions has been prepared for use by the customer
intheformofan&buttonStatfonUser’sGtide.
406.2

KEY TEIJWHONB

STATION

FEA-

The in&&
Digital Key Telephone System provides the following keys. indicators
and features on the &button
dig&al terminal:
HANDSET AND SPEAKER are located at the
left side of the front panel. Ahandset is provided
to allow conbdential
conversation
when desired. Ltfting the handset from its cradle [going
off-hook)
disengages
the station’s
built-in
speaker.
The speaker is located directly below the center
portion of the handset. The station may be
operated wfth the handset on-hook. When this
occurs, audio is transrnwted to the station user
through the station’s speaker.
FLEXIBLE
BUTTONS are used to access idle
outside lines. provide DSS/BLF for internal
stations. access speed dial number and activate
features. These buttons are programmed by the
individual station user. The default flex feature
buttons are described below:
DSS/BLZ (flex) button allows you to autornatictiy signal the assigned intercom station. DSS/BLF buttons are programmed

Issuel,

January

1993

FEATURE

OPERATION

by the station user. By default, flex buttons
1 and 2 are set for Stations 100 and 101.
L0OP (flex) button will act as the direct
appearing button for outside lines that do
not appear on the user’s individual
telephone. Any digital terminal that doesn’t
have all lines appear on it must have a loop
button. ‘There is NO limit to the number of
LOOP buttons a station may have. Loop
buttons are assigned in database administration.
POOL (fief) button &bles
a group of outside lines to be placed under one button.
When this button is pressed, the system
will select an available line from this group
for the user to place a crib on. Pool buttons
are assigned in database administration.
FXED FEATURE BUTTONS:
WSFER
[TRANS) button
is used to
transfer an outside oL1 from one station to
XlOthher.

SPEED button provides you with access to
speed dialing, save number redial and last
number redial. This button is also used to
access speed dial and flex button programmLng.
ON/OFF button enables you to make a
telephone call without l@ing the handset
It turns the telephone on and off when
using the speakerphone.
HOLD button er@les you to place an outside caller on hold.
MSG IABEP indicates
Message Waiting
Callback requests left at you station.
OUTSIDE CALLS are announced
by a tone
signal repeated every 3.2 seconds. The corresponding
outside line indicator
will flash
slowly.
IRTRRCOM CALLS can be tone @#ng or voice
announce If it is voice announced.
the recetving
station will receive 2 bursts of tone prior to the
announcement.
If it is a tone ringing calI+ the
receiving station will hear a tone ring every 2.4
seconds.

405-l

Digital

Figure
us-2

405-l

S-Button

Digital

Termin&

Ecy Telephone

Systems

iqjlntie

D&itd

DVX I and DVX ’

Key Telephone

Sy&ems

Table

405-Z Digitnl

System

i 1 OO-127Station Intercom Numbers DVX ‘1
100- 155Station Intercom Numbers DVX ‘)
22 [ClCalI Park Location O-7 (system)
i 228PersonaI Park
: 33 D-ID-Iunt Group Pilot Numbers O-7
4% IVlVoice Mail Group Pilot Numbers O-7

55 [UlACD*/UCD
Group Pilot Numbers O-i’
; 566ACD’/UCD
Available/Unavailable
’ 567 55 rVbCD*/UCD
Calls in Queue Display
570 @BlACD’ Call Qualifier
57 lACD* Agent Logout
572 55 ILIIACD* Agent Login
573ACD* Group Member Status
574ACD* Agent Help Request
6# IXXXJTone Mode Ring Optron
62oCamp-o~
621he
Queue
622Call Back

623Message Wait
624Confermce
626LCR Queue Cancel
629MU7E Button
63 1Do Not Disturb
633 IZZlPersonalized
Messages
633 IOOlClear Personalized Messages
64oAllcanForward
640 [7lNo Answer - Call Forward
640 I8JBusy - Cdl Forward

Issue 1, January

1893

8-Button

Numbering

plan

840 IS]Busy/No Answer - Call Forward
640 (S]Off-Net - Call Forward
66OFlash Command to CO Line
662Clear - Call Forward, DND.
Personal Messages
663Message Wait return
664Conference
W/ Personal Park
690Name in Display Programming
7OAll Call Page (Internal & External)
7 1 Internal Page Zone 1
72hternal
Page Zone 2
73Internal
Page Zone 3 ’
74Intemal
Page Zone 4
75lnternal
&.I Call Page
76 fOJExtemd Ail Cdl Page (All Zones)
76 [PJExtemal Page Zones l-7
7’?Meet-Me-Page Answer
9JXR or CO Lfne Group 1
(if LCR is disabled)
OAttendant
#OGroup Call Pick Up
# 1Directed Call Pick-up
#22 1CJCa.U Park Pickup
#3Univcrsal
Night Answer
Xxx = Intercom Station Numbers
YY = Speed Did Bin numbers
22 = Personalized Messages
U = ACD/UCD Group Number O-7

4Q6-3

~.IHJTTON
405.3

KEYS=
AuTOmTIC
TION (ACDJ

F’EATUFUZ OPERATION
CALL DISTRIW-

The Basic ACD Software package is an optional
software package available for the infinite Digital Systems. When purchased,
Uniform CalI
Distribution
(vCD) is not used and is replaced
by the ACD functions identified in the following.
E&l-&Automatic
Call Distribution
[ACDJ groups
can be programmed,
each containing
up to
eight three-digit station numbers.
A

Agent

Lq#n/Logout

Ftaturt

The Agent I.ogin/Logout
feature provides a
means for an agent to log into one of the
ACD groups and receive calls. For an agent
to be placed into an active ACD state, the
agent must first logfn. The agentlogs in by
performing the following steps:
1. Dial the LOGIN CODE [57!2] on the dial
pad, followed hy the ACD group number
(55x) that the agent is going to Iog into,
or

Press a pre-programmed’
LOGIN flex button.
2.The age.& enters his unique AGENT ID
code KKKN3-9999). The LOGIN flex button
LED will be lit steady. Confirmation
tone is
heard and the agent is Iogged anti the ACD
group. The ON/OFF LED will artlnguish if
the agent started the sequence in the
handsfree mode. When the agent logs in,
an ACD login event is sent to the ACD
SMDR port, if active.
MUi

For an agent to remwe himself from the ACD
group as an active agent:
1. Dial the LUGOUT CODE [571] on the dial
pad,
Kess a pre-programmed*
LOGOUT flex
button. The LOGIN flex button U3D wilf.
extinguished.
When the agent logs out and
removes himself from the ACD group, an
ACD Iogout event is sent to the ACD SMDR
port, if active.
Condftions:
l
If an agent logs into an ACD group from
a statton that is logged into another ACD
group, the station will be automatica@
m-noved hm the previous ACD group.
l
An agent may log out while in wrap-up,
or unavailable.
405-4

@in&?
DVX I aad DVX ’
Digital Xey T&phone
Systems

9 An agent logging in will first be placed. Ln
wrap-up mode before receiving an ACD
call.
l
If an agent attempts to log into an ACD
group that already has eight members,
that agent will receive error tone.
e The i@nite Digital System wiU not verify
agent’s ID codes. other than requiring
four digits to be entered.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Fletible
Button
Assignment.
B. ACD Agent “HZLP” button
The ACD Agent ‘HELP” feature provides a
means for an ACD agent to signal his assigned supervisor
for assistance.
A flex
button must be progra&med
for this feature to operate. Refer to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible Button Assfgnment.
While on a call in progress, the agent:
1. Presses his pre-programmed*
“HELP” flex
button. ConfIrmatlon
tone will be heard by
the agent. The agent wiU see his “HELP”
button illuminate if a supervisor is logged
into his ACD group. If no supervisor
is
logged in. the agent wiIl recefve a burst of
error tone and his “HELP” button will not
illuminate.
The ACD supervisor
station receives a
WELT message if a member of one of the
ACD groups he is assigned to initiates a
“HELP” request. The “HJZLP” function also
sends a Camp-On tone to the speaker of
the supervisors keyset. The ‘HELP” message takes precedence over any other message and can be deared by the supervisor
by pressing his “BE&P” butin.
At the time the supenrisor
receives
a
-HELP” request he can press his WXP”
flex button foIlowed by his override feature
button to bridge onto the ACD group members call. The ‘HELF’” button will place an
intercom
call to the station requesting
“HELP”.
The ‘HELP” message will be
cleared after the supervfsor’s ‘HELP” button is depressed. In addition, the “HELP”
message will be cleared ff the agent was on
a call and went back on hook before the
supervisor could respond. In this case, the
“HELP” message will be converted to a message wait indication.
The agent can also
clear the ‘HEW” request by hifzting his
“HELP” button a second time.

Isme

1, January

1995

i@mite
DVX I and DVX I1
D&Ml
Key Telephone
Systems

Conditions:
l
Up to five messages can be left at any
supervisor station.
l
The supervisor can cancel the “HELP”
request signal by depressing his flashin&
‘HELP” button. In addition, a call will be
placed to the agent requesting “HELP”. If
the agent is on a call, the supervisor can
press his barge-in button to monitor the
cdl or give assistance on the call,
l
The “HELP” feature access code (FACODE) will permit a single line telephone
to access the WEIF
feature. The SLT
after hook-flashing
whiIe on a call can
dial the F’LRX CODE [574J to leave the
“HELP’ message. The SLT will be returned to his call after the code is dialed.

ACD Call ~catiou

The CAL QUALJFICA~ON
feature provides a means for an Agent to enter codes
on ACD type calls that identifies the call.
This feature provides up to four digits for
the ACD SMDR reporting function. This
feature permits up to 12 digits to be entered, however only the flrst four digits are
provided for ACD reporting.
The QUALIFY button is programmed using
flex code [570#1. Ifthe agent wishes to enter
his quallfy code in a speed bin. he can do
so using the standard speed bin programming sequence. Then when he programs
his flex button, he can enter 570 followed
by the bin number. This will provide an
agent with a series of buttons with qualify
codes under them. Refer to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible Button A&gnment.
bhile on a call, the agent:
1. Presses the pm-programmed
CALL QUAL.IFY flex button, foIlowed by the four-digit
quAUfy code. Enter a [+#I to complete the
sequence.

Condttions:
l
The outside party will not hear the (qualify code) account code being entered.
l
The qualify code uses the first four di@ts
of the account code. Therefore the account code record in the SMDR will contain the quali@ code in the fist four
digits.

Issue 1, January

1995

The qualify code must be entered during
CO talk state.
A I#) can be entered in the qualify code.
however it will not be recognized by the
ACD reporting package.
Speed dial entries can contain all digits
including the I%], which will terminate
the entry and return the ACD agent to
his co party.

ACD Amilab~c/IJnavailab~e
Mode
If you are a ACD agent, you may place your

station in the Available mode to receive
ACD type of calis or you may place your
station in the Unavaiiable
mode to block
ACD type calls from ringing your station.
To go Available:
q
1. Dial 15661 on the dial pad,
or
press the pre-programmed*
AvaiJable/Unavailable button.
You may now receive
ACD calls.
To go Unavailable:
1. Dial 15661 on the dial pad,
Eess the pre-programmed*
Available/Unavailable button. You are nowblocked from
receiving ACD calls.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
405.4

CAW, FORWARD:

STATION

A
CallP’ommrd-AllCalls
If you have been given the abilfty to forward
your cans:
1. Wt handset or press ON/OFF button.
2. Dial the Call For&&d
pad.

code 16401 on the dial

k
the pre-programmed*
FWD flex button.
3. Press DSS button of desired station,
or
dial the three-digit
extension
number
where calls are to be forwarded, including
ACD or UCD Group, Voice Mail Group. and
Hunt group pilot numbers.
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
Conditions:
m Line Queue, Call back requests, message watt requests,
and pre-selected

405-5

8%BUTTON KEYSET

FEATUREZ OPERATION

messages are canceled when a station
activates call forward.
. cdl back requests are not allowed at a
station where a call is forwarded.
l

CO
Line calls can be transferred by the
receiving station back to the original forwarded station.
A station in the call forward mode may
still make outgoing calls.

To Remove Call Forwarding:
1. Uft handset or press ON/OFF

button.

2. Dial the CalI Forward Cancel code, I6621 on
the dial pad.
or
Press the pre-programmed*
FWD flex button. Confirmation
tone will be heard.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Lkssi@meIlt.
B. CalfForward-Nohwu
if you have been given the ability to forward
your calls:
1, Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.
2. Dial the Call Forward code [640] on the dial
pad,
or
Press the pre-programmed*
FWD flex button.
3.Dial the Call Forward No-Answer code [7]
on the dial pad.
4.Dial the three-digit
extension
number
where calls are to be forwarded. Confiition tone wfll he heard.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
To cancel Call Forwarding:
3. Lift the handset or press the ON/ OFF button.
2. Dial the Call Forward Cancel code, [662] on
the dial pad,
or
Press the pre-programmed*
FWD flex button. Con&nation
tone will be heard.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
C. CXIFCWVWY~-B~
If you have been given the ability to forward
your calls:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.
the Call Forward
dial pad.
or

2-Dkd

405-6

in.ite
DVX ’ and DVX ’
D#itml Key Telephone
Systems

code, [6401 on the

Press the pre-programmed*
FWD flex button.
3. Dial the Call Forward Busy code 181 on the
dial pad.
4.Dial the three-digit
extension
number
where calls are to be forwarded. Confirmation tone will be heard.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
To cancel Call Forwarding:
1. LifI the handset or press the ON/OFT button.
2. Dial the Call Forward Cancel code, 16621 on
the dial pad.
Ls
the pre-programmed*
lWD flex button. Con&nation
tone will be heard.
*Refer
to Sec. ;QCl9.37. Flextble
Button
Assignment.
D. Call Fonvard - Busy/No Answer
If you have been given the ability to forward
your calls:
1. L&t the handset or press ON/OFF button.
2.Dial the Call Forward code, I6401 on the
dial pad,
or
Press the pre-programmed*
IWD flex button.
3.Dia.l the Call Forward Busy/No
Answer
code (91 on the dial pad.
4.Dial the tlxrce-digit
extension
number
where calls are to be forwarded. Con&mation tone will be heard.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
blltt0l-L

To cancel CaU Forwarding:
1. LB the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
2. Dial the Call Forward Camel code, 16621 on
the did pad.
or
Press the pre-programmed*
FWD flex button. Confirmation
tone will be heard.
‘Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
E. Cd Fomvard - Off-Net [via speed dial)
In a speed dial bfn, store the number of the
off-net location where calls are to be forwarded.
Follow instructions
provided for storing station
or system speed dial numbers.
This feature allows sbtfons to forward intercom
and transferred
CO calls to an off-net location.
Issue 1, January

1993

1. Lift handset

or press ON/OFF

button.

2. Dial the Call Forward

code. 16401 on the
dial pad,
or
press the pre-programmed’
FWD flex button.
3.Dial[%Jonthedialpad.Thendialthespeed
bin number
that contains the number
where calls are to be forwarded.
or
Press the pre-programmed*
flex button for
the speed bin. Confirmation
tone is heard.
FWD bution LED is flashir@
4. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
Conditions:
l
Line Queue, Call back requests, message wait requests.
and pre-selected
messages are canceled when a station
activates call forward.
l
Call back requests are not allowed at a
station where a call is forwarded.
l
COLinecaUscanbetransferredbythe
receiving station back to the original forwarded station.
l

A station in the call forward
still make outgoing calki.

Canceling C&Net Forwarding
1. LffI handset or press ON/OFF
2. Dial the CaU Forward
the dial pad.

mode may

button.

Cancel code. [66Z] on

Press the pre-programmed*
FWD flex button. CALL FWD button
LED is extinguished.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button

lASSi~eIlt.
F.

Call Forward

- ACD or UCD Groupa

If you have been given the abruty to forward
your calls:
I. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.
2.Dial the Call Forward code, 1640) on the
dial pad,
or
Press the pre-programmed*
FWD flex button.
3. Dial the desired code:
(il=noanswercalls
PI= busy calls
(91= busy and no answer calls.

hue

1, January

Skip

the

step

for

4. Dial the three-digitACD

or UCD group pilot
number
(550-557)
for the group (l-8)
where calls are to be forwarded. Confymation tone will be heard.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible
Button
Assgrlment.
To cancel Call Forwarding:
3. Uft the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
2. Dial the CalI Forward Cancel code, [662] on
the dial pad.
Eess the pre-pro&ed*
FWD flex button. Con&nation
tone will be heard.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible Button
Assignment.
0.

call Forward

- voice

Mail

Groups

Intercom and Transferred
CO cal3ers may be
routed directly to your mail bax by forwarding
your phone to a voice mail group. Callers will
then be greeted by your personal voice mall
greeting if ava.Uable.
If’ you have been given the ability to forward
your lxius:
1. Lift the handset or press ON/OFF button.
2.Dial the CaU Forward
diaI pad,

code, 16401 on the

St’
the pre-programmed*
FWD flex button.
3. Dial the desired code:
[7] = no answer calls
[8] = busy calls
19]= busy and no answer calls.

4. Dial the three-digit

Voice Matl group pIlot
number
(440-447)
for the group (l-8)
where calls are to be forwarded. ConfIrmation tone will be heard.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
To cancel Call Forwarding:
1. Uft the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
2. Dial the Call Forward Cancel code, (6621 on
the dial pad,
or

405-7

in_finite
&BUTTON

KEY-SET FEA’MJRE

Cdl Forward

- Hunt

Groups

If you have been given the ability to forward
your calls:
1. L..ift the handset or press ON/OFF button.
2. Dial the call Forward code, 16401 on the
dial pad,
or
Press the pre-programmed+
FWD flex button.
3. Dial the desired code:
[7]=noaIlswercails
[S] = busy calls

4. Dial the three-digit Hunt group pilot number (330-337) for the group (l-8) where
calls are to be forwarded.
Confkmation
tone will be heard.
5. Replace the handset or press the ON/OFF
button.
To cancel Cdl Forwarding:
1. L,ift the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
2. Dial the Call Forward Cancel code, [662] on
the dial pad,
or
Press the pre-programmed*
FWD flex button.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
405-b

CALLING
OPTION

STATION

TONE MODE

The 8-button
keyset will initialize
to the
handsfree mode any time it is powered up or
reset. If the user is in the tone ringing mode, he
will be returned to the hands&e
mode if the
power is turned off or the system is reset.
When the tone ringing mode is desired:
a. Dial the Tone Mode Option code 16673 on
the dial pad. This code will toggle between
the handsfree and tone rhging mode.
405.6

CONFERENCE

WXEI

PERSONAL

PARK

While connected to an outside he:
a. Press t-beTRANS button. Transfer
is heard.
405-S

Di@iz3l Key Telephone

OPERATION

Press the pre-programmed+
FWD flex button. confirmation
tone wiu be heard.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assi&nmeilt.

DVX I and DVX ’
Systems

b.Dial~228]onthedialpad.(lstcallisplaced
in personal park].
c. Dial desired number for 2nd call.
d.Press the TRANS button again. Transfer
dial tone is heard.
e. DiaI [664] on the dial pad. All three parties
are conferenced.
f. Replace the handset to terminate
conference.
405.7
CO IJNE QUEUING
A station can queue only one line at a time. If
you see that a particular
outside line is busy
and you wish to be placed on a list waiting for
that line to become available:
To Place a Queue
.
a. Press the Pool button. Busy tone is heard.
b. Press the pre-programmed*
LINE QUEUE
button.
c. Replace the handset.
To Answer a Queue
If you hear ringing and an outside line of the
line group (or a Loop or Group Key), you queued
onto is rapidly flashing:
a. L&t handset or press ON/OFF button.
b. Press flashing Pool button to answer.

*A flex button must be programmed
ftaturt to operate. Refer to Sec. 400.37,
Button ~sigmnent.

for this
Flexible

405.8
DIRECTED
GAIL PICK-UP
When incoming, transferred,
or recalling outside line ringing, fntercom ringing, or Camp On
ringing is heard at an unattended
telephone:
a. Dial the station numbr
of the lu10wn ringing telephone. Receive rfngback tone, or
call announce tone.
b. Press the pre-programmed*
PICK UP button to answer the call.
*A flex button must be programmed
for this
feature to operate. Refer to Sec. 400.37. Flexible
Button Assignment.
Conditions:
l

User must have access to the spcdfc
outside line or a Loop button to do a
directed will pickup.

dfal tone

Issue I, Januarp

I993

infinite
Dfgi&d

DVX ’ and DVX n
Key Telephone
Systems

DO NOT DISTURB
405.9
If you have been given the ability

S-BUTTON
405.11

to place your

phone in Do Not Disturb:
a. Lift the handset or press the UN/OFF

but-

t0Il.

b. Dial the Do Not Disturb code I63 l] on the
dial pad,
or
hess the pre-programmed*
DND button.
DND button lights steady.
Removing Do Not Disturb
a. Dial the Do Not Disturb code (6311 on the
dial pad.
or
Press the pre-programmed*
DND button.
The button LED e.xtin@shes
and DND is
canceled.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
405.10

BUES!UGE

WARTNG

lf you dial a station that is busy, unattended,
or in DND, you can leave a message waiting
indication.
a. Lift the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
b.Dial the desired intercom station. Busy
tone or DND tone is heard.
c. Press the TRANS button. Transfer dial tone
is heard.
d-Dial the Message Wait code (6231 on the
dial pad, Confnmation
tone is heard.
e. Replace the handset.

Answering a Message Waiting Indication
If your MSG WAIT lamp is flashing, you have a
‘message waiting for you. The first message left
will be the first one called.
a. Ldft the handset or press the ON/OFF button.
b. Dial the message wait return code I6631 on
the dial pad. Staffon that I& message will
be signaled with tone ringing.
c, If called station does not answer, dial the
message wait code [6231 to leave message.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37,
Flexible Button
Assignment ~

bmx? 1, January

1993

HEYSET

FEATURE

OPERATION

MUTE-

The MUTE feature provides privacy dutig
speakerphone
or handset operation
by disabling the microphone.
To activate the Mute feature:
a. Press the pre-progmmmed+
MU’lE button
while off-hook on speakerphone
or handset to act&ate.
To de-activate the Mute feature:
a. Press the pre-programmed’
MUTE button
again to deactimte.
The mnte feature
auronmticoaly
d4!admwrrpbncall-*.
*A flex button MUST be programmed
for this
feature
to operate.
*Re199)
- XXX = Either a Station Number, system
Speed dial bin Number, or Local Number/Name Translation Table number
- IU-UI = Programmed Name (blank if none)

To clear an entry:
a. Press the TRANsfer button. Then press the
FLASH button.
b.Press the SPEED button,
Confirmation
tone wiIl be heard and the entry will be
erased.

420-12

Imllc

1, YaxWary

1993

@finite
DVXrandDVXn
Digital Key Telephone

Systems

ATTENDANT

FEATURE

OPERATION

MethodTwo:
This method may be used to enter names that
will be associated to the Local Number/Name
Translation Table only.
To Select a diiierent

entry in the Directory List:
a. Press the HOLD button,
b.Enter the three-digit
enlry number (OOO099 for DVX I System, 000-199 for DVX ’
System) on the dial pad and press the
SPEED button,
%il [*ii to scroll up (next entq)
list,
zial I#) to scroll
through the list.

down

through

(previous

To enter a name along with a local
her/name translation table number:
1. Press the TRANS button.

the

entry)
n~m-

Z.Dial the three-digit
local number/name
translation
table number (300-499) that
represents the desired telephone number.
To Enter or Change the current name shown on
the display:
1, Press the MUTJ3 button.
Z.Then enter the name (up to 24-characters
may be entered) by using keys on the dial
pad as follows: The displav will update as
thename is entered.
- A=21
B=22
C=23
D=31
E =32
F=33
G =41
H =42
I=43
3 =51
K =52
L&33

M=61
1 =l#
N =62
2 =2#
0 =63
3=3#
P=71
4=4#/
Q =74
5=5#
R=72
6=6#
s =73
7 =7#
T=81
8=8#
u =82
9 =9#
v =83
O=O#
w=91
Space =I1
X =92
: =12
Y =93
- =13
Z=94
’ =14
3.Press the SPEED button when
Confirmation
tone wiU be heard.

~uc1,Jan~1993

* =01
, =02
7 =03
/=04
1 =‘l
$ =*2
Oh =*3
& =*4
* =‘#
(=#l
) =#2
f =#3
= =#4
# =##
finished.

This method may be used to enter names that
will be associated to a system speed dial bin
04Y*
To enter a name along with a system speed diaI
number:
1. Press the SPEED button once.
2. Press a desired outside line key
or
Press the SPEED button a second time to
have an outside line selected automatically.
3. Dial the system speed dial bin location (20
to 99).
4. Dial the telephone number (including speclal ch;lracte~~TRANS,
HOLD and FLASH).
5. Press the SPEED button to store the teIephone number.
To enter a name:
1. Press the MUTE bution.
2. Enter the name (up to 24 characters may
be entered) by using keys on the dial pad
as foIlows:
A=21
B =22
c=23
D=31
E =32
F -33
G-41
H =42
I=43
J =51
K =52
L=53

M =61
1 =I#
N =62
2 =2#
0=63
3 =3#
P=71
4=4#
Q =?4
5 =5#
R =72
6 =6#
s =73
7 =7#
T=81
8 =8#
u =82
9 =9#
v -83
0 =O#
w=9x
space =11
x =92
: =12
Y =93
- =13
Z=94
’ =14
3.Press the SPEED button when
Con&-m&ion
tone wiU be heard
display wflI update.

= =Ol
* =02
?=03
/=04
;z:;
96 =*3
& =‘4
l

=‘#

(=#l

) =#2
+ =#3
= =#4
# =##
fInished.
and the

420-13

iqftnite
DVX ’ and DVX ’
DWtal Key Telephone
Systems
4. Either hang up to end programming
or
begin at step ‘2” to program another System Speed Dial bin/Name
combination.

NIGHT SERVICE
a-Any designated
attendant
can place the
system into Night Service by pressing the
pre-programmed
Night Service button
{DND) or by dialing IS041.
b. Pressing the pre-programmed
Night Service button again removes the system from
Night Service.

420.18

420.20

OFF HOOK VOICE

OVER [OHVO)

This feature allows users, o&hook on a call (CO
or Intercom). to receive a voice annaunccment
through the handset receiver without interrupting the existjng call. The Voice Over is
muted so as not to “override” or “drown” out the
existing conversation.
The overridden
party
may then respond to the calling party using
CAMP-ON procedures
to talk to the calling
par& or may use Silent Text Messaging to respond to the calling party via LCD Displays.
Placing an Off-Hook Voice Over (OHVO) caU:
a. When an OHVO station calls. a busy OHVO
station. and busy tone is received, the calling OHVO station can dial tbe OHVO code
[SZS] on the dial pad.
&ss a pre-programmed*
OHVO button to
initiate
an OHVO announcement.
The
HOD button LED will flash at the called
oHvo station.
b. Both OI-WO stations w-ill receive a one-beep
B
tone. The station receiving the
OHIO call must be off-hook and in the
?-IF mode, and then the calling OHVO
party may begin the voice announcement
- to the called OHVO par&. Thecalled OHVO
station’s exisfing conversation will not be
interrupted
and the voice over announcement
will not ‘drowned”
out the
existing conversation.
The calling OHVO
station will not be connected to or otherwise be able to hear the called station’s
conversation
(the connection will only allow the calling station to transmit to the
called stationl.

420-14

Responding to an OK-Hook Voice Over (OHVO):
After receiving an OHVO announcement,
two
options are available to respond to the calling
party:
l.Tbe called OHVO station may respond to
the calling OHVO station by using the
Camp-On feature. The called OHVO station presses the flashing HOLD button to
consult with the calling station. The existing call (CO line) goes on Exclusive Hold
automat&&y.
This method. then follows
Camp-On procedures and operation.
2. The called station may respond to the calling station by using the Silent Text Messaging (this feature is only available to
digital key terminals, and the called station
must be a digital display terminal.) The
called OHVO station may press pre-programmed Message button to respond to the
voice over announcement
without being
released from the current
call. (i.e. by
pressing a flex button pre-programmed
for.
the message “IN MEETING”),
the calling
station TKul receive this message on the
calling station’s U3D display.
Ifmecaui8anlnca.l&th.ein~
calrwill

be dripped

and an+llruwm~d

wiLibeestnbli.sh&ktwenthta4Z&gamd
ca&d8tationc
‘.
Conditions
l

The station receiving
the OHVO call
MUST be off-hook and in the “FfF mode.
The calhg (originating)
station and receiving station must be OHVO digital
terminals.

when the dialed station responds vh
Camp-On
all conditions
and options
available to Camp-On apply [refer to the
feature description for Camp-On).
l
OHIO may be used to nof@ the called
party of a transf&-red
call (CO Line or
Intercoms by announcing
the call. then
releasing to complete the t3xnsfer. When
this occurs, the receiving station does
not need to respond to the OHVO.
l
WbcnacallislransferredvfaOHVO,the
recetving station will not receive muted
ringtig after the transfer is complete.
9 Any messages
including
“CANNED”.
‘CUSTOM”. or ‘SILENTRESPONSE”
text
messaging may be used to respond to an
OHVO call. The message will appear on
the calling station and called station
LCD displays.
l

bsue

1, Jamxary

1993

imite
D&itni

DVX ’ and DVX II
Key Telephone
Systems

If the calling station is a non-LCD term&
nal, the called station will receive en-or
tone when responding via text messaging.
l
The called station may press a flex button programmed as a TIM: Message button, [633#+XXI.
This flex button may
then be pressed to respond to the caUng
station. MMF’ digits wiIl not be heard by
either party.
l
The receiving
station
must be programmed to anow OHVO calls.
l
When silent messaging is used to tespond to an OHVO call, the existing call
on the called station will not be disconnected, while the messages are being
sent to the calling station.
0 The calhgstation
of an OHVO call must
re.rnain off-hook to receive silent messages. The calling station’s voice tram+
mit wilI remain connected to the called
station and may respond verbally to the
text
messages. The OHVO caIl ends
when the calling station goes on-hook.
l
If the receiving station is on-hook in
speakerphone
mode and a calling party
initiates OHVO. the receiving stationreceive a Camp-On warning tone and
normal Camp-On procedures
are followed.
l
The c&led station may send (multiple
messages) and even after sending a message, may press the Camp-On button to
talk to the calling station. Each time a
message is sent., the splash tone will be
heard and both displays will be updated.
’ LED’s will follow Camp-On LED lampfng
sequences.
Each station can be Programmed
to allow receiving OHVO calls as part of Station Programming. Each station may be programmed
for
OHVO in one of two ways. as follows:
- OHVO disallowed
(may not receive
OH-v0 cans}.
- May receive OHVO calls.
l

420.21

SETTING SYSTEM TIME AND
DATE
Must be set by the first programmed
attendant,
a. Dial (6921 on the dial pad. Con&nation
tone is heard.
b. Enter date and time as follows:

bmlt

1, January

1993

ATTENDANT

FEAT’ORE OPERATION

YYMWIDDHHMM
YY=year
00-99
MM = month
01-12
DD = day 01-31
HH = hour 00-23
MM=minute
00-59
When the correct number of digits are entered,
co&&nation
tone wilI be heard and the display
will update.
420.22

STORING

SYSTEM SPEED NUM-

BERS

System Speed numbers must be entered by the
first programmed
attendant.
lf no attendant
is
speciikl.
enter at Station 100.
a. Press SPEED once, then press a desired
outside line key or sqect an outside line
automatically
by pressing the SPEED button a second time.
b. Dial the System speed bin location (20 to
99).
c. Dial telephone number.
d. Press the SPEED button.
e. Hang up.
- PressingtheTRANSbuttonduringnumber entry initiates
a Pulse-To-Tone
switchover.
Pressing the HOLD button
during number entxy inserts a Pause.
Pressing the FLASH key inserts a Flash
into the speed number.
- Pressing the TRANS button as the first
enby in the speed bin inserts a no-display character
causing the numbers
stored in the bin not to appear on the
Di@tlTerm~&
display when the bin
is accessed.
Speed Bin numbers 60-99 are NOT monitored
by Toll Restriction.
420.23

TEXT
sP=el

~~EBSAGIIUG (Siitnt

Rt-

This a feature allows a station user to use text
messages to respond to a caller that has either
Camped-On
or has used the Off-Hook Voice
Over feature to alert a busy station user of a
waiting call or message. The “camped-on”
station may respond to the caller via the canned,
custom. and silent response text &CD) messages. The text messages appear on the calling
par& LCD Display.
While receiving a Camp-On. or OHVO call:
a. The called partymaypress
a flexible button
programmed
for message access, then dial
the two digit message code (or press a
pre-programmed
flex button for a particu420-15

i#@J&e Dm’andDVX”
D&iti
Key Telephone
Systems
lar message). Example : I6331 + 1381 means
that a telephone calling the station will
receive the message WHO IS IT?“.
me additional
messages [with their codes)
listed below can also be sent as a text response:
j
i:

31
33
32

1 IWILLTAKECALL
1 TAKE MESSAGE
TRANSFER l-0 SECRETARY
1
PUTCALL ON HOLD
CALL, BACK
ONE MOMENTPLEASE
I WILL CALL BACK
wHOISlT7
IS IT LONG DISTANCE?
IS IT PEXSOIWL?
IS ITAN EMERGENCY?
IS
IT Ih@ORTANT?
t
fS IT URGENT?
SEND CALL ‘I’0 VOICE MAIL
PARK CALL
OUT OF OFFICE
PUT CALL THROUGH
I AM BUSY
O.K.
NO

34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Conciitions:
l
If the station receiving the text message
response was doing a camp-on he will
first receive a short burst of tone on the
speaker. then the display wilI show the
message that has been activated by the
called station.
l
If the station receiving the text message
response is on an OHVO calL no tone wiIl
be received.
l
AIlcannedand
custommessagesmaybe
used to respond to a calling party.
l
Text response messages will automatically clearwhen the eaIIing station (station receiving
the messages)
goes
on-hook.
l
A station can receive only one message
at a time.
l
Text messages may be chained (i.e. multiple messages sent to one caller).

420-16

‘kxt message responses may only be
activated by key stations
and the receivbg station must lx a Digital Display
telephone.

0 The text message responses wiII appear
on both the caIling station and the called
station
(station
activating)
text responses) LCD displays.
l
If the calliug station is a non-LCD terminal, the called station will receive error
tone when responding via text messaging.
l
The called station may press a flex button programmed
as a Text Message button, (633#+XXj,
This flex button
may
then be pressed to respond to the caIling
station. DTMF digits will not be heard by
either Party.
l
When silent messaging is used to respond to a call., the gxisting call of the
called station wiIl not be disconnected
while the messages are being sent to the
calling station.
l
The calling station must remain off-hook
to receive silent messages.
l
If the &led station responds with a text
message, the textmessage will appear on
the ED.
0 LED’s will follow that of the CAMP-ON or
OHVO.
l
Each Inditidud
message may be programmed onto a fIexibIe button including a flex button on a DSS/BLF console.
The -calling sCation nuut be a dig&al
dit@~W@toneandthewUedmistb8aksgseL

ATTENDANT

with

DSS/DIs

FEATURES

The attendant
console may be programmed
in
one of five different ways. Therefore. you may
not have all of the features listed below on your
console. Refer to See 320.13 for a description of
each map.
420.24
ATTENDANT TRANSFER SEARCH
When attempting
to locate a party:
a. Press a station button to signal that station. If the party is not located. press another station
button
to continue
the
SS3dl.

420.25

fLMXNGAN
OTJTSIDE GAIL
&Itolllatic
Line selectioxl)
a. Press outside line button. ON/OFF button
LED will light and dial tone will be heard.
b. Dial desired party.

Issue 1. January

1983

@@d&e DVX’andDVXn
Dwa
3ey Telephone

8y8textIs

ATTENDANT

c. When called party answers, lift handset
converse or use speakerphone

420.26
CALLI’=
While connected to an outside line:
a. Press programmed
CALL PARK button.
The caller is put on Exclusive hold.
b.At this time, you can page or call another
internal station.
c. When the party you calIed responds, announce the call park location and replace
handset.
420.27
DO NOT DISTURB INDICATION
The associated station button wiIl flash at a
medium rate to indicate that station is In Do
Not Disturb.

Bcrccned Transfer:
While connected to an outside line:
a.Press station button where call is to be
transferred
lif programmed
on your telephone).
or
pressTRANS button and dial station number (loo to 155).
b.The c&led extension signals according to
the intercom signal switch position.
c. When that extension answers. announce
the tifer.
d. Hang up to complete transfer.
Unscreened Transfer:
When the called extension begfns
hanguptotransferthe&l(Recalltimerstarts)).

to signal,

Transfer Search:
When attempting
to locate a pa&
a. Press a station key to signal a station.
b.If the party is not located, press another
station key to continue the search.

Issue 1, January

1989

OI’ER&‘MON

If the party is not located:
c. Press another station button to co&me
the search.
d. When the caLled party answers, hang up to
complete the transfer.
420.30
CAMP-ON
While connected to an outside line:
a. Press desired station button.
b. When busy tone is heard, press CAMP-ON
button.
c. Replace handset, access another CO Line
or press RELEASE button (ifyou have one).
420.51

FIJCXIBIE
MING

BUTTON

FROGRAM-

a. Press SPEED button &ice.
b.Press FLEX button to be programmed
(it
must be programmed
In database as a
flexible button).
c. Dii desired code (Refer to Table 4-00-2 Flex
Button Programming
Codes).

420.28
RETREWNG
A PARgeD CALL
a. Lift handset or press ON/OFF button.
b.Dial I#] on the dial pad.
c. Dial the parking location (220 to 227)
where the call was parked.
420.20
CALL TRANSFER
Outside lines can be transferred
from one
phone to another within the system. The &ITJSfer can be either screened (announced) or unscreened to either an idle or busy station.

FEATURE

420.32
MEET ME PAGE
To request another party meet you on a page:
a. Dfal the desired two-digit paging code
or
press pre-progxammed*
flex button.
b. Request that party meet you on the page.
c. Do not hang up: wait for the requested
party to answer.
Answering a Meet Me Page
a. Go to the nearest telephone and dial 177)
onthedialpad.
b.You will be connected to the party that
paged you.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible
Button
Assignment.
420.33
A.

PAGING

Extemalpagiag
1. Dial the two-or three-digit External
code. Wait for page warning tone.
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76

paging

[Ol= Ekternal All Call (Zones l-7)
[I)=ExternalZone
1
I21 = External Zone 2
!31= External Zone 3
(41= External Zone 4
15]= External Zone 5
IS] = Extermd Zone 6
[7] = External Zone 7

42CL17

2. Speak

in normal tone of voice to deliver
message.
stations off-hook or in DND will not hear the
internal page announcement.

3. Deliver

page ~II normal

4. Replace handset
nouncement.
B.

tone of voice.

to terminate

page an-

InternalPaging

Stations off-hook or in DND will not reeefve the
page announcement.
1. Press the pre-progrred’
PAGE button,
or dial one of the following codes:

7O=AllCall-lntemal&Extemal
71= Internal Zone 1
72= Internal Zone 2
73= Internal Zone 3
74= Internal Zone 4
75= Internal AU Call
76[0]= Exkmal All Call [All Ext Zones)
76(zJ= External Zone (2=1-7)
2.Speak in normal tone of voice to deliver
message.
3.Replace
handset to terminate
page announcement,
c. All CallPaging
lrnternal/Extcmal)
1. Dial I701 on the dial pad,

or
press the pre-programmed*
PAGE button.
2. Speak in normal tone of voice to deliver
message.
S.Replace handset to terminate
page announcement.
*Refer
to Sec. 400.37.
Flexible Button
Assignment.
RELEASE BW’TON
All DSS/DLS
maps contain a Release button
that may be pressed to disconnect or terminate
an intercom call, transfer sequence, page announcement
or CO call.
420.34

420-18

Ifmu

1. Jannary

19%

iqjintieDVXTandDVX’
Digital Eey Telephone

LCD D1SPIa.K~

Systems

LCD DISPLAYS
490.1
The display is arranged into an upper and lower
field. ‘Zhe upper field displays the current activity of tie telephone. The lower field is divided
into two sections. The left section of the lower
field displays the date.speed bin number, connetted intercom station or outside line number.
Table 430-1

Liquid

CALLING STA3OWS

FUNCTION

The right section of the lower field dispkys the
current time or elapsed time on an outside call.
The following Table shows what will appear on
the LCD displays based on the function performed.

Cqwtal

Displays

DISPLAY

[LCD]

CALLED STATION’S DISPLAY
I

Idle Station

ManuaIIy

outgoing

Dialing
CaIIs

Recalling Line
from Hold

qyii?TJ!

piiiezq

,a1

piii=q
Recalling Line
from Another Station
31

Connected to an
Incoming CO Line

p=iq

i@nite
Digital

LCD DISPLa’

430-l

Table

FUNCTION

LCD Displays

I MMhlD/W

ckmp-on

TO STA

XXX

HH:MMam

I
I

CAMP-ON BY STA XXX
HH:MM am

MIWDD/W

CAMF-ON BY ..(name)..

CALL TO ..(name)..
MNUDD/YY
HH:MM 81tl

MM/DDlYY

CONFERENCE
Conference

Systems

CALLJ3DSTAnONSDISPLAY
I

CALL

Xey Telephone

(Co&d)

CALLINGSTATION’SDISPi.AY

DVX ’ and DVX *

I MWWW

HH:MMam

HH:MM am

CONFER’IENCE
HH:MM 8m

MMIDDIYY

PAGE FROM STA XXX
I MNyDDlW
-HH:MM am

I
f

IntemalPage
PAGE FROM ..(name})..

MWUDDlYY

HH:MM am

Exttzrnal Page

AU
I

AllCaUPage

MMiDDPP(

CALL PAGE
.HH:Mhl am

PAGE FROM STA XXX
MMlDDm

HH:MM am

PAGE FROM XXX
MMfDDIYY

HH:MM am

Meet MePage
CALL FROM XXX
MkVDD/YY

430-2

HH:MM am

.CALLTOXXX
MMIDDIYY

.HH:MM am

lsaue 1, Jall~

1093

LCD DISPLAYS

Table

43&l

CALLING

LCD Display8

STATIONS

FURWARDEDfO
MJk#DD/YY

(Co&d)
CALLED STA’IIONS

DISPLAY

8-I-A XXX
HH:MM am

Station Call Forward
(originating
Station)
(Name in Display)

Station No-Answer
Call Forward
(or@nating
Station)

NOANSFWDTOSTAXXX

MMlDD/YY

HH:MM am

1 NO ANS FWDfo .&tame)..
MMlDD/YY
HH:MMam

1
1

X&ion

Busy/No-Answe
CaIl Forward
(originating
Station)

Station Busy
CalI Forward
Or@inating
Station)

BUSY FWD To ..(name)..
MM/DD/YY
.HH:MM am

VIA STA Xxx
Forwarded Call
Phne in Display)

CALL FROM
I VIASTAXXX

STA XXX
HH:MMarn

I
1

CALL FROM .&tame)..
VIASTAXXX

188lxc 1, January

1993

HH:MM am

430-3

iqfMtenVX’an.dDVxn
LCD DISPLAYS

Digital

Table 430-l

FUNCTION

II1’
-I
1
[
1
[[
[[

’

Intercom

Call

Station Forwarding
to a Voice Mail Group
(Station Idle)

Station Forwarding
to an ACD or TJCD
Group(Station
Idle)

Preset Forward

Station calling a
Station Forwarded to
a Voice Mail Group

VIASTAXXX

MM/DD/yy

FORWARDED

Mhd/DDlYY

TO STA Xxx
HH:MM am

(
I

HH:MM am

TO ACD 55X
HH:MM am

FORWARD
LINE XX

RfNG
HH:MM ttm

FORWARDED TO VOlCE MAIL 1
VIASTAXXX

HH:hlM am

FORWARDED

TO VOtCE MAIL

MM/DDMv

-HH:MM am

CALL TO STA XXX
I.-FFIOMSTAXXX

HH:MMam

TO STA XXX PICKED UP

BY STA XXX

4304

DISPLAY

FORWARDED TO VOICE MAIL

CAU

Exch~~ive Hold

Sgstcm~

&ont-d)
CALLED STATIONS

FORWARDED

Forwarded

LCD I3isplays

Key Telephone

HH:MM am
TRANSFER

FROM STA XXX

.UNE XX

HH:MM am

LfNE HOLDING

LINE Xx

HH:hIMam

Issue

1, Januarp

1993

irlfinite

~&$al

DVX I and DVX ’

Key Telephone

LCD DXSPLAYS

Syetcms

Table 430-I

LCD IXsplaps

(Co&d)
CALLED STATION’S DISPLAY

CALLING STATION’S DISPLAY

FLIIWXION

STAllON IN DO NOT DISTURB
HH:MM am
MhUDDlYY

Do Not Disturb

DO NOT DISTURB ..(name)..
HH:MM am
MfNDDlYY

TiI
CALL 8ACK FROM STA XXX
HHMM am
MhVDDM

CALL FROM STA XXX
MMIDDp(Y
HH:MMam

Call Back

Outside Line
Transfer

MSG:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

Message WaiEng

Reply to a
Message Waiting

Issue 1, January

1993

MMIDDNY

HH:MM 6m

CALL BACK FROM STA XXX
MMIDDIYY
HH:MM am

430-E

imite
Digital

LCD DISPLAYS

Table 430-I

CALLING STATION’S

FUh’C’I7ON
I
I

LCD Displays

Programmed

Flash

Co-d

(FJ

Programmed
Command

Pause
(PI

1 Programmed

Pulse-ToTone Switchover (Sl

CO Line
0ueW

DISPLAY

DVX ’ and DVX ’
Key Telephone
Systems

(Cont’d)
CALLED STATION’S

DISPLAY

F12

950777Fl234567
SPEED XX

HH:MM am

95mvst234S67
SPEED XX

HH:MM am

QUEUE CALL BACK
LlNExx

HH:MM am

ACD or UCD
Groups

430-6

bsue

1, January

l-3

iqfinite
D@itd

DVX ’ and DVX JJ
Key Telephone~Spstems

LCD DISPLAYS

Table
FUNCTION

mging

co Lines

p-----I

DispIay Security
Feature

CALLING

430-I

LCD Displays

STATIONS

DISPLAY

(Cont’d
CALLED SJZAlION’S DISPLCI’Y

-I
!

Staticm Fomardiq
Off-Net

Cal&g a Station
Forwarded m-Net
lbeiore and after call is
answered)

Calls in Queue
ISupervisor)

Calls in Queue
(using Dial Code)

Unavailable Mode
(Agent St&on)

L
Station calltng a
Voice Mail Group
Pilot Number

Iasuc1,Jan~1993

430-7

Digital

JXII DISPLAYG

Table 430-l

FUNCTION

;
/I

Dial By Name

Executfve

I/
I’

430-s

STA’IIOWS

DISPLAY

I
DIAL NAME:
MRUDDIYY

MMIDDNY

(OHVO)

Override

CALLED

HH:MM pm

ANNOUNCE TO STA XXX

Off-Hook
Voice tier

(Cont’d

STATION’S DISPLAY

I 1

CALLING

LCD Dfl3plays

iqfinite
DVX ’ and DVX ’
Key Telephone
Systems

MONlTORtNG
MWDDIYY

H&MM am

STA XXX
HH:MM 8m

Issue 1. JaQufiry

1999

infinite
Di#t,al

DVX ’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systtms

INSTALLATION

SECTION 500
INSTALIATION
500.1
SITEPIANNING
Selection of a suitable Iocation is the most
basic, yet most critical consideration
in the
installation
of a telephone system. The following should be considered when choosing an
appropriate location for equipment installation:
l
Ampie space must be allowed to remove
the KSU cover. to access assemblies and
cards within the cabinet and allow space
for the MDF (Main Distribution
Frame).
l
Location of CO/PBX line terminations
must be considered when selecting a
location for the KSU. In the case of telephone company line, FCC approved connectors
supplied
by the telephone
company. should be within 5 feet (I .5
meters) of the cabinet/main
distribution
fiane.
l
To
nxinimb
the length of cable runs
between the stations and the system
KSU. the location of the majority of the
telephone sets (stations) should be taken
iuto consideration when selecting a location for the cabinet.
l
A well ventilated, and well lighted area
having an optima-n temperature
range
of 60 degrees to 80 degrees F and a
reMive humidity range of 5 to 90% [noncondensing) must be provided.
0 Area lighting should be adequate for installation
and maintenance
of the system. Hazardous or flammable materials
should be removed from the vicinity. The
immediate area must not be subject to
flooding or excess moisture. The KSU
should be isolated from areas of moving
machinery or equipment.
It is also recommended
that static electxicity-producing vts
not be installed in this
area.
l
A separately fused. dedicated 117V ac,
HO?%. 15 Amp., 60 Hz. single phase,
3wire
(parallel
blade with ground]
power outlet should be located within 5
feet (1.5 meters) of the system power
SUPPlY.
l
‘he Ksu and main distribution
frame
should be placed in au electrkally noise
free environment,
isolated and shielded
Issue 1, Jixnuxu-y

1993

from equipment
that causes eleceomagnetic interference
@Ml) or radio frequency interference
WI). Examples of
electrical noise are rotating
electrical
machinery and arc welding equipment,
refrigerators.
copy machines, etc. Floor
coverings that generate static electricity
should also be avoided.
l
The system KSU should not be installed
close to any equipment which may produce RF7 (Radio Frequency Interference)
such as a radio frequencytransmitter,
or
microwave oven.
l
lfthesystemistoheinstiedinalocation prone to lightning strikes, provide
lightming protection
on the power Line.
any station cable runs outside the building, and CO lines.
A. Symtem Grouadisg
To ensure that the system WllI operate
properly. a good earth ground is required.
Use of the Telco ground (source not demark) or a mekllic COLD water pipe usually provides
a reliable
ground
path.
Carecheck that the pipe does not contain insulated joints that could isolate the
ground. in the absence of the COLD water
pipe, a ground rod or other source may be
used. A No. 12 AWG copper wire should be
used between the ground source and the
KSU (25 feet maxirmxn). The farther from
the ground sours
the larger the ground
wire used should be. The wire should be
kept as short as possible and can be connected to the ground fug provided on the
lower left side of the backplane on the KSU
with the cover off.
B. Lightningptottction
The @fir& Digital Key Telephone System
should have Central Office lines, Single
Line Telephones
and O&F?emfse Extension stations protected with proper lightning surge arrestors.
This will provide
protection from damaging surges on sensitive cabliug by non-direct lightning sties.
The protection
should contain a compliment of three-element
gas-d&charge
tubes
to ground high potential surges. and associated circuits to absorb and filter lower
kvel surges. This type of lightning protec500-l

infinite
DVX ’ and DVX ‘*
Digital Key Telephone
Systems
tion is available through telephone eqtipment supply houses. Care should be taken
to ensure that such protection devices are
installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
and to ensure that no
more than one set of protectors be installed
on central office lines at the installation
premises. Improper installation
can be a
serious safety hazard.
Failure to provide the proper lightning protection wilI increase maintenance
expense
and require more available spare parts.
SO0.2

INSTALLATION

PLANNING

TEE Dvx I SYSTEM
Prior planning of the installation
smooth cut-over and a satisfied
lect a suitable location for the
mine the number of telephones
and the number of CO/Station
sales contract and discussions
tomer.

FOR

will aid in a
customer. Sesystem. Deterof each type.
ports from the
with the cus-

. programming
information
should also
be gathered from the customer at this
tfme so that the system may be programmed either before. or while the system is being installed.
l
Determine the location and type of each
telephone, and mark floor plans accordm&Y. Determine the location for the operator
staticms.
and mark the floor plans,
. Arrange for power cabling Iif necessary)
and station cabling of the site.
- . Ifthe system is to be installed in an area
subject to frequent
lightning
storms,
consideration
should be given to protiding additional
lightning
protection
on
the CO lfnes beyond what Is provided by
the local telephone operatmg company.

hzstol~

fmWut
lm~bejim
produd.
500.3

ahmrld

with

trained

and

thmmgh@i

the basic wmponmts
nttnnpting
in8taLIotion

COMMON EQUIPMENT
DVX I SY!3TBM
Basic Key Service

of thei
Qfthis:

Unit ~4th

FOR THE

Power

Supply @rrsvl
The DVX ’ Basic Key Service Unit (BKSU)
is a system which comes fully confIgured
for four CO/PBx/Centrex
lines and eight
stations. The Basic KSU also contains one
RS-232C I/O port. one DTMFRecetver.
one
connector for background
music and Music-on-Hold,
an on-board
300 baud modem port. and one External Page port. The
Basic KSU also contains two connectors for
adding a 2x4 Expander Module, a 2x4 SLT
Expander
Module (J9 and JlO). an optional I/O Module that adds one additional
RS-232C port and one RS-422 port, and an
optional 1200 baud modem can be added
to increase the speed of transmission
of the
on-board
modem
port. A Reset (Halt)
switch and a Background
Music volume
control are also mounted
on the PCB. In
addition, two connectors
are provided for
adding an Expansion KSU which will allow
the system to expand to a total of 14
CO/PBX/Centrex
lines and 28 digital station ports. Refer to Figure 500-l Digital
Flatpack Mounting
krangements
for the
component layout and location of connectors.
Power Supply:
The power

supply, installed fn the Basic
KSU at the time of manufacture,
has an
input voltage of 11 iv ac f10%. The power
supply provides power, a fiItered/unregulated 112V dc. to the main key senrice
board. A slo-blow 1.5 amp fuse on the AC
side of the transformer
provides the necessary fire and overload protection. Power is
regulated and distrfbuted
to stations / circuttry in the system on the main key serv-

co
STAmO& ,
!
PORK5
PORTS
4x8 1 6x:- t v.,
r Basic IEW
1
l-4
l-8
J
J
JIJ
J
2x4 Station or SLTExpander
Module
1 5-6*
g-12*
J
I
/
Expansion KSU
7-10
13-20
1
4x6 Expander Module
11-14
21-28
1
*If the 2x4 Station or SLT Ekpander Module is not installed in the Basic KSU and an Expansion
KSU is part of the system cor&guration.
CO Ports 5-6 and Station Ports 9- 12 can be r-e-assigned.
Refer to Sec. 720.3 and/or Sec. 730.4. Flexible Port Assignment Features.
soo-2

Issue

1, January

1883

irlfinite

Digital

DVX’ 8xM DVX’
Kep Telephone
Systems

INSTALLATION

Basic Cabinet (4x81

Ferrite

I* I,

Expansion Cabinet (4x8)
)7’
-mm-

,
-:I:”

L
[ ExpZion
.*1

nr K.’

----e

+I- +Tl”lf
,I,,

--------:a a :
:i!
0;
:.t1

.,::;.:
.,. .. . .._
_.I
,, ..

I--r---^-.C
DTMF:

3/8 in.
*- F --,nr
am

! :I3

-PI

- ------7
12c
Ra;pd -i

.--J
pL”---.

MOlUBdM
input

Typical Conni3ction
14 CO has maximum

----------------------_^___-__________I

Connectho

Blocks

Dedicated
117 VAC, 60 Hz, 15 Amp.

Isme

1, Janumy

1993

iqjinite
INSTALLATION

Di@al

DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

14.50’

Figure
5004

500-2

D&Hal

Flatpack

Mounting

Dimcnaions

rssue

1, Janauuy

1093

ice board. The power supply and cabinet
meet all safety requirements
to comply
with UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA
~22.2 No. 225 standards.
LED5 a hldicators:
Four green LEDs are located on the main
key seTYice board along the top of the PCB.
lXvo of the LEDs IDS2 & DS3) indicate the
presence of +5V & -5V dc. LEDs DSl ad
DS5 indicate the presence of +12V dc used
to supply power to the key stations (one
LED per four stations). An extinguished
LED indicates the absence of the associated voltage.
A red LED (DS4) located in the lower right
portion of the main key service board provides a system “heart beat” indication.
Basic ESU BAotmting:
The DVX’ Basic Key Service Unit (E3KSI-J)
is housed iu a wall mountable
cabfnet
which contains the main key service board,
power supply and pre-wired connectors for
stations and CO Line interfaces. Once the
zuea for the telephone equipment has been
selected, mount a plywood back board to
the wall. The back board size will vary
depending upon the size of the MDF. The
entire system and frame can be mounted
ona 4’~6’~3/4”plywood.
Ifmounwthe
Basic KSU alone, the mfnimum backboard
size is 25”~ 17” x 3/4”. A fully loaded KSU
can weigh approrcimately 15 lbs. Make certain proper mounting procedures are folIOwed.

1. Mount the KSU to the plywood using 3/4”
#I2 pan-head
sheet metal su-ews such
that the top of the KSU is appmately
three feet (1 meter) from the ceiling. and
bottom is four feet (1.2 meters) Corn the
floor.
2, Use the mounting template supplied with
the cabinet to locate the mounting holes.
Refer to Figure 500-2 Digital F&pack
Mounting Dimensions.
3. Drill the holes and mount the Basic KSU.
Gro-:
A NO. 12 AWG copper wire should be used
to connect a ground between the ground
source and the Basic KSU (25 feet maximum). A two position terminal strip P3 is
hated
along the bottom edge of the main
L

key service unit and is accessible through
the bottom of the KSU. One terminal position can be used to connect the ground wire
from a ground source and the other position may be used to connect the ground
from the Basic KSU to the Expansion KSU.
CPU and Memory:
The DVX ’ system is controlled by a 16-bit
(68000) main micro-processor
which controls all system functions
including
the
PCM/TDM
voice switching under the direction of ROM and RAM software coding.
The r&n key service board is responsible
for all control functions,
execution of all
logic operations
and control of system
modules
including
control over the circuitry necessary for yoice switching
and
conference
connections.
The main key
service board is also responsible
for all
system tones, system timing, and station
status control. Refer to Figure 500-3 Main
Key Service Board of the Basic KSU. In
addition the main key service board provides software and hardware support of the
following:
l

RealThnecibck

Watch dog time-r and recovery.
l
PCB status as to presence/absence
of
modules for automatic software confQuration setup.
. State/event
software design.
l
Backup
of customer
database
RAM
memory via a “Super Cap” (super capacitori .
System software is provided in EPROM
memory and is @staWcl on the main key
service board. The system contains 512K
of EPROM storage and is equipped with
l28K of “battery”-backed
static RAM. Provisions have been made on the card to
address up to two megabytes of EPROM
memory and up to two megabytes of static
RAM.
An option’dip”
switch (S’WI) located on the
main key service board a&ws the system
EPROM memory to be configured utilizing
dffferent size EPROM chips. 1 Megabit, 2
Megabit, 4 Megabit and 8 Megabit chips
may be used to provide the generic software. Refer to Section 800, Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
for *dip” switch (SW 1)
settings for various allawable configural

tlOllS.

A separate option strap (J26) allows the
use of either 256Khit.
1 Megabit,
or 4
meabit
static RAM chips to be used for
RAM memory.
Refer to Section
800.
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
for the
option strap choices.
CO Line/Station
Interfaces:
‘Ihe Basic Key Sertrice Unit (BKSUI contains the necessary circuitry to connect
four CO/Centrex/PBX
loop start lines and
eight digital key telephones to the system.
Thfs card also contains one additional
voice (lransmit) path for external paging.
The maCn key service board (KSB) conWns
four Central Office. Centrex or PBX loop
start. line interfaces. The protectfon
circuitry to allow the system to be classffied
as a fully protected system are located on
the card for each CO circufL The CO circuits are equipped with current sensing
circuitry that Identlfres distant end disconnect (loop supervision). Each CO line interface design also provides proper fusing or
protection to comp+vith
the requirements
of UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22.2
No. 225 standards. CO lines are connected
to the system via W-11 modular jacks
mounted
on the bottom of the main key
service board.
The main key station board also provides
the interface for eight Digital Key Telephones using two 64K cbarmel arrangements. Stations connect to the board via
the MDF through a 50-pfn connector located inside the Basic KSU. Each station
connection
requires four wires to connect
to the board.
A Digital DSS Console, Single Line Telephone Adapter (Opx) or other spedficaIly
_ designed adapter with a digital interface
can be assigned to any one of the interface
circuits. The key station interface circuits
are protected from mis-wiring
and overClUTfXk
The m&n key service aIs0 cor~tains an onboard modem that is capable of msmitting data at a late of 300 Baud. The modem
supports and is compatiblewith
the Hayes
command protocol. The Bell System (Westem Electric) standards 103 and 212A for
modem design is incorporated
into the design of this modem. The modem operates
on-line inbothFull
and Halfduplexmodes.
An optional
1200 Baud module may be
added to the main key seme tit
to ~.IIOW
transmission
at the rate of 1200 Baud.

co LdnesconxlcctioM:
CO Lines are connected to the system &a
modular
RJ- 11 connectors
accessed
through the bottom of the Basic KSU. The
Basic KSU connects CO Line ports 1.2.3.
and 4 to the system through modular connectors J 1,52,53. and J4 respectively. The
CO Line is wired to the green/red pair. The
pinouts of the modular connector are as
follows.

II:,_:!r
Lbl-inI,;:
.i.l 1
IILlI-LY-,
!
.*,yr.
Jj&l-l’&
-A!!Qj
j@L-a
FUNGI’
m-1
stations
connections:

The station pm& are wired to the main
distribution
frame via a 25-p&r. (50-pin)
male amphenol-type
connector located on
the main key sewIce board, connector J 11,
A 25-pair cable w&b a 50-pin female amphenol-type
connector is required to extend the station
ports to the main
dfstriiution
tiame. Refer to Table 500-l
Basic KSU Jl 1 Station Connections
for
pinout fnfoxmation.

External
Paging conntction5:
The Basic KSU is equipped with an external page port [a one-way, tramxnit
voice
path) that is wired to the Jll connector
(50-pin male amphenol-type
connector) on
the Violet/Slate,
Slate/Violet
pair of wires
(pin’s 50 and 25). Refer to Table 500-l
Basic KSU Jll
Station Connections
for
pinout information.
Background
Music Connection:
The source for Background
Music / Music
on Hold is connected to the system via an
RCA type connector, 57 is located Fn the

DVX ’ and IX%
Drprital Key Telephone
Systenm
irlfnite

INSTATAKIION

0
;--‘** ________-----** _____.
*.-*._____-__-_--*--*-*--------.

-5

E
8
----I-----*-~‘~T ______---.--__.,
:
.---.-..----------*--;

I
E$

rpssurt 500-3 Main Key Service
IwnIc

1, Jaauary

lB93

gg
= 2-m

Board

of the Basic KSU

two-7

INSTATLATION

Drpital

bottom right comer of the main key service
board (KSB). A potentiometer
labeled R40
located directly above the RCA connector
allows for volume adjustment
for MusicOn-Hold.
Refer to Figure 500-l Digital
Flatpack
Mounting
Arrangements
and
Figure 500-2 Digital Flatpack Mounting
Dimensions for location of components.
Modem

Connections:

pAII
1
2

4
5
6
7

connectioll5:

The Basic KSLJ contains one RS-232C, I/O
port [fern&e, DB-25 type connector] located on the main key service board (55).
This I/O port is oapabIe of transmitEng
and receivhg
data at 300, 1200, 2400.
4800 and 9600 Baud rates.

8
9
10
11
12

RmhaDam

13
14
15
16
17

RS-23ZC

PINOUT

Data ccmmuniealbn

Re.wirem8nts

A) Bekl

Port compaWa

8) ASCII

Code Compatible

$taas

F’igure 5004

and 1 Stop Bii

4 F!aw Cantmf
NOTE: Amws

em:

Methad: xarlxoff

show fbw mnrml

dimeM

Digital Flatpack
colJnectioll5

RS-232C

An optional I/O module may be added to
the main key service board &!jB) on connector J15 adding one additional RS-232C
Poti b-de,
DB-25 type connector] and
one l?S422 port (modular jack connector).
Refer
to Section
500.6.
Appli&ion
Modul&l
hxtaliation
for the pinouts and
~O~~cation
requirements
for the DVX
RS-232C/R.S-422
I/O Module.
500-S

Baefc IESU 511 Station
COpnCCtiOXM

The optional 1200 Baud modem module
may be installed on the main key service
board to conneotor
514 located directly
below the EPROMS. The modem port itself
is accessed via system software control. No
hardware connections
are required to connect to the modem.
x/o Ports

Table 500-l

injhite
DVX’ and DVX’
Key TeIepbone
Systems

21
22
23
24
25

m
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

-T

COLOR
WWBL
BL/WH
WH/OR
ORm
wH/GN
GN/WH
WH/BN
BNlUrH
wH/SL
SL/wH
RD/BL
BL/RD
RD/OR
OR/RI3
RD/GN
GN/RD
RD/BN
BN/RD
RD/SL
SL/RD
BK/BL
BL/BK
BK/OR
OR/BK
BK/GN
GN/BK
BK/BN
BN/BK
BK/SL
SL/BK
YL/BL
BLrYL
n/OR
OR/=
YL/GN
GNlVL
YL/BN
BN/m
YL/SL
SW=
VI/BL
BLm
VI/OR
OR/VI
VI/GN
GNrVI
VI/BN
BN/VI
VIjSL

nt
2x4 SLT Expander

DESIG
Xmt Tip
XmtRing
Rcve Tip
RcveRing
xmt Tip
Port 02
m.itRing
Rcve Tip
RcVeRing
Fort 03
XmtTip
XmtRtng
Rcve Tip
Rcve Ring
Port04
xmtl-ip
-tw
Rove Tip
RcveRIng
Port 05
xmt Tip
antRing
Rcve Tip
-m
Port06
XmtTip
XmtRing
Rcve Tip
me-%
?ort 07
xmt Tip
Port 01

XintRing

‘m-t 08

Rcve Tip
&Ring
xmt Tip
xntRing
RCWTip
RcveRing

‘art oQ*

Port 10s

?ort 118

‘al-t 125

kternd
Page Tip
Sxtemal Page Ring
P Expander Module
Module is installed
fssuc

1, Jantury

1993

iqffnite
Mgital
B.

DVX’andDVX”
Key Telephone

Eagyi~n

Sy&exm

KSU with POmr

mSTALT,ATION
Supply

T’he Expansion Key Service Unit F.KSu) is
a unit which comes equipped with a power
supply and circuitry providing four additionaI loop start CO/PBX/Centrex
Ltae
ports and eight digital key telephone ports
to the Expansion KSU. All processing and
control functions as well as voice connections and switching are controlled by circuitry on the Basic KSU and transmitted
to the Expansion KSU through the ribbon
cables.
The main key service board on the Expansion KSU allows connection of one optional
application module (Le. IYI’MF Receiver) to
the system and connectorfs) for installing
an additional
2x4 Expander Module, 2x4
SLT Expander Module or a 4x8 Expander
Module. Refer to Figure 500-5 Main Key
Service Board of the Expansion KSU for
printed circuft board layout and location of
connectors.

Power 8upply-z
The power supply, installed in the Expansion KSU at the time of manufacture,
has
an input voltage of 117V ac, &lO%. The
power supply
provides
power,
a filtered/unregulated
+12V dc, to the Expansion Key Service Board (EKSB). A slo-blow
1.5 amp fuse on the AC side of the bansformer Provides the necessary fire and
overload protection. Power is regulated and
disixibuted to stations/circuitry
in the systan on the main key sewice board on the
Expansion
KSU. The power supply and
cabinet meet ail safety requirements
to
comply with UL 1459 Second Edition and
CSA C22.2 No. 225 standards.
,LEDs a Indicators:
Four green LEDs are located on the main
kqr service board on the Eqxmsion
KSU.
Two of the LEDs (DS2 & DS3) indicate tie
presence of +5V & -5V. LEDs DS 1 and DS5
indicate the presence of +I2V dc used to
supply power to the key stations (one LED
for every four stations). An extinguished
LED indicates the absences of the assoeiated voltage.
Expansion
KSU Mounting:
The Expansion Key Service Unit (EKSU] is
housed in a wall mountable cabinet which
cmtains the main key setice board of the
EXPEUIS~OII KSU, power supply and prewired connectors far station and CO Z;ine

interfaces. The Expansion RSU is mounted
directly to the right of the Basic KSU and
connects via two ribbon type cables provided with the unit. Once the area for the
telephone
equipment
has been selected,
mount a plywood back board to the wall.
The back board size will vary depending
upon the size of the MDF. The entie system and f&u-he can be mounted on a 4’x 6’
x 3/4” plywood. A hlly loaded Expansion
KSU can weigh approximately
15 Ibs . Make
cer&in proper mounting
procedures
are
followed.

1. Mount the ExpsnsionaKSU to the plywood
using 3/4” #12 pan-head
sheet metal
ssuch that the top of the Expansion
KSU is approximately
three feet (1 meter)
from the ceiling, and bottom is four feet (I .2
meters) from the floor.
2. Use the mountmg
template supplied with
the cabinet to locate the mounting
holes.
Refer to Figure 500-2 Digital Flatpack
Mounting Dhnensions.
3.m
the holes and mount the Expansion
KSU.
Gr0U.U~:
A No. 12 AWG copper wire shouId be used
to connect a ground between the Basic
KSU and the Expansion KBU. A two posltian terminal strip (p3) is located along the
bottom edge of the main key service unit
and is accessible through the bottom of the
Basic KSU. A sfmllar two position terminal
strip. P3 is located along the bottom edge
of the main key sentice hoard and is accessible through the bottom of the Expansion
KSU, One terminal position on each P3
connector
can be used to connect the
ground wire fimn the Basic KSU to the
Expansion KSU.
co Line/station
Intufact8:
The Expansion
KSU contains the necessary circuitry to connect an additional four
CO/Centrex/PBX
loop start lines and
eight digital key telephones to the system.
This card also contains one additional
voice Itransmit) path for external paging.
The main key service board on the Expansion KSU contains four Central Gffice,
Centrat or PBX loop start, line interfaces.

ini@de
DVXl
Di@id Key Tdephone

INSTALtATIOs

and Dvx”
Systems

i)L
.!
iI-

-r

L
rL

,_._-. ________.
: *

t
Ri
_.--__--_-__

Fi@uc
600-10

500-S

Main

Key Se&cc

Bard

of the Expaxmion

KSU

J66UC 1. Jamary

1993

irlfinite
~&it.&

DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
6yatems

The protection circtilxy to allow the system
to be classified as a fill@ protected system
are located on the card for each CO circuit.
The CO circuits are equipped with current
sensing circuitry that identifies distant end
disconnect
(loop supetiion).
Each CO
line interface design also provides proper
fusing or protection
to comply with the
requirements
of UL 1459 Second Edition
and CSA C22.2 No. 225 standards.
CO
lines are connected to the systemvfaRJ11
modular lacks mounted on the bottom of
the ma& key service board of the Expansion KSTJ.
The main key service board also provides
the interface
for e&ht digital key telephones using two 64K channel arrangements. Stations connect to the board via
the MDF through a %-pin connector located inside the Expansion KSU. Each station connection
requires four wires to
connect to the board.
A Digital DSS Console, a Single Line Telephone Adapter (OPX) or other specif~caliy
designed adapter with a digital interface
can be assigned to any one of the interface
circuits. The key station interface circuits
are protected fi-om mis-wfrfng and overcurrentt.
co Lines conRections:
CO Lines are connected to the system via
modular
RJ-11 connectors
accessed
through the bottom of the Expansion KSU.
The Expansion
KSU connects CO Line
ports 9. 10. Il. and 12 to the system
through
modular connectors Jl. 52, 53.
and 54 respectively. The pinouts of the
modular connector are as follows:
c

djiy::&
d,j in*
Sbdkm5
Connections:
The station ports are wired to the main
distribution
frame via a 25-pair, (XI-pfn)
male amphenol-type
connector located on
the main key service board on the Expansion KSU on connector Jl 1. A 25-p& cable with a 50-pin female amphenol-type
connector is required to extend the station
ports to the main distribution
hme.
Issue

1. Jan-

1993

INSTALLATION

Table 500-2 Erpanaion

KSU Jll

Station

Connections

EPAIR FiL PIN COLOR
!
WHjBL
1

DESIG
Port 13
xmt ?Yp
XmtRing
Rcve Tip
Reve Ring
Port 14
Xmt Tip
XmtRillg

I
I

26
I
1
BLlWK
2
27 WH/OR
I
OR/W
2
13
! 28 WH/GN
j
3
GNrWH
4
29 WH/BN
4
Ez&
/
BNlwH
1
30 wH/SL
Port 15
XmtTip
5
5
?hltRing
j
SL/wH
Rcve Tip
31
RD/BL
6
6
BL/RJJ
km
1
Xmt Tip
32
FZD/OR Port 16
7
XTntRing
7
OR/RD
33
RD/GN
RCWZTip
8
8
GN/RD
WeRIng
9
34
RD/BN
Port 17
%ntTip
9
BN/RD
XntRing
35
RD/SL
Rcve Tip
10
SLIRD
10
-RLng
I1
36
BK/BL
Port 18
XmtTip
11
BL/BK
XmtRing
12
37
BK/OR
Rcve Tip
12
OR/BK
-w
BK/GN
Port 19
XTltTip
13
38
13 GN/BK
-tw
BK/BN
14
39
=-=-m
14 BN/BK
-Ring
15
BK/SL
Port 20
xmt Tip
40
15
SL/BK
tit
RinE!
16
41
YL/BL
RCWTip
16
BL,ln,
-Ring
17
42
YL/OR
Port 21+
17
ORrYL
18
YL/GN
43
18
GNW
19
44
YL/BN
Fort 22’
19
BN/YL,
20
45
YL/SL
20
SLryL
21
46
VI/BL
Fort 23+
21
=/VT
22
47
VI/OR
22
OR/VI
23
Vl/GN
Fort %I*
48
23
GN/vI
24
Vi/BN
49
24
BN/VI
25
vI/SL
50
Sternal Page Tip
25
=/VI
‘Only present when
:4 Expander Module or
2x4 SLT Expander Module is installed
ESOO-11

iqfinite
Di@tal

INSTALLATIQN

Refer to Table 500-2 Expansion
station Connections for additional
formation.

KSU Jll
pinouts in-

The 25-p&
cable
used to extend
&he
-tothexuPrIwP~to&
Ehiddai.
liimemr,
the 25pair
cable must
pass thtvagh a S/8” CiinmeterftrrIte
core
b@imazit@theESUq@ntocomplywith
Fz!cponll6
rqpkdms

Split
ferrite
core

rcx//
\

25-pair port
card to MDF
cable

Exted
Pa@ng c&tctions:
The Expansion KSU is equipped with an
external paging port which provides a oneway transmit voice path. This port is wired
to the JI 1 connector (50-pin male amphenol-type connector)
on the Violet/Slate,
Slate/Violet
pair of wires (pins 50 and 25).
Refer to Table 500-2 Expansion KSU J 11
Station Connections
for additional
inforIIBti0l-L

Application

Moaule(s]

Connections:

The Jl connector on the main key service
board of the Expansion
KSU allows the
installation
of one application module (i.e.
DTlvIF reeeiverl to the system. Refer to Section
500.6.
Application
Module(s]
Installation
for a description
of the available application modules.

DvX*anrd~vX~

KeyTelephoneSystcnm

irlfinite
mgitd
c.

DVX ’ and DVX ’
Key Telephone
Syatcms

2x4 Expander Module
The 2x4 Expander Module

is a two CO by
four key station interface module that
plugs onto the main key service board of
the Basic KSU or the main key service
board of the Expansion KSU through the
use of two ribbon cables. This module is a
combination board that contains the necessary circuitry to connect two CO/Cen?r&PBX
loop start lines and four digiti
key telephones to the system. This card
also contains one additional voice (transtit) path for external paging, and a connector for adding one application module
(i.e. DI’MF ReceWer) to the system.

Lmkl

INSTALLATION

board of the Basic KSU or main key service
board of the Expansion KSU.
7. Restore power to the Basic KSU and Expansion KSU. if installed.

L Indicators:

Three green LEDs are located on the 2x4
Expander Module. Two of the LED’s (DS3
BrDS2) fndieate the presence of +!5V & -!TV
dc. LED DSl monitors the +12Vdc used to
supply power to the key stations. An extinguished LED mdicates the absence of the
associated voltage.

2x4 l!iqmdcr

Module

bmtaiiation:

1 .Rernove power f&n the Basic KSU and
Expansion KSU, ff instaIled.
2.Locate the J9 connector on the main key
service board on the Basic KSU or main key
sewice board on the &pan&on
KSU and
the Pl connector
on the 2x4 Expander
Module. Refer to Figure 500-l 8 basic KSU
Application Card Lomtions.
3. Gently push the cable f?om the Pl connector on the 2x4 Expander Module onto the
J9 cmx.m.ncct.oron tit main key service board
of the Basic KSU or the m&n key sew-ice
board of the Expansion KSU.
4. Locate the JlO connector on the main key
service board of the Basic KSU or main key
service board of the Expansion KSU and
the P2 connector on the 2x4 Expander
Module. Refer to Figure 50@ 18 Basic KSU
Application Card Locations.
5. Gently push the cable from the P2 connector on the 2x4 Expander Module onto the
JlO connector on the mafn key service
board of the Basic KSU or main key service
board of the Expansion KSU.
6. Sa.m
the six screws attached to the 2x4
Expander module to the main key sewice
Issue

1. Januay

1993

4,
..-1-_-_-:
::
&
:,
‘.
:t
-.
-.5.
g
RcvR
--\
tt-.’
‘.
-.-.‘.*..n
,:
.
c3
0
600-1s

D&ital

~sTALLAT~ON
CO Line/StatioJl
Interfaces:
me 2x4 Expander
Module provides the
interface for two Central Of&e, Centiex or
PBX loop start, lines. The protection
circuitry necessary to allow the system to be
classified as a fuIly protected system are
located on the card for each CO circuit. The
CO circuits
are equipped
pvith current
sensing circuitry that identifies distant end
disconnect (ioop supervision).
The module
design aiso provides proper fusing or protection to comply with the requirements
of
UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22.2
No. 225 standards. CO lines ate connected
to the system via RJ-11 modular
connectors mounted
on the bottom edge of the
board.
The 2x4 Expander module also provides
the interface for four digital key telephones
us~two
64K cllanne!l armngemerlts.
stations connect to the board via the MDF
through a 50-pin connector located on the
main key service board inside the Basic
KSLJ or a similar connector on the main key
service board on the when installed in the
Expansion
KSU. Each station connection
requires four wires to connect to the board.
A Digital DSS Console, a Single Line Telephone Adapter [OPX), or other specifically
designed adapter with a digital interface
can be assigned to any one of the interface
circuits. The key station interface circuits
are protected from mis-wiring
and overC-t.

CO1TIP t CO1

500-14

Station6 Counections:
The station ports of the a4 Expander Mddule are wired to the main distribution
frame via a 25pair.
[5O-pin) male amphenol-type connector located on themain key
service board or expansion
key service
board, connector Jl 1. A 25pair cable with
a 50-pm female amphenol-type
connector
is required to extend the station ports to
the main distribution
frame. The pinouts
for the stations on the 2x4 Expander Module activate ports 009 through 0 12 on connector J 1 I as shown in Table 500-3 2x4
Expander Module Jll BKSU Connections
when installed
on the main key service
board in the Basic KSU. Also refer to Table
500-l BasicKSU Jll St@ionConuections.
Table 500-S 2x4 Expander Moddc
BKSU Connections

18
19
20
21
22

24
25

Jll

Yj&

DESIG
COLOR
42
Port 09
XmtTip
YL/OR
37
OR/yL
-tRing
43
Rcve Tip
YL/GN
18
RcveFthg
GNryL
44
Port 30
Xmt Tip
yL/BN
19
XmtFklg
BNln
45
YL/SL
Rcve Tip
20
Rcve Ring
SL/yL
46
Port
11
xmt
Tip
Vl/BL
21
XintRing
BL/VI
47
W/OR
Rcve Tip
22
RcveRing
OR/VI
48
VI/GN
Port 12
Bit Tip
23
XntRillg
GNrVr
49
VI/BN
RCVC?Tip
24
BN/VI
hRm2
50
W/SL
El3cbmd Page lip
25
External Page Ring
sL/vT
The pinouts for the stations on the 2x4
Expander
Module
activate
ports 025
through 028 on connector Jl 1 are shown
in Table 500-4 2x4 Expander Module Jl 1
EKSU Connections
when installed on the
maiu key setice board in the Expansion
KSU. Also refer to Table 500-2 Expansion
KSU J 11 Station Connections.

PAlft
17

co wmu, conllcctiorl6:
CO Lines are connected to the system via
moth&r
RJ-11 connectors
mounted
on
the 2x4 Expander Module and accessed on
the bottom of the KSLJ. The 2x4 Expander
_ Module connects CO Line ports 5 and 6
(when installed on the Basic KSU) or ports
13 and 14 (wheninsta.IledintheExpansion
KSUI to the system through modular connectors 521 and J22 respectfvely.
The pinouts of the modular
connector
are as
follows.

in@nite DVX’ and DVX li
Key Telephone
Spsttms

RING

I6eut

1. Januacy

1993

INSTALUITION

Table 500-4

2x4 Expander

Module

Jll

EKSU Connectione
PAJR PIN
t

17
18

i 19
20
;21
22
‘23
24

42
17
43
18
4-4
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

COLOR
YL/OR
ORm,
YL/GN
GNrYt
YL/BN
BN/YL
YL/SL
SL/n
vI/BL
BWVI/OR
ORlVI
WGN
GNjVI
VI/BN
BN/VI
vI/SL
sL/vI

-i
7 Port

DESIG
Xmt Tip
-tRtng
Rcve Tip
Rcve Ring

Port 22

Port 24

Xmt Tip
y-t Ring
Rcve Tip
heRlng
XmtTip
XmtRing
Rcve Tip
RcveRing
Xmt Tip

External
External

XrntRing
RCVt?TSp
-m
Page Yip
PaPe Ring

Port23

Paging c4Iulectione:
A two position termhal strip 52 mounted
on the 2x4 Expander Module provides connection to the exkmal
one-way transmit
voice path page port provided for on the
2x4 Expansion Module.
Application
Moduk(e)
Connections:
The Jl connector on the 2x4 Expander
Module &lows the installation
of one application module (i.e. DTMJT receiver) to the
system. Refer to Section 500.6, Application
Module(s) Installation
for a description of
the available application modules.

Digital
D.

2x4 SLT Expander Module
me 2x4 SLT Expander Module

is a two CO
by four single line telephone Interface modtie that plugs onto the main key service
board of the Basic KSU or the main key
service board of the Expansion
KSU
through the use of two ribbon cables. This
module is a combination
board that contains the necessary circuitry
to connect
two CO/Centrex/PBX
loop start lines and
four single line telephones to the system.
This card also conks
a connector for
adding one application module (i.e. DTMF
Receiver) to the system.
Message Wafting
capability
comes instaked on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module.
This circuiby
provides message waiting
voltage to single line telephones equipped
with message wafting lamps, and supports
up to four single line telephones message
waiting lamps at 9OV dc typical across tip
and ring.
LED5 clt Indicator8:
Two green LEDs indicate the presence of
+5V & -5V dc. An extinguished
LED indicates the absence ofthe associated voltage.
2x4 SLT Expansion
Module InstAation:
l.Remove
power from both the Basic KSU
and Expansion KSTJ, if installed.
2.Lucate the Message Waiting module and
remove the two screws holding it to the 2x4
SLT Expander Module. Remove the Message Waiting Module to expose the hold
down screw underneath.
3. Locate the J9 connector on the main service board of the Basic KSU or main key
service board of the Expansion
KSU and
the Pl connector on the 2x4 SLTExpander
Module. Refer to Figure 500-18 Basic KSU
Application
Card Locations.
4. Gently push the eabfe from the PI connector on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module onto
the J9 connector on the main key service
board of the Basic KSU or main key servfce
board of the Expansion KSU.
5. Locate the J10 connector on the main key
service board of the Basic KSU or main key
service board of the Expansion
KSU and
the p2 connector on the 2x4 SLT Expander
Module. Refer to Figure NO- 18 Basic KSU
Appfication
Card Locatfons.
6. Gently push the cable from the pz connector On the 2x4 SLT Expander Module onto
the. 3 10 connector on the main key service
board of the Basic KSU or main key service
500-16

infinite
DVX I and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

board of the Expansion KSU.
7. Secure the four screws attached to the 2&4
SLT Expander
module to the main key
service board of the Basic KSU or main key
service board of the Expansion KSU.
8. Re-install the Message Waiting Module and
secure It with the two mounting
screws.
9. Restore power to both the Basic KSU and
Expansion KSU, if installed,

I
i

Pi?
00

Figiuc

500-7

2x4 SLT Expander

knlc

Module

1. J8nuary

1993

jnfinite
DVX’andDVX’
Di@atEeyTelephoneSystems

Interfaces:
The 2x4 SLT Expander Module provides
the interface for two Central Office, Centrex or PBXloop start, lines. The protection
circuitry necessary to allow the system to
be classified as a fully protected system are
located on the card for each CO circuit. The
CO circuits are equipped with current
sensing circuitry that identifies distant end
disconnect (loop supervision). The module
design also provides proper fusing or protection to comply with the requirements
of
UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22.2
No. 225 standards. CO lines are connected
to the system via W-1 1 modular connectors mounted on the bottom edge of the
board.
The 2x4 SLT Expander module also provides the interface for four standard onpremise single line telephones (2500 type).
Four 3W dc single line circuits am provided on the printed circuit board. These
singleline telephones canbe equipped with
a standard
message waiting lamp (9OV
T&R) that operate on the -tip” and ‘ring”
leads. Additionally,
each circuit provides a
loop intenupt (7OOms duration) to the connected SLT or device. ‘Ihe card will support
single line telephones up to 2000 feet from
the Basic KSU. On-premise single line telephones should present a load to the port
totaling a maximum ringer equivalence of
2.5.
A mdex connector. 54 is located in the
upper left comer of the 2x4 SLT Expander
Module to provide ring generator capabflities. It is recommended
that the TelIabs
8101. 30 Hz. SOVAC Ring Generator be
used with this board.
co Lines conneetione:
CO Lines are conuscted to the system via
modular
R&l1
connectors mounted
on
the 2x4 SLT Expander
Module and accessed on the bottom of the Basic KSU. The
2x4 SLT Expander Module connects CO
Line ports 5 and 6 (when fnstalled on the
Basic KSU) or ports 13 and 14 (when installed in the Expansion KSU) to the system tbm~gb modular connectors 521 and
J22 respectively. The pinouts of the modular connector are as follows-

INSTALIATION

CO Line/St&on

--co1 TIP

1:z

tot

RING

The station ports of the 2x4 SLT Expander
Module are wired to the main distribution
frame via a 25pair,
(50-pin) male amphenol-type connector located on the main key
service board or expansion
key service
hoard, connector J 11. A 25-p& cable with
a 50-pin female amphenol-type
connector
is required to extend the station ports to
the main distribution
frame. The pinouts
for the stations on the 2x4 SLT Expander
Module activate ports 009 through 012 on
connector Jll as shown in Table 500-5
2x4 SLT Expander
Module
Jl 1 BKSU
Connections
when installed
on the main
key service board in the Basic KSLJ. Also
refer to Table 500- 1 Basic KSU J 11 Station
COMCCtiOnS.

Table 500-S 2x4 SLT Expander
Jf 1 BKSU Connections
pALR

42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Issa~l,January19Q3

fi
49
24
50
25

I COLOR
YL/OR

Port 09

Module

DESIG
SLT Tip
SLT Ring

OR/n, >
?ZL/GN
GN/n.
YL/BN
Port 10
SLTTip
SLT Ring
BNrYL
YL/SL
SLrn
VI/BL
Port 11
SLTTip
. SLTRing
BL/VI
VI/OR
OR/VI
VI/GN
Port 12
SLT Tip
SLT Ring
GN/VI
VI/BN
BN/vI
vI/SL
External Page Tip
External
Pwe Ring
SLrvl

500-17

itlfinite
DvX’andDVX’
D&ital Key Telephone
Systems

~STALMTION

The pinouts for the stations on the 2x4 SLT
Expander
Module
activate
ports 025
through 028 on connector Jl 1 are shown
in Table 500-6 2x4 SLT Expander Module
Jl I EKSU Connections when installed on
the main key service board in the Expansion KSU. Also refer to Table 500-Z
Expansion KSU J Z 1 Station Connections.
On& the Xmit Tip (SLTTip] and Xnit Ring
[SLT Ring) leads are used when connecting
SLT stations to the 2x4 SLT Expansion
Module.
Tabie 500-6
Jll

i PAIR
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
124
25

i
jI
1

PIN
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

2x4 SLT Expander
EKSU mnne&ons

COLOR
YL/OR
OR/YL
YL/GN
CN/YL
YL/BN
BN/YL
YL/SL
sL/n.
VI/BL
BLM
VI/OR
OR/VI
WGN

GNM

Port 21

Module

DESIG
SLT Tip
SLT Ring

Port 22

SLTTlp
SLT Ring

Port 23

SLTTIp
SLT Ring

Port 24

SLTTip
SLT Ring

VI/BN

BNM

vI/SL
sL/vl

External Page Tip
ExtfmdPa.geRinP

Application
Module(s) Connection:
The J 1 connector on the !Zx4 SLT Expander
Module allows the insta.Hation of one application module (i.e. DTMF receiver) to the
system. Refer to Section 500.6. Application
* Module(s) hW.allation
for a description
of
the available application modules.

irtfirtite
DVX * and DVX’
p&$N
Key Telephone
SysWxui
E.

4x8 Expandu
Module
The 4x8 Expander Module

is a four CO by
eight digital key station Interface module
that may plug onto the main key service
board of the Expansion
KSU only. This
module is a combination
board that contains the necessary Circuitry to connect
four CO/Centrfx/F’EIX
loop start lines and
eight digital key telephones to the system.
This card also contains one additional
voice (transmit) path for external paging,
and a connector for adding one applicatton
module (i.e. DTMF Receiver] to the system.

E
!@..

LEDB & Indicators:

Four green LEDs are located on the 4x8
Expander Module. Two of the LEDs [DS4 &
DS3) indicate the presence of +5V % -5Vdc.
LEDs DSl and DS2 indicate the presence
of c 12V dc used to supply power to the key
stations (one LED for every four stations).
An dinguishecl
LED indicates the absence of the associated vokage.
4x8 Erpandtr

Yoduk

InstalIation:

l.Removepxwzrfromthe

ExpansionKSU.

on the main key
service board of the Expansion KSU and
the J9 connector on the 4x3 Expsnder
Module. Refer to Fiiure 500- 18 3asic KSU
Application
Card Locations.
3. Gently push the cable from the J9 connector on the 4x5 Expander Module onto the
J9 connector on the main key service board
of the Expansion KSTJ.
4.Secure the seven screws attached to the
4x8 Expander module to the main key
service board of the Expansion KSU.
5.Eiemn-e the ground wire from the 4x8 EXpander Module to the two position terminal
h
strip (P3) located along the bottom edge of
the main key service board of the Expansion KSU.
6. Restore power to the Expansion KSU.

2. Locate the J9 connector

Issue 1, January

199s

/
I
0

.:
Figure

SW-8

4x8 Erpanaion

Modttk

50@19

INSTAUATION
Module

A No. 12 AWG stranded wire is used to
connect a ground between the 4x8 Expansion Module. and the main key service
board of the Expansion
KSU. A two position terminal strip (p3) is located along the
bottom edge of the main key service board
and is accessible through the bottom of the
Basic KSU. One terminal position on the
P3 connector is used to connect the ground
wire from tbe Basic KSU to the Expansion
KSU.
The other terminal position is used to connect the ground wire from the 4x8 Expander Module to the Expansion KSU.
CO Line/Station
lntcrhces:
The 4x8 Expander Module provides the
interface for four Central Office. Centrex or
PBX loop start. lines. The protection circuitry necessary to allow the system to be
classtfied as a fully protected system are
located on the card for each CO circuit The
CO circuits
are equipped
with current
sensing circuilrythat
identifies distant end
disconnect Poop supewision).
The module
design also provides proper fusing or protection to comply with the requirements
of
UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22.2
No. 225 standards. CO lines are connected
to the system via I?& I 1 modular connectors mounted
on the bottom edge of the
board.
The 4x8 Expander module also provides
the hterface
for eight digiital key telephones using two 64K channel arrangements. Stations connect to the board via
the MDF through a 50-pin connector located on the board. Each station connecttion requires four w&s to connect to t,he
_ board.
A Digital DSS Console, a Single Liie Telephone Adapter (OPXj or other specifically
designed adapter with a digital interface
can be assigned to any one of the interface
circuits. The key station interface circuits
are protected hm mis-wiring
and overcurrent.
co Liucs conne!ctiope:
CO Lines are connected to the system via
modular
RJ-11 connectors
accessed
through the bottom of the Expansion KSU.
The 4x8 Expander Module connects CO
J.&x pods 13,14. 15, and 16 to the system
through modular connectors Jl. J2, 53.
amI 34 respectively. The pinouts of the
5OQ-20

modular

Grounding:

connector

are as follows:

I-.
,...

wsriug

/ Piuouts

-j
I

/ coxlntctlon8

- station8

The station ports of the 4xSExpanderModule are wired to the main distribution
frame via a 25-pair. (50-pin) male arnpheno1 type connector located on the 4x8 Expander module, connector Jl 1. A 25-p&
cable with a 50-pin female amphenol-type
connector is required to extend the station
ports to the m~@~distribution
frame. The
pinouts
are shown in Table 500-7 4x8
Expander Module Station Connection.

The 4x8 Expander Module is equipped with
an external (one-way transmit voice path)
page port. This port is wired to the J 11
connector
(50-pin male amphenol-type
connector)
using
the Violet/Slate.
Slate/Violet
pair of wires (pin’s 50 and 25).
Refer toTable 500-7 4x8 Expander Module
Station Connection for wiring information,
Application
Module(s) Conntctiope:
The J 1 connector on the main. key service
board allows the installation
of one application module (i.e. IYIMF receiver) to the
system. Refer to Section 500.6. Application
Module(s) installation
for a description
of
the available application modules.

b8ut

1, hnuary

1993

infinite

Digi@l

IIUSTAUATION
way near the back of the KSU cabinet.
Refer
to Figure
500-9
Basic KSU
Equipment Cabinet for circuit board layout
and location of connectors.
Power supply:
The power supply is installed in the KSU
cabinet at the time of manufacture
and
ships with the KSU. The power supply input voltage is 117V ac. i-10?!. The power
supply provides power distribution
of fiItered/unregu.lated
12Vdc and aregulated
-EN dc to the backplane bus. An ON/OFF
switch is located on the front of the power
supply along with a slo-blow 5 amp fuse on
the AC side of the transformer.
The power
supply provides an input for a 48V dc
source for future use. Power is regulated
and distributed
to stations/circuitry
inthe
system on each printed
circuit board.
Three fuses located inside the power supply protect the system fi-om over-current
situations.
The power supply and cabinet
meet all safe@ requirements
to cornply
with UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA
C22.2 No. 225 standards.
The power supply is installed inside the
system cabinet, on the right side, in the
first card slot (J9). The power supply is
designed to be an integral, structural part
of the system. Do not attempt to install the
system. or interface car&unless
the power
supply is installed with 3l.l four spews
securely in place. The cabinet. includes the
power supply already installed. The power
supply is recognized underthe Component
Program of Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.

The power supply is unique in that the
transformer
is not present on the power
supply card and its enclosure. The transformer is mounted inside the cabinet next
to the bottom right of the backplane. When
the power supply card is installed. the
transformer
is totally enclosed by the
power supply card’s “L” shaped enclosure,
and the right side of the cabinet. l’his creates a totally enclosed. operational, power
supply. Since the transformer
is installed

DWZ’

and DVX’

Key Telephone

Sy8tcms

in the cabinet.

and the power suppIy card
from the cabinet, the AC cohare made directly to the system

is removable

nections
backplane.

[WARNING!
Since hazardous voltages are always
present on the backplane
while the
system AC power cord is plugged in.
AT NO TIME SHOULD ‘I3IE POWER
SUPPLY CARD BE REMOVED WHILE
THE SYSTEM AC POWER CORD IS
PLUGGED IN. THE POWER SUPPLY
BOARD AND iTS ‘L” SHAPED METAL
ENCLOSURE
PROVIDE THE ONLY
PROTECTION
mane SHOCK muARDWHILETHEACPOWERCORDIS
PLUGGED IN. There are very few instances when the power supply card
should be removed. If an instance
arises where it must be removed, AL
WAYS unplug the system AC power
cord FIRST.
The power supply cord plugs into an isolated, dedicated, (with dedicated ground)
1 I7V ac outlet for power. This is necessary
to prevent possiblevoltage
spikes and transients that may be caused by equipment
sharing the same AC circuit.
The AC connection to the power supply
requires a parallel blade with a ground
receptacle. A three wire to two wire isolation adapter should not be used. The use
of a surge suppressor is required.
G1ollmuxlg:
A No. 12 AWG copper wire should be used
to connect a ground between the ground
source and the KSU (25 feet m-urn).
A
two position terminal strip (J10) is located
on the lower left comer of the motherboard
and is accessible through the left side of
the KSU. One tennina
position can be
used to connect the ground wire &om a
ground source.
B.

Cabinet

Iu&aUation

Once the area for the telephone equipment
has been selected. mount a plywood back
board to the wall. ‘Ihe back board size will
vary depending upon the size of the MDF.
The entire system and frame can be
mounted
on a 4’ x 6’ x 3/4” plywood. If
mounting
the cabinet alone, the minimum
back board size is 25” x 17” x 3/4”. A fully

iqfinite
DIgital

DVX’

and DVX ’

Eey Telephone

Systems

! i

GND

Figure

bmc 1, Januq

1093

soo-sBa!31c

KSIJ Eqtdpment

cabinet

500-23

i@,niteDVX1andDVXu
DQit8.l Key Telephone
Systems

JNSTALLATION

,,v!

i1 j

’

FUSE

l/2 inch diameter
Split ferrite cores

117 VAC

Qzurc
500-24

500-10

Basic ESU Cabinet

Make certain a l/2
in& diameter ferrite
core is installed on

Mounting

D.imensions

h8Ue

I, Jantmry

1993

iq#idte
D&&al

DVX1 and DVX
Key Telephone

Spetexm

INSTALLATION

loaded cabinet can weigh approzdmately 64
lbs. Make certain proper mounting procedures are followed.
CJuck local bdding and &CM
codes
bqfore
ccrtafn

rata&ant

mounhg
ureas

&wood

the sgstem. For example,
mag require
a flame
back board.

1 -Mount the cabinet to the plywood using
3/4” #12 pan-head
sheet metal screws
such that the top of the cabinet is approximately three feet (1 meter) from the ceiling,
and bottom is four feet (1.2 meters) from
the fl oar. Make certain before mounting the
cabinet that circuit cards slide easily in
and out of their respective card slots.
Z.Use the mounting
template supplied with
the cabinet to locate the mounting holes.
Also refer to Figure 500-10 Basic KSU
Cabinet Mounting Dimensfons.
3.Drill the holes and mount the cabinet.
c.

central
Prooessor Board (CPB)
This plug-in
card is the only common
equipment
card required to make the system operational
and controls all system
activity. The CPB contains the rnatn microprocessor a 16-bit (68000) and a real time
clock which controls all system functions
including
the PCM/TDM voice switching
under direction of ROM and F&M software
coding. The CP3 is responsible for aJl control functions. execution of ail logic operations and control
of system modules
including control over circuitry necessary
forvoice swftching and confkence connections. The CPB is also responsible for all
system tones, system timing, and station
status control. ln addition the CPB also
provides software andhardware
support to
ensure the following:
l
Watch dog timer and recovery.
PCB status as to presence/absence
of
cards for automatic software confiiuration setup.
. Interpret
an ID code from each PCB so
that card type can be determined automatically.
l
State/event
sodesign.
l
Battery backup of customer database
RAM memory.
The CPB contains the circuitry and connection (RCA type) for background
music/music
on hold, and the standard 300
Baud Modem. An optional 1200 Baud Mol

Iasuc

1, Jammy

lfH33

dem can be iastalled on the CPB to allow
the on-board modem to transmit at ti 1200
baud rate. In addition
there is one RS232C modular
connector
input/output
port on the CPB and a connector to support
the use of an optional I/O expansion module. The I/O expansion module adds RS23X!. I/O port and one RS-422 l/O portto
the system for a system total of three I/O
ports. A reset (halt) push button switch
and a BGMjMOH volume control potentiometer is located on the front of the printed
circuit board. Refer to Figure 500-9 Basic
KSU Equipment
Cabinet for CPB layout
and location of connectors.
System software is provided in EPROM
memory and is installed on the CPB. The
CPB contains 512K of%PROM storage and
is equipped with 256K of battery-backed
static RAM. Rovisions have been made on
the card to address up to four megabytes
of EPROM memory and up to two megabytes of static RAM.
An option -dip” switch located on the CPB
allows the system EPROM memory to be
configured utiliziq
difh-ernt size EPROM
chips. 1 Megabit, 2 Megabit, 4 Megabit and
8 Megabit chips may be used to provide the
generic software. Refer to Section 800,
Maintenance
and Troubleshooting
for
‘dip” switch settings for various allowable
confiiffoRs.
The CPB allows tie use of either 1 Megabit
or 4 megabit static RAM chips to be used
for F?AM memory. The size and type of
memory used is automatically
determined
and set by the system.

The battery backup strap must be
placed in the “ON” position to activate
memory battery backup (J3}. Do this
prior to inserting the CPB into the
KSU. Refer to Figure 500-9 Basic KSU
Equipment
Cabinet. If the optional
1200 baud modem module or expanslon I/O module are to he installed. do
this now prior to inse*g
the CPB.
The CPB board is inserted into the 58
slot with components on the card facing the wt.
This board must NOT be
installed with the power on. The edge
connector on the CPB is offset to prevent it corn being installed in an incorrect slot. Do not force the card into
500-26

illrfinite
IWx’ and wXLI
DfgitalKey
TelephoneSystems

INSTALLATION

1200 Baud
Modem Module {MM}

l/O Module (IOM)

imite

DVX’ and DVX’
Ecy Telephone
Systems

KNSTALUCI’ION

I
‘2
I
I
c’l

Pin
Pin
Pin
1 Pin
1 Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin

#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8

(orange)
(blue)
(black)
(red)
(green)
(yellow)
(white)
(brown)
-

CPB l/O 8 Pin Modular Jack Pinout

PAINTER
TERMINAL
W-W
8 PI

Pin #
D&25

Mod Jack

Transmit Data

6 (yellow)

5 (w=n)

I
I

2’

Receive Data

RTS (Request to Send)

CTS (Clear to Send1

DSR (Data Set Ready)

7 (white)

Pin#
DB-9
3

DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
DTR must be held high or data from the
KSU will stop

3 (black)

RS-232C PI NOUT
Data Communication Requirements are:
A) Serial Port Compatible
B) ASCIJ Code Compatible
C) 8 Data Bits and 1 Stop Bit
. D) No Parity
E) Flow Control Method: Xon/Xoff
NOTE: Arrows show fiow control direction.
If required by the printer or terminal
l

Fi@re
-Ue

1. January

199s

590-12

Basic KSU CPB R5-232C

Connectiona

500-27

another slot. One Central Processing
Board is required per system,
ids

& Indicators:
?kro green LEDs located along the iiont
edge of the Centrat Processing Board (CPB)
provide an indication
of the presence of
+5V dc & -5V dc to the PCB. A third red
LED located just below the two greem LEDs
provides a system ‘heart beat” indication.
Modem Intcsfkce:
The Central Processor Board (CPB) contains au on-board modem that is capable
of transmitting
data at a rate of 300 baud.
The modem supports
and is compatiile
with the Hayes command
protocol. The
Bell System (Western Electric) standards
103 and 212A for modem design is incorporated into the design of this modem. The
modem operates on-line in both Full and
Half duplex modes. An optional 1200 baud
module may be added to the CPB to allow
transmission
at the rate of 1200 baud.
x/o Port(a) comlections:
The CentraI Processor Board (CPB) contains one RS-232C. I/O port (8 pin moduIar jack type connector) located near the
tiont edge of the board. This I/O port is
capable of transmMin.g
and receiving data
at 300.1200,2400.4800.
and 9600 baud
rates. The pinouts and communication
requirements
are shown in Figure 500-12
Basic KSU CPB RS-232C Connections.

RS-232C
Connector
or I/O Module Connector(s)

To MDF

or Device

An optional I/O module may be added to the
Central Processor Board (CPB) adding one additional RS-232C port (8 pin modularjack
type
connector) and one RS-422 port (6 pin modular
jack connector).
Refer to Section
500.6,
Application
Module[s) Installation
for the pinouts and communication
requirements
for the
500-28

DVX ’ RS-232C/RS-422
I/O Module.
Modem Cxuu.tcctionrx
The optional 1200 baud modem module
may be installed on the Central Pxxessor
Board (CPB) to connector 55 located directly above the battery. The modem port
itself is accessed via software control. No
hardware connections are required to connect to the modem.
BackgrouIld
Music canucctions:
Background
Music/Music-On-Hold
is
connected to the system via an RCA type
connector, 52 is located on the front edge
of the Central Processor Board (CPB). A
potentiometer
labeled R5, accessible from
the front of the CPB. allows for volume
adjustment
for Music-Oh-Hold.
D. 4x8 Key Interface
Board (CKB]
The 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKBI is a four
CO line by eight digital key station interface board. The 4x8 Key Interface Board is
a combination
card that contains the necessary circuiby to connect four CO/&mtrex/PBX loop start lines and eight digital
key telephones to the system. This card
also contains one additional voice (transmft) path for external paging, a multi purpose relay and a connector for adding one
appliication moduIe to the system. The 4x8
Key Interface Board may be installed into
Basic KSU cabinet backplane using slots
J7 through Jl and may be removed or
inserted whLle power is applied to the Basic
KSU (power on). Refer to Figure 500-9
Basic KSU Equipment Cabinet for component layout and location of connectors.
LEDS 8clJldicators:
.:
Five red LEDs are located along the front
edge of the 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKE!),
one for each CO Line to indicate when it is
in use and one LED that monitors
the
contact operation of the multi use contact
located on the board. Two green LEDs also
located along the tint
edge of the CKB
indicate the presence. of +5V & -5V dc.
CO Line/Station
Intcrfkc#r:
The 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB) provides the interface for four Central Of&x.
Cedrex or PBX loop start. lines. The protection circuitry necessary to allow the systern to be classified as a fully protected
system are located on the card for each CO
circuit. me CO circuits are equipped with
current sensing circuitry
that identifies
distant end disconnect (loop supervision).
Psuc

1, January

1993

i@nite
Digital

DVX’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems

F
-co1
.-

---a
-

-e
---

co3

-.-.

INSTAILATION

.:..
:.

F-MAY -StEllV5

..
‘:.

., ‘.
: ,.: .:, : :.
*i : *... .‘..
1

Pin #l (blue) - N/C
Pin #2 (black) - Ring 2
1 Pin #3 (red) - Ring 1

1 Pin #4 (green) - Tip 1
Pin #5 (yellow) - Tip 2
Pin #6 (brown) - N/C

RJ-14 Modular Jack Pinouts for 4x8 Key Interface

Figure
Issue 1. January

1993

600-13

4x8 Rcy Intufacc

Board

Board (CKB)

K?EBl

500-29

INSTALLATION

D&&al

infinite
DVX I and DVX’
Key Telephone
8yitems

SEE DETAIL A
PORT CARD
TO MDF CABLE

BOTTOM PLATE,
FEED CABLE BEI-VVEEN
SQUARE KNOCKOUTS
AS SHOWN
EXPOSEDhRAIDED
PORTION OF CABLES
IS TO BE GROUNDED
BY CABLE TIE AS
SHOWN

DETAIL A
Figure

600-14

Shielded

Cable Ttrminatione

The card also provides proper fusing or
protection to comply with the requirements
of UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22.2
No. 225 standards.
The 4x8 Key Interface Board also provides
the interface
for eight digital key teiephones using two 64K channel arrangements. Stations connect to the board via
the MDF through a 50-pin connector located on the front edge of the board. Each
station connection requires four wires to
connect to the board.
A Digital DSS Console, a Single Line Telephone Adapter (OPX), or other spe&cally
designed adapter with a digital interface
can be assigned to any one of the interface
circuits. The Key Station interface circuits
are protected from mis-wMng
and overcurrent.
co Lines conuectioncr:
CO Lines are connected to the system via
modular RI- 14 connectors mounted to the
front edge of the 4x8 Key Interface Board
(CKBI and accessed through the bottom of
the KSU. Each card connects four CO Line
ports to the system through modular connectors 52 and 53 found on each 4x8 Key
Interface Board. The pinouts of the modular connector anz as follows:
Pin #1 (blue) - N/C
Pin #2 (black) - Ring 2
Pin #3 (red) - Ring 1

i Pin #4 (green) - lip 1
Pin #5 (yellow) - Tip 2
Pin #6 (brown) - N/C
CKB RJ-14 Modular

Connect

to modular

on 4x8 interface

jack

card
Gh

Jack Pinwt

Stations colmections:
The station ports of the 4x8 Key Interface
Board (CKB) are wired to the main distribution frame via a 25-pair. (56pin) male
arnphenol type connector located on the
front edge of the board. connector JI. A
25-pair cable with a 50-pin female amphenol-type connector is required to extend
the station ports to the main distribution
frame.
Refer to Table 500-8 4x8 Key
Interface Board (CKB) for pin-out information.

w
szkkmd

Paging

Fmnl 01 cabinet
connectiollE:

The 4x8 Key Interface
Board (CKB) is
ecfuipped with an external page port (a
one-way, iransmit voice path) that is wired
to the Jl connector (50-pin male amphenol-type connector)
on the Violet/Slate.
Slate/Violet
pair of wires (pin’s 50 and 25).
Refer to Table 500-8 4x8 Key Interface
Board (CKBI for wMng information.
lku5ccxlaueous
Relay connections:
Each 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB) also
contains a miscellaneous
relay (KI) that
can be used as for External Paging, Loud
Bell. CO Line control. Power Fail, RAN,
other functions as software will allow. The
relay provides both an Open and a Closed
loop upon activation. Therefore. each relay
may be used for various applications.
The
relay provides a dry output and is rated for
lAMPat24Vdc.Therelayfswiredtothe
MDF via the Jl connector
(50-pin male
amphenol-type
connector)
on the Violet/Orange,
Violet/Green
and BrownfViolet wires (pin’s 47, 48 and 24). Refer to
Table 500-8 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKI3)

Dig&al

INSTALLATION
for wiring

information.

Application
Module(s) Connections:
The J 14 connector on the 4x8 Key Interface
Board (CKB) board allows the installation
of one application
module {i.e. DT’MF receiver) to the system. Refer to Section
500.6, Application
Module(s) InstaJhtion
for a description
of the available application modules.

Table

500-S 4x8 Key Interface

1PAIR 1 PIN
:1
26
1
2
i 27
j 2
3
28
3
4
I 29
5

6
7
8
9
10
I1

30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
395
10
36
11

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
14
25

600-32

iqf?nfte
DVX’andDVXn
Key Telephone
Systems

37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

j COLOR
WH/BL

’
Port 01

=/wH
1 W/OR
i OR/WH 1
WH/GN !i Port 02
GN/W-H
I WH/BN
wH/SL
SLrwH
RD/BL
BL/RD
RD/OR
OR/RD
RD/GN
GN/RD
RD/BN
BN/RD
RD/SL
SL/RD
BK/BL
BL/BK
BK/OR
OR/BK
BK/GN

Port 03

Port04

Port 05

Port06

Port 07

GN/BK
BK/BN
BN/BK
BK/SL
SL/BK
YL/BL
BL/YL
YL/OR
OR/n,
YL/GN
GN/yL
YL/BN
BN/YL
YL/SL
SL/yL
VI/BL
BLM
W/OR
OR/VI
VI,‘GN
GNM
V?/BN

BNM
vI/SL

SLM

Port 08

Board (CEB)
DESIG
Xmt Tip
X-ntRiig

Rcve Tip
Rcve Ring
Xmt Tip
xmt Ring
Rcve Tip
Rcve Ring
xl-& -lip
XnltRing
Rcve Tip
RCVFRiIlg
XntTIp
-tRLng
Ftcve lYp
-Ring
xnlt Tip
XrntRing
Rcve Tip
-Ring
XlntTip
XrntRing
Rcve Tip
mew
xrnt Tip
XmtFang
Rcve Tip
RcveRing
XrIltTip
XnltRing
Rcve Tip
RcveRing

Misc. Relay N.C.
Misc. Relay N.O.
h&c. Relay Common
External Page Tip
External Page Ring

Isslle

1. January

1883

i@nite
D&WI
E.

DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

4x8 SLT Interface
Board (CSB]
The 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) is a four
CO Line by eight single line telephone interface board. The card is a combination
card that contains the necessary circtitry
to connect four CO/Centrex/PBX
loop
start Ihes and eight standard on-premise
single line telephones
(2500 type) to the
system. This card also contains one additionaI voice (transmit)
path for external
paging and a connector
for adding one
application module (ix. DTMF Receiver or
Dual DTMF/Talk-Back
Page Module] to
the system. The 4x8 SLT Interface Board
can be removed or inserted with power on
the KSLJ. Refer to Figure 500-9 Basic KSU
Equipment Cabinet for component
layout
and location of connectors.

A molex connector is located on the 4x8
SLT Interface Board (CSB) to provide ring
generator capabilities.
It is recommended
that the Tellabs 8101.30
Hz, SOVAC Ring
Generator be used with this board.

Message Waiting
capability
is installed
onto the 4x8 SLT Interface Board. This
circuitry provides message waiting lamps
to single line telephones
equipped with
message waiting lamps. and supports up
to eight single line telephone
Message
Waitjng lamps at 9OV ac typical across tip
and ring.
LEDS & Indicatorr3:
Five red LEDs are located along the front
edge of the 4x8 SLT Interface Board, one
for each CO Line to indicate when it is in
use and one LED that monitors the contact
operation of the multi use relay located on
the board. Two green LEDs also located
along the front edge of the 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) indicate the presence of
&‘V & -5V dc.
co uIle/Station
I.ntelfhces:
The 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB] provides the interface for four Central Offke.
Centrex or PBX loop start. lines. The protection circuitry necessary to allow the systern to be classified as a fully protected
system are located on the card for each CO
circtit. The CO circuits are equipped with
Issue 2, January

1883

current
sensing circuitry
that identifies
distant end disconnect (loop supeniision].
The card also provides proper fusing or
protection to complywith the requirements
of UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22.2
No. 225 standards. The 4x8 SLT Interface
Board does not support data devices for
data switching.
The 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) provides the control and interface for eight
standard
single line telephones
(2500
type). Eight 36V dc single line circuits are
provided
on the printed
circuit board.
These single line telephones
can be
equipped with a standard Message Waiting
Lamp (9OV T & R) that operate on the ‘tip”
and ‘%ng” leads. Addationally each circuit
provides a loop interrupt (7OOms duration)
to the connected SLT or device. The card
will support single line telephones
up to
2000 feet from the Basic KSU cabinet. Onpremise single line telephones should present a load to the port totaling a maximum
ringer equivalence of 2.5.
co Line5 calnections:
CO Lines are connected to the system via
moduIar RJ-14
connectors mounted to the
front edge of the 4x8 SLT Interface Board
and accessed through the bottom of the
Basic KSU cabinet. Each 4x8 SLT Interface
Board connects four CO Line ports to the
system through modular
connectors
52
and 53 found on each card. The pinouts of
the modular connector are as follows:

~~~~~

4x6 SLT Interface

Board (CSB)

RC14 Modular

Jack

Pinout

BEi

t2ttZi2ZW
._-.-.
i.‘..
EELFPJI

~.
-

--kn*cuo

500-33

in.ite
Dd
and DVX I1
Digital Key Telephone
Systems

XNSTAwcATfON

Message
Wait
Circuitry

0
I
0

Station
connect0

: ‘,

(FUTURE)
Opfionaf
Dual DTMFI
Talk-Sack Page

. .

..::..

:..

Module
---JqE!F&----

. .

Optional
Single DTMF
Receiver
Module

:
.,
‘.

..:,

. ..
:.:..

:..

*‘.

Pin #l {blue)

- N/C

Pin #2 (black) - Ring 2
1 Pin #3 (red} - Ring 1
1 Pin #4 (green)
c,

4x8 SLT Interface

Pvgure
500-34

- Tip 1
Pin #5 (yellow) - tip 2
Pin #6 (brown] - N/C

Board RJ-14 Modular Jack Pinouts

500-15

4x8 SLT Interface

Bard

(CSB)

Issue

1, Jamnary

1993

iq,@ite
DQ#al

DV2Cx&
DVX’
Xcy Telephone
Systems

INST2U.LAmON

stations coIulection6:
The station ports of the 4x8 SLT Interface
Board (CSB) are wired to the main distribution iiame via a 25-pair. (50-pin) female
amphenol type connector located on the
tkont edge of the board, connector 53. A
25-p&
cabie with a 5O-pin male smphenol-type connector is required to extend
the station ports to the maLn distribution
frame. The pinouts are shown in Figure
500-9 Basic KSU Equipment
Cabinet.
czmnltbffic2E~a7bk(impp~~
the4xe5&TlllttzfootBoctfru~to.
lBt&KmsbbUtCmmkahicw
fi%wte~.andqfthc~ldc&wt
totheBasicJn3rioabinet.Thfscablemust

ShScldad

3
4

6
7
8

CubIt

9
10

_.11
12

Ertd

hgilg

coxlnection6:

The 4x8 SLT Interface Board will provide
an external two-way page port when the
Dual DTMF/Talk-Back
Page Module (future) is installed. When t&i module is installed onto the 4x8 SLT Interface Board. it
is wired to the JI connector (50-pin male
amphenol-type
connector)
on the Violet/Slate. Slate/Violet
pair of wires (pin’s
50 and 25). Refer to Table 500-Q 4x8 SLT
Interface

E&u-d (CSB) for wiring

informa-

%i6cellsncoue

Relay

Connections:

Each 4x8 SLT Interface
miscellaneous

Issue 1. January

I9BS

16
17

relay (Kl) that can be used

4x8

Board contains

for Loud Bell. CO Line control, Power Fail,
RAN, and other functions as software will
allow. The relay pmvldes bothan Open and
a Closed loop upon activation.
Therefore.
each relay may be used for various applications. The relay provides a dry output
and is rated for 1 AMP at 24V dc. The relay
is wired to the MDF via the Jl connector
(50-pin male amphenol-type
connector) on
the Violet/Orange,
Violet/Green
and
Brown/Violet
whs(pin’s
47, 48 and 24).
Refer to Table 500-9
Board (CSB) for wiring

tion.

SLT Interface

information.

4x8 SLT Intcrfme

PIN
26
1

be rued to EompIy with FCC Port 16
n?fpwk-xnaddftioni?u~ircubk
must paas through
a fmtoc cmv btfm
oddingthe~Ksr.rcubiRet~to

cmnp~nrzt)rpccRvtlsnsgu~~ff
to pigu+c
500-14
9-a

Table 500-9

20
21
22
23
24
25

27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

COLOR
WH/BL
BL/WH
WH/OR
0RM.H
WH/GN
GNP=
WH/BN
BN/Wf-I
WWSL
SL/wH
RD/BL

BL/RD
RD/OR
OR/RD
RD/GN
GN/RD
RD/BN
33N/RD
RD/SL
SL/RD
BK/BL
BL/BK
BK/OR

OR/BK
BK/GN
GN/BK
BK/BN
BN/BK
BK/SL
SL/BK
YL/BL
BLfYL

i ?ort01
!’

Board

(CSB)

DESIG
SLT Tip
SLT RiTlg

1?ol-t02

SLT Tip
SLT Ring

IFort03

SLT Tip
SLT Ring

?ortcM

SLTTip
SLT Ring

?ort 05

SLT Tip
SLT Ring

?ort 06

SLT Tip
SLT Ring

1Port 07

SLT Tip
SLT Ring

1Fort 08

SLT Tip
SLT Ring

YL/OR
OR/n.
YL/GN
GNryL
YL/BN
BN/YL
YL/SL
SL/n,
VI/BL
BL/VI

VI/OR
OR/VI
VI/GN
(=/VI
VI/BN
BN/VI
Vl/SL

Misc. Rfzlay N.C.
Misc. Relay N.O.
hbc. Relay Common
External

Page Trip*
-

SLrvI._ ~LxternalPageRin~
_

when

the Dual JYiMF/Talk-l3ac
is installed.
500-s5

r
iq#.nite
DVX’ and DVX’
D&ital Key Telephone
Systems

ZNSTALLYITON

Module(s) Connections:
The 514 connector on the 4x8 SLT Interface Board allows for the installation of one
application
module (i.e. Single D’i’MF recefver or the Dual DTMF/Talk-Back
Page
Module) to the system. Refer to Section
500.6. Application
Module(s) Installation
for a description
of the available application modules.

Application

500.6

APPLICATION

MODULX(S)

IN-

STAUATION:
k

~md/&

Module

QOM) for the

The DVX ’ contains one RS-232C. I/O port
(female. DB-25 type connector} located on
the main key service board (55). This optional I/O module may be added to the
main key service board (on connector J 15)
adding one additional
RS-232C port (female. DB-25 type connector) and one RS422 port (6 pin modular jack connector).
Each I/O port on this module is capable of
transmitting
and receiving data at 300.
1200.2400.4800
and 9600 baud rates.
0

coIlnections:

The pinouts and communication
req&ements for the @%-G& DVX I Expansion
I/O
module are shown in Figure 500-16.
B.

Eqmydbn&

Module

(IOM) for the

This module provides one FS232C
I/O
port (8 pin modular jack) and one RS422
I/O port (6 pin modular jack). This module
is installed on the CentraI Processor Board
printed circuit board and adds two I/O
ports to the one RS-232C I/O port already
on the Central Processor Board for a total
of three I/O ports allowed in the system.
Each port is independently
programmed
for its use and the rate of speed at which it
transmits
and receives’ data (baud I-ate).
The options are 300. 1200, 2400, 4800,
and 9600 baud rates atl at 8 data MS, 1
stop bit, with No parity.
0
n
to

Rs232
52
0

To instd
the I/O Module onto the Central
Processor Board of the DVX ’ System:
I. Remove power tiom the Basic KSU.

oiI c
onto the main

In&akg
the I/O Module
service board of the DVX ’ Basic KSU:
1. Remove power from the Basic KSU.

key

2. Locate the J15 connector on the main key
service board of the Basic KSU and the P4
connector
on the I/O Module. Refer to
Figure 500- 18 Basic KSUApplication
Card
Locations.
3. Gently push the P4 connector on the l/O
Module onto the J15 connector on the
main key service board of the Basic KSU.
4.Secure with the screws provided on the
module.
5. Restore power to the Basic KSU.

2. Remove the Central Processor Board (CPB)
from the Basic ESU &met.
3. Locate the 54 corm&or
on the CPB board
and the P4 connector on the I/O Module.
Refer to Figure 500-l 1 Central Processor
Board (CPB) .
4. Gently push the P4 connector on the I/O
Module onto the 54 connector on the CPB
board.
-5. Secure with the screws provided on the
module.
6. Re-insert the CPB board in the Basic KSU.
7. Restore power to the Basic KSU.
Connectlomi:
The plnouts and communications
requirements for the in&&e DVX’ Expansion J/O
Module are shove in Figure 500-17.

@fir&e
~&&al

DVX I and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systcmts

Tnmmil

Dam

Rabivscma
>

>
CT.5 (ChuulvSend)

>
0s.R (Data se! RMdy)

GND

DTR tDam?enninal
DTR mm Wz;z

RS-232C
Data Communication

Rsadyj

~ckam
‘8”

h-cm the

PINQUT
R~uirwnent6

SIrrNla)

NOTE

Arrows

Melhod:

show flow control

---_---.->’

are:

Rs-422

A) seri8l Port Compatible
6) ASCII coda compatible
C)8Data~BltsandlStopB11
3 RZ%trol

nccmnscfim

<-.-.-.-

PlNwT

DaU Communkation

Flequiremanta

are:

A) setid port compa!w
B) ASCII Code Compatible
.
g fl&!aai
and 1 Slop &I
1
E) now corltml Methcd: xolv?Ioff
NOW Arrows show flow contml direction.
* If nzqulmd by the printer or terrnlnel

xon/xoff
direction

* There is no set standard for pins to be used with RS-422 connectors.
Refer to your particular terminal instellation guide for proper hook-up.

pigurt
Issue

1, January

1QQQ

SOO-16 DVX’

Erpansfon

f/O Module

pin-oats

500-37

r
iqfhite
INSTALLATION

DVX’tmdDV2K”

DigitalEeyTelephone8ystems

Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin

Jy;

I1
#2
#3
M

Ioranaal
(blue)
(black)
(red)

-----

Pin fll (blue)
Pin #2 (bkick)
Pin #3 (tad)

-----

Pii x5 (yellow)

Pin 114 (grew)
pilnrfs

tin #a {brown)

Tmrumtl dpm {-)

2(bWJ

cKs{clurtu&cq

’

(white)

4 wd

6WM8~

Recsiva Oala (+)

.._....

-.._.

.’

“?“.???!?..

AS422

. -

__..

PINOUT

Data CPnmunfcation

Requirements

are:

A) Serial Port Compatible
ASCII CQde ConlpatiIlla
e$i$aE$k
and 1 Stop Bit
E) Fkw

A) SerfsI Porn Compatible
5) ASCII code compalti
C)8DataSf!sand1StcpBH
8

I!EZZLA

NOTE: Amws
* ff mqulred

500-38

Mehd:

NOTEc Amws
* H required
iadx0n

show ffow oomrd direction.
by tha prfnter or t6fr~inal

Contml

&hod:

Xmlxoff

show How cadd
dimciion.
by the pdntsr or tennfnal

There is no sst standard for pins to be usad with RS-422 mm.
Refer to your pa&~lar
terrnfnat instak~ion
guide for proper hook-up.

bsne

1, January 19B3

r
INSTALLATiON

Installing
the I200 Baud Modem Module onto
the main key service board of the DVX l Basic
K!3J:
1, Remove power from the Basic KSU.
or M

RS-23%
Wute

2. Locate the J 14 connector

on the main key
service board on the Basic KSU and the Pl
connector on the Modem Module. Refer to
Figure 500-18 Basic KSU AppIication Card

Cmnttctor
Comxtor(5~

-fo~DFor

D&n

Locations.
I=.*~~

3. Gently push the
dem Module onto
main key service
4.Sectu-e with the
module.
5. Restore power to

12QO Band Modem Module (MM)
This optional 1200 baud modem can be
installed on either the DVX ’ or the DVX JJ
systems to add the capability of communicating with the system from a remote site
or location at the rate of 1200 baud. Both
systems provide as standard an on-board
modem capable of transmi tting data at 300
baud. With this module installed a transmission baud rate of 1200 baud can be
selected. Aprogramma
ble option allows for
auto baud detection between 300 and 1200
baud,
Connection to the modem is accomplished
by simply w
into the system and connecting to the modem. This can be done by:
1. Ringing directly to the modem,
2. Going through

the 1200 Baud &odem Module onto
Processor Board of the DVX ’ Systern Cabinek
1. Remove power from the Basic KSU.
the Central

2. Remove the Central

Processor Board (CPB)
i+om the Basic KSU.
3. Locate the 55 connector on the CPB board
and the PI connector on the Modem Module. Refer to Figure 500-l 1 Central
Processor 3oard (CPB).
4. Gently push the Pl connector on the Modem Module onto the J5 connector on the
CPB board.
S.Secu.re with the s(lfews provided on the
module.
6. Re-insert the CPB board in the Basic KSU
cabinet.

3. After being answered

0
1

P
1
Q

Issue 1. January

1993

the Basic KSLJ.

Installing

DISA.

by a station user and
transferred to the modem port.
Connection
to the modem port is under
sofimare control.
The 1200 baud modem module maintains
the compatibilitywitb
the Hayes command
protocol and uses theBell System (Western
Electric) standards 103 and 21ZA for modem design. The modem operates on-line
in both Full and Half duplex modes.

P1 connector on the Mothe J 14 connector on the
board on the Basic KSU.
screv?s provided on the

COontcti0nS:

Connection
trol.
D.

Ipstalllng

is under system software
the DTMF Rtceiver

con-

M~ule

This module is used to provide DTMF receivers in the system to support single line
telephone
and DISA applications.
CurFntiylhfs
module can be added to the DVX
System Expansion KSU, 2x4 Expander
Module, 2x4 SLTExpander Module and the
4x8 Expander Module. This module can
also be added to the DVX” System on each
4x8 Key Interface Boards. and each m
SLTInterface Boards. Each DTMF Receiver
Module contains one DTMF receiver. A
maximum of three MMF Receiver Modules
can be installed in the DVX * system for a
total of four receivers for the system(one
DTM!? Receiver is located on the main key
service board on the Basic KSU. A maxi500-39

r
INST:AI;[LATION

DigItal

mum of 13 DTMF Receivers can be installed in the DVX ’ system. depending on
whether the DTMF Receiver Module or the
Dual IYTMFjTalk-Back
Page Module is in-

Genera@. one receiver will support DISA
and/or 8 SLT stations under light to moderate traffic, K SLT and or DISA traf& is
heavy, addiffoional DTMF receivers should
be added. It is also recommended
to add
additional DTMF Receivers when a Voice
MafI or Auto Attend-t
is connected to the
!syE.tem.
connectfons:
The DIMF Receiver Module plugs onto a
20-pin connector on the following printed
circuit boards (one M’MF Receiver Module
may be instaIled on each card):
l
2x4 Expander Module
l
2x4 SLT Expander Module
l
Main
Key Semite Board of the Expansion Key Service Unit (EKSU)
l
4x8 Expander Module
l
4x8 Key Interface board (CKB)
l

infinite

4x8 SLT Intetiace

board (CSB)

DVX I System

Installing the M’MF Receiver Module onto the
2x4 Expander Module:
1. Locate the Jl connector
on the 2x4 Expander Modtie and the PI connector on
the DlMF Receiver Module. Refer to Figure
500-18
Basic KSU Application
Card
Locations and Figure 500-19 Expansion
KSU Application
Card Locations.
2. Take the MMF Receiver Module and push
the Pl pin connector gently onto the 31
pins on the 2x4 Expander Module.
3. Secure the DTMF Receiver Module with the
screw provided on the module,

50040

irzfirrite
DVX ’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems

Installing the DTMF Receiver Module onto the
2x4 SLT Expander Module:
1. Locate the Jl connector on the 2x4 SLT
Expander Module and the P1 connector on
the DTMF Receiver Module. Refer to Figure
500- 18 Basic KSU Application
Card
Locations and Figure 5OO- 19 Expansion
KSU Application Card Locations.
2. Take the DTMF Receiver Module and push
the PI pin connector gentry onto the Jl
pins on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module.
3. Secure the DTMF Receiver Module with the
screw provided on the module.
hx%albng the IYIMF Receiver Module onto the
main key service board of the Expansion KSU:
1. Locate the 55 connect#
on the main key
service board of the Expansion
KSU and
the Pl connector on the DTMF Receiver
Module. Refer to Figure 500- 19 Expansion
KSU Application Card Loc&iom.
2. Take the MMF Receiver Module and push
the P1 pin connector gently onto the 55
pins on the main key service board of the
Eqansfon
KSU.
3. Secure the DTMFReceiver
Module with the
screw provided on the module.
Installing the DTMF Receiver Module onto the
4x8 Expander Module:
1. Locate the J5 connector on the 4x8 Expander Module and the Pl connector on
the DTMF Receiver Module. Refer to Figure
500-19 Expansion KSU Application
Card
Locations.
2. Take the Dl’MF Receiver Module and push
the Pl pin connector gently onto the JS
pins on the 4&3 Expander Module.
3. Secure theDTMFRe&verModuiewitb
the
screw provided on the module.
ir&i.te
DVX a System:
Installing the DTMF Recefver Module onto the
4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB):
l.Locate the Jl connector on the 4x8 Key
Interface Board (CKB) and the P1 connector on the DTMF Receiver Module. Refer to
Figure 500-13 4x8 Key Interface
Board
(CK01.
2. Take the DTMF Receiver Module and push
the PI pin connector gently onto the Jl
pins on the 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB).
3. Secure the DTIW Receiver Module with the
screws provided with the module.
4. Replace the 4x8 Key Interface Board (CKB)
back in the Basic KSU cabinet.
Issue

1. JaIulary

1993

@finite
D&r&d

DVX ’ and D’VX *
Key Telephone
Systems

hmalling
the DIMF Receiver Module
4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSBl:

INSTALLATION

onto the

1. Locate the Jl connector on the 4x8 SLT
Interface Board (CSB) and the Pl connector on the M’MF Receiver Module. Refer to
Figure 500-15 4x8 SLT Interface Board
(CSB).
Z-Take the DTMF Receiver Module and push
the Pl pin connector
gently onto the Jl
pins on the 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB).
3. Secure the DTMF Receiver Modulewith
the
screws provided with the module.
4. Replace the 4x8 SLTinteTface Board (CSB)
back in the Basic KSU cabinet.
Installing
the DuaI DTMFITalk-Back
Page
Module onto the 4x8 SLTInterface Board (CSB):
0
l%ismodule
is used to provide additional D?MF
receivers in the system to support single line
tefepbone
and DISA applications
along with
two-way external paging capability. Cunwtly
this module can only be added to the DVXn 4x8
SLT Interface
Board
ICSB). Each Dual
m/Talk-Back
Page Module contains two
DTMF Receivers.
A maximum
of six Dual
DTMF/Talk-Back
Page Modules can be installed in the DVX I1 system, (A CEB must be
installed in Slot 1 for programming
f?om an
Executive DigitalTerminal
(0nIya single D’IMF
Receiver module can be installed on the CKI3
board}, CSB boards can be installed in Slots 2
thru 7. Each CSB board having a Dual
M’MF/TaIk-Back
Page Module installed, resulting in thirteen DTMF Receivers in the systern.

1. Locatetie Pl and P2 connectors on the 4x8
SLT Interface Board (CSB) and the J 1’4 and
J16 connectors on the Dual MMF /TalkBack Page Module.
P-Take the Dual DTMF/Talk-Back
Page
Module and push the J14 and J16 pin
connectors gently onto the Pl and P2 connectors on the 4x8 SLT Interface
Board
(CSB).
3.Secure the Dual lXMF/Talk-Back
Page
Module with the screws provided with the
module.
4. Replace the 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB)
into the Basic KSU cabinet.
coIulectlons:
The Dual DTNF/Talk-Back
Page Module
plugs onto a 20-pin cohnector and a 14 pin
connector on the 4x8 SLT Interface Board.
.

Optional
Dual DTMF/
Talk-Back
Page Module
(FUTURE) p2

Generally,
one receiver will support DISA
and/or 8 SLT stations under light to moderate
tra&.
If SLT and or DISA tra&
is heavy,
additional DTMF Receivers should be added. It
is aIso recommended
to add additional D’IMF
Receivers when a Voice Mzdl or Auto Attendant
IS connected to the system.
Ifume 1. January

1993

500-41

r
iqfinite DVX’ and DV2C’
Digital Key Telephone Systems

XNSTALLATlON

/f ----_-----.-----__-*---__--__

I_____
___.
,-__.--____-__-_*________

-__-__.
-822

q
wm
RS-422
Moclule

..;:

.:
.’

..
i&.&e
Digital

mxl and Dvx”
Key

Telephone

I”

Symtema

INST~TION

I
-._.

-.__

I
. .._.
:‘-....
:

l.,

'3.

;
i.lC

“...;.-....--....-.,

.-..
1 ; ...i
-_
i --.
..=_,:
--.__
G.._.__.__._
:y.:
! Ii=!1
I Ii

hsue

1. Januarg

1993

50043

b&&al

INSTAUATZON
500.7
A.

DIGITS

TERMINALS

Digital Terminal Installation:
The Digital Terminals are interfaced with
the DVX ’ Basic KSU or Expansion KSU
main key service board which provides
eight circuits. E&ch of the e@ht clrctits are
interfaced from the Jll connector on the
Basic KSU or Expansion
KSU maIn key
service board to the MIX?. The digitaI terminals are interfaced witi the DVX II 4x8
Key Interface Board (CKB) and 4x8 SLT
Interface Board (CSB) which each have
eight circuits per board. Each 4x8 Key
Interface Board interface is extended from
the Basic KSU or the Expansion KSU to the
MDF through the front edge connector on
the CKl3 or CSB board.
At the mF are the terminated distribution
cables that are run from each key telephone location. Each Key Telephone requires two-pair twisted cable wiring to
connect the digital tern&mls to the system
on a “home run” basis. The telephone end
of the cable is terminated
on a modular
jack and the MDF end of the cable should
t-k
on a punchdown
block making
up the MDF. Refer to F’fgure 500-l Digital
Flatpack
Mounting
Arrangements
and
Figure
500-9 Basic KSU Equipment
Cabinet.
Telephones
are connected to the station
interfaces via industry-standard
twisted,
2-pair. 22 or 24 gauge wire. The station
cable run from the main distriiution
frame
to the station wall jack should not exceed
1000 feet. It is recommended
that
the station cable contain 4 pairs of wires. Refer to
Figure 500-20 Digital Terminal Modular
Block Wiring.
- Station cable is connected to the ?kDF at
one end. and a modular connecting block
at the other end. The modular line cord of
the telephone is then plugged into the connecting block.

The system communicates
with each
phone using 4 wires. ?plo of the wires are
used to send digital information
(voice and
COnId
signals) from the system to the
telephone. and two w&es are used by the
telephone to send digital information to the
Sydem. All 4 wires are necessary for the
telephone to fwnction. Each telephone connected to a station port has two &@tal
500-44

iq#inite
DVX’ and DVX I1
Key Telephone
Spsttms

channels. The primary channel is used for
voice communications
only. The second&y
channel is used to provide a secondzuy
path for data switching applications
[fumre).
The installer should exercise caution when
connecting a digital terminal while system
power is on. Each digital terminal station
circuit is overload protected
by internal
circuitxy on the 4x8 Key Interface Board
(CKE) or 4x8 SLT Interface Board [CSB)).
however the proper polarity of the wired
connections
must be maintained
for
proper operation.
The standard Single Line Telephone.
Single Line Telephone Adapter
(OPX). and
Dfgital DSS Console arl all considered to
be telephones by the system. These interfaces are all wired to digital key station
ports the same as a digital telephone.
B. D&&al DSS Console Installation:
The Digital DSS/DLS Console is assigned
to operate with a digital terminal.
Up to
three DSS/DLS Console units can be assigned to any one station. There are a maximum of 21 DSS/DLS Console that can be
installed in the infinite DVX’ System, and
a m-urn
of 42 DSSIDLS Consoles tit
can be installed in the in@nite DVX ’ System. Each unit uses a digital terminti
interface circuit and reduces station capacity
on a one-per-one basis.
A two-pair
twisted cable is required for
connecting
the DSS/DLS Console unit to
the MDF. The cable should be run from the
DSS/DLS Console to the MDF in a “home
run” manner. The DSS/DLS Console end
of the cable is terminated
on a three-pair
modular jack and the MDF is “punched
down” on a terminaI block for cross connection to the appropriate
station cable.
Refer to Figure 500-20 Digital Terminal
Modular Block Wiring.
Since the system supplies power to the
DSS/DLS
Console, no transformer
or cxtanal power device is required.
C. Wall Mounting
the 33-Button
Digital
TCrmiaal
To wall mount the &JJ%I& Digital Terminal,
it is necessary to use the X%-Button Wall
Mount bracket and one standard-type
jack
assembly designed for normal wall hanging applications.
1. Unplug the line cord from the phone. A
4-foot line cord is provided with the wall
Issue I, Janwy

1993

irlfinite
D&$d

DVX’ EUXI DVX”
Iby Telephone
s~8tCIIlB

INSTALLATION

Key Telephone

Wtring

DBSIDLB

GREEN
RED

Single

Figure

600-20

Digital

Line Telephone

Terminal

Console

Wiring

XMTTIP
XMT

RING

Wiring

Modular

Block

Wiring

INST&LATION
bracket.
2.Ltie up the hooks at the bottom of the
bracket so that they engage with the slots
cut
in the bottom of the telephone base. Tilt
the telephone back and lock the telephone
into the hooks at the top of the bracket. The
bracket wiIl snap in place.
3. Route the line cord from the wall jack and
plug into the connector on the back of the
telephone.
Now match the two key hole
slots on the base plate with the lugs on the
630-A type jack. Align the modular connector and slide telephone into place. Refer to
Figure
500-21
Digital
Terminal
Wail
Mounting.
D. Wall Moudting
the &Button
Df.@ti
TtSHlbd
To wall mount the GI.I.
DigTerminal.
it is necessary to use the 8-Button Wall
Mount bracket and one standard-type
jack
assembly designed for normal wall hanging applications.
1. Unplug the I&e cord from the phone. A
4-foot line cord is supplied with the wall
bracket.
2.Line up the hooks at the bottom of the
bracket so that they engage with the slots
cut in the bottom of the telephone base. Tilt
the telephone back and lock the telephone
into the hooks at the top of the bracket. The
bracket will snap in place.
3. Route the line cord from the wall jack and
plug into the connector on the back of the
telephone.
Now match the two key hole
slots on the base plate with the lugs on the
630-Atype jack. Align the modular connector and slide telephone into place. Refer to
Figure
500-21
Digital
Terminal
WalI
MOlXlttng.
E. - Single Idne Telephone
In~taIlation
Single Line Telephones (SLTs) can be exchanged for digital terminals on a groups
of eight or one-for-one basis with an OPX
box.
The 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) can be
pluged
into any designated CKB card slot.
Each 4x8 SLT Interface Board supports
eight standard
single line telephones
(standard DTMF Single Line Telephones
ami mwage waiting DTMF SLTs).lt is recommended that the Tellabs 8101. 30 Hz,
9OVAC Ring Generator be used with this
board.

D&&al

iqfinite
DVX’andDVX”
Key Telephone
Eqstems

o#tl&JoneRtigOarnatorisnquindpuI
lzb%xwe&T’
iIEzzcdkcut-int?lesptcnL
I
Either the singk DTMF Receiver Module or
the Dual DTMF/Talk-Back
Page Module
may be installed on each 4x8 SLTinterface
Board installed. The single DTMF Receiver
Module {RM) installs onto either a 4x8 Key
Interface Board [CKB) or 4x8 SLT Interface
Board [CSB) and provides 1 DTMFreceiver.
The Dual m/Talk-Back
Page Module
can ONLY be installed onto the 4x8 SLT
Interface Board and provides two DIMF
receivers. M’MF receivers can be added to
the system to support Single Line Telephones. If SLT &afEc is heavy or a Voice
Mail system is being installed, it is recommended that additional
DTMF Receiver
Modules be installed in the system.
Each SLT requires one-pair cable. The cable should be placed from the telephone
location to the MDF in a -home run” manner. The telephone end of the cable run
should be te-rl ’ &ted in a modular jack.
Refer to Figure 500-l Digital Flatpack
Mounting
Arrangements
and/or
Figure
500-9 Basic KSU Equipment Cabinet. The
MDF end should be “punched down” on a
terminal block for cross connection to the
appropriate
station cable. Refer to Table
500-9 4x8 SLT interface Board (CSB) for
SLT wiring connections.
F. SLT Adapter
/ Off-m
EXkIlSi0n
Moddc (OPX)
This external module provides the interface for one long loop (OPX) singIe line
telephone (2500 type) extension. This module requires a separately provided -48V dc
power supply to provide the necessary current for long loop applications
and to support ring generation. This module is wired
to and uses a key station port from any
digital key terminal station poti on any
card plugged into the system. The OPX
card meets the requirements
of the FCC for
connection
to the telephone (‘&lco) network. Telephones
must be DTMF only
12500 type). Refer to Figure 500-22 CHPremise Extension (OPX) Module
This module also provides for one Power
Fail circuit in the event of an AC power
faiIure.
Buttons aud xm&3:
An LZD located on the back of the unit
indicates correct connection and WIU light

33-Button Wafl Mount Bracket

--L

lf3
cl
c

8-Button Wall Mount Bracket

!i3

DVX’ and DVX I1
Key Telephone
Systems

iqf?nite

Di@tal

INSTALWLTXON
when the SLT station is taken off-hook.
Connections:
AU connections
to the SLsi (0PX) adapter
are made on the back of the unit. %o
modular jacks and a two-wire cable are
located on the back of the unit for connection to the KSU and power supply. The two
wire cable connects to a 48V dc power
suppIy / ring generator. The modular jack
marked KSU is connected to a KSU Digital
terminal station port. This connection requires all four wires and wires the same as
a kqr station. The modular jack marked
OPX is wired to the SLTstation (2500 type].
OPX circuit or SLT device. Additionally,
a
CO line may be wired to the second pair of
the SLT modular connector for Power fail
operation.
Cable Imp

Limiti:

The maximum
loop limit from the KSU to
the SLA (OPX) adapter is 1000 feet.
The mz&num
loop limit from the SLA
[OPX) adapter to the connected SLT or
device is 1400 ohms not mciudtng the telephone or device.
500.8
A

POWER FAILURE

TRANSFER

Relay / Sensor Interface
Module
The Relay Sensor interface Module connects to the system using one digital station port and provides three relay activated
contacts and three sensing circuits. The
relays provide for applfcations
such as
Loud BeJJ Control contacts, CO Line control contacts, RAN Start contacts, Page Relays, Power FaiI contact and additional
applications
as software wIJJ permit. The
sensing circuits wiJl provide for such applications as Alarm signaHnginput,
RAN Stop
* [end of message) and other applications
as
developed and allowed by s&ware.

COllUCCti0nS:

All connections to the Relay Sensor Module
are made on the back of the unit. 7bo
terminal strips with screw termfnals each
provide connection to the ancillary devices
for relay control or sensing monitoring. The
Modular jack marked KSU is connected to
a KSU Digital terminal station port. This
connection
requires all four wires and
*es
the same as a key station. Refer to
Figure 500-23 Relay / Sensor Interface
Module for wiring information.
An CX@IXLJ power source may be required
to &iv= equipment connected to the relay

contacts. The contacts are rated at 24Vdc
max at 1 amp.
Cable Loop Lixnitzx
The maxImum
loop limit from the KSU to
the relay Sensor Module is 1000 feet.
B. Power Fhihre lkaaefer
Unit IpFTU)
This unit provides the relay transfer circuits for up to 12 CO lines in the event of
a power or processor failure. The unit is
housed in fts own enclosure and mounts
external to the KSU. Activation of the PFIY
relays is contrc&d
by a multi-use relay on
any one of the CO/Station
Interface boards
that is programmed
for PFT. A customer
provided 12 volt DC power supply is required to operate the un&t. There is a manual switch that activates the PFl%I for
testing purposes.
With loss of power to the system or a failure
of system processing. the PFTU will automatically connect up to twehre CO Jines to
prewired 500/2500
type telephones. When
power is restored. the PFKJ will automati&iy restore the CO &LI.&S and stations
to nonndl operation. ‘These SLTstations
do
not have to be used for intercom, but can
be if so desired.
wtrxlg
/ Pinouts / conxlectiolls:
The PFlW has two 50-pin male amphenol
connectors labeled CONNl and CONNS Jocated on the front of the unit. Each connector wires six CO lines for power fail
transfer. Refer to Table 500-10 PFI’U Corm
A Connecting
Block and Table 500-11
PFTU Corm B Connecting
Block for pinouts of each of the cqnnectms.
The PFIL7 is connec&d to the KSU via the
modular connector on the side of the unit.
This is connected in series to a customer
provided 12V dc supply. and ta a multi use
relayprognxnmed
as a power failure mlay.

GREEN

STATION
;FtF;CTJNG

SLT Ring 11 SLT Tip
MODULAR
CABLE

Black wire to - of external
Red wire to + of external

48~ supply
48~ supply

Yellow

FQurc
Issue

1, Januaxy

IBBS

500-22

OfWremiee

Extcnaion

to Trunk

Ring

(OPIZ) Module

590-49

INSTALLATION

GREEN
XMITTIP

XMIT RING
RCVE
RCVE

TIP
RING

SENSOR

Device Output Relay

I- Loud Bell Control

‘Lip-J:2!i!:E:r,
Customer Provided
Power Supply
(if needed)
NOTE: RAN device does not
require external power supply

500-50

Issue

1, Jsumary

1993

imite
D&itaI

DVX’andDVX”
Xey Telephone

Systems

IN!STALLATlON

OPX

PFT
SLT

RING

IN 1

1 SLTTIP

RING

Method #I

Method #2

DVX

II Basic

KSU Cabinet

MDF
--

I--

Figure

k=uc

1, January

19~3

5ioo-24

Power FMlure

Transfer

Wiring

Optiona

SOUS

infinite
DVX ’ rind DVX I1
D&&al Key Telephone
Systems

Table

500-10

Table

PFTU Corm A Connect&g

500-11

PFTU Corm B Connecting
Block

Block

DESIG

COLOR

10
11
12
13
14
L5
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

500-52

27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

WH/BL
BL/wH
W-H/OR
OR/WH
WH/GN
GN/WH
WH/BN
BN/WH
WH/SL
SL/wH
RD/BL
BL/RD
RD/OR
OR/RD
RD/GN
GN/RD

RD/BN
BN/RD
RD/SL
SL/RD
BK/BL
BL/BK

BK/OR
OR/BK
BK/GN
GN/BK
BK/BN

BN/BK
BK/SL
SL/BK
YL/BL

BLrn

YL/OR
ORW
YL/GN

GNrn
YL/BN
BNrn
YL/SL
SLrn
VI/BL

BLM
VI/OR
OR/VI
VI/GN

GNM
VI/BN
BNM
vI/SL

=/VI

1nT
1TzR
1 STA1NTiP
1 STAINRING
1TRKouTm
1 TRKOUTRING
1SIQT
1STOR
2llT
2lm
2STAINTiP
2 STA IN RING
2TRKOuTTIP
2TRKOUTRING
B+slnr
2STQR
3m
3m.R
3 STAINTIP
3 STAIN RING
3TRKOuTTIP
3TRi-COUTNNG
3moT
3STOR
3l-n
3nR
BSTAINTIP
3 STA IN RING
QTfcKOuTTiP
3’iRKOTJTRtNG
PsroT
PSl-OR
3TlT
STIR
3STAINTIP
5 STA IN RlNG
jTRKOUTTIP
5TRKOUTRING
ISTOT
ASTOR
j?lT
STIR
6 STAINTIP
GSI’AINRING
6TRxzOuTTIP
B’TIWOUTRING
6sTwr
GSIOR

i PAIR t PIN ’ COLOR I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

26
I
I 2:
2
! 28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

I
!

DESIG

WWBL

! 7 nT
7nR
WH/OR : II 7STAINTiP
OR/wN : I 7 ETA IN RING
WWGN I : 7TRKOuTTIP

BL/wII

GNW

7TRKOUTFlING

WH/BN
BN/wH
WI-ML
swwl
RD/BL
BL/RD
FZD/OR
OR/RD
RD/GN
GN/RD
RD/BN
BN/RD
RDJSL
SL/RD
BK/BL
BL/BK
BK/OK
ORjBK
BK/GN
GN/BK
BK/BN
BN/BK
BK/SL
SL/BK
YL/BL
BLryL
YL/OR
ORfyL
YL/GN
GN/YL
YL/BN

7STOT
7STOR
8’llT
8nR
8STAINTIP
8 SJYAIN RING
8 TRK OUTmP
8lRKOuTRwG
8STOT
BSTOR
9nT
9nR
9 STAINTIP

9 STAINRING

BNrn
YLjSL
=m
Vi/BL

BLM
VI/OR
ORM
Vl/GN

(=/VI
W-BN
BNM

9TRKouTmP
9’IRKOUTRING
9Slvr
9sToR
1omT
1OTIR
10 SIAINmP
10STAINRING
1OTRKOuTmP
10TRKOUTRING
1OsToT
10 STOR
1lTiT
1lmR
11 STAINTIP
11 STAINRING
1lTRKOuTrnP
1lTRKOUTFUNG
11STOT
IISTOR
12Trr
12mR
12 STAINTZP
12 STAIN RING
12TRKOuTrnP
12TRKOUTRING
12 STOT
12 STOR

W/SL

SLM

Issue 1, January

1993

iqfinite
D&ital

DVX’ and DVX”
Ecy Tcltphont
Systems

INSTAUA’IXON

INSTALLING
RECORDED ANNOUN~NTDEVICE
(RAN]
The Recorded
Announcement
feature
(RAN) is used with either the Automatic
Call Dfstrihution
fACD) or Uniform CaU
Distribution
(UCD) features to provide unanswered incoming CO calls or calls in
queue with a Recorded Announcement
while wafting for an available ACD or UCD
station. The system may be programmed to
provide this announcement
on specified
RAN output ports on the system [unused
SLT and CO ports). The system can be
programmed
to connect the wait&q caller
to a different FUN port for the second, and

When a CO line port is used for a ground
start application.
a 24V dc power source
must be connected to the CO line port for
talk battery, A Page/Relay
contact assigned to an announcement
table in programming would provide contact closure to
start the Recorded Announcement
device.
When an SLT port is used, the RAN device
must be configured for ring trip operation
(loop start]. The 9OV ac voltage sent to the
SLT port will be recognized by the RAN
device which will then answer the call.

500.9

subsequent

RAN messages.

v
%Lw

Fi@m

Iasuc 1, January

1993

500-25

TYPE RAN SIQNAUNG

CO and SLT RAN @nncctions

500-m

. . .

ir#mite

DVX’

and DVX’

m3TALLATION
500.10

The Digftal Data lnteriace Unit IDDIU) is wired
to the infinite Digital Key Telephone Systems
like a digital telephone, and requires one station port.
All connections
to the DDIU are made on the
back panel. The back panel has a modular jack
and a DB-25 type connector. The modularjack.
labeled KSU. is used to connect the DDIU to the
station port ofthe system. The DB-25 connector
supports an RS-232C connection
and is used
to connect the data device to the system.
A green LED Irehts to indicate the DDIU is
prgperly wired ti the system.

DATA=TURE

The Data Feature is a time division switched,
point to point data transmission
capability
which pen-nits simultaneous
(on the same system but not the same port) voice and data
communications.
The Data Feature offers the
abillty to transmit
data information
between
personal computers.
printers,
plotters, modems, CRT terminals.
and main frame computer ports.
To establish a Data CalI. a Digftal Data Interface
Unit (DDIU) is required to be connected to each
data communications
device. Data information
can be switched through the system at speeds
of 300, 1200, 2400, 4800. 9600, 19.2K and
38.4K baud asynchronous.
GREEN

MDF

STATION
CONNECTlNG
BLOCK

KSU
8(
“JF
HOOK

F@ut

=o-s4

SOO-26 Di#tal

Data Inttrbt

0000000000000
000000000000

To Data Device

Unit

(DDl’W rpiring

Itmlt

1, JannRry

1996

imite
Digital

DVX * and DVX’
Key Telephone
Syetesrs

connection
of the individual data communication devices requires that the installer be familiar with data communications
terms, and has
access to the appropriate
information
for connecting the variety of data communications
devices
that
may be encountered.
This
information
consists of, but is not limited to:
1 .Is the device configured as data terminal
equipment (DTEJ. or data communications
equipment (DCE.
2.What pin on the RS232C type connector
performs what function?
3.What signal leads are required to make the
device operate?
When planning the instalkticm
of the data feature, use a digital display phone at any location
that is to originate a data connection. A DDIU
can only be called: it cannot originate a connection..A digital display phone would typicaUy be
connected to a CRT terminaI, or personal computer. A DDIU would typicaUy be connected to
a prfnter,or a MODEM.
The station wiring for a digital display phone
and a DDIU are identical.
The data connector of the Digital Data Interface
Unit (DD1l-J) is a 25-pin. type D connector which
is configured as Data Communications
Equipment with the follow-jng pin configurations.
PIN
USE
DtRECTION
1 #
’ 2 ! Receive Data
into telephone (or
I
DDIUJ
3 Transmit DATA
out of telephone
(or DDIU’)
f
Request
To
Send
into
telephone (or
4
DDIU)
Clear To Send
out of telephone
5
(or DDW)
I
Data
Set
Ready
out of telephone
6
(or DDIU)
7 i SignalGround
Data carrier detect out of telephone
8
(or DDILJ)
t
1 11 unassigned
into telephone (or
DDIUJ
I
12
Secondary DCD
out of telephone
(or DDIU)
15 Transmit Clock
out of telephone
(or DDlU)
17 Receive Clock
out of telephone
(or DDIU)
19 Secondary KIS
into telephone (or
DDIU)

Issue 1, Jammy

1993

INSTALLATION

( DataTerminal
Ready
: 22 ) Ring Indicator

1 into telephone (or (
II
! DDlU)
i out of telephone
j
!
j (or DDIUJ
The following diagram will aid in the design of
cables to connect the many different conf@rations of data communications
devices.

D&itat

Systems

Data Switching

soo-ss

DVX * and DVX ’
Systems
Keg Telephone

irlfinite

DigiW

mSTALLKI’ION

To establish

DDI

UODEM

1 GNO

sG7

Modem

756

to DDIU Cable

DISPLAY
PHONE

PC
r
_

WJl
m2

Computer

to Phone

C&k

1GNn
2Fn

a connection to any idle data port:
l.A user witi an associated DDIU dials the
station number of the DDJU or the group
access number of the group that the DDIU
has been inserted into or presses a DSZj
button representing
the DDIU. The digital
key system will then determine the baud
rate set&g for the called DDIU and convert
the user’s associated DDIU to the same
baud rate. The system will then complete
the connection.
A second method to establish
a connection
between two DDlUs is done by the first attendant.
l.Tbe first attendant
dials the extension
number of one data u~$t. Dii tone is received and the display will show the BAUD
RATE.
2.Then dials the &&ion number of the second data unit, confitmation
tone is heard.
To break down an establfshed connection:
l.The station user dials his associated DDIU
number or press the DSS button for the
associated DDIU folloftred by pressing the
FLASH button. The first attendant can dial
one of the DDIUs. folfowcd by pressing the
FLASH button.
Conditions:
l
The System is transparent
to the devices
being connected. ‘Ikerefore each DDIU must
be configured with a specific baud rate, number of data bits and number of stop bits. This
configuration
wiIl be done by the fkst attendant or in the case of an associated data unit
can be confqxed
by the user.
l
Data switc&ng
is aqcomplished
using the
same wiring the telephone station uses for
voice switching.
. Data ports can be arranged in UCD Groups
or Hunt Groups.
l
Data ports do not have to be associated with
a keyset. however to connect two DDIU devices one of them must be associated with a
keyset unless the connection is made by the
first attendant.
l
when the data connection
has been completed, the baud rate used in the connection
wilI be displayed on the keyset.
l
Non associated DDIU connections
can be
broken down by the first attendant.
l
A DDIU has a DCE interface. Therefore a
straight through RS-232C cable can be used
connect to a DTE device (printer. PC, etc.).
l
Each DDIU re@res a digital termhal port-

iqjinite
D&i&d

DVX’ and DVXn
Key Telephone

Systemfi

Refer to Station Attributes
Programming.
730.2. Station ldentifkatlon
for programming
the Station ID of the Digital Data Interface Unit
(DDIU). Also refer to Sec. 730.3. Digital Data
Intmface Unit IDDILl) for programming
the parameters
of the Digital Data Interkce
Unit
(DDIUI.

INSTALLATION

iqjinite

INGTAW*ATfON

Di@al

Table 500-12

DVX’

and DVX II

Key Telephone

systems

SMDR printout

The SMDR feature provides detailed records of alI outgotng and/or
incoming.
long distance only
or
all &IS. The SMDR Qualifkation
Timer determines
the length of time that is needed to
determine a valid SMDR call for reporting purposes. By default. this timer is set to 30 seconds
and is variable from 00 to 60 seconds in I sec. increments.
This feature is enabled or disabled in
system programming.
By defauk SMDR is not enabled and is set to record long distance calls
only. A printout
format of 80 characters maximum or 30 character maximum may be selected in
system pnagramming.
The standard format is 69 characters on a single line. A30 character format
will generate
3 lines per message, If the SMDR feature Is enabled, the system starts collecting
information
about the caU as soon as it starts and terminates
when the call ends. If the call was
longer then 30 seconds. the f&owing information
is printed:
30 ch6ractu

fcmlat

sdtetted:

123456789012345678901234567890

AAA BB HH:MM:SS

HH:MM MM/DD/YY(CRj

(LF)

HCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
GGGGGGGGGGGG

STA CD TOTAL
START
DATE
116 08 00:02:00
14:13 05/11/90(CR)(LF)
0123456789012345678901234~CR)(LF)
123456789012(CR)(LF)

80 character
1

format

he&cd:
2

3
4
5
6
7
~23456789012345678901238567890123456?6901234~67%90~234567a90123~567~90i234567~90
AA.?4 33 Ei:i'!M:SS
RH:MM MH/DD/YY HCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
GGGGGGGGGGGG (CR)(LF)
STA CO TOTAL

116

00:02:00

80 character
1

DATE
START
14:X
05/11/90

format

with
2

DIALED
0123456789012345678901234

CaIl Cost misplay feature
4
3

ACCOUNT CODE
123456789012(CR)(LF)

enabled:
5

'-7

~234567~901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567830
AAA 133 :HE:ME:SS HH:b!X MM/DD/ YY HCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
GGGGGGGGGGGG
(CR)(LC)

STA CO TOTAL
116 08 00:02:00

START
14:13

DATE
05/11/90

DIALED
0123456789012345678901234

ACCOUNT CODE COST
123456789012
OOO.OO(CR)(LF)

KXID

80 character
format selected:
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901~34567830~~~4567~~~~~345~7~~~~~~~~~~~g~

STA CO

TOTAL

100 01 00:00:36

START

04:37

DATE
06/19/92

04:38

(CR) (L-F)
&S/19/92
Ul-602-443-6000f'

l *vomv1

0: 00:~~:~~
**VODAVI

-CWUimeonnextpage-

DIALED

IT-602-443-6000**

ACCOUNT CODE
(CR) (LF)

imite

DVX’

and DVX”

Table 500-13

ShfDR printout

[C-ont’d)

AAA = Station originator or Trunk on DISA and Off-Net (CO Line) calls.
BB = Outside line number
HH:MM:SS = Duration of call in Hours, Minutes and Seconds
HH:MM = Time of day (start time) in Hours and Minutes
MM/DD/YY
= Date of Call
H = Indicates call type:
“I” = Incomi.ng
“0” = outgoing
T=Transfcrred
‘7J” = Unanswered c&Us for ICIJD SMDR call records
CC....CC

= Number

GG....GG

dialed

= Last Acmxmt
(CR) = Carriage return
(LF) = I&e Feed

ku3ue 1, January

1-3

code entered

(optional]
,

5m-59

i@nite

DigiW

DVX ’ and DVX ’
Key Telephone
Sy8tezns

spsTEh¶

CBECE-OUT

SECTION 600
SYSTEM CHECK-OUT
600.1
INTRODUCTION
prior to actual power up and initialization.
the
infinite Digital Key Telephone System should be
checked over to avoid start up delays or improper loading. A step-by-step checklist is provided for this purpose.
6cKI.2

PREW

PROCEDURES

f . Make sure that the Basic Key service Unit
(BKSU) is properly grounded.
2. Verify that all PCB’s are firmly plugged into
the correct card sfot positions or expander
modules are firmly seated onto their connectors.
3.Inspect the MDF for shorted wiring and
improper
polarity that would aEect the
Digital Tertnimil or DSS console.
4.Make certain that the nicad battery is set
to ‘ON”. Switch 53 on the DVx’
Centi
Processor Board (CPB).
5.Make sure that plug-ended
MDF cables
connected to the KSU are secure and are
plu@ed into the correct position.

Table 600-l

VOLTAGE
DESIGNATIONS

3.The CPB has one red IED located on the
fkont of the CP3 card. If the power up is
succ&.
the red LED will flash.
4. Press the reset button OR the CPB. The
above CPB LED indication wiIl repeat.
S-The system is ready for programming.
Ii
znproblrO
have occurred, Refer to SecMaintenance
and
Troubkshoot&

Power Supply

Tests

t
TEsf ‘POINT
- -I_1
REMARKS
LOCATION
I
CorllmmaI
POwer
117 VAC
+117VAC flO?z!
source
The power supply is pre-set at the time of manufacturing.
but she: uld be checked
-----____ at
-_ svstm
-, ---initialization
with a dgital volt meter havfng an accuracy of *I%.
i

VOLTAGE
RTMDING

600.3
POWER UP SEQUENCE
The power up sequence involves the proper
application ofAC power to the System. and CPB
LED’s, A successful power up is assured if the
installation
checklist has been followed.
1. Plug the AC power cord of the Key Sexvice
Unit into the dedicated 117V ac outlet.
2.Tum the power switch of the KSU to ON.

i&hite
D&it&

DVX’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems

CUSTOMER

SECTION 700
DATA BASE PRUG-NG

INTRODUCTION
700.1
The infinite Digital Key Telephone System can
be programmed
to meet each customer’s individual needs. All programming
is done either at
Station I00 using the 33-button display digital
terminal as the programming
instrument or an
ASCII texminal or PC. The distal display model
is suggested since the display is designed to
assist in programming.
When the program mode is entered, the Digital
TerminaI being used no longer operates as a
terrnird
but as a progmmming
instrument
with all of the buttons redefined. The keys of the
dial pad are used to enter data fields (program
Codes) associated with system, station,
and CO
line features as well as enter specific data that
requires a numeric entry. Flexible buttons are
used to toggle on or off features or alIow entry
into speciAc data fields. LED’s and the LCD
display provide visual indication of entered data
and their value.
Programming
can also be performed by using
an ASCII terminal. or a computer capable of
emuiamg
an ASCII terminal. Thfs form of programming can be done either locally (on-site) by
connecting the terminal directly to the FS232C
connector on the CPB or can be performed
remotely (off-site) through the use of the onboard modem located on the CPB. The method
and steps to progmm the system via a terminal
are identical to that used when programmin%
from a digital keyset. A button to keyboard
mapping
has been incorporated
(see Figure
700-l ) to help minimix
f-on
and
training time.
At the time the system is installed it must be
initialized to load default data into memory. If
this pi-e-prosuits the customer, initialization
is all that is needed. Refer to Table
700- 1 for a listing of all the default values.
Any time data is to be changed, the program
mode must be entered and then the individual
data field (program code), A data field can be
entered to determine current prom
or
to change a sped& feature witbin that field.
During
programming,
the other Digital
Timnfnals in the System operate normally. If a
data field is entered but nothing is changed. or
changed but not entered, the previous data will
i-a-&n intact upon leaving that data field. Data
bzmt

1, Jantwy

1993

DATA BASE PROGR&MlkDNG

fields can be entered at random.
In many of the data fields. programming
is
performed by toggling LED’s on or off, or entering digits on the keypad. If no changes are to be
made to the line or station, exft the data field by
either leaving the program mode (pressing the
ON/OFF button to OFF) or entering another
data field (pressing the FLASH button and entering that program code).
When features an being programm ed. tones
are provided to help the programmer
determine
if a comect or ticorreet entny has been made. A
solid one second tone indicates the data was
accepted. An interrupted
tone means an error
was made.
When this occurs, reenter the data field and
r-e-enter the information.
Until new data is entered and accepted, the system will continue to
operate under default or prwiously
entered
values.
The system database is updated on a real-time
basis as new data is entered, by pressing the
Hold button. The system continues to operate
with the current database and is updated with
any newly entered or changed data without
interruption
to telephone operation or call processing in progress. However. if for example a
station’s attributes are changed while that station is off-hook on an active call, the newly
entered data will not take effect until the station
goes on-hook or becomes fdle.

700.2

PROGRAM MODE ENTRY [Hey
Station)
pro&ramming
a digital terminal is performed at
Port Cl1 (Station 100) using a 33-button
Digftal
Display Terminal. Programming is ahvays done
at this Port regardless of the class of service or
which station has been assigned the attendant(s) .
Before entering the program mode, tbe programmer must ffrst verify that the Digital Terminal isi properly connected to Port 01 [Station
100).

700-l

CDSTOMER

ir@ite
DVX’ and DVX’
Di@taI Key Telephone
Systems

DATA RASE PROGRAbI&mVG

When using a data terminal 0/O device) to program the system. the following
terminal characters that are equivalent to the keyset buttons.

chart presents

the data

adm> ?
REl-tOTE ADtlIN

KEY DEFINITIONS

Keyset

Term

Keyset

FLEX 2
FLEX 34

5”

;
:

;
89

FLEX
FLEX
FLEX
FLEX

ii
X

FLRSH
HOLD
DND

---------I------------------------------0
0
FLEX i

*
&FINS

65
7
8
9
10

Term

Keyset

Term

;
R
E

FLEX 11
FLEX 12
FLEX 13
14

FI
S
FD

Y
T
LI
I
0
P

FLEX
FLEX
FLEX
FLEX

Ii6
J
K
L

iR
C

ON-OFF
SPEED
IlUTE

16
15
17
18
20
19

A
6

adm>

In place of keyset button to&$ing to enable/disable
a feature, the associated data terminal key can be
toggled (pressed a&n) to enable/disable
a feature, or the plus (+I character can be used to turn on
or enable a feature and the minus (-1 character can be used to turn off or disable a feature.
a.’

700-2

Issue

1, Jamery

lQB3

irlfirtf&
Dj#ital

DVX’mdDVX’I
Key Telephone

Systems

CUSTOMER

If&urr: ?oQ-2 InfidteDigitaIRogramming

Button

DATA

BASE PROGRAMMING

Mapping

CUSTOMER

il?jidte
DVX’andDVX”
Digital Key Telephone
Systems

DATA aASE mOGFG

Table 700-I

Defatit

Value5

PROGRAM
CODE
i SYSTEM T’IMERS:
1 System Hold Recall Timer
Exclusive Hold RecaIl Timer
Attendant Recall Timer
Transfer Recall Timer
Preset Forward Timer
Call Forward No/Answer Timer
Pause Timer
Call Park Timer
Confere.nce/DISA
Timer
Paging Tlimeout TJmer
CO Ring DetectTimer
SLT D’I’MF Receiver Timer
MSG Waiting Reminder Tone
Hookflash Tfmer
Hookflash Debounce Tfmer
SMDR Call QuaLiftcaton
Timer
Auto Call Back Timer
SYSTEM FEATURES:
Attendant Override
Hold Preference
External Night Ring
Executive Ckenide Waming Tone
Page Warn@ Tone
Background
Music
LCR Enable
Forced Account Codes
Group Listening
- Idle Speaker Mode
Call Cost Display Feature
Music-On-Hold
Attendant Station Assignment (3 Stations)
Set Date and Time
PBX Dialing Codes
Executlve/SecretaryAssi~ents
Relay/Sensor
Programming
Baud Rate Assignments
Port #I (uOn-Board” RS-232C)
Port X2 [‘On-Board”
Modem)
I

‘When the ACD Soi?ware package is purchased
listed ACD features.
700-s

FLEXBUTI’ON

Flash 01
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button

I
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
i’l
12
13
14
15
16
17

060 sec.
180 sec.
01 min.
045 sec.
10 sec.
15 sec.
2 sec.
180 sec.
10 min.
15 sec.
3 (100 msec.)
020
000 min.
10 (1 sec.)
010 msec.
30 sec.
00 sec.

Flash 05
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
Button 5
Button 6
Button 7
Button 8 ”
Button 9
Button 10
Button 11
Button 12
Flash 10
Flash11
Flash 12
Flash 13
Flash 14
tilash 15

Button
Buttons
Buttons
Buttons

l-4
l-5
l-4
l-7

Button
Button
1
.separately,

_
the

CD features

Disabled
system
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
DisabIed
Enabled
loo
IM/DD,‘YY,
12 HI
None
None
None
2400 Baud
300 Baud

are replaced

with the

Issue 1, Jammy

1~93

i@inite
DVX’andDVX’
D&&d Eey Telephone

CUSTQMER

SyMcrn8

Table 700- 1 Default

(Cant’d)

PROGRAM
CODE

FEATURE
/

Values

Port #3 Q/O Expander

Module

RS-232C)

Port #4 [I/O Expander

Module

R!H22)

Acimin password for Digital
Sh4DR PROGRAMMlNG
SMDR
Cd?srpe

Key Tw

3
4

Button
Button

1
2

Button
Button

1
2

Button
Button
Button

3
4
5

1
’ 1

2400Baud
2400 Baud
loo

3226

Disabled
LD
80
2400

Port #l

Flash 22

MZWld

2-8

O-4 08:00- 1790
5-6 ####-####I

Button

Auto/Manual
Days of the Week !Schedule

Buttons
Flash 23

Table

Button

Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
Button 18
Button 19
Button 20

Next Entry
Fbrevious Entry
New Entry

HUNT GROUP PROGRAMMING;
Groups 1-8

Flash 30
Buttons l-8
Button 9

PU0t/Circti

CO IDJE GROUP PROG-G:
DTMFDial
Pulse Signsling
co/pm
Flag
Universal Night Answer (UN.A)
corlfercnee
~==Y
Loop Supervfsion
DISA
Flash ‘lkner
CO Line Group
Line COS
Ringing Assfgnlnmt
CO Line Identification
When the ACD Software
listed ACD features.
1, January

Button
Button

Flash21

Print Format
Baud Rate
Polt#
MGHl. MODE PROGRAMMING:

hue

FLEXBUTION

Flash 20

Acces& Codes
DISA Access Code

Directory Dw
Bin/KM
Name
Clear Entry
Back space

DATA BASE PROGFMMBUING

1993

Ftash 40
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
Button 5
Button 6
Button 7
Button 8
Button 9
Button 10
Button
Button

Display
package

is purchased

eparately.

the

11
12

CD fkatures

co
Enabled
Enabkd
Ellabled
Disabled
Disabled
10
I
1

None

are ,eplaced with the

700-s

CUSTOMER

DATA IBASE PROGRAMMING

Table 700-l

DIgital

Default

Values

PROGRAM
CODE
1 Display Ring Assigumentb)
; Next [forward) CO
Next (backward) CO
j
; NewRange
Dial Puke, Speed/Ratio
programming
Break/Make
Dial speed
Fkxible PortAssignment
Feature - CO Lines
ICLID Ringing Assignment
Feature
STAnON PROGRAMMING:
Page Access
DND Access
Conference
Executive Override

Flash
Flash
Flash
Page

42
43
50
A

Flash 50
Page B

Class of Service
Speakerphone
Group Pickup
Pagingzones
Preset Forward
CO Line Group Access
LCR Class of Service
Off-Hook Preference
Flexible Button Assignments
Display Button ASSQIUII~~S
Select Page A
Vhert the ACD Sofkware package
;t.ed ACD features.
700-6

““““‘“““1

FLEXBUTTON
17
18
19
20

RillgatSta

Button 1
Button 2
33uttons l-7
Butkms 1
Button
Button
Button
Button
But&on
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
%.&ton
Button
Button
Button
Button

. . me
.. U
separate&y,
CD features

60/40
1OPps
Cards 1-7

Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
18
19
20
1 ’

0 Wewet)
5(SLT w/o MWti
I
0
1
1
None
1
0
0 R=yJet)

Button 2
Button 3
Button 4
Button 5
Button 6
Button 7
Button 8
Button 9
Button 10
Button 17
Button 18
is purchased

100

Flash 41

Line Answer

Call Forward
Forced LCR
Supervisor Barge-In for ACD
Select Page A
Select Page B
New Station Range (#%I
Station Programming
[ConVd)
Station ID

(Cont’d]

Button
Button
Button
Button

pnivacy
System Speed
0ueuing
Preferred
OWO

iqjinite
DvX’aadDVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

am replaced with the
Issue

1, Janwiry

1993

i@&te
Dj#d

DVX’andDVX’
Key Telephone

Systems

Table 700-l

FEATURE

Select Page B
New Station Range (#&I
DIG-DATE
IN~~~RFA~~EuNIT~DDIU)
BaudFtate
Character Length
Stop Bit
Flexible Port Assignment Feature - Stations
Local Number/Name
Translation Table
ICLID FEATURES:
Enable/Disable
Name in Display
Baud Rate
Pot-t #
*ACD GRCXI-P PROGRAMMING:
ACD Groups (l-8)
Alternate ACD Group
ovemowAssignment
Announcement
Table(s) Entries
; ACD Supervisor Pro-g
: Select Page A

CUSTO-

Default

Values
PROGRAM

CODE

FIXXBU-ITON

19
20

Flash 51

Flash 52
Flash 55
Flash 56

Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Buttons l-7
3uttJms 1-4
Button
Button
Button
Button

Flash 60
Page A

Select Page B

ACD Groups (l-8)
Select Page A
Select Page B
l ACD ‘TIMERS:
RingTlmer
MIT Timer
Over Flow Timer
Wrap-Up Tier
No-Answer Recall Timer
No-Answer Retry ‘kner
UCD GROUP PROGRAMMING:
UCD Groups (l-8)
Alternate UCD Group
owmow Assignment
Announcement
Table(s) Entries
Select Page A
Select Page B
UCD Groups (l-8)
Select Page A
When the LCD Soi33vare package is purchased
sted ACD features.

[Cont‘d)

Button
Button

DATA EASE PROGRAMMING

Page B

Buttons
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Buttons
Button
Button

1
2
3
4
l-8
11
12
13
14
18
19
l-8
18
19

9600
8 characters

1 stop bit
Cards l-7

’

Disabled
2400

Port #l
None
None
None
None

None

Flash61

Flash 60
Page A

Button

Button
Button
Button
Button
Button

2
3
4
5
6

60
60
60
04
000
30

sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.

l-8
None
Button 11
None
Button 12
None
Button 13
None
Button 18
Button 19
Buttons l-8
Page B
None
Button 18
separately, tne LJCD features are replaced with the
Buttons

CUSTOMER

DATA BASE PROC+RAhWIINCi

Table 700-l

FEATURE
Select Page B
UCD TIMERS:
Ring Timer
MITmmer
Over Flow Timer
wrap-up
Tirne.r
, No-Answer Recall Timer
No-Answer Retry Timer
UCD RAN Am-rouncement
Tables
‘PC/ACD Event Trace
Event Record
Port #
. VM GROUPPROGRAMMING:
t VA4 Groups (l-8)
AItcmate VM Group
Leave Mail Table entry
Retrieve Mail Table enny
Station Assignments
VM Leave/Retrieve
Disconnect Tables
VM ln-Band Digits
VM ID on Incoming CO CalIs
Allow Call Fomd
to Voice Mail
ALLOW/DENY
& SPECIALTABLES:
Allow Table A
Deny Table A
Allow Table B
Deny Table B
Special Table 1
Special Table 2
Special Table 3
Special Table 4
Area Code for Special Table 1
Area Code for Special Table 2
Area Code for Special Table 3
Display Tables
LCR PROGRAMMING:
3-Digit Routing Table
s-Digit Routing Table
Exception Code Table
Route List Table
When the ACD Sofhvare package is purchased
i sted ACD fmtura.

700-8

Mgital

Default

Values

ti@.ni.te DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
SJrstems

(Cont’d)

PROGRAM
CODE

FLEXBUTTON
Button

Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button

1
2
3
4
5
6

Flash61

I
Flash 62
Flash 63

60
60
60
04
000

sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.
sec.

300 sec.
None

Button
Button

1
2

Disabled
Port#l

Buttons
Buttons
Button
Button
Button
Buttons

l-8
9
10
11
12
l-8

None
None
None
None
None

Button
Button

1
2

Enabled
Disabled

Button
Button
Button

1
2
3

Button

4 ’

None
None
None
None
1ill Codes Allowed
1ill Codes Allowed

Flash 65

FIash 66
Flash 67

Flash 70

Button 5
Button 6
Button 7
Button 8
Button 9
Button 10
Button 11
Button 12

1ill Codes Avowed
1ill Codes Allowed

Flash 75

separately.

Button 1
Default
Button 2
None
Button 3
Button 4
the UCD features are replaced with tile

Imme 1. Januarp

1993

irlfinite
D@ital

DVX’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems

Takrle 700-l
FEATURE

Insert/Delete
TabIe
Daily Start Time Table
Week@ Schedule Table
Route for 555-1212
; INBMLJZE DATA BASE PARAMETERS:
hit system Parameters
hit CO Line Attributes
Inft Station Atkibutes
Init CO/Station
Port Parameters
Itit Exception Tables
Init System Speed
Inft I.ZR Tables
hit Entire System and Reset
Init ICIID Parameters
Inft Directory Dfaling Tabfe
h-it Hunt Group Parameters
InitACD or UCD Group Parameters
Init VM Group Parameters
System Reset
PRINT DATA BASE PARAMETERS:
print System Parameters
Print CO Line Attributes
Fkint Station Athibutes
Print CO/Station
Port Parameters
Prkrt Exception TabIPrint System Speed
F%int U=R Tables
print Entire Data Base
Print ICLID Parametets
Print Directory D&hug Table
print Hunt Group Parameters
Print ACD or UCD Group Parameters
Print VIM Group Parameters
AhcrtI%rlting
DATME
7JPLOAD/DGWNLGAD
Database Upload Routine
Database Download Routine

Nfien the ACD Software package is purchased
sted ACD features.

CUSTOMER

Default

Values

DATA BASE F’ROGRAlHMlNG

(Cont’d)

PROGRAM
CODE

DEF*uLrTVALuE
(

FLEXBUTTON
Button
Button
Button
Button

5
6
7
8

Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I1
12
13
20

Button
Bution

1
2

Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button
Button

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
20

Button
Button

1
2

Flash 80

FIash 85

Flash 86

I parateiy,

the

[CD features

are

zplaced with the

CUSTOMER

DATA BASE PROGRhMlKING

TO enter the program mode:
a. Press ON/OFF
button.
(optional)
LED
lights and intercom dial tone is heard.
b. On the dial pad, press the asterisk (*I
twice.
C. On the dial pad. enter the digits I3lI21[2lISI
(DBAMJ’. Confh-rnation tone is heard.
l
‘This is a default setting, however may be
changed after entering programming.
d. The ON/OFF button LED is lit. The system
is ready to program.
Other telephones connected to the system continue to function normally.
MODE ENTRY (Data
Terminal
or PC)
A data terminal connected to the RS-232C port
on the CPB or remotely through the on-board
modem can be used for databaseprogrammiq.
When using a data terminal (ASCU or PC capable of emulating an ASCII ted)
on-site or
locally, to program the System:
aPress them
keyonthe
terminal.
b.Enter the password (VODAVI], and press
return again. Proper entry of the password
will result in the ADM> prompt. Proceed
with programming
referring to Figure 7001 for terminal characters
that represent
the keyset buttons. By entering a [?I from
the terminal, a HELP screen wili appear.
When entermg the system remotely via a data
terminal. access to the on-board modem is accomplished
by accessing
Port [ 1991 either
through a dfrect ringing assignment or through
DISA or by being transferred
to Port [ 1991 by
700.3

PROGRAM

anyintemdstation.
Proper entry of the password will result in the
AD&
prompt. Proceed with programmin
re
ferring to Figure 700-l for terminal cha$&
that represent the keyset buttons. By entering
a I?) from the terminal,
a HELP screen will
appear, similar to that shown in Figure 700- 1.
Using the Remote Admix-~ Key DeCniffons follow
the same steps and procedures to program the
rnjinite Digital Key Telephone System when using a terminal
(as outlined
in the following
sections).
700.4

BEGINNING

TO FROGti

Ck~ce tie program mode has been entered via a
dQW knnina~ or via an ASCII terminal, you
=Y proceed with programming
by:

700-10

irtfinite
DVX I and DV’X I1
Key Telephone
systems

D&Sal
hdtialte

foliomtng

hen?

-Qlmr.R&rtothei
for
inittalitatidn

ucction

;

a. Press the FLASH button.
b.Dial the two-digit
program code for the
desired data field.
c. Enter customer data.
d.To permanently
store the entered data,
press the HOLD button. A burst of one
second confirmation
tone should he heard.
If an interrupted
(error] tone is heard. reenter the data starting with step a.
e. Repeat from step a. until all data has been
entered into memory.
700.5

VmON

The system has been pre-$rogrammed
with
certain features which are called default data
(Refer to Table 7OP1). These features are
loaded into memory when the system is initialized.
ill6tuiledorataitcrnytime.#l6datalmu6hus
bell &xmuped.
Use the procedures below to return the system
database to default values:
a. Enter the pq$amming
made.
b. Press FLASH button and dial ISO].
c. Press the System Reset flexible button
(Button #8).
d. Press HOLD button to initiahze the system
database to default values. Con&nation
tone will be heard upon completion of the
initializat.ion
process.
e. Repeat from step c. to return only parts of
the database to default values using the
following fJe.xiile buttons:

m
‘r-7

mrul
mmulu
” 8 E
El
unTamE5
El-. T ”

infinite
digital

DVX ’ and DVX ’
Ety Telephone
Systems

CUSTOMER

CUSTOMER DATA WORKSBEETS
Before any attempt at progmmming
is made. it
is strongly recommended
that customer data
worksheets be prepared (Refer to Appendix A).
These worksheets should become part of the
permanent
record of customer progmmming.
Refer to the following sections when preparing
the worksheets.
700.6

700.7

DATA BASE FIELDS

sections.
DATABASE
ROUTINE

cable from the RS-232C connector on the
Central Processor Board of the DVX’” System to the desired Comm Port on the Personal Computer.

a communication
software package
(i.e. Procomm) into the Personal Computer.
Make the necessary changes to the following artas of the communications
package.
Save these permanent
settings.

2.Load

The data fields are used to set system timers,
determine central office line features and Key
Telephone features. When entering CO line
data and station data. be sure to enter the exact
number of digits spe&ed.
The data fields and
features are further described in the folk&q
700.8

DATA EkASE PROG-G

lTFMSTOCHANCE
Parameters:

CHANGE

0
0

/iJ *

UFLUAD/DOWNLCMD

The Database Upload/Download
database fez+
ture provides a maintenance facility which permits the user to download the database to a PC,
when a software change is made or when the
system needs to be Mtialized
and re-programmed. In addition, the routine w-ill facilitate
the prog
:,rg of a database on au in-house
system which can be downloaded to a PC and
then uploaded to a system in the field. After the
system maintenance
is completed.
the Ble
saved in the PC can then be uploaded to the
system.

Item D: Character Pa&r@
Item E: Line Pa&g

mmi

Using the PC to ‘trpload/Download
thru Rtmote
Adlhli6trdi0n

A Personal Computer must be connected
totheRS-232CportontheDVX’MainKey
*
Sewice Board or on the DVX ’ System
Centi
Processor Board (CPB) can be used
for database pragrammkg.
When entering the system remotely via a
Personal Computer. access to the on-board
modem is accomplished by accessing Port
I1991 either through a direct ringing assignment
or through
DISA or by being
transferred
to Port 11991 by any internal
station.
1. Connect one end of an RS-232C Serial
dAe from the RS-232C connector on the
DVX I Main Key Service Board to the desk-d Comm Port on the PC.
~n.nect

one end of an RS-232C

lsaue 1, Jzuluary

1993

Serial
700-11

CUSTOMER

DATA BASE l’R0GRAMXING

Wital

iqfinite
DVX’andDVx”
Key Telephone
Systems

3. Press the iEmwlkey on the PC. The followhxg
display will be seen on the Personal Computer monitor.
/
,
PMW
1428

Eng.
Mmi

PUSReady
Digftnl

Ucr.

Key-System

2.8alS

MTE:

BBAJAZ

IIIIE:

89:11:43

pr3ssuonD:

4. Enter the password [VODAVIJ, and press
the m
key again. Proper entry of the
password wiIl result in the ADM> prompt.
Proceedwitbprogmmmingzf&ingtoF@ure 7061 for terminal
characters
that
represent the keyset buttons. By entering
a (?I from the terminal, a HELP screen will
appear. Refer to the previous screen capture and enter the information
shown.
S-Enter the information
on the foIlowing
StlreenCapture.
/
PRDam PLUSrkndy?
iuB

DigItal

Key-Sgsta

Erg. Ikr.
z.eaf5
MtER FSSJORD:

DME:

7. On the PC, press the m key to begin the
downloading
routine. Con&nation
tone
will be heard when the database is completely downloaded.
B.OnthePC,pressthe~+~keysagainto
turn the log fde off.
The download ftie will contain a series of ASCII
strings which will contain a checksum at the
end of the string. The checksum will be verified
when the system receives the string back. An
error in the checksum will result in rejection of
the string. In addition an error message will be
sent to the PC when a sMng fs received with an
error. When transmission
of the download file
is complete, a confumation
tone will be heard.
The following is a list of strings and the order
that they wilI received in:

.
e8/14/92

TIME:

1*:17:12

6. Press the&J
key after entering the above
information.
Press the a + m keys. This
wiII bring up the log screen on the PC
monitor. Enter a path for the database fl.le
* to be sent to or press m and the database
file wiIl be sent to the destination
shown in
the communications
package default set-

700-12

hue

1. January

1893

iqfinite
DIgital

DVX’andDVX”
Eey Telephone

Sy~tCrn~

CUSTOIHD~

1
I SYSTEM SPEED BIN
; 30. 1 STA-SPEED-BIN
(station 100 thru
’
I
I 155)
1 31. 1 SPEED-DIR (directory entrv)
1
i 32. 1 ICLID_TRANS_TABLE
(trans table
r
entrv)
1
I 33. i ICLID 7JAC TABLE (uac table entrY)
134. i SPECIAL TABLE
I 35. i PORT TO STATION
i 36. t POKF l-0 co LINE
i 37. 1 STATUS FUZQUEST
38. 1 END~OFJ’ILE
Forward and backward compatibility
will be
maintamed,
If the fiIe being uploaded from the
PC contains less information
in a string then is
required by the system database, the system
will maintah
default information
in the area
not covered by the string
If the file being
uploaded from the PC contains more information in a sW.ng than Is required by the system
database, the system will ignore the additional
information.
29.

To upload a database file:
1. On the PC, enter the fallowing
after the fbst ADM> rxompt.
I

PtEmnll

14zB Digital
lky-*ta
Eng. ucr. 2.ealS mm:
MIEA PRssyofID:

information
Then press

PLllS Ready?
88/14&z

IIil!c

16:if:Bt

DATA BASE PROG-G

4. Enter the path for the Ale to be uploaded to
the system and press the m key. The file
will now be uploaded to the system. Confirmation tone will be beard at the completion of the upload routine. If the g
key
was pressed during the download routine
without a fIlename entered, the default filename wiIl be: PCPLWX,OG.
/
\.
,
MmlPRDGAfY(tlD
admhl
exiting rdmin. *.
t
DfI'lZ:
uttiag

oB/1%CtZ TIRE: 16:24:53
WiintcMn
uttlr~.
. .

I
I

S-After the Ale is uploaded to the system, the
ADIbb prompt wiIl be returned to the PC
monitor. Enter an ‘W at the prompt and
press the m key.
6-k the PC, press the q + [Xj keys. Press
the s
key to exit Procomm and return to
the DOS prompt

i1
1

2. On the PC. press the m + [C 1 keys to clear

the screen, Press the &iiJ key to bring up
the upload screen. Enter an “A” to set the
upload as an ASCII upload Ale.
3.This will bring up the ASCII upload file
screen on the PC monitor.
+

Upload

Pmtaols

Issue 1. January

1983

700-13

&jWfe
DVX’andDVXn
Di@.a.l Key Telephone

Systems

SYSTEM PARABEXERS

SECTION 710
PARAME TERS PROGRAMMING

SYSTEM
Profgamdng

Description

steps

If the system is in the programming
mode,
continue using the program codes. Ifstarting to
program here, enter the programming
mode.
Refer to Sec. 700.2 , Fk-ogram Mode Entry (Key
Station).
If any System Tpmers are to be changed:
l.I?t-ess FLASH and dial [Ol]. The following
message is shown on tie display phone:

.UIYY.& “VYY

BUN

I SYSTEM TlMERS:
! FLASH 01
I

Issue 1. January

1993

PRCIGRABBMING

r-1

This section describes the procedures
and
steps necessary to program system timers.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the System Timers progmmmirq.

DEFAULT VALUE
(after ix-lltializinp)

“Jsn

1
2

System Hold Recall
Exclusive Hold Recall

16
17

I SMDR Call Qualification
1Auto CaIl Back Timer

060 seconds
180 seconds

Timer

30 seconds
00 seconds [disabled)

710-l

r
in@niteDVX’ andDVXu
D@itaI
SYSTEM TIMERS
A

System

Hold Recall

Timer
Steps

If this timer is to be changed:
1. Press the SYSI’EM HOLD RECALL TIMER
flexible button (Button #I). The following
message is shown on the display phone:

2. Enter a three-digit timer value on tile dial
pad which corresponds
to 001-300 seconds.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Erclusive

Hold Recall
ProgI

If this timer
1. Press
TIMER
lowing
phone:

Systems

(Cont’d)

RotTanning

Key Telephone

Description
This timtzr determines the amount of time before a call placed on System Hold wilJ recall the
station placrng the hold. If unanswered
by that
station. the calI will recall the attendant..
Dcfaulk
By default, the System Hold Recall
T’imer is set for 60 seconds and is variable from
001 to 300 seconds.
An entq of000 will disable the timer and there
willbenorecall.
Related Pro-:
Refer to Sec. 710.2,
Hold Preference for selecting System Hold Preference; Refer to Sec. 710.3. Attendant
Station
Assignment
for assigning the Attendant(s)
to
receive recalls.

Timer

’ g steps

is to be changed:
the EXCLUSIVE
HOLD RECALL
flexible button (Button #Z). The folmessage is shown on the display

Description
This timer d&e-es
the amount of tfme before a catf placed on Ekclustve Hold retells the
station piacing the Hold:lfunanswered
by that
station, the cd recalls the attendant.
DeEault: E3y default. the Exclusive Hold Recall
Time&
setfor 180 seconds and is variable from
00 1 to 300 seconds.
An entry of 000 will disable the timer and there
Willben0X-C!C~.

Progrnlnuniu~:
Refer to Sec. 710.2,
Hold Preference for selecting Exclusive Hold
Preference:
Refer to Sec. 710.3, Attendant
Station Assignment
for assigning the Attendant(s) to receive recalls.
Related

2. Enter a three-digit timer value on the dial
pad which corresponds
to 001-300 seconds.
3.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
W now update.

710-Z

Lmlt

1. Jan-

1993

irifinrte
mtal

VVX’andDVXn

SYSTEM
C.

TIMERS

Attendant

SYSTEM

Systems

I.&y Telephone

Recall

Timer

Description

steps

If tMs timer is to be changed:
I. Press the ATTENDANT
RECALL TIMER
flexible button (But-ton #3). The following
message is shown on the display phone:

AlWBBEW IllrlEB
Ill

inaB

2.Enter a two-digit timer value on the dial
pad which corresponds to 00-60 minutes.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

PROGRAMMING

[Cont’d)

Progr-g

PARAMEXERS

This timer determines the amount of time a
recalling calJ will ring at the attendant station(s)
before the system will release the hne.
When a CO Line recalls to the Attendant station
mnswered.
the system will release
andisstillu
the line at the expfration
of this timer and
automatically
place the ltne back to an idle
CondSon.
Defiault: By default, the Attendant
is set for 1 minute and is variable

RecallTimer
from 00 to 60

minutes.
An entry of 00 will cause qe AttendantIs)
to ring
unti answered.
R&ted
Prow
Refer to Sec. 710.3.
Attendant
Station’A&gn.ment:
Refer to Sec.
710.1. System ‘Ihers for the System Hold Recall Timer, Exclusfve Hold Recall Timer. Call
Park Recall Timer. and Transfer Recall Timer.
Refer to Sec. 720 , CO I&e Programming
for
Loop Supervision progmmming.

lkansfcrRccaUTiu~cr
Prow

steps

If this timer is to be changed:
1.FresstbeTFUNSFERRECALL’ITMERflexibfe button (Button #4). The following message is shown on the display phone:

2. Enter a three-dgit
tfmer value on the dial
pad which corresponds
to 001500
seconds.

3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Conf.&mation tone is heard and the d&play
wiII now update.

Issue 1. January

1993

Description

This thner determines
the amount of time a
transferred
call rings, at the station reteWing
the transfer before it recalls the station making
the transfer. If unanswered by that station, the
call recalls the attendant.
Default: By default, the Transfer Recall Timer
is set for 45 seconds and is v-a&Me f?om 001
to 300 seconds.
A 000 entry dfsables the timer and there will be
no recall.
Related
Pmgnunmhg:
Refer to Sec. 710.3,
Attendant
Station Assfgnmcnt forassignmgthe
Attendant(s)
to receive recalls.

710-3

sYSTEM

PARMW=E=

SYSTEM TIMERS
E.

Preset

PROGRAMMiNG

[tint

Forward

iqftnite
DVX’ and DVX’I:
lM@al Key Telephone
Spstcxns

‘dl

Timer

Programming

Description

Steps

If this timer is to be changed:
1. Press the PRESET FORWARD TIMER flexible button (Button #5}. The following message is shown on the display phone:

2.Enter a two-digit timer value on the dial
pad which corresponds to 01-99 seconds.
3. Press the HOD button to save the entzy.
Ccmkmation
tone is heard and the display
wilt now update.

Cdl

Forward

No/Answer

Progmmming

This timer determines the amount of time an
outside line will ring before being forwarded to
a predetermined
station. This entry works with
Preset Forward station assignments
in Station
programming.
More than one station can be
forwarded to the same party.
This timer also govms the time the DISA call
will ring at a station before being returned to
intercom dial tone, if nat answered.
DcGult:
By default. the Preset Forward Timer
is set at 10 seconds and is variable from 01 to
99 seconds.
A 00 entry disabks the time; and there will be
no forward.
XM.atcd
Pro grr&
Refer to Sec. 730.1,
Station Attributes
Program&ng
, Preset CalI
Forward Progwnming
for instruction
on assigning a preset forward destfnation
to a station.

Timtr
Steps

Description

If this tber is to be changed:
1. Press the CALL FORWARD NO/ANSWER
TlMER flexible button Button
#6). The folIowSng xnessage is shown on the display
phone:

This timer is used when a statton in the system
specifies that “no answer” caUs be forwarded to
another station. The timer determines how long
an intercom or transferred caU will ring before
it is considered a “no-ansprer” calI. The call w5II
then forward to the designated station for han-

2. Enter a three-digit timer value on the dial
pad which corresponds
to 000-600 seconds.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the e&y.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

710-4

By default, the CaU Forward No/Answer Tpmer is set for 15 seconds and is variable

Default:

ii-om 000-600 seconds.
Related
Prog.mmmi+:

Refer to Sec. 710.1,
System Timers, Preset Forward Timer; Refer to
730.1, Station Attributes
Fkgmmming,
Call
Forwarding
option.

issue

1, January

1993

SYsTEM
SYSTEM

TIMERS

PARAMETERS

PROG-G

(cont’d)

Programming

Description

Steps

lfthis timer is to be changed:
1 *Press the PAUSE TiMER flexible button
(3utton
#I?). The following
message is
shown on the display phone:

This timer determines the length of the pause
when programmed
for use with speed dialing
and LCR Insert Tables.
Default: By default. the Pause Timer is set at 2
seconds and is variable from 1 to 9 seconds.
There is no 0 entry.

2.Enter a one-c&it i&ner value on the dM
pad which corresponds to 1-9 seconds.
3.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the &splay
will now update.

prog;ramminFi

Description

Steps

If this timer is to be changed:
l.PresstheCAU.PARKRECALLTIMERfl~ible button (EMton #8). The following
sage is shown on the display @one:

mes-

2. Enter a three-digit tfmer value on the dial
pad which corresponds to 001-600 seconds.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone Is heard and the display
will now update.

Iwme

I, Jammy

1993

This timer determines the amount of time before a call placed in the CalI park location wiIl
recall the station placing the call park. lfunanswered by that statfon. the call wiu recall the
attendant.
DefbIt:
By defauk @e Call Park Recall Timer
is set at 180 seconds and fs variable from 001
to 600 seconds.
A 000 entry dfsables the timer and there ti be
no recall.
Refer to Sec. 710.3,
RelRted Progmlmmhg:
Attendant Station Assignment for assigningthe
Attendant(s) to receive recall&

710-5

SYSTEM PARAMETERS

Prow

PROGRtXMMRVG

Digital

i?finite
DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

Description

Steps

If this tier
is to be changed:
l.Press the CONFERENCE/DISA
TIMER
flexible button (Button #9). The following
message is shown on the display phone:

This tuner determines the amount of time an
unsupervised
conference can continue after the
initiator of the conference has &ted the conference.
Default:
By default.
the Conference/DISA
Timer is set at 10 minutes and is variable from
01 to 99 minutes,
A 00 entxy disables the timer and means no
automatic
disconnect occurs.

2.Enter a two-digit timer value on the dial
pad which corresponds to 0 l-99 minutes.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confiition
tone is heard and the display
wiu now Update.

WiUkprertntbdtDbtdlDISAptlM?S,t?l8Yl

one
minute
wltomaiie~~

'iater

nluwe

the system
both trunks.

dZ1
The

ctn@mlwTimerdDwn0tqgi?ctor-1

Pr0g-J:
Refer to Sec. 720, CO
Line Programming
for DISA Trunk-to-Trunk
IPer CO tine) programming;
Loop Supervision
Programming;
andDISAProgmmn&g.AIsorefer
to Sec.
730.1,
Station
Attributes
Progmmming.
Conference Enable/Disable
(Per
Station) option.
Related

Pa&lag’IYxucoutTime~

prolzrammtng
steps
If this timer is to be changed:
1. Press the PAGING TIMEOUT TIMER flexible button
(Button # 101. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

2,Enter a two-digit timer value on the dial
pad which corresponds to 01-60 seconds.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

710-6

DescriPtion
This timer determines the maxknum
length of
a page announcement
(internal. external or all
call). The system wil.I automatically
disconnect
the page at the end of this time unless the
person making the page has already hung up.
DefaaIt: By default, the Paging Timeout Timer
is set at 15 seconds and is variable from 01 to
60 seconds,
A 00 entry disables the timer and pages will not
be limited in length.
Related
Rogrrg:
Refer to Sec. 730.1.
Station Attributes
F’rogmmmtng
for allow&
stations access to the system paging resources.

Issue 1, Jalluary

199s

infinite
m&al

DVX’andDVX”
Eey Telephone

SYSTEM TIMERS
a-

Systems

SYSTE&I PDRS

Eont*a

CO Ring Detect

Timu

Pro-

steps

If this timer is to be changed:
1. Press the CORING DEI’ECTlWIERflexible
button (Button #I 11. The following message is shown on the display phone:

Description
This timer controls the time necessary to detect
an outside line as ringing into the system.
Default
By default, the CO Ring Detect Timer
is set at 3 (300 msec), and is variable &om 2
(200) msec. to 9 (900) msec. There is no 0 or 1
entry.

2.Enter a one-digit timer value on the dial
pad which corr-ponds
to 2 (200 msec) -9
(900 msec.) mill&seconds.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

PROGRAMBUING

SLT DTMF Receiver

Timex

ProgSteps
lf this timer is to be changed:
l.FYess the SLIT M’MF RJ3CENER TIMER
fludble button (3utton # 12). The following
message will be shown on the display.

a three-dig% timer value on the dial
pad which corresponds
to 005-100 seconds.
3. Tess the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
2. Enter

Description
Single line telephones
require the use of a
lYI?vlF receiverwhen going of&hook and dialing.
When SMDR or toll restiction.
(via COS assignments) is enabled in the system a D’IMF receiver will monitor and screen an SLITS digits
for the duration of this timer. By adjusting this
timer the system administrator
may either i&e
up system DTMF receivers sooner if system SLT
trafnc is heavy or provide for a longer monitoring period if toll restriction becomes a problem.
It should be understood that when LCR is enabled the D’lMFreceivers
are released when the
expected number of digits are dialed as entered
in the LCR database.
DeiiuW
By default, the SLT DTMF Receiver
T’imer is set at 20 seconds and is variable from
005 to 100 seconds.
Related Programming:
Refer to Sec. 710.10.
SMDR Programming:
Sec. 720.1, CO Line
Programming,
Class
of Service
(COSI
RogTammhg:
Sec. 730.1, Station Attributes
Pro-.
Station Class of Service (COS)
options. Also refer to Sec. 765.1. UZR Tables
programming.

Iaeue 1. January

1993

710-7

r
DVX ’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems

iqfhite

SYSTEM PDRS

Message

PROGRAMMING

Wait Reminder
Prow

Digital

Tone
Description

steps

If this feature is to be changed:
l.Press the MESSAGE WAIT REMINDER
TONE flexible button
(Button #13). The
foltowing message is shown on the display
phone:

This timer determines the amount of time between repeated reminder tones to a key telephone with a message waiting.
Digital key station users may be reminded of a
message waiting on their telephone
with an
audible signal presented at a timed interval.
Default:
By default, the Message Wait Reminder Tone is set at 000 [disabled]
and is
variable from 000 to 104 minutes.

2. Enter a three-digit timer value on the diaI
pad which corresponds to 000 to 104 minutcs.
3.FYess the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

SLT Book

Pktsh Timer
FYognuImrg

steps

If this timer is to be changed:
1.PresstheSLTHGOKFTIMERflwdbIe
button (Button #14). The following
sage is shown on the display phone:

Description

mes-

2.Enter a two-digit timer value on the dial
pad which corresponds to 0.5-2.0 seconds.
S.I?ress the HOLD button to save the entry.
Con&x-nation tone is heard and the display
will now update.

710-s

This timer determines
how long an SLT user
should press the hook switch fn order for it to
be considered a valid on hook @&connect) request. An on-book shorter in duration
(but
longer than the &ok Switch BounceTimer)
will
be considered a Hook Flash &ransferl request.
Refer to Figure 710-l Hook Switch Activity.
Default: By default, the SLT Hook Flash Timer
is set at 10 (one second) as is variable from 0.5
(05) seconds to 2.0 I201 seconds.

mnle

1. Januq?

1993

mite

DVX’andDvX”

D&$&d

I&y Telephone

SYSTEM TIMERS
0.

Systtxris

[Cont’d)

SLT Hook Flash

Debounee

Programming

Timer

Steps

Description

If this timer is to be changed:
1. Press the SLT HOOK FLASH DEBOUNCE
TIMER fiexible button (Button #15). The
following message is shown on the display
phone:

This timer determines the length of time that is
needed to deWmine a valid on-hook or off-hook
condition for single Iine telephones. On-Hook
or Off-Hook signals that are shorter in duration
than this timer will be ignored by the system.
Refer to Figure 710-l Hook Switch AC&Q.
Default:
By default, the SLT Hook Flash Debounce ‘Kmer is set to 0.10 sec. and is variable
f?om 0 to 1 second in 10 msec increments. This
entry is a three-digit entry where 010 equals .1
second.

2. Enter a three-t&it
timer value on the dial
pad which corresponds to O-l second ti 10
msec increments.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
ConfMnatfon
tone is heard and the display
will nuw update.

Vdid

System
Response

ON-HOOK
(DISCONNECT)
By default

Hook Switch
Timer
Hook Switch

Bounce
Timer

= programmable

1993

1.0

1.5

2.0

RME

range

(in seconds)
pigate

ISaut 1. January

710-l

Hook

Switch

Activity

710-8

SYSTEM PARAlldETERs
SYS’lZM
P.

TIMERS

SMDR

PROGRAMMING

D&&al

iq#kite
DVX’andDVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

(Cont’d)

CalI 9118lIfication
I?ro*amming

Timer
Steps

If this tkner is to be changed:
1. Press the SMDR CALL QUAL T’IMER fkxible button
(Button #16). The folIowing
message is shown on the display phone:

Description
This timer determines the length of time that is
needed to determine
a valid SMDR call for
SMDR reporting purposes.
DeEault: By default, the SMDR call Qualification Timer is set to 30 sec. and is variable from
00 to 60 seconds in 1 set increments.

2. Enter

a tw&ligit
timer value on the dial
pad which corresponds to 00-80 seconds
in 1 set increments.
3. press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Automatic

Cdl Back Timer

ProFframming steps
If this timer is to be changed:
1. Press the AUTO CALLBACKTXMERflexible
button (Button #17). The following message is shown on the display phone:

Z.Enter a two-digit timer value on the dial
- pad which corresponds to 00-99 seconds
in 1 set increments.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Conflrrnation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

710-10

Description
To accommodate
the reduced number of buttons on the infinfte8-button
keyset. a CalI Back
Feature has been added to system. This feature
vdl invoke a call back anytime a user listens to
busy tone for a preset period of time.
Dcfhult:
By default, i&Automatic
Call Back
Tttner is set for 00 seconds (disabled), and is
variable from 00 to 99 seconds.
An Automatic
Call Back WilI not occur when
this timer is disabled.

Issue 1. Jaxulaly

1993

i@nite
Digital

DVX’ aad DVX”
Xey Telephone
L3gstexr.u

710.2

SYSTEM FEiATURES
MMG

Programming

SYsmM

P ARAMETERS

PROG-G

PROGRAM-

Description

Steps

If the system is in the programming
mode,
continue using the program codes. Lf starting to
prc@arn here, enter the programming
mode.
Refer to Sec. 700.2, Program Mode Entry (Key
Station)
If any System Features are to be changed:
1.W
FLASH and dial 1051. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

This section describes the procedures
and
steps necessary to program System Features.
The buttons on the digitaI terminal are defmed
as shown below when entering the System Features pro@-amming area.

ST3JEAl All ST ENII Ed IW
Eli ml AC 3 3 33 ml

PROGCODE

FLASH 14

1-7

1
FLASH 15

2
3
4

hue

1, January

DEFAULT

FUNCi-ION

1 Page/ Contact Programming
I Port #1 (“On-Boa&
RS-232C)
1 Port #2 (‘On-Board Modem)
Port #3 (I/O Expander Module

CUSTCIMIER
DATA

None

2400
300

RS-

I 232C

1 Port #4 II/O Expander

1993

Module

RS-422)

710-11

it@aite
DVX’~~~DVX~
Di&itd Hey Telephone
Systems

SYSTEM PARAMETERS PRGGRtiMUING

IPROG
CODE!
- I
:J=gpj;
;FL&HZl

1
2

FLASH22

FUNCTION

i SMDR Enable/Disable

Disabled
LDOnlv
2400
80

can me

3aud
Print columns
Rate

I Port

I Night Mode Operation

1ANMSchedule- Mondav

3
4

1 ANM
AN&l Schedule
Schedule

5
6
7

Auto/Manual

Tuesday
-- Wednesday

1
Manual

CUSTOMER,
DATA

f
i
:I

i
I
1tI
I

I
!
i

/
/

3
4

ANM Schedule - Tl-mrsdav

ANM Schedule - F’riday
AIVM Schedule - Saturday
.
8 f ANMSchedule - Sunday
Dialing Table
t FLASH 23 1 1-4 1 Directoq

710-12

j DEFAULT

/
/

5########
6########

/
/

Issue

1, Januarg

1993

r
irlpnite
Dj&ital
SYSTEM

DVX’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems

FEATURES

Attendant

(Cont’dI

Ovcmide
Prom

Steps

if this feature is to be changed:
1. Press the ATIN OVERF$DE flexible button
(Button #I). This feature will toggle on and
off with each depression, and the display
will update with each depression.
l
LED off =Attendant
Override is disabled
l
LED on = Attendant
Override is enabled
2.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confikmation
tone is heard.

Description
When this feature is enabled, ft aUows the attendant to override a busy station or a station
in DND.
Default: By default, Attendant
Override is disabled.
Reinted
piognlmdllf~:
Refer to Sec. 710.3.
Attendant
Station Assignment for designating
a station as an Attendant.

HoId Preference

Pro&&

- ig steps

If this future is to be changed:
1. Press the HOLD PREIFflexible button (Button #2). This feature will toggle on and off
with each depression, and the display will
update with each depression.
l
IED off = Exclusive Hold is preferred
- LED on = System Hold is preferred
2. Press the HOLD button to save the en*.
Confirmation
tone is heard,

fB8ue 1, January

1993

Description
The system may be programmed to have either
ExciusiveorSystem
Hold preferred. IfExclusive
Hold fs preferred, the userwill press the HOLD
button once for Fxclusive Hold and twice for
Systexn Hold. If System Hold is preferred. the
user wiIl press the HOLD button once for Systan Hold and twice for Exclusive HoId.
Refer to system llmer programming
for recall
times for both System and Exclusive Hold.
Ikfimltz
By default, Hold preference Is System
Hold.
Related l+ogrrurdng:
Refer to Sec. 710.1,
System tiers
for the System HoId Recall
Timer and Exclusive Hold Recall Timer.

710-13

SYSTEM PARAMETERS
SYSTEM FEATURES
C.

Erternnl

Nfght

PROGRAMhUNG

Override
Prog

Systems

Rixq
Description

Steps

If this feature is to be changed:
1. Press the FXFNIGHTRING
flexible button
(Button #3). This feature will toggle on and
off with each depression, and the display
will update with each depression.
+ LED off = Ext. Night F&g is disabled
l
LEDon=
Ext. Night Ring is enabled
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entq.
Confi.iation
tone is heard.

Executive

Key Telephone

[Cont’dl

Programming

Di&al

Wmdmg

When this feature is set to yes, it activates
external night ring which produces a tone that
is sent over aII external page groups. When
outside lines are marked UNA, ringing will acttvate a tone over external paging when an
incoming
cd occurs on those lines during
night service.
Default:
By defauk. External Night Ring is disabled.
R&&d
Programmiq:
Refer to Sec. 710.7,
Relay/Sensor
Programming;
Refer to Sec.
720.1, CO Line Pro gmmmingfor
assigning UNA
status to a CO Line(s).

Tone

- qq steps

If this feature is to be changed:
1, Press the EXE32 OVER WARN TONE flexible button (Button #4). This feature wiII
toggle on and off with each depression, and
the display w-lb update with each depression.
l
LED off = Executive Override Tone disabIed
l
LED on = Executive Override Tone enabled
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

Description
A Station progmmmabIe
option allows stations
to be designated as “Executive” stations with
the ability to override and “barge-in” on other
keysets engaged in conversation
on a CO line.
Prior to actual cut through of the third party, a
warning tone is presrmted to all parties notifying them of the “barge-in”.
‘Ibis warning tone however is a programmable
option. on a system wide basis. that either
enables or disables the tone. When the tone is
disabled no audible signal is presented to the
parties to signal the “barge-in”.
Dctatrlt: By default. Executive Override Warning Tone ia enabled.
-tCd
b@IIUlB@J:
Refer to Sec. 730.1,
Station
Attributes
Programming,
Executive/Secretary
Pairs for assigning stations as Executive

stations.

USE OF THIS FEATURE WHEN THE
EXEC’I;ITNE
OVERRIDE
WARNING
TONE IS DISABLED MAY BE INTERPRETED AS A VIOLATION
OF FEDERAL OR STATE LAWS, AND AN
INVASION
OF PRIVACY. CONSULTCOUNSEL WITH RESPECT l-0 APPLICABLE LAWBEFORE INTRUDlNG ON
CALLS USING THIS FEATURE.
710-14

Issue 1, January

1993

iqfini.teDVX1andDVXn
Digital Xey Telephone

Sys&n.s

Sl’STEM

PARULETERS

PROGRAMMING

SYSTEMFEATURES(Cont'd)
E.

Page Warning

Tone

Progrsmming

Steps

If this feature is to be changed:
1, Press the PAGE WARN rONE ilexible button (Button #51. This feature will toggle on
and off with each depression, and the display will update with each depression.
. LED on = Page Warning Tone is enabled
l
LED off = Page Warning Tone is disabled
P.Press the HOLD button to save the entry,
Confkmation
tone is heard.

Background

Music
Prg;

Determines
whether a page warning tone will
be sounded over the Key Telephone speakers or
external paging speakers, prior to a page announcement.
Default: By default. Page Warning Tone is Mabled.
lRelaicd Fvogramminsl
Refer to Sec. 730.1,
Station AttrIbutes Prog
* 4 for Paging Access and Page Group Assignments.

Channel
- lg steps

IfBackground
Music is to be enabled/disabled:
1. Press the BACKGROUND
MUSIC flexible
button (Button #6). This feature will toggle
on and off with each depression. and the
display will update with each depression.
l
LED on = Background
Music is enabled
l
LED off = Background Music is disabled
- 2,Ress the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

Lseuc l,&umary1993

DWXipU0Il

Description
The system can be programmed
to allow stations to activate Background
Music at their
stations, fn addition to Music-On-Hold.
A music source must be connected to theBGM/MGH
connector on the CPU.
Detault:
By default. .&he Background
Music
channel is enabled.
lcclatcd
Rogrannninn:
Refer to Sec. 710.2,
SystemFeatures~~.
Music On Hold
for the Music-On-Hold
assignment.

710-1s

SYtSTEBB P-RS
SYSTEM FEATURES
G.

PROG-G
(ConVd)

LCR Enable
Prop-

Steps

If this feature is to be assigned:
1. Press the LCR ENABLE flexible button
(Button #7). This feature will toggle on and
off with each depression,
and the display
wrll update with each depression.
l
LED on = LCR is enabled
l
LED off = LCR is disabled
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Conhnation
tone is heard.

Account

Description
If Least Cost Routing is to be used, it must be
enabled here. Before enabling LCR refer to the
Least Cost Routing section and programming
tables [Appendix Al. when the tables have alI
been programmed.
you may then enable LCR
for the system. After system iuitialization,
a
default LA3R database is loaded into the LCR
section of memory. Refer to Figure 775-8 DB
Printout of LCR Default
Default: By default, UZR is disabled.
Related
Programmhng:
Refer to Sec. 765.1,
,
LCR Tables programming.

Codes - Forced

l4lamwg
steps
l.Press ACCOUNT CODES flekble button
mutton #8) to determine whether the use
ofAccount Codeswill be forced or optional.
This feature will toggle on and off with each
depression.
and the display will update
with each depression.
l
LED ON = Account Codes are forced
l
LED OFF = Account Codes are optional
2. Press tbe HOLD button to save the entry
Confk-matlon
tone is heard.

710-m

iqfirzite
DVX’and
DVX”
D@itaI Key ‘relcphone
systems

Description
The system can force the use of account codes
on ail restricted caIls.
If forced account code option is enabled, then a
stations Class of Sewice is upgraded
to day
COSl, night COSl, when the account code is
entered.
If forced account code option is disabled, then
a stations Class of Semice is not upgraded but
the account code amtiues
to be part of the
SMDR record.
Debault: By default, the use of account codes is
not forced but optional.

lfmue 1, klmuy

1993

irlfintte
Di@d

DVX’

and DVX’

Eey Telephone

Systems

Steps

is to be assigned:
1. Press the GROUP IB’IENING
flexible button (Button #9]. This feature win toggle on
and off with each depression, and the display will update with each depression.
6 LED on = Group List&g
is enabled
l
LED off = Group Listening is disabled
2.Prer.s the HOLD button to save the entry.
Conknation
tone is heard.

If Group Listening

Idle Speaker

PROG-G

1, January

Desctiption
All digital key terminals have built-in speakerphones. Station users may use the speaker to
monitor a call while using the handset to converse with the outside party. This enables other
people in the room to listen to both parks in
the conversation.
Group listening is not available when the station is in the headset mode.
DcfanIt:
By default, Group Listening is disabled.

Mode

profframmin
Steps
If the speaker mode needs to be assigned.
1. Press the IDLE SPFAKER MODE flexible
button (Button # 10). This feature w-iU toggle on and off with each depression, and
the display wQl update with each depression.
v L?ZDon= Istdigitdialedisheard.
* LED off = 1st digit dialed is muted.
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

but

PARAMETERS

Group Listening
Programmhg

SYSTEM

1993

Description
This feature atlows the system to determine
whether the first digit dialed is heard over the
digital key terminal speaker. This feature can
be allowed or denied on a system-wide basis In
programming.
Dcfkult:
By default, idle speaker mode is disabled.

71@17

SYSTEM PmRS

call Cost Display
Prog~

PROGRAMMING

Music

Key Telephone

Systems

Feature
steps

If Call Cost Display Feature is to be enabled:
1 .Press the CALL COST DISPLAY flexible
button (Button # 11). This feature will toggle on and off with each depression, and
the display will update with each depression.
. LEDon=
Call Cost Display is enabled
l
LED off = Call Cost Display is disabled
2. Press the HOLD button to save the e&y.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

D&itaI

Description
The Call Cost Display Feature provides a means
for a user to view the approxknate
cost of each
caLI made. This approximate
cost wizl also be
printed as part of the SMDR record.
The Cdl Cost Display will replace the call duration display when a call is made using LCR.
This display is enabled in programming.
The cost information
is programmable
by selecting one of the 16 route list tables and one of
the four time periods. This allows the user to
program four separate costs based on the time
of day for each of 16 routes. The costs entered
in the tables wiIl be a cost for one minute.
however. costs are calculated using a 1 /lOth of
a minute value. These’costs are rounded down
and are based on the start time of the call. even
if the call extends into a dzerent time period.
The SMDR printout
w-ill contaM a cost calculated using a l/ 10th of a minute irxrement and
the display will update approxhnateiy
every 30
seconds. The user must use LCR enabled to get
the call cost display.
Jkfanlt:
By default, the Call Cost Display Feature is disabled.
Related
Pro@xmming:
Refer to Sec. 710.2.
System Features Programming,
L.CR Enable.

On Hold

If Music On Hold is to be disabled:
1, Press the h4USIC ON HOLD flexible button
‘(Button
#12). This feature will toggle on
and off with each depression. and the display will update with each depression.
l
LED on = Music On Hold fs enabled
l
LED off = Music On Hold is disabled
2. Press tile HOLD button to save the entry.
Confk-matton
tone is heard.

De&&ion
A music source. when connected to the system,
provides music to ail lines on Hold. parked
calls. transferred
calis and calls waiting to be
answered by Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD)
or Uniform CaU Distribution
(LJCD). This feature can be allowed or denied on a system-wide
basis in prom.
Default: By default. Music On Hold is enabled.

r
f@&e
Digital

Dvlt’andDVX”
Key Telephone

710.3

A’ITENDAIUT
BUENT

Prog~

SYSTEM

Systems

STATION

Dt?scription

Steps

b. Enter up to three three-digit
ber(s) on the dial pad.

PROG~G

ASSIGN-

If Attendant Station(s) are to be changed:
a.Press FLASH and dial [lo]. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

station

num-

c. Press the HOJD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display

will now update.

710.4

PJ%RAmmERS

The system will identlfy an attendant station for
the purpose of receiving recalls and activating
night service. The system can have up to three
attendant(s)
programmed.
Entering three pounds I###] wii remove that
attendant a&gnment
or different station numbers can be programmed.
Default:
By default, Station 100 fs assigned as
the first attendant.
Related
Pro-:

Refer to Sec. 710.1,
System Tfmers for the hystem Hold Rem11
Timer, Exclusfve Hold Recall ‘Drner. Call Park
RecalI Timer. and Attendant
Recall Timer; Sec.
7 10.2,
System
Features
Programming,
Attendant
Override: Sec. 710.1 I. Weekly Night
Mode Schedule programming.

SYSTEM TTUHEAND DATE

Description
To set the time

and date which appears on
display Digiti Ten&r&:
a. Press FLASH and dial Ill]. The following
message is shown on the display phone.

can be displayed in either the US
(month/day)
format
or the European
(day/month)
format on Exec&ive Display stations. In addition. the time can be displayed in
either the standard 12 hour format or the 24
hour format.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
asshownbelowwhenenteringt.heSystemTime
and Date programming
area:
The date

b. Choose display format by pressing the appropriate button in the fI&ble button field.
c. Press the HOLD button or dial in the time
and date as follows (twehre digits]:

YYMMDDHHMMSS
d. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Cordrmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

When entexin~ the time Ad date, use the following data:
- W(year)=0000099
- MM (month) = 01 to 12
- DD(dayI=Ol
to31
- HH(hour)=OOto23
- MM(minute)=OOto59

- SS (second) = 00 to 59 (optional)
Default:
By default.
the date Is set for
month/day
format and the time is in the 12
hour format.
Related
Progrmg:
Sec. 420.18. Setting
System Time and Date from the tist programmed
attendant;
Sec. 710.3, Attendant
Station

Assignment.

SYSTEM
MISC.
710.5

P ARAzldETERS

SYSTEM

PROGRAMlvIlNG

PARAnuEm

PBX DIALING

Programming

Rs (cont’d)

CODES

Steps

Description

If PBX Dialing Codes are to be assigned:
a. Press FLASH and dial 112). The following
message is shown on the display phone:
I PBK DW cm

i #I#, ##, ##, ##, ##
b.Enter
five twodigit
code numbers,
one
right after the other, on the dial pad up to
a maximum of ten digits.
c. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
710.6

iqfirzite
DVX’ and DVX”
DigItal Xey Telephone
Spatems

EXECUTlVE/SECREMRY

Five one or two-djgit PBX access codes can be
programmed
into memory. When dialed. these
codes signal the system so that toll restriction
is applied at the next dialed digit. When a single
digit code 191 is entered, it must be foflowed by
the pound [#] as the second digit.
To delete an entry. enter two pounds [##J and
press the HOLD button.
Lines must be programmed
as PEIX lines before
these codes will apply.
Default: By default, no PBX dialing codes are
assigned.
EEt
T
Fef”r to Sec. 720, CO
grammug
for assigning a CO Line(s) as
PBX Linels).

PAIRS
Description

If Executive/Secretsry
pairs are to be assigned:
a. Press F.TASW and dial [ 131. The following
message is shown on the display phone-

b-The top left button in the fkxiile
button
field will be lit indicating the fvstpairmay
be programmed.
c. Enter the three-digit
Executive
station
number.
d.Enter
the three-digit
Secretary
station
number.
e. Press the HOLD button to save the data.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
f. To program a second pair, press the second
fkible
button in the flexible button field
and enter station numbers as in steps c.,
d., and e.
g-To program a third pa&. press the third
button in the flexible button field and enter
station numbers as in steps c., d., and e.
h-To pmgmn
a fourth patr, press the fourth
button in the flexible button field and enter
swan
numbers as in steps c., d.. and e.
716-20

There are four Executive/Secretary
able. When an Executive station
DND, intercom calls and transfers
matically routed to the designated
The buttons on the key telephone
as shown below when entering
tive/Secretary
programming
area:

pairs availis busy or in

will be autoSecretary.
are defmed
the Execu-

FiRWpgq
The assigned secretzuy may, h owever, CampOn to the Executive Stapon when the station is
busy or in Do-Not-Disturb.
There- can be only one pairing of stations, with
no duplifcates. You cannot pair Executive 100
toSecretary101andthenpairSenetary101to
Executive 100. You can have the same Secretaq station formore than one Executive station
(101 to 105 and 102 to 105).
An entry of six pounds [#I#####] will remove the
assignments.
Individual pairs may be changed
by pressing the associated flexible button.
Default:
By default. no Exec/See’y pairs are
assigned,

Issne

1, January

10BS

r
irtfinite
DVX’tiDVX’
Dig&al Xey Telephone

Systems

SYSTEM PARAMETERS

PRGGRLWMING

MISC. SYSTEM PARAMETE RS (Co&d]
710.7

REUW/SENSOR
Programrniqq

PROGRAMMING
Steps

If Relays are to be assigned:
a-Press FLASH and dial 1141. Relay #l (Flex
Button # I) and On-Board Relays (FlexButton #ll] LEDs ti
be lit indicating
the
system Is in the pro&ramming
mode for
“On-Board”
relay prom
The followhg message is shown on tde display
phone:

To program “On-Board” relays:
a. Press the “On-Board” Relays (Fkx Button
#111 to indicate the system is in the ‘OnBoard” relay programming
mode.
b.Press the desired flex button that corresponds to the relay to be pwed
and
follow the steps outlined in the following
section.
To program relays on the Relay/Sensor Module:
a. Press the appropriate flex button 12 thru
15 to indicate which Relay/Sensor
Interface Module is to be programmed.
b. Press flexbuttons
(l-3) to indicate the relay
to bc programmed.
To program Sensing circuits on a Relay/Sensor
Module:
a. Press the appropriate flex button 12 thru
15 to indicate which~Relay/Sensor
Inter* face Mudule is to be programmed.
b. Press flex buttons (4-6) to select the sensing circuit to be prcgmnmed.

Description
The DVX I and DVX ’ systems offer relays that
may be individually programm ed for: External
Page, Loud BeIl Control,
CO Line Control.
Power Failure Transfer.
and Recorded Announcement
uses. Up to four Relay/Sensor
interface modules may be installed on either
system. Each Relay/Sensor
Interface module
contains three independent
relays and three
sensing input circuits. In addition. the DVX ’
4& Key Interface boards (CKB) each contain a
Relay Contact (for up to seven “on-board”
relays) that may also be assigned to any of the
functions mentioned above.
The buttons on the digifal termfnal are deEned
as shown below wlxn entering the Relay/&nsor programming
area:
MlAY#!
la

:c
Ea

._..
E&l

UYR
...
M 1 E

RL*YY
**1AR
* ,

Whtl-t?:
- Button #1 I = On-Board Relay programming (Relays on the 4x8 Key Interface
Board E-1
- Button # 12 = Relay/Sensor
Interface
Module # I prqramdng
- Button #13 = Relay/Sensor
Interface
Module #2 programming
- Button #14 = Relay/Sensor
Interface
Module #3 programming.
- Button #15 = Relay/Sensor
Interface
Module #4 pro@
-62
By default, there is no relay program-

Default:

mineR&ted
Roflammkg:
Refer to Sec. 740.1.
Automatic
Call Distribution
(ACD). ACD
Recorded Announcement
Assignment(s);
or
Sec. 745.1, Urdfonn Call Distribution
(UCD),
UCD Recorded Announcement
Assignment(s)
for RAN Table programmhg.

Issue 1, January

1993

71&21

r
SYSTEM PARAMETERS
RELAY/SENSOR
A

PROGRAMMING

PRoGRAMMIlV

Pr&dl

irLfini.k
DVX I and DVX I1
D&it.& Kcy Tckphone
Syi~tems

G (Cont’d)

relay for External
:
Prog

* ASteps

Description

1. Press the flex button that corresponds
the desired relay to be programmed.
Z&Dial 111 on the dial pad,
3. Enter a one-digit

page zone number

(l-4)

4. Ress the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confkmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Wbm:

- X= Page Zones lthnl4

Pl-o*amming

relay

EXTERNAL
PAGE RELAY: When assigning a
relay as an External Page relay, the relay will
activate when the extemaI page zone the relay
is assigned to is accessed. The relay will rem&n
activated during the page announcement
until
the station hangs up or the page f&ner expires
and releases the page zone.
To disable a relay or sensor cfrcuit:
a. Press the desired flex button that corresponds to the relay or sensor circuit to be
.
disabled.
b,. DiaI 101 on the dial pad.
c. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

for RAN sm:

Rog~
Steps
l.Press the fkx button that corresponds
the desired relay to be programmed.
2.Dia.l[21 on the dial pad.

Description
to

3. Enter a one-digit RATV Table number
(I
thru 8j the relay should be associated to.
4. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Ccmfkmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Where:
- X= F&IN Table number

RAN START RELAY: When a CO line port is
used for a ground stark application.
a 24V dc
power source must be connected to the CO line
port for talk battery. A Loud Bell Control contact assigned to that CO line port in programming would provide contact closure to start the
Recorded Announcanent
device.
When an SLT port is used, the RAN device must
be configured for xing trip operation {loop star&
The 9OV ac voltage sent to the SLT port will be
recognized by the RAN device which will then
answer the call.
To disable a relay or sensor circuit:
a.Press the desired flex button that coxrespends to the relay or sensor circuit to be
disabled.
b.DIalIOIontbedialpad.
.
c. Press the HOLD button to save the e&y.
Conflation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
Rcfated Pragramming
Refer to Sec. 740.1.
Automatic
Call Di&bution
(ACD). ACD
Recorded Announcement
Assignment(s);
or
Sec. 745.1, Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD),
UCD Recorded Announcement
Ass#xnent(s)
for RAN Table programmiq.

r
D&kid

Hey Telephone

RELAY/SENSOR

Systems

PROGWWJkltN

SYSTEM PARAMETERS

PROGRAMMING

G (Cont’d)

relay for Power Failure
c-

:
Prog

* g steps

Description

1. Press the flex button that corresponds
the desired relay to be programmed.
2. Dial 131 on the dial pad.

3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

POWER FAILURE TRANSFER: When the in@
nite Power Failure Transfer Unit is used for
Power Failure, It provides the relay transfer
circrrits for up to 12 CO Iines in the event of a
power or processo r faGure. Activation of the PFT
relays is controkd
by a multi-use relay on any
4x8 Key In&face Board @3SF%]or Relay/Sensor
Module. A customer provided 12 volt DC power
supply is required to operate the unit.
With loss of power to the system or a failure of
system processing, the PFRJ will automaticaJly
connect up to twelve (12) ?33 lines to pre-wired
500/2500
type telephones. When power is restored, the PFFU will automaticayl
restore the
CO trunks and stations to normal operation.
These SLT stations do not have to be used for
intercom. but can be if so desired.
To disable a relay or sensor circuit:
a. Press the desired fkx button that correspends to the relay or sensor circuit to be
disabled.
b. Dial 101 on the dial pad.
c. Press the HOLD button to save the entq.
Codirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Ismxc 1, January

lSs3

710-23

imite
Dj@m

DVX’ and DVX’
gcS TCrephone
SJ?StCIWi

RELAY/SENSOR
E.

SYSTEM PAEWWXERS

PROG RtlMMING

f’rogramming
COlltIOk

(Cont’d)

rck~y for co tie

From

Description

steps

I. press the flex button that corresponds
the desired relay to be programmed.
2.Dial [5J on the dial pad.
3. Enter a two-digit

CO Line number

(0 l-28)

4. Press the I-lOLD button

to save the entry.
ConfIIation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

ONBBNBU
BElAY
i BEMY
l=WJIEfl(

Aes&n Rclay/&naor
to a station:

Interface

1. Press the STA flex button

(Button

2. Enter the three-digit

Module

#8).

station assignment
of
the reIay sensor.
- 3,Press the HOLD but&n to save the entry.
ConfIItion
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

i llMY~8MOB m
j SENSDB
1=
BONE
Where:
- YYY= Station Assignment

Issue 1, January

lSB3

CO LJNE CONTROL: There are three control
contacts on the Relay/Sensor
Module, which
can be individually
programmed
as CO Line
Control to control customer provided ancillary
equipment.
There are seven control relay contacts on the
DVX ‘, which can be individually
programmed
as Loud Bell Control to control customer provfckd ancikiry equipment. One contact on each
4x3 Key Interface Board (CKB).
When programmed
as CQ Line Control and
assigned to a CO fine. f&e corresponding
contact will close whenever that CO line is accessed.
To disable a relay or sensor circuit:
a-Press the desired flex button that corresponds to the relay or sensor circuit to be
disabled.
b. Dial (01 on the dial pad.
c. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confkmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

- xX= CO Line number

PROGRAMMING

STATION ASSIGNMENT&
The programming
of this station represents the station port that
the Relay/Sensor
Module is associated to.

To delete a station assignment:
a. press the STA flex button (Button #8).
b. press the TFWWfer button.
c. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
wiu now update.
R&ted

Programmhg:

is necessary

to as-

sign a station ID to the station port used for a
Relay/Sensor
Interface module in Sec. 730.1.
Station Attributes Programming.

71@26

SYSTEM PARAMETERS
R~,~AY/SENSOR
G.

PROG-G

PRO0 RAMMING

DigftaI

infinite
DVX’ and DVXn
Key Telephone
Systems

(Ccmt’d]

Ptogramsensingch’cuitasa~
Sensiu.~$ (RAN END) circuit:
grammhg

Steps

a. MaJ I61 on the dial pad.
b. Enter a one-digit RAN Table number [ 1-8)
the sensing circuit should be associated to.
c. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
d now update.

- X= RAN Table number

Description
RAN SENSING [RAN END): The Recorded Announcement
feature (RAN) is used with the
Automatic
Call Distribution
@CD) feature or
the Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD) feature to
provide unanswe red inc0mh.g CO calls or calls
in queue with a Recorded Announcement
while
waiting for an available ACD or UCD station.
The system may be programmed
to provide this
announcement
on specifkd RAN output ports
on the system (unused SLT and CO ports). The.
system can be programmed
to connect the waiting caller to a different RAN $ort for the second,
and subsequent
RAN messages.
When a CO line port is used for a ground start
application,
a 24V dc power source must be
connected to the CO line port for talk battery.
A Page/Relay
contact
assigned
to an announcement
table in programmin g would provide contact closure to start the Recorded
Announcement
device.
To disable a sensor circuit:
a. Press the desired flex button that comesponds to the relay or sensor circuit to be
disabled.
b. D&I (01 on the dial pad.
c. Press the HOLD button to save the en-.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
Rebated Pm@ammiq:
Refer to Sec. 740. I,
Automatic
Call Distribution
(ACD). ACD
Recorded
Announcement
Assigmnentfs):
or
Sec. 745.1. Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD).
UCD Recorded Announcement
Assignment[s)
for RAN Table progmmming.

710-26

hsuel,January

1893

Description
If Baud Rate[sI are to be assigned:
1. Press FLASH and dial [15]. The ftrst button
will be iit and ready for programming
Port
# 1. The following message is shown on the
display phone:

To program

The infinite Digital (DVX) Key Telephone Systems can provide outputs such as SMDR or
ICLID to either the standard RS-232C ‘OnBoard” connector on the DVX I BKSU or CPB
board or to the optional RS-232Cj422
I/O Expander Module connector(s).
When features
such as SMDR or ICWD are desired, the Baud
Rate(s) need to be programmed
to determine
how the information
will be distributed.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the Baud Rate
assignments
programminffarea.

the Baud Rate(s) for Ports # 1, #3 or

#4:

Progra

- Agsteps

1. Press the desired PORT # fkxible button
[Buttons # 1, #3 or #4) to determine the port
to be progmnmed.
2.Enter
a one-digit number for the Baud
Rate:
- I= 300 Baud
- 2= 1200 Baud
- 3= 2400 Baud
- 4= 4800 Baud
- 5= 9600 Baud
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
wiu now update.

Description
PORT # 1: Port #I is the ‘On-Board”
RS-23X
port on either the DVX I and DVX ’ systems.
PORT #3: Port #3 is the RS-232C connector on
the I/O Expander Module used in the ir@We
Digital Key Telephone systems.
PORT #t4: Port #4 is the RS-422 connector on
the I/O Expander Module used in the infinite
Digital Key Telephone systems.
Default:
By default, Port #I [CPB RS-232C).
Port #3 (RS-232C) and Port #4 (RS-422) Baud
Rate(s) are 2400 Baud.
Related
Ro &p7ynhg;a~;sto~;
:,‘og*
.
SMDR Rogranmmg
.
750.1, ICLID Rogmmming.
’

To vex-i@ Port #2 Baud Rate:
$+-mkng

steps

1. Press the PORT #2 flexible button (Button
#2). to verify the baud rate of the ‘OnBoard” modem. The following message is
shown on the display phone:

Issue 1, January

1993

Description
PORT #2: Port #2 is the ‘On-Board”
modem
which is included in either DVX I or DVX ’
Digital systems. The baud rate will be 300 Baud
for the “On-Board” modem or 1200 Baud for the
optional& installed 1200 Baud modem.
Default:
By default, the ‘On-Board”
modem
Baud Rate is 300 Baud.

71Q-27

hone
SYSTEM PAEWMETERS

msc.
710.8

ACCESS

(Cont’d)

CODES

Prm

Description

Steps

If the system is in the programnUng
mode,
continue using program codes. if starting to
progkun here, enter the programming
mode.
Refer to Sec. 700.2. Program Mode En&-y lKey
Station).
If Access Codes are to be changed:
1. Press FLASH and dial [ZO]. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

Systems

Tbis section describes
the procedures
and
steps necessary to program Access codes.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering
the Access
Codes progmmming
area:

DKSAAccessCode
From-

If this feature is to be assigned:
X.Press the DISA ACCESS CODE flexible
button Button # 1). The following message
is shown on the display phone:

2. Enter a three-digit
value on the dial pad
- which corresponds
to the first attendant
station. A maximum
of 3 stations can be
entered.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

710-28

Description

steps

This allows a three-digit access code to be assigned to the system. Anyone calling in on a
DISA line must use the access code in order to
gain access to system features.
To disable the DISA access code, enter three
pounds (###).
Default:
By default, 100 is assigned as the
access code.
Related
pmgmmming:
Refer to Sec. 710.1.
System ‘l%ners for tie Preset Forward Timer,
and C!onference/DISA
Timer, Sec. 720.1, CO
Line Programming,
for DISA TYunk-to-Trunk
(Per CO Line). A CO Line(s) must be assigned
for DISAoperation.
Also refer to Sec. 720.1, CO
Line Pro&ramming for CO LJne I+-fvacy and Conferenceoptions.

lsaue 1. JaInlary

1993

@j+tite
Digital
ACCB.

DVX’andDvX1l
Key Telephone

Systems

Admin.

PROGRAMMING

Password

Programming

steps

Description

If this feature is to be assigned:
1. Press the ADMIN PASSWORD flexible button [Button #2). The following message is
shown on the display phone: 1

DYIIIPAmaBD
8226

P-

G [Cont’d)

CODE PROGDatabase

SYSTEM

-t

Z.Enter a four-di@t value on the &al pad
which corresponds with 0000-9999.
3.E’ress the HOLD button to save the entry.
CoxBmatlon
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

The password used to enter customer database
programmiq
can be individualized
by each
customer. This allows tbe system administrator
to block unauthorized
personnel from entering
database admin-

Care should be taken when changing
the programming
password so not to
“lockout”
autfiorized
personnel
that
may prevent or delay&em
from making necessary programming
changes.
Dtfault:

By default.

the Admin

password

f32261 IDBAM) is assigned.

Issue 1, January

1993

710-29

r
infinite

Digital

~PARtUWlXRSPROGIUMMiNG
MISC. SYSTEM

710.10

PARAB6ETERG

STATION MESSAGE
CORDING (SMDR)
Progiznmig

DETAIL

Systems

RE-

Steps

::I
2.To program SMDR features, use the flexable button(s) as defiied in- the following
procedures.
3.The SMDR TYPE. and PRINT features will
t@e on and offwitb eachdepression,
and
the display will update with each depression.
4.After all entries are made, press the HOLD
button to save the entry. Confirmation
tone
is heard,

Description

The inftrite Di#tal Key Telephone Systems can
provide SMDR output to either the standar<
RS-232C -On-Board”
connector on the DVX
BKSU or CPB board or to the optional RS232C/422
I/O Expander Module connector(s).
When SMDR is desired, the following systemwide parameters will determine how the SMDR
information
will be reported.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defmed
as shown below when entering the SMDR pro.

Related
pnogrammfng:
Refer to Sec. 710.5.
P3X Dialing
Codes: Sec. 7 10.1, SLT D’IMF
Receiver timer, Sec. 730.1. Station Class of
Senrice (COS): and Sec. 760.1,
Exception
Tables progtammiug.

SMDR Exmble/DisabIe

Programming

steps

1. Press the SMDR flexible button (Button
# 1). This feature will toggle on and off with
each depression, and the display wili update with each depression.
l
LED ON = SMDRis enabled
l
LED OFF = SMDR is disabled
2.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
tone is heard
- Confirmation

Key Tcieplxone

and DVX’

(Cont’d)

If Station Message Detail Recording is to be
used:
1. Press FLASH and dial (2 11. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

DVX’

Long DistaRce/~al

Programdng

A call accounting device can be ir~stalkd allowing the system to track calls by outside line
number. number dialed, time of day, date, station that placed or received the call. and duration of the call.
Refer to Sec. 710.1 for further instruction
regarding the rezationship between SLTReceivers
and SMDR
Default:
By default, SMDR is disabled.

kwdgnmeRt

Steps

1. Press the CALL TYPE flexible button (0utton #2) to determine the type of calls to be
recorded. This feature will toggle on and off
with each depression. and the display wiIl
update with each depression.
l
LED ON = Long Distance is enabled
l
LED OFF = All Calls is enabled
2. I’RSS the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

no-30

Description

Description
The system can be set to record either all outgoing calls or only outgoing long distance calls.
Lung Distance calls are def3ned as either beginning with a ‘1’ or ‘0’ or containing
8 or more
digits. incoming calls are only recorded %?YPE
is set for all calls.
Default:
By default, the system is set to record
long distance &D) calls only,

Issue

1. January

lSa3

r
SYSTTEM PARAMETERS
STA’I’XON MESSAOE DETAIL
[Cont’d)
C.

Character

RECORDmG

Print Assignment
Programmiq

Steps

1. Press PRINT FORMAT flexible button (Button #3) to determine the print format of
SMDR records. This feature wit1 toggle on
and off with each depression. and the display will update with each depression.
l
LED ON = 8O-Character
is enabled
l
LED OFF = 39Character
is enabled
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

Description
The system can be prograrmned
to prtnt individual SMDRrecords in either a l-line 8Gcharacter format or a 3-line 30 character format.
Defimlt:
By default, the l-line 8O-character
format is selected.

11. Baud Rate Display
Proglramwq

steps

The SMDR Baud Rate is programmed
using Flash 15. Baud Rate Assfgnments. Button #4 will return error tone when pressed.
The LCD displays the current baud rate
based on which Port number is assigned to
the SMDR Port number,

PROGRAMMING

Description
The injkite Digital Key Telephone Systems can
provide SMDR output to either the standary
FS232C “On-B0an-l” connector on the DVX
BKSU or DVX * CPB board or to the optional
RS-232C/422
I/O Expander Module connectotis), The Baud Rate will be displayed as either
300 baud, 1200 baud, 2400 baud, 4800 baud.
9600 baud.
Refer to 710.8, Baud
Related Programmiq:
Rate Assignments
for pro@ Elmming SMDR
Baud Rate Assignment.

SMDR Port Assfgpments

1. Prfss the PORTflexfble button (Button #5)
to determine which port is to be used for
SMDR information.
2.Enter
a one-digit number for the SMDR
- Port number:
- 1= Port # 1 (Wn-Board”
RS-232C)
- 2= Port #2 (Wn-Board”
Modem)
- 3= Port #3 Q/O Expander Module
Rs-232C)
- 4= Port #4 o/O Expander Module
Rs-422)
3.The LCD dispkgs the current baud rate
based on which Port number is assigned to
the SMDR Port number.
4. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confknatlon
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Description
Poti It1 refm to the standard RS-232C ‘OnBoard” connector on tie DVX* Basic KSU or the
CPB board on the DVXn.
Port #2 refers to the “On-Board”
300 Baud
modem provided wit31 the system.
Port #9 refers to the RS232C connector on the
f/O Expander Module.
Port 114 refers to the RS422 copnector on the
same I/O Expander Module installed in either
ihjimf?Digitalsysta.
Dcf&Ak By default, Port #l is used for SMDR

r
DVX’ and DVX’
Keg Telephone
Systems

iqfinite

GYSTEILZ P ARAMETERS

PROGRAMBEING
RS (Co&d)

MISC. SYSTEM PARAMETE
710.11

WEEKLY

Digital

NIGFM’ MODE SCHED-

Description

steps

If entries or changes need to be made to this
schedule:
a. Press FLASH and dial [22]. The following
message will then be shown on the display:

The infinite Digital Key Telephone System can
be programmed
so that the system is automatically placed into and out of night mode. A
programmable
weekly time schedule allows the
system administrator
to preset the time the
system is put into night mode and the time to
remove nfgbt mode on a daily basis including
weekend operation.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the Weekly
Night Mode Schedule proarea.
~~h-“T”;-l~pq
~j..gq

Automatic/lYIanual
I3WmmWg

Steps

Day of Week programming
Prom

steps

1. The MONDAY flexible button (Button #2)
LED is lft.
2.To change days of the week, press the
appropriate
flexible button (butk~ns 3-8)
and perform the following procedures.
3.Enter the four-digit
entry to indicate the
hour and minutes to end night mode.
4.Enter the four-digit entry to indicate the
hour and minutes for the system to go into
the night mode for that particular day.
5. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confkmation
tone is heard and the display
wiil now update.

710-32

Operation

1. FWss the AUTO/MANUAL
flexible button
(Button #I1). This feature wiU toggle on and
off with each depression, and the display
will update witi each depression.
l
LED on= Automatic Night Mode
l
LED off= Manual operatfon.
2. If no other changes are to be made, press
the HOLD button to save the entq. Con&
mation tone is heard.

Descriptfon
Ifthe system is operated in the automatic night
mode the attendant(s)
can override the automatic mode by pressing the night key on the
attendant[s)
phone. The schedule wiI1 not go
back into efFect until the attendant(s)
press the
night key again.
When the system is placed into night mode CO
line ringing will follow the Night ringfng assignments and stations will be governed by their
respective night COS.
D&II%:
The default ttmes for automatic
night
mode is as follows:
,,
Monday tbru Friday OS:00 X7:00
(day time operation 8:0&n
to 5:OOpm)
Saturday and Sunday ##:## ##:##
(24 hour night mode operation)
An entry of “0O:OO 23:59” would indicate 24
hours of day mode
RelattdPro
gramming:
Refer to Sec. 720.1, CO
Line
Programming,
CO Line
Ringing
Assigmnents;
Sec. 730.1, Station Attributes
programming
station class of Service (COS)
assignment;.
Also refer to Sec. 710.3,
Attendant
Station Assignment
for Attendant
station assfgnments.

Issue I, dalluary

1993

r
i@dte
DVX I and DVX’
J-&$&II Key Ttfephone
Systems
b!nsc. SYSTEM PARAMETE RS (Cunt’d)
710.12

DIRECTORY

DIALING

(tint

Digital

DVX’andDVX”
Key Telepbonc
Systems

(Cont’d)

‘d)

To enter the Intercom number or system speed
dial bin to be associated to the name:
Projpmming

Steps

1. Press the BIN/ICM fl&ble button (Button
#ll.
2. Enter a three-digit station intercom number (100-155) or
Enter a three-digItSystem
speed dial number (020-099).
Enter a three-dgit
Local Number/Name
Translation
Table number (300-499).
3.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Car&m&ion
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Fro)qammbg

steps

ToEnter or Change the eurren t name shown on
the display:
1 .Press the NAME flexible button (Button
#2).
2.Enter the name (up to 24-characters
may
be entered) by using keys on the dial pad
as follows:
A=21
B =22
Cd!3

M ~61
1 =l#
‘=ol
N =62
2 =2#
* =02
0 =63
3 =3#
?=03
D=31
P =71
4=4#
/=04
E-32
Q =74
5 =5#
! =*1
F=33
R =72
6=6#
$ =*2
01693
,G =41
s =73
7 =?#
H =42
T=81
8=8#
& =*4
I =43
u =82
* &#
9 =9#
J=51
V =83
0 =O#
( =#l
K =52
w=91
Space =ll
] =#2
L =53
x =92
:=12 .
+ =#3
Y 293
= =#4
- =13
Z&4
’ =14
# =##
3. Ifan error is made while entering the name,
press the BACK SPACE flexible button
(Button #4). This button may be pressed to
backspace one character at a time.
4.Pre.s~ the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confrrrnation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
710-34

Description

BIN/XC&I - Each entry in the directory dialing
list must be associated to either a system speed
dial bin (for calling a destination
outside of the
system) or to an intercom station (for calling
idxnal
station including CO line transfers).

Description
NAME - A name of up to 24-characters
may be
entered into each directory dial list entry. The
names will appear alphabetically
when accessed by a station user. It is possible t have
multiple entries that are associated to the same
station number or system speed dial bin. This
allows the same name to be entered into the list
several times. for exxnple by last name and by
first name, pointed to a station number and a
speed dial bin [home. or mobil phone number)
or to have several different names all associated
to the same speed dial bin,

ISa&

1. January

199s

iqjhitt?
DQm

DVX’andDVXn
Key Telephone

MISC. SYSTEM
DIRECTORY

DIALING

smnu

Systems

PAIWMETERS

PROGRABUMNQ

(Cont’d)
(Co&d)

To ckar an entry:
Prog
1 -Press the CW

-lgsteps
flexible

Description
button

(Button

#3).
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Conffrmation
tone is heard and the display

wiU now update. The em-y will be erased
(both the BIN/ICM
assignment
and the
programmed
name).

CLEAR - Entries in the table may be erased and
cleared from the table allowing another entry to
be placed into the list. When a system speed
dial bin has been deleted or changed the name
associated tc the bin must also be erased. As
multiple table listing may be assodated to one
system speed dial bin it may be necessary to
clear more than one entry.
.

SYSTEM

PARAM.EE=

MISC. SYSTEM
710.13

PROGRAMMING

D&&al

&finite
DVX’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems

PARAMETE RS (Cont’d)

EruNT GROUPS

Description
1f Hunt Groups are to be assigned:
f . Press FLASH and dial f30J. The following
message wiIl be shown on the display:

2.The top left button in the fle&ble button
field will be lit for programming
Hunt
Group I @30). To change Hunt Groups or
enter a &f&rent
Hunt Group. press the
appropriate
flexible button 1-S (330-337)
and perform the following procedures.
3. Enter the three-digit station numbers up
to a maximum
of !24-digits (8 stations).
Hunt groups are joined together by entering another Hunt Group pilot Number as
the last entry of the group.
4. Press the HOLD button to save the entq.
Confxmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
To remove stations from a hunt group:
1. Enter three I###] ~pounds] on the dial pad.
2. Press the HOLD button. Confirmation
tone
is heard and the display will now update.
This will remove all stations previously
programmed
in that group,

B-- tW~titxx/~ot
Prom

Hunting

Assignment
Steps

1. Press the STATION/PILMI‘
flexible button
[Button #9) to indicate Station Hunting or
PIlot Hunting.
l
L.ED on= Station Hunting enabled
l
LED off= Pilot Hunting enabled

710-36

The system can be arranged for up to eight hunt
groups. Each hunt group can contain up to
eight stations each. Each hunt groups can be
independently
arranged to utilize either a pilot
hunting
technique
or station hunting
technique. Hunt groups may also be chained together when larger Hunt groups are desired.
Hunt groups can be joined together by programmjng another hunt group number as the
last member of a hunt grout.
If a station is in DND or is forwarded to another
station. it is conside+
busy.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the Hunt Group
prog
- garea.

Description
PILOT HUNTING:
Incoming
CO, transferred
CO. and intercom calls can be directed to a ptiot
number of a hunt group. ‘llxe system will search
sequenWy
(in the order the extensions were
entered in the database programming)
for an
idle station in the group and will ring that
station. Calls directed direct@ to stations (by
calling the extension number) witi
the hunt
group will not hunt but receive call progress
tones from the extension.
STATION m
0: Incoming co, transferred
CO, and intercom calls that are presented to a
busy, or DND station, that is a member of a
Station Hunt group, will search sequentially
(in
the order the extensions were entered in database programming]
for an idle station in the
group and wiU ring that station. calls will st.iSl
be allowed to be directed to the groups pilot
number for hunting.

Issue 1, January

1993

iqfinite
Di@td

MISC.
7 10.14

DV2C’andDVX”
Telephone

Key

SYSTEM

Spstems

PARAMETE

SYSTEM

TRANSIA-

Proffrarnrning Steps
lf changes need to be made to Local Number/Name Translation Table:
1. F’ress FLASH and dial 1551. The following
message is shown on the display phone:
]I

mere:
- XXX= Table Number 300-499
- ##= Route Number 00-19
2.The ROUTE NUMBER LED is lit. Enter the
two-digit Route Numbu (00- 191 frm what
was entered in program code, FUSH 43.
- 00-09= DVX I System
- O&19= DVXn System
phone

PRUGIlAMMING

RS (Cont’d)

LUCAL NlJMBER/NAME
TIUN TABLE

To erase a current

P-RS

number

Description
An administerable
table in the KSU provides a
local translation from a received c&ng number
to a name. This is administerable
by the customer from the attendant console position. This
table is also shared by the ICLlD features. In
cases of conflict between the name delivered
from the CO and that in the locat translation
table. the local translation table shall rule. 100
entries are provided in this table for the infinite
DVX ’ system, 200 entries are provided in this
table for the inj?nUe DVX f ’ system.
Tbe buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below.w+n
entering the 1CLlD l.ccal
Name Translation programming
area:

and name

entry:

l.F’ress the CLEAR ENTRY flexible button
(Button #4) to clear an entire phone number and name from the current index.
2.Press the NEXT TABLE flexible button
(Button # 16) to advance to the next index
and continue entering information
into the
translation table, or
3.F’ress the PREV TmLE
flexible button
[Button # 19) to go back to a previous index
that is already programmed.
-To locate an existing index for editing:
1. FYess the TABLE NUMBER flexible button
(Button #20). The following message is
shown on the display phone:
Related
Pm Braqmriae:
Refer to Sec. 750.1.
ICLID Programmmg for additional information
about ICLID features.

,,,.,,
%-Enter a two-digit number
which cornspnds to the index numbers 00-99.
3.~ss
the HOLD button to complete the
entry.

Issue 1, January

1995

710-57

8YsTEM
MISC.

PARAMETERS
SYSTEM

PROGRAMMlNG

PARAMETE

FtS (Cont’d)

LOCAL NAME TRANSLATION
Pm@

@finite
DVX’ and DV2X”
Di@t.al Ecy Telephone
Systems

[Cont’d)

* .,steps

Description

To progmm
a phone number into the Local
Number/Name
Translation
table:
1. Press the PHONE NUMBER flexible button
(E&.&ton #2) to enter the desired phone
number into the translation
table. Maximum length of phone number is I$-digits,
including hyphens.

M =61
1 =I#
“=ol
N =62
2 =2#
,=02
OS3
3 =3#
?=Q3
D =31
/=04
P=71
4=4#
E=32
Q =74
5 =5#
1=*1
F=33
R =72
6 =6#
$ =*2
o/s =*3
G =41
s =73
7 =7#
H =42
8 =8#
& =‘4
T=Bl
+ d#
I -43
U =82
9 =9#
J =51
v=83
0 =O#
(=#l
K =S2
w=91
$.xxe=ll
] =#2
L =53
x =92
: =l2
+ =#3
= =#4
Y =93
- =13
Z=94
’ -14
# =##
2. Press the HOLD button to update the database.
The BACK SPACE flexible button (Button #5)
can be used to erase the current number to
correct for errors.

710-38

Issue

1. January

1993

_ _ ..

i@zite
D&itd

DVX’ and DV2C”
Key Telephone
Systema

MISC.

SYsrnM

PA,IuMEm

LOCAL NAME

SYSTEM

PARAMETERS

PROGIUUKMING

RS (Cmt’d)

TRANSLATION
Rogrammiry!

(Cont’d)

Description

Steps

To progam
a name into the translation table:
1. Press the PJAME flexible button mutton #3)
to enter the desired name into the translation table. Maximum Iergth is 2-+charac-

ters.

A=21
B -22

M561
N -62
0=63

C=23
D=31

E =32
F =33
G =41
H =42
I=43

J =51
K =52

L=53

f =?l
Q =?4
R =72
s =73
T =81
u =82
v=a3
w=91
x=92
Y=93
Z=94

4=#
5 =5#
6 =6#
7 =?#
a =8#
9 =9#

/=04
I

l G#

cl =O#
Space

I=*1
$ =*2
% =*3
& =*4
(=#l

= 11

: =12
- =13
i ‘=14
2. Press the HOLD button to
tabase.

) =#2
+ =#3
= =#4
# =##
update the da-

The BACK SPACE flexible button (R.&ton #5)
can be used to erase the current letter to correct
for errors.

Isme

1, January

1993

710.39

r
in_finite DVX'andDVX'
D~~KeyTclepho~eS~telIlB

CO LINE ATITUBUTES

SECTION
CO LINE ATTlUBUTES
720.1

PROGRAMMING

720
PROG-NG

~ODUGTION
l?rogramming

steps

If the system is in the progr *
’ g mode,
continue using the program codes. IfstarLing to
program here, enter the programming
mode.
Refer to See. 700.2, Program Mode Entry (Key
Station).
If any CO line features are to be changed:
a. Press FLASH and dial 1401. The following
message is shown on thgt display phone:

51
b. Enter a four-digit number for the range of
lines being programmed.
If only one line is
being programmed,
enter that number
twice (0101).
c. Fress the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update. Flexible button #20 [New
Range) will be lit. The following message is
shown on the display phone to indicate
current progmmming
of that line or group
of lines.

Description
This section describes the procedures
and
steps necessary to progmm CO Line attributes.
When entfxing the CO Line attributes
portion
of the database, the programmer may decide to
enter information
for either a range of CO lines
or one spedfic CO Line.
Range proallows the programmer
to
change a specific parameter or a few parameters for an entire range of CO Lines leaving
intact the remaining data fields that do not
require change. ThFe data fields will continue
to operate with the previously
programmed
data. For example ifC0 lines are programmed
into several CO line groups with different Class
of service etc... but it is desired to enable Loop
Supervision
(SUPV) on all CO Lines the programmer may enter as the range BLb, CO lines
(01-28) and enable loop supervision,
then wdt
programming.
This will enable loop supervision
for all CO lines leaving intact the various CO
line group programming
and COS data for the
range*
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the CO L,ine
Attribute progmmming
area.
pfq

pig

- XX-XX= The CO Line Range being
programmed.
(01-281

p+q~~~
- Button #17 [Ring Display] will display
the ringing assignments for the CO line.
- Button # 18 lrJext Entry] will take you to
the next higher CO line,
- Button #I9 Previous Entry] will take
you to the next lower CO line.
- Button #20 [Select Range] will prompt
for a new CO Line range.

lsa~l,JanuarylQQS

720-l

CO LINE ATTRIBUTES

PROG-G

co LINE A’ITRTBUTES

[C-onYd)

DTMF/Dial

P&e

Progmz

Profprmming

CO/PBX

Description

Steps

1. Press the DTMF/DIAL
PULSE flexible button fButton #l]. This feature will toggle on
and off with each depression. and the display will update with each depression.
l LED on = DTMF enabled
l
IlED off= l&I Pulse enabled
2.Ress the HOLD button to save the entry.

ir@.nite
DVX’ and DVX”
Di@.aI Key Telephone
Systems

m/DIAL
PULSE. Each individual
outside
line can be programmed
to bc either DTMF
(tone) or dial pulse. When a line is assigned as
dial pulse, you can program the break/ make
ratio and dial speed.
Default:
By default, all lines are set for UKMF.
Related
Rogzam&mg:
Refer to Sec. 720.2,
Dial Pulse Parameters; and Sec. 710.1. System
Timers. CO Ring Detect Timer.

programming
ROgI

’ lg steps

1. Press the CO/PBX flexible button (Button
#2). This feature will toggle on and off with
each depression, and the display will update with each depression.
l
LBDon=
co type is enabled
l
LED off= PBX is enabled
2.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

Descriptron
CO/PBX.
Each in&iduaI
outside line connected to the system may be programmed
as
either a CO or PBX line. Also use the PBX mark
when identifying Centrex lines.
Default: By default, alllines are assigned as CO
lines.
Related
Progmnming
Refer to Sec. 710.5,
PEX Dialing

codes; sec. 710.1.

systeIIlTimers.

CO Ring Detect l%nec &so refer to Sec. 720.1,
CO
Line
Programming,
Flash
Timer
Prog-nmdng
later fn this section.

720-2

Ismut

1, Januarg

19Bs

r
iJZFn@e DVX’ and DVX If
digital
Key Telephone
Systems
CO LINE ATTRIBUTES

CO l.JNE ATTRIBUTES

PROGIUBKMING

(Cont’d)

Pro@krmning

Steps

Description

1. Press the UNA flexible button Button #3).
This feature will toggle on and off with each
depression,
and the display will update
with each depression.
l
LJSD on = UNA is enabled
. LED off= UNA is disabled
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

UNA. If a line is marked UNA, and if the system
is in night setice mode and if UNA is enabled
in system parameters,
then when a CO line
rings into the system, a ring tone is generated
over all external page zones.
Defarrlt: By default, UNA is enabled
R&ted
Pro-:
Refer to Sec. 710.L.
System Timers. External Night Ring; and Sec.
710.7. Relay/Sensor
Programming.

DIM

Trunk-to-Tnmk
R-c,

(Per CO Ibnt)
’ gsteps

Description

If the CO line DISA Trunk-to-Trunk
(Conference) attributes is to be cfianged:
1. Press the DISA TRIGTO-TRK fltible
button (Button #4). ‘Ihis feature will tog&e on
and off with each depression, and the display will update with each depression.
l
LEDon
= DlsA Trunk-to-rrunk
is enabled (a ‘C” is displayed)
l
LED off = DISA Trunk-to-Trunk
is disabled
2.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confiition
tone is heard.

DXSA TRK-TO-TRK
The DiSAlYunk-to-Ttunb
(or Conference) mark on the CO line governs a
DISA callers ability to access other outside
lines. CO lines must have D&AR-u&-to-M
enabled to allow a DISA caller to establish an
outgoing bunk-to-trunk
connection.
This allows for spedik CO line access restriction on
DIM calls.
A station with conference enable will be allowed
to initiate a Conference on CO lines regardless
of the CO iine DISA Trunk-to-‘Punk
marking.
Dcfixnik By default, DISA Tkunk-to-Trunk
is
enabled for aJ.I CO lintk
Related Progrrq:
Refer to Sec. 730.1,
Station Attributes
Programming,
Conference
Enable/Disable
(Per Station).

The CO line DISA Trunk-to-Trunk
flag affects a DISA callers ability to access butgoit-g CO lines as shown in the following table:
Incoming

hue

1. Janq

DISATrunk

Trunk

DLSA caller attempts

to access

T-t-T Enabled

T-t-T Disabled

T-t-T Enabled

Cdl Allowed

Call Denied

T-t-T Disabled

call Denied

Call Denied

1993

720-a

iqj%ite
co z;LNE AWUTE!j

PROGRAMMING

co LINE ATTRE3UTES

@unt’dI

Dig&al

DVX ’ and DVX I1
Key Telephone
Systems

privacy
Pro@

~‘gsteps

Description

If CO L.ine privacy is to be changed:
1. Press the PRIVACY flexible button. (Button
#5, This feature will toggle on and off with
each depression. and the display will update with each depression.
* IED on = Privacy is enabled
* LED 0s = Privacy is disabled
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

RRIVACY. If desired. the system can
gramrned to eliminate CO Line privacy,
another station to join in on existLng
line conversations.
l
Stations must have a direct CO Hne
ance to join CO line conversations

be proallowing
outside
appearin pro-

gRSS.

A station must also have Privacy disabled
before the system wilI allow that
station to
enter into an existing conversation.
l
Both parties will hear an alert tone just prior
to a station joining the cal&
l
When privacy is disabled, only one other
station may join tn on an existing conversation.
D&ulk
By default, Privacy is enabled for all
co Lines.
RcIated Rogmmming:
Refer to Sec. 730.1,
Statian Attributes
Programming,
F’rivaq (Per
Station)
option
and Sec. 730.2,
Page ‘B”
Programming,
Flexible But-ton Programming
for button assignments.
l

The CO line. Privacy f.fag affects a station users ability b access CO lines already engaged in conversation by another station in the system as shown m the following table:
Station Attempting
to
Access CO Line

CO Line In use by another
11

privacy Enabled
1
Privacy Disabkd

7204

Station

Privacy Enabled

Privacy Msabled

Private
No Cut-through

Private
(No cLlt-through)

Private
(No Cut-through

Privacy Released
Cut-through
Allowed

Issue 1, Ja3lualy

I.093

irlfinfte
DQ.$w

DvX’andDvX”
&y Telephone

Systems

co IJNE ATTRIBUTES

(Cont’d)

Pro$!yM

steps

1. Press the LOOP SUPV flexible button (Button #61.
2,Enter a one-digit timer value on the dial
pad between 1 and 9 which corresponds to
100-900 msec.
3.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

h3uel.Jfmuaq1993

CO LlNl3A~U’Xl-S

PROG-G

Description
LOOP SUPV. Loop supervision is used primarily with DlSA, Voice MaiI/Auto
Attendant
and
with unsupervised
conference applications.
It
provides the system with the ability to detect
when loop current has been broken and an
outside line is no longer being used. To determine timer value for loop supervision,
consult
your local serving central office for type and
duration of loop supervisfon signal.
It is recommended
that Loop Supervision
be
enabled, especially when connecting
a Voice
Mail orAuto Attendant to the infinite Digital Key
Telephone Systems. The duration of the Loop
interrupt is 700 msec.
Default:
By default, Loop Supervision
is disabled for all CO Lines.
Related
Progl%mldng:
Refer to Sec. 710.1,
System Thners. CO Ring Detect Timer; Sec.
720.1,
CO Line
Programming.
DISA
Pro-:
Sec. 755.1, Voice Mail Groups
(VI@, and Sec. 755.2, Voice Mall Outpulsing
Table.

720-b

infutite
DVX’ and DVX”
Dij@tal Xcy Telephcme Systems

Dl!SA Programming
Profframming

Description

steps

I. Press the DISA flexible button

(Button

W).

2. Enter a one-digit value on the dial pad to
Indicate type of DISA desired.
- I= 24hou.r
- 2= Night ordy
- 0= no DISA (disable DISA)
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entryConfirmation
tone is heard and the display
will ROW update.

720-6

DIM. A line can be assigned as a DlSA line
during night service only or on a 24- hour basis.
A maximum
of three DISA lines can be pmgmmmed into the system. A DISA access code
can also be programmed.
Incoming DISA callers may dial any vaIid internal station or access
outside Iine groups. DISA callers WiII be subjected to the Class of Setice placed on the line
accessed for outdiahng. It is recommended
that
hop Supervision
be enabled when setting up
DISA Iine(s). Sec. 710.1, System Timers
,
Conference/DISA
Timer allows the system administrator
to control the length of time a DISA
caller is allowed after establishing a “lYmk-toTnmk” cdl. After expiration of the Conference
Timer. a tone will be presented to both DISA
parties, then one minute later the system will
automatically
release both trunks, ‘Ike Conference Timer does not affect or control a DISktostation CalI.
Default:
By default, there are no outside rines
assigned as DEA lines.
F&elated Ro grrg:
Refer to Sec. 720.1, CO
Line Programming,
Conference/DISA
Timer:
Sec. 710.9. Access Codes: Sec. 720.1. CO Line
Pro@
* ig, Loop Supervision ProgmmmUng
DISATrunk-to-Trunk
(Per CO Line]. and Class
of Service (COS) Programming. Also refer to Sec.
760.1, Exception Tables Programming.

Il5sue 1. January

199s

irlfinite
~)@taI

DVX’andDVXn
zxey Telephone

Systems

CO LINE ATTRIBUTES

(Cont’d)

FlashTfmcr

Steps

l.Press the FLASH TIMER flexible button
(Button #8).
Z.Enter a two-digit timer value on the dial
pad between 01-20 which corresponds to
100 msec-2 seconds.
3.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
ConiTirmation tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Line

PROGRAMMING

Programming

Pr0jpnmm.g

CO LINE ATTRIBIJTES

Group

FLASH TIMER. Flash is a programm able opening on a line for signaling.
When using an
outside line. flash allows a user to obtain new
dial tone without Iosing the line. This is particularly useful behind a PBX or Centrex. Each
indivfdual
CO line can be programmed
for a
flashtime.
Default:
By default, the Flash Timer is set for
10 (1 .O seconds) and is variable from 01 to 20
(100 msec. to 2 seconds).
Related Pro@ammiq&
Refer to Sec. 720.1 ,CO
Line Progrm,
CO/PI% Programming.
.

Programming

Prw

Steps

I. Press the CO LINE GROUP flexible button
[Button #9).
2. Enter a one-digit value on the dial pad
between O-7 which corresponds to Groups
o-7.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confiiation
tone is heard and the display
wiIl now update.

Issue 1. January

Description

1999

Description
CO LINE GROUP. Eight line groups are available for CO line assignment.
Groups should be
assigned according to type Ilocal, FX, WATS,
etc.) Line group 0 is used for programming
a
line(s) as a private line.
Me Grouping affects Line Queuing, Pooled
Group access (Pool Buttons), Speed Dial, and
LCRfetures.
;
D&tit:
By default, AU lines are placed in Line
Group 1.
Related
programmfng:
Mer to Sec. 730.1,
Station
Attributes
Programming,
Flexible
Button Prom
- Pool Buttons. Also tier
to Sec. 765.2, L.CR Route List Table.

720-7

iqfiniie
cOLINEA’M’RIBUTESPRO-G
co LJNE ATI’RIBUTES
J.

class

of Semite

D$$taI

DVX’andDV2Kn

Key Telephone

Systems

(Co&d)
(COS) F+ro&

Programming

’ g

Steps

Description

1. Press the LINE COS flexible button

(Button

assfgmnents
of a CO Class
of Service the assigned CO line wit1 either interact with a staffon Class of Service, provide a
“canned” restriction
or provide unrestricted
dialing capabilities.
(when a CO line is marked
PBX COS restrictions
apply to the station only
if one of five codes are dialed first.)
Refer to Table 720-l Class of Service (COS) for
CO to Station Class OfService relationship.
De&t&
By default. all CO lins are assigned
Class of Service 1.
Related
Programming:
Rqer to Sec. 730.1,
Station Attnibutes Programmhg,
Station Class
of Service (COS) options. Also refer to Sec.
760.1, Exception Tables Programmiq.
LINE CO!& Through

#lO).

2.Enter
a one-digit value on the dial pad
between 1-5 which corresponds to five possible class of service to which a line may be
aSsigned:
- COSl= No res&ictions.
- COS2= Table A governs, Station COS
2 and 4 are monitored.
- COS3= Table B governs. Station COS
3 amI 4 are monitored.
- COS4= Restricts O.l.*,# dialed as
first digit and places a seven digit dialing limitation.
In addftion. l-800,
1911, and 1611 areahwedand
411,
976. and 555 numbers are denied.
- CO!%= Overrides station COS 2,3,4,
and 5 and allows unrestricted
dialing.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the e&y.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Table 7!2u-1 class

of sedce

[Cos)

CO LINE CLASS OF SERVICE
I
S
T

A
T
I
0

Unrestricted

TableA

Table B

TabIes A&B

720-S

Unrestricted

~~~~~n~

Unrestricted

Table A

Unrestricted

kzEa$nW

Unrestricted

Unresticted

Table B

N
C
0

-1-4

Table A

Table B

canned
Restriction*
C-d
Restricti 0l-P

Unrestricted
Unrestricted

canned
canned
Canned
Canned
Restriction*
Restriction*
Restriction*
Restriction*
Unresfricted
Intercom
Intercom
Intercom
Intercom
Intercom
6
only
OdV
only
only
1
only
l Canned
Restriction= No ‘0’. 1, #. l *’ as.a first dialed digit, and 7 digits maxhnum
plus l-800. 1911, 1611 are allowed and 411,976.
and 555 numbers are denied.
5

Issue 1, January

1999

i@ite

DVX’

~i@aI

and DVX s

Key T&phone

Spstema

co LINE ATTRIBUTES
K.

CO Line Ringing

PROGlUiMMING

(Cont’d)
Assignments

Progranxniug

Steps

Each CO line in the system may be assigned
initial incoming ringing to one of the following
destinations:
a one or more stations (keyset or SLT)
l
to an ACD, UCD. Voice Mail or Hunt
Gl-Wp
. Off-Net (via speed dial)
1. Press the RING ASSIGNMENT fI&ble button (Button #Xl] to toggle to the Ringing
Assignment display. The display wilI show
the following information:

the three-digit
destination
(DDD)
and the one-digit ring type (R) followed by
the HOLD button. Confirmation
tone Is
heard and the display will now update.
3. Press Button # 17 to display ring assignments. Assfgnments
will be displayed in
sets of 8 up to the number programmed.
Press Button # 17 additIonal limes to cycle
to the next group of 8 rkrg assignments.
The following format is used to display the
SSsignm~tS:
2.Enter

Where:
- DDD= Destination
- R= D for Day
- N=Night
- B= Both Day & Night.
Deleting a station (eWerIng a 0 for ring type)
only removes that station from the ring assignment.
Ring assignments will be continuous
and will
be displayed in order of the destination number
from 00 1 to 557.

IfumE 1, JaxllxFu-y 1883

CO LIME ATTRIBUTES

Description
RINGASSIGNMENT
. When ringing is assigned
as a part of the CO line parameters. ringing of
a station is independent of that stations button
configuration.
However, Stations that are assigned for initial ring-in MIJS’I” HAVE a LCOP
button(s)
to answer the cdl(s) if a direct CO
appearance
is not avaikble.
Multiple station assignments are allowed for a
particular
CO line in a mixture of Day. Night.
or Day 8r Night ring types. An incoming CO line
may be programmed to any number of stations
but it cannot be programmed
to ring a mixture
of stations and groups (iem. a Hunt Group and
four stations. or more than one Hunt Group).
Incoming
cab directed Off-Net will be connected to an outgoing system speed bin.
CO lines assigned to ring multiple stations will
not follow any stations’ forward to a UCD, ACD,
Voice Mail, Hunt Group or Off-Net. Forwarding
to another station will be allowed.
3 mdestfnatlulls
&k,. .
- 02CW99 = System Speed Bins 20-99,
for off-net ringing.
- 100-l 55 = Station extension Numbers
- 199=DirectRingingtoModem
Group
- 330-337 = Hunt Groups l-8
- 440447
= Voice Mail Groups l-8
- 550-557 = ACD or UCD Groups 1-8

- 0 = unassigrkd
(to delete a station)
- l=DayF2inging
- 2=Ni&htRir@ng
- 3=Day&NightRinging
Multiple station assignments are accomplished
by assigning
another destination
with ring
status. DDDR and pressing the HOLD button.
This can be done for up to the maximum nurnber of stations on the system,
Defhlt:
By default. all CO lines are assigned
to ring at the first programmed
attendant,
Station 100.
Related
Frogrammlng:
Refer to Sec. 750.2,
ICLlD Ringing Assignment.

720-g

r
CO LINE ATTRIBUTES

PFtOGRAMMING

co LINE ATTRIBUTE!5

(Cont’d)

CO Line

Identificatfon
pro@-mming

Display

Description

steps

Each CO line in the system can be programmed
to have a name associated to it in database
programming.
1. Press the CO LINE IDEIWIFICATION
flexible button
(Button #12). The folIowing
message is shown on the display phone:

2. Enter the name by using keys on the dial
pad as follows. Valid alpha-numeric
characters are: A-Z. O-9. l , #, - [spaces] and
other ASCII characters as listed below. The
name may be entered in any combination
up to 1%characters
in length (this represents 24-digits entered).
A=21
B=22
C =23
D =31
E =32
F =33
G =41
H =42
I=43
J=51
K =52
L =53

M =61
N =62
0 =63
P =71
Q =74
R =72
s =73
T=81
U =82
v=83
w=91
x =92
Y =93
z=94

iqj?nite
DVX’aadDVX”
Di.#aI Key Ttlephone
Syratms

=I#
T-21 =2#
3 =3#
4 =4#
5=5#
6 =6#
7 =7#
8 =8#
9 =9#
OEO#/
!jpace ~11
: 112
- =13
I
’ =14

* =Ol
, =02
7 =03
/ =04
1=*1
$ =+2
0%=*3
& =*4
* =‘#
[=#l
) =#2
+ =#3
= =#4
# =##

This feature shows a name to be entered into
the database prog
’ g for each individual
line (trunk) connected to the system.
Once entered into the database, LCD phones
incIuding the attendant staff ons will receive the
programmed
line “name” in place of the default
‘LINE XX message. This applies to all line call
processing conditions where the current ‘LINE
Xx message appears.
SMDR will continue to print out the Iine number in place of the programmed
name.
If the line name has not been programmed,
then
the current “LINE XX” display will be used as
the default.
A programmable
data field is avaiIable for each
he in the system. Line namea may be programmed using the range programming.
A message similar to the fohowing wiII be used
for aII CO Iine displays when a name has been
programmed
for a CO line.

3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
W-III now update.

720-10

fsfme

1, Jan-

1895

CO LINE A’ITKIBUTE!3

720.2

PARAMETERS

DIALPULSE

gntmmhg

Steps

If this feature is to be assigned:
a. Press FLASH and dial 141). The following
message is shown on the display phone:
I._...,.,

10PFs

b.‘Ihe Dial Pulse features will toggle on and
off with each depression, and the display
will update with each depression.
. JXDon=60/40(RKTI0).
1OppsW’EED~
. ISDoff = 66/33 (RATIO), 20pps WEED1
c. Press the HOLD button to save the entxy.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now upaate.

Issue 1, January

PROGRAMMING

1983

Desctiption
By default all lines are DTMF (tone) signaling.
If outpulsing is required, the individual outside
line must be programmed for pulse. Refer to CO
section. The break/make
raline programming
tio and the dial speed can be programmed
at
this time.
The buttons on the digit& terminal are defined
as shown beiow when entening the Dial Pulse
Parameter programming
Wea:

D&m&: By default, the b&&/make
ratio IRATI0) is set at 60/40 but can be changed to
66/33. By default, the dMng speed [SPEED) is
XOpps but can be changed to 2Opps.
R&edPro~
g: Refer to Sec. 720.1, CO
Line Programming
for DTMF/Dial
Pulse
programming.
l

720-11

r
CO IJNE A-UTES

l’ROGlUMMING

co I~INE ATTRIBUTES

(Cont’d)

720.3

FLEXIBLE
FlrATuRE

iqfhzite
DVX’ and DVX”
D&ital Ecy Telephone
Systems

PORT ASSIGNKENT

Programming

Description

steps

if the CO Line numbers need to be relocated to
different ports:
a. Press FLASH and dial (421. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

5
b.The buttons 1 through 7 indicate cards 1
through 7. When the relocation program is
initially entered, Button #I will be lit indicating that the user is progmzumningthe
CO
Line numbers on the first card (CO Ports 1
through 4). The LCD wiiI display the CO
Line numbers presently
assigned to the
first four ports.
To change the CO Line number assigned to any
port:
a. Dial the position number on the display (01
through 04). folIowed by the CO Line number desired.
Example:
- If 0103 were dialed, the CO line number of the first enuy on the display
would be changed to 03. In addition,
since 03 was shown as the third cntry on the display, that enuy would
be bknk (##I.
- lntheDVX1System,ifa2x4Expander Module were installed, the enby would be 0 1 for CO5. followed by
the CO Line number desired.

‘Ike Fltible
Port Assignment
feature will provide a means to assign CO line numbers to any
CO line port in the system. This provides complete flexibtily in determinWg CO line numbers
within the system as long as fhey stay witbk
the system numbering plan. A CO line can be
assignedanynumberbetweenO1
and 14ontbe
in@zite DVX’ system and any number between
01 and 28 on the in..
DVX I* system. This
restrktion
is required to rninknize memory requirements
on the smaller !5pms.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown belowwhen
entering the Flexible Port
Assiient
feature programming
arca:
~&Eq
[a

gg
&ETR

Fi
h;Ti

All CO line numbers entered are stored in a
temporaq
database area which is uploaded to
the main database when the system is reset.

To select another card in the system:
a. Press the button associated with that card.
For example, ff Button #3 were pressed (CO
ports 9 through 121, the CO Line numbers
assigned to the third card would be displayed. CO Line numbers on the third card
are changed in the same manner by entering the position number (01 through 04),
folkwed by the CO Line number desired,

720-12

Istrue 1, January

1883

infinite
D&itd

DVX’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
SyrMms

STATION
750.1

STATION

SECTION
ATTRIBUTES

ATTRIBUTES

PROGRAMMING

730
PROG~NG

INTRODUCTION
Pr0g-t

+ng Steps

Description

If the system is in the programming
mode,
continue using the program codes. If starting to
program here, enter the programming
mode.
Refer to 700.2. Program
Mode Entry (Key
Staffon).
If station features are to be changed:
a. Press FLASH and dial [50). The following
message is shown on the &play phone:

This section describes tbe steps and procedures necessary to program station attributes
for stations connected to the in_finite Digital Key
Telephone System. When entering the Station

attributes
portion of the database, the pmgrarnmer may decide to enter information
for
either a range of stations or one specific station.
Range programming
allows the progrannner
to
change a spe&c pammeter
or a few parameters for an entire range of staff on5 leaving intact
the remaining data fields that do not require
change. Those data fields will conttnue to operate with the previously programmed
data.
Station Attributes
are divided between those
features that require either a simple aflow/deny
or Enable/Dfsable
(toggle) operation and those
that require a numeric entry. The allow/deny
(toggle) type features are programmed
on page
“A”.
When programmmg
the Page ‘IA” features. the
flexfble buttons are mapped as follows:

;I
b. Enter a six-digit number (1 OO- 155) for station range being programmed.
If only one
station is being programmed,
enter that
number twice i.e. (lCH3100).
c. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
tif now update. Flexible button #20 (New
Range) will be lit. The display updates to
current programming
for Page A:
111

where:
-

- XXX= Station Range
- A= Page “A” Features
- PA= paging Access is allowed
- DD= Do Not Disturb is allowed
- CF= Conference Is allowed
- -A= Executive Override IS allowed
- PR= privacy is enabled
- SP;=Syatem Speed Dial is allowed
- QU= Queuing is allowed
- PL- Preferred Line Answer is enabled
- OH= Off-Hook Voice Over is allowed
- ~=Cdl
Forward is allowed
- LC= Forced LCR Enabled
- SB= ACD Supervisor Barge-in*

Issue 1, January

1993

- Button #I18 PAGE “A”] selects Page *A”
and displays Page “A” parameters..
- Button #19 [PAGE “B-1 selects Page ‘B”
and displays Page “B” parameters..
- Button #20 (Select Range] will prompt
for a new Station range.
ACD Features are ONLY av&ble
when the
Basic ACD Software package Is purchased
separately.

730-l

iqfhtite
s’.IXl’ION
PAGE ‘A”

ATTRIBUTES
STATION

Digital

PROGEUIMMZVG

ATTRIBUTES

DVX’

Key Telephone

aad DVX I1
Systems

[Cont’d)

Description
1. Press the PAGE ACCESS fl&ble
button
(Page A, Button # 1). ‘Ihis feature will to&e
on and off with each depression. and the
display will update with each depression.
l
LED on = Paging is allowed
. IEDoff=Pagirqisdenied
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation

tone is heard.

PAGE ACCESS. Stations can individua@
be
allowed or denied the ability to make pages.
This applies to alI intema.l and external zone

paging. A station denied access to paging may
still answer a meet-me page announcement.
(Station COS 6 will not deny a station the ability
to make a page.1
Debault:
By default, Paging is allowed at all
stations.

Do Not Disturb
ggxmmhg

1. Press the DO NOTDISTURB

flexible button
(Page A. Button #2). Tl-& feature will toggle
on and off with each depression.
and the
display will update with each depression.
l
LED on = Do Not Disturb is a.Uowed
l
LED off= Do Not Disturb is denied
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
_ Confkmation
tone is heard.

730-2

Description

steps

DO NOT DISTURB.
Stations can be individually allowed or denied the ability to place their
telephone in Do Not Disturb.
Default:
By defau2t. Do Not Disturb is allowed

at all stations.

Issue

1. January

1993

inlfinite
DVX I and DVX ’
Dj@tal Key Telephone
Systems

PAGE “A” STATION
Conference
station)

ATTRIBUTES

Enable/Disable

Programming

STATIOIV ATTRIBUTES

(Cont’d)
(Per

Steps

l.Press the CONFERENCE flexible button
[Page A, Button #3). This feature will toggle
on and off with each depression, and the
display will update with each depression.
l
LED on = Conference is enabled
l
LED off = Conference is disabled
2.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

Executive

Description
CONFERENCE. This feature allows the system
to be programmed
on a per Station basis for the
ability to initiate a conference.
Only stations tbat have Conference enabled will
be able to initfate a conference.
A station that is denied conferencing capabilities in progranmhg
can be a party to another
stations conference provided that station does
have conferencing privileges.
Default: By default, Conference is enabled for
all stations.

Owe&de
pfogx-mmhg

steps

1. Press the EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE flerdble
button (Page A, Button #4). This feature
will toggle on and off with each depression,
and the display wiIl update with each depression.
l
LED on = &cut&e
Override is allowed
l
LED off= Executive Override is denied
2.Pre.s~ the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confknation
tone is heard.

1 CAUTION

]

USE OF THIS FEATURE WHEN THE
EXECUTIVE
OVERRlDE WARNING
TONE IS DISABLED MAY BE INTERPRETED AS A VIOLATION OF FEDERAL OR STATE LAWS, AND AN
INVASION OF PRIVACY. CONSULT
COUNSEL WTIX RESPECTTO APPLJCABLE LAW BEFORE INTRUDiNG ON
CALLS USINGTHIS
FEA’IURG.

It=nlt

PROGRAMhUNG

1, Jauualy

1995

Description
EXECUTIVE
OVERRIDE.
This feature allows
certain stations to be designated as “Executive”
stations with the ability to override and ‘bargein” on other keysets engaged in a CO line or
intercom conversation.
An optional waming tone is programmed
on a
system wide basis to either enable or disable
the tone. T% tone wiIl be presented to all
parties prior to actual cut thru of the third

Dciimiltz By default, Executive Override is disabIed for all stations.
Related
Pro
Refer to Set 710 2
Systcxu Features
-A. Pro
Exec bvenii;
Warning Tone. Also refer to Sec. 730.1, ACD
Supervisor Monitor w/Barge-in.

730-3

DVX I and DV2L I1
Key Telephone
Systems

@finite

STATION

PROGRAMMING

A--

PAGE “A” STATION
E.

Privacy

Digital

ATTRXBUTES

(Co&d)

(Per station)
Profipmmdg

Description

Steps

To program

station(s) for Automatic Privacy:
1. Press the PRIVACY flexlble button (Page A,
Button #5). This feature wit1 toggle on and
off with each depression, and the display
will update with each depression.
. LED on = Privacy is enabled on Stations(s)
. LED off = Privacy is disabled on Sta-m
2.Press the I-lOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmatfon
tone is heard.

PRIVACY. The system provfdes privacy on all
communications
in the system which prevents
other stations from accidentally
entering
an
existing conversation. However. if desired, the
system will allow on a per station basis the
ability for a station to join an existing outside
CO line conversation.
Each station can be
granted the privilege to join an existing CO line
conversation
by simply pressing the CO line
button of a CO line in use.
Both the station and the CO line must have
prtMcy disabled before the system will allow
6
cuHhI-u.
If privacy is disabled and a station joins an
existingcalL bothpartieswill
hearanalerktone.
If privacy is disabled, only .one other station
may join in on an existing conversation.
Default: F’rivacy is enabled for all stations in
default.
Related programming:
Refer to Sec. 720.1, CO
Line Programmln g. Privacy in CO Line Attributes programming.

The Station Privacy flag affects a station users ability to access CO lfnes already engaged in conversation by another station in the system as shown in the folluwing table:
Station Attempting
to
Access CO Line

730-4

Privacy Enabled

Enabled

Private
INo Cut-through)

Privacy Msabled

Private
(No cut-through)

ptfvacy
*

CO Une In Use by Another

Station

Privacy Disabled
,

Private
(No Cut-through)
Privacy Released
[Cut-through
Allowed)

Isue

1, January

190s

infinite
~&itd

DVX * and DVX’
Key Telephone
Spatems

pA(iE ‘A” STATION
F.

System

ATTRIBUTE-S

STATION

A-UTES

PRoGZXAMMING

(Cunt’d)

Speed Dial Access
Prog~

steps

1, Press the SPEED fieiible button (Page A,
Button #6). This feature will toggle on and
off with each depression, and tie display
will update with each depression.
. LED on = System Speed Dialing access
is allowed
l
LED off= System Speed Dialing access is
denied
2.Pres.s the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

Description
SYSTEM SPEED DIALING ACCESS. Stations
can be individually
allowed or denied the ability
to use system speed dial (20-99) numbers. The
last 40 systmn speed numbers are not monitored by toll restriction.
Stations can not be
prevented from using station speed dial.
Default:
By default, System Speed M&ng
is
allowed at alI stations.
Related
Ro gremming:
Refer to Sec. 760.1,
Exception Tables Programmmg.
.

WneQueuing
Programmiq

Steps

1. Press the QUEUING fkdble button Page
A, Button #7). This feature will toggle on
and off with each depression, and the display will update with each depression.
l
LJ3D on = Queuing is allowed
l
LED off= Queuing is denied
2.Press the HOLD button to save the enky.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

Issue 1, Jl%nTUiIy 1993

Description
LINE @lEUING.
Stations caa be allowed or
denied the ability to manually queue for a busy
group of CO lines. Even when disabled. stations
will have automatic IAX queuing privileges.
Default:
By default, CO Line Queuing is allowed at all stations.

730-6

r
STATION ATTRIBUTES
PAGE “A” STATION

Prcfcrrcd

PROGRAMMING

ATTRIBUTES

(Co&d]

Line Answer
ptogrammbg

Steps

1. Press the PREF LINE ANSWER fl&ble button [Page A. Button #S]. This feature will
toggle on and off with each depression. and
the display will update with each depression.

LEDon=hef’kxredLineAnswerisallowed
l
LED off= Preferred Line Answeris denied
2.FYess the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.
l

Off-Hook

Voice

Description
PREF LINE ANSWER. Stations can be given the
ability to answer incoming outside line calls,
transferred
and recalling lines and he queues
by simply going off-hook. (Preferred Line Answer)
D&auk
By default. FVeferred Line Answer is
disabled on all stations.

Over

l?roflpmnkg

steps

1. Press the OHVO flexible button (Page A,
Button #9). ‘Ibis feature wilI toggle on and
off with each depression. and the display
will update with each depression.
LED on = Off-Hook Voice Over is aUowed
l
. LED off= OfFHook Voice Over is denied
2.Press the HOLD button to save the enhy.
* Confirmation
tone is heard.

730-6

imite
DVX*andDVXn
Di@t.al Key Telephone
Systems

Description
OHVO. This feature a&ws a station to receive
OHVO calls. Only OHVO DfgitalTenninals
may
receive an OHVO cdl. A station can be denied
the ability to receive OHVO calls by disabling
the OHVO option.
DcfimItz
By default. &-Hook
Voice Over is
disabled for all stations.
Remed
Programming:

Issue 1, January

1893

irlfinite
D&$a

DVX * and DVX’
JXcy Telephone
System8

PAGE “A” STATION
J.

ATTRIBUTES

STATION

PROGRAMMING

ATTRlBuTEs

(Cont’d]

CaII Fonvardiq
Prqqramming

steps

Description

1. Press the CALL FORWARD flexible button
(Page A, Button # lo]. This feature will toggle on and off with each depression, and
the disp1ay will update with each deptession.
l
LED on = Call Forwarding is allowed
l
LED off= Call Forwardhg
is denied
2.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

CALL FORWARD. Stations can be allowed or
denied the ability to have incoming CO calls,
intercom, transferred
outside Lines forwarded
to another station, ACD. UCD. Hunt or Voice
Mail group or Off-Net Fomard via speed dial.
Dcfautt: By defauit. Call Forwarding
is allowed
at all stations.

Forced

Least

Cost Ranting

Progmmming

&CR)

Steps

1. Press the FORCED LCR flexible button
(PageA, Butt.on#ll).ThisfeaturewiU
toggle on and off with each depression. and
the display will update with each depression.
l
LED on = Least Cost Rmtfng is forced
l
LED off= Least Cost Routing is optional
2.FWss the HOLD button to save the enm.
Confirmation
tone is heard.

Description
FORCED LCR. Stations may be forced to place
outgoirqj CO calls by use of LAX [dial [9]) to
access an outside line). This allows the system
administrator
to control dialing patterns and
t&e lines used for outgoing CO calls more effectively. This can be enabled/clisabled
on a per
station basis for additional flexibility and contrd.
Defimk
Forced LCR Q optional for all stations.
Itdated
prom:
Refer to sec. 730.1.
LCR Class of service (COS): Sec. 710.2. LCR
Enable:
765.1,
Least Cost Routing
(LCR)
programming.

I~sut

1. Januarg

199s

730-7

STATION

ATTRIBU'IWS

I?ROGRAblILdING

PAGE “A” STATION

ATTRIBUTES

Monitor

ACD Supe+r

Proglxmmhg

infinite
DVX ’ and DVX ’
Dtgltat Key Telephone
Systems

[Cont’d)

w/Barge-In

Steps

1. Press the SUPV 3mGE-IN
flexible button
(Page A, Button #12). This feature will toggle on and off with each depression. and
the display will update with each depression.
l
LED on = ACD Supv Barge-in is alIowed
l
LED off;; ACD Supv Barge-in is denied
2.F%ess the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confiiation
tone is heard.

Description
This feature is ONLY available when the Basic
ACD Software Package is purchased
separately.
The ACD Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In feature provides a means for an ACD Supenrisor
to monitor an agents calI in progress or provide
assistance in training ACD personnel. When
used, a supervisor may intrude onto an agents
call in a listen only mode of in a true conference
mode. This feature is available with or without

Default:
By default, the Supervisor
Monitor
w/Barge-In
feature is not allowed.
Related
Pmgramming:
Refer to Sec. 730.1,
Executive Override.

Executive

Ckwfde

BIockiq

- gsteps
1.
l.Press
the EXECUTIVE
OVERRIDE
BLOCKING flexible button (PageA Button
#13).ThisfeaturewiIltoggleonandoffwith
each depression, and the display will update with each depression.
- I, LED on = Blocking is denied.
LED off= Blo&q
Is allowed,
2.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confiiation
tone is heard.
l

730-s

Description
The Executive Override Feature has a separate
condition added to it which wili allow or disaISow an liZxecutive to override an extension. This
prevents an extension with override capability
from overriding an Executive’s station. Reler to
Item D., Executive Override eartier in this section.
Dcfautt:
E3y default. Executive Override is allowed at all stations.
Related Programmiq:
Refer to Sec. 710.2,
System
Features
Programming,
Executive
Override.

Issue 1, Januazy

1993

STATION
PAGE “B” STATTON ATTRIBUTE8

PROGRAMMING

(Co&d)

PAGE “B” INTRODUCMON

730.2

Projg3mmkg

b.Enterasix-digitnumber(lOO-155)forstation range being programmed.
If only one
station is being programmed,
enter that
number twice i.e. (100100).
c. Press the HOLD button to save t.be entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update. Fltible
button #20 (New
Range] will be lit.
d. Press FG Bl button. The display of current
programming
for those featclreswill appear
as follows:

EEX3lfll D Ill3 EON 1 8pO
MM EBBE ccc nEDnltPB 10

Where:
- xx=staticmRange
-

3= Page ?3* Features
ID= Station Identification
(O-7)
COS= Class of Senrice (1-6)
SPK= Speakerphone
Option (O-2)
AAAA= Pickup Group (l-4)
l3BBB= F%ging Zone (l-4)
CCC= Preset Forward Destination
DD....DD= CO Line Group access(0-7)
u);: LCR Class of Service (O-6)

Issue 1, January

1993

Description

Steps

If t&e system is in the programming
mode.
continue using the program codes. If starting to
program here, enter the programming
mode.
Refer to 700.2, Program Mode Entry (Key
Station).
If station features are to be changed:
a. Press FLASH and dial [50]. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

AlTBIB=

This section describes the steps and procedures necessary to program the Page “B” station attributes
for stations connected to the
infirrite Digital Key Telephone System. When
entering the Station attributes portion of the
database, the programmer
may decide to enter
information
for either a range of stations or one
specific station.

Range programming
allows the programmer to
change a specific parameter or a few parameters for an entire range of stations leaving intact
the remaining
data flelds,that
do not require
change. Those data fields will continue to operate with the pnwiously programmed
data.

When programming
the Page ‘B” features,
flexible buttons are mapped as follows:

the

RgJh;;alGl
p$q~gqpiq
- Button #18 [PAGE -A”] selects Page -A”
and displays Page -A” parameters.
- Button # 19 PAGE ‘B” 1 selects Page ‘B”
and displays Page “B” parameters.
- Button #20 [Select Range] will prompt
for a new Station range.

730-Q

infinite
STATION

AmUTE!

PAGE “B” STATION
A

Station

D&&al

PROGRAMMING
ATTRIBUTES

DVX ’ and DVX ‘I

Kcv Telephone

Systems

(Cmt’d)

IdcntJfication
Programming

Description

Steps

1. Press the STATiON ID flexible button page
B. Button # 1).
To program the Station ID for a Digital Terminal:

1. Dial a [O] on the dial pad.
2. Press the HOLD button

to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now upaate.

To program the Station ID for a DSS/DLS
sole with Map 1, Map 2 or Map 3:

STATION ID. Each system port must be programmed to identify tie type of station that wiII
operate on that port. Each station me must be
identiiied.
Dtfhultz By default, alI 4x8 Key Interface Cards
default to ID 0 [Digital Terminal). all SLTs default to ID 5 (SLT or OPX).

Con-

steps
1. Dial either

a 111.[2] or 131 on the diat pad.

2. Enter the three-digit station number (loo1551 which the DSS/DLS Console is associated with.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Description
lWJP #la By default, the first 28 Stations (Stas
100-127) and CO Lines 1-14 are mapped to be
buttons. Three Call Park locations,
Release,
Attendant
Override, and an AlI Call Page are
also mapped to the buttons. All buttons except
the 14 CO Iine buttons and Release button are
flexible and can be c.hanged by the station user.
MAP %2. By default, CO Lines l-28 are fbced
buttons and Stations IOO- 111 are flexMe buttons and appear in sequential
order with 6
buttons Programmed as features.
MAP #S. Stations 112-155 are flexible buttons
and appear in sequential order with the bottom
4 buttons programmed
as either features or
flwcible. This provlIdes the receiving
stations
with DSS buttons when used in conjunction
with DSS Map 2 for a full 28x56 CO/Station

Related Rugramming:
Refer to Sec. 720.1, CO
Line Programming.
CO Line Progrrng
for
CO Line ringing assignments onMap 1 and Map
2.

730-10

IBfwe 1, January

1905

irlfinite

DVX’andDVX”

Dj@al

Key Telephone

PAGE ‘B” STATION

Systems
ATTRIBUTES

STATION

ATTZUBLITE-S

I’ROGEAMMING

(Cont’d)

station
Identi&ation
(Cont’d)
To program the Station ID for a Relay/Sensor

Module:
Frol.lXd

steps

a 14) on the dial pad.

2.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

To program
Station:

the Station
Prog$amdng

l.Diala151

steps

2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
ConfltmaUon
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

1993

RELAY/SENSOR
HODDTX: The Relay Sensor
Interface Module connects to the system using
one digital station port and provides three relay
activated contacts and three sensing circuits.
The relays provide for applications
such as
Loud Bell Control contacts,
CO Line contro1
contacts,
RAN Start contacts,
Page Relays.
Power Fail contact and additional
applications
assoftwarewiUpermit.The
sensingcircuitswill
provide for such applications
as Alarm signaling input, RAN Stop (end of message) and other
applications
as developed and allowed by software.

ID for a SLT or OPX

onthedialpad.

Issue 1, Janwuy

Description

Description
SLT/GFF PREmSE EXTENSLGN (Opx): This
external module provides the interface for one
long loop (OPX) single line telephone
(2500
type) extension. This module requires a separately provided -4SV dc power supply to provide
the necessary cument for long loop applications
and to support ring generation. This module is
wiredtoandusesa~statlonport~any
digital key terminal station port on any caml
phgged into the system. The OPX card meets
the requirements
of the FCC for connection to
the telephone
Uelco) network.
Telephones
must be DTMF only (2500 type].
Related I%o@amxr@$
Refer to Figure 500-22
OfT-Premise Extension (OPX) Module
This module also provides for one Power Fail
circuit in the event of an AC power failure.

730-11

i&s&e

PAGE “B” STATION

ATTRIBUTES

DVX'

and DVX”

(Cunt’d)

station Identification
[Cont’d)
To program the Station ID for a SLTw/Message
waiting Lamp:
Pro-

Description

Steps

l.Diala[6]onthedialpad.
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will nuw update.

To program the Station
Interface box (DDIIJ):
ProgramminF(

ID for a Digital

Data

steps

l.Di.ala(?]onthedialpad.
2.Enter
the three-digit
associated station
number. (100-155) or
Enter ### in the case of a DDIU without an
associated station.
3.Pres.5 the HOLD button to Save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

730-12

SINGLE UNE TELEPHONl3 (SLT): The ir$r&
Di@aI Key Telephone System supports indusb-y standard 2500 Type (DTMF) single line iustruments.
When the 2x4 SLT Expander
Module is installed in the DVX I system, a
m&mum
of eight single line telephones may
be supported.
When the 4x8 SLT Interface
Board [CSB) is installed in the DVX ’ system. a
maximum
of 48 single line telephones may be
I
supported.

Description
DIGITAL DATA ZNTERFACE BOIS: The Data
Feature is a time division, point to point data
’ ion capability which permits simultaI3
neous voice and data communications
[within
the same system but not the same port]. The
Data Feature ofks the ability to transmit data
information
between
personal
computers,
printers, plotters. modems, CRT termink.
and
main frame computer ports. To establish a data
call. a Digital Data Interface box (DDI) is required to be connected to each data communications device. The DDIU allows any serial data
communications
device (which conforms to RS232C) to be connected to the in_fintte Digital
system. Data information
can be switched
through
the system at speeds of 300, 1200,
2400.4800.9600,19.2Kand
38.4Kbaud
asynchronous.

Issue

1, January

1993

iq#inife
DVX’tmdDVXn
D&$&d Key Telephone
PAGE “B” STATION

StEtion

STATXON A-U==

Systems
ATTRIBUTES

class of Service
Pro#+?mxmg

(Cont’d)

(Cm)
Description

steps

CLASS OF SERVICE. Each stations must be
assigned a certain COS for day mode operation,
and also be assigned a COS for night mode
operation. The night COS goes into affect when
the system is placed into the night mode.
manually or automatically.
This prevents the
misuse of phones after hours.
Class of service (COS] determines the stations
dialing privileges. Refer to Table 720- 1 Class of
Service (COS).
Dcfaulk By default. ail stations are assigned a
COS 1 for day mode and COS 1 for night mode.
Related w:
Rifer to Sec. 720.1, CO
Line Progr~J,
Class of Service [COS)
Programming:
and Sec. 760.1,
Exception
Tables Programmtng.

1. Press the CLASS OF SERVICE fkible
button (Page B. Button #Z).
2. Enter a two-digit Class of Service entq as
follows:
l
1st digit is day COS
+ 2nd digit is night COS
The six classes of service are:
- 1= unrestricted
- 2= governed by Table A
- 3= governed by Table B
- 4= governed by Tables A and B
- 5= no O,I,‘,# as first digit, 7 digits
- 6= intercom only [no CO Line access}
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confkmatton
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Table 730-l
1
S
T
A
T
1
0
N
c
0
S

Isauc 1. January

PROGRAMMWG

Clam3 of &mice

(COS)

CO LlN5 CLASS OF SERVICE
2
3

Unrestricted

Rzg;tn*

Unrestricted

Table A

, Unrestricted

R$u$$&

Unreskicted

Table B

Unrestricted

Table B

Tables A&B

Table A

Table B

Canned
ResMction*
Intercom

Unrestricted
Unrestricted

Canned
Restriction*
Unrestricted
Intercom
* h&x-corn
6
0*
OlllV
onlv
OnSy
only
* Canned Restriction= No ‘0’. 1. #, ‘*’ as a iht dialed digit, and 7 digits maximum
phs l-800. 1911. 161 f are allowed and 411,976,
and 555 numbers are denied.
5

1993

Canned
ResVlction*
Intercom

Canned
Restriction*
Canned
Restriction*
Canned
Restriction*
Jntercom

730-13

STATlON

ATTRIBUTES

PAGE “B” STATION

PROGRNlMlNG

ATTRJBUTES

C. Speakerphont/fXeadact
Progxamming

FVog

(Cont’d)
’ g

Steps

1. Press the SPEAKERPHONE flexible button
[Page B, Button #31.
2. Enter a one-digit number on the dial pad
between 0 and 3 to identify the speakerphone operation.
- 0 = works as normal speakerphone.
FUI spezkrphone
capabilities on
both CO lines and Intercom.
- I = Speakerphone
enabled for intercom calls only. Speakerphone
capabilities disabled for outgoing CO line
calls (monitoring and on-hook dialing are still auowtd.
- 2 = Speakerphone
is disabled
complete@. Allows for headset operation.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confiiation
tone is heard and the display
wilI now update.

Pick-Up

Group[s)

Descrintion

SPEAKERPHONE.
Each telephone’s
speakerphone ability is programm able in one of three
Ways.
A speakerphone
ID of 2 will aUow the station
user to enable headset mode by dialing a code.
The station user may then return to fuIl speakerphone operation by di&ng
the same code
ag-Dcf&nlk By default. aU stations are assigned an
ID of 0.
.

programmipg

Description
1. Press the GROUP PICKUP flexible button
(Page B. Button #4J.
2. Enter
a one-to-four
digit number to prob

gram Pickup &Foups.
- o=nogroup

GROUP PIC3UP.

Each station

is assigned

into

pick up groups. Stations can be in any combination of the four group& or in no group at alL
D+fault: By default, all stations are in group 1.

- l=Groupl
- 2=Group2
- 3= Group3
- 4= Group 4
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confhmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
[

730-14

Issue 1. Jalluaxy

1sss

i@ite
Di@l

DVX’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems

PAGE “B” STA’MON

P@ng

ant(s)

ATTRIBUTES

STATION

PROGIMBlMRVG

(0mt’d)

pr0g-g

Prof$Tmmbg

steps

l.Press the PAGING ZONES flexible button
(Page B. Button #5).
2.Enter a one-to-four
digit number to program paging zone(s).
- 0= no zone (no pages received)
- l=Zonel
- 2=Zone2
- 3=Zone3
- 4=Zone4
3.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confbmation
tone is heard and the display
wIIl now update.

Ifume 1, January

ATTRIBUTES

1993

Description
PAGING ZONES. Each station is assigned to
internal paging zones. A station can be in any
or all zones or in no zone at alI.
All Call is all page zones combined. If a station
is not in any internal zone. itwill not receive any
all call pages.
Stations not assigned to a page group can still
make page announcements
ifallowed in station
prog
‘?g. Stations can be assigned to a
page group in order to receive pages but not
akwed to make pages.
Defaultz By default, alI $&ions
are in Page
Zone 1.

73&16

STATION

ATTRXBUTES

PAGE “B” STATION
F.

Preset

AmU’IE3

Call Forward
Progr~

FROGIUWMING
(Cont’d)

Rogrammfn&
Steps

1. Press the PRESET FORWARD flexible button (Page B, Button #6).
2.Enter a three-digit number to determine
the destination where calis are to be routed
when the preset forward timer expires.
.
3 dim
- OZO-099= System Speed Bins 20-99
for off-net forwz&fng
- loo-155= station Numbers
- 330-337= Hunt Groups l-8
- MO-447= Voice Mail Groups 1-8
- 550-5572 ACD or UCD Groups 1-8
3,Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

730-16

iqfinite
DVX'EUI~DVX~
D&&al Key Telephone
Systems

Descriution
PlEESET FORWARD. This feature allows the
system database to be configured so that incoming CO Lines, which are programmed
to
ring at a parttcular station, can be forwarded
elsewhere in the system predetermined
by pro*
g.
This
feature
is
actfve
if
the
station
$2
ringing is not answered in a specified time. This
is particularly
useful in “overflow” applications
where a Voice Mafl or Auto Attendant may be in
use.
A station may have one designated preset forward location defmed in the database.
Reset Call Forward is ch&able
only to other
predetermined
preset forward stations specified in the database up to a chain of 5 stations.
If a CO Line foxwarded by Preset Call Forward
encounters a manually forwarded station (Call
Forward - Station]. or a station in DND. then
the incoming CO Line will bypass that station
and forward to the next in the chain. If that
station is the last in the chain, then the call will
not forward any further and will continue to
ring at that station until answered or terminated.
Chainable Preset Call Forwarding will force the
incoming CO Line to ring at each station preassigned in the database for the Preset Forward
Ring Timer. specified in the database, before
fol-Wa&ng.
CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring into
an ACD, UCD, Voice Mail, Hunt Group or OffNet via speed dial from any station. A CO line
will not preset forward to a busy hunt, voice
mail, ACD, or UCD group, however each time
tfie preset forward timer expires [for a toti of
five attempts1 the group will be checked for an
idle station. If a member of the group Is idle the
call will then be presented to that member.
Default:
By default, no preset fomd
destinations are programmed.
Related
PI-O-:
Refer to Sec. 710.1,
System Timers, Preset Forward Timer.

Iseue 1. Jaauarg

1993

i@ite

DVX’aadDVX’

~j#al

Xt?y Telephone

Systcme

PAGE “B” STATION

ATTRIBUTES

hm?ss

CO Lbe

-Up

RoJqmmiTg

(Cont’d)

steps

LPress the CO LIFtI3 GROUP ACCESS flexible button (Page B. Button #7}.
2. Enter up to seven digits (0, or 1-3 for the
outside line groups the station wiIl have
access to,
- O=noaceess
- 1 =accesstoGroup
1, Code9or81
- 2 = access to Group 2. Code 82
- 3 = access to Group 3. Code 83
- 4 = access to Group 4, Code 84
- 5 = access to Group 5. Code 85
- 6 = access to Group 6. Code 86
- 7 = access to Group 7. Code 87
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entty.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

LCR clans of scmicc

[Cos)

steps

1. Press the LCR COS flexible button (Page B,
Button #8).
b 2. Enter a one-digit number between 0 and 6
to correspond to the LCR Class of Service
desired.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Issue

1. January

1993

Description
CO UNE GROUP ACCESS. A station is allowed
access to any combination
of outside hne
groups. Or a station may not be allowed any
access to outside lines. The following are the
line group numbers and their access codes.
CO line groups are used primarily by single line
telephones or for flexible buttons assigned as
pooled group buttons on a Key Telephone.
Deiidtz
By default, all stations are allowed
access to Group 1.
Refer to Sec. 720.1, CO
RdmtcdRo~:
Line
Programming,
TO
Line
Group
--*

Description
LCR COS. Stations can be given a class of
service assignment for Least Cost Routing. The
rangeisbetweemOand6withObeingunre-

stricted and 6 being the most restricted.
A
station will be allowed use of LCR routes with a
priority rmmbes equal to or higher than the
stations LCR cos assignment.
Default: By default, all stations are given unrestricted access (0).
Related
programming:
Refer to See. 760.2,
U=RTables
Programming
.

730-17

iqfinite
STATION

ATTRIBUTES

PAGE “B” STATION
1.

Off-Hook

PROGRAMMING

ATTRIBUTES

Preference
Programming

Prog

D&it&

DVX'

and IWX"

Key T&phone

Syatam~

[Co&d)
* g

steps

a station for OR-Hook Pre.ference;
1. Press the OFF-HOOK PREF flexible button
(Page B. Button #9). The following message
is shown on the display phone:

TO program

2. Enter the two-digit button number (0 l-28)
or (00) to indicate no specific button is
preferred. SLTs use 01 to enable or 00 to
disable.
3.Then. enter either 0 or 1 where:
- 0 = Disable user programmable
preference so that users may not change
the off-hook preference as set in programmirg.
Also use for SLT stations.
- 1 = Enable user programmable
preference to key station users so that
they may change the off-hook preference through a user dial code.
4. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Con&mation
tone is heard and the &splay
will now update.

Description
OFF IIOOK PREF. This allows a key station
user to automatically
have a flex button selected when going off-hook or when pressing
the ON/OFF button. SLT user may have a particular CO line or a CO line group selected
automatically
when going off-hook.
This may be established in programming
so
that key station
users may select and/or
change their off-hook preference through the
use of a dial code. This user programmable
preference may be allowed or denied in prog-g.
When establishing
an off-h&k
preference for
SLT stations.
it is necessary to program the
SLTs CO Une. or line group, to be accessed
when going off-hook
first using a flex button
pq$2mmQj
procedure.
Default:
3y default, all digital terminals
are
allowed to change their preference but no button is assigned (00). SLT stations are not allowed this feature.
Related
Progllg:
Refer to Sec. 730.1,
Station
Attributes
Programming,
Flexible
Button Programming
later in this section.

i@ite
~@ta,I

DVX’andDVX’
gey T&phone

PAGE “B” STATION

Systems
ATTRIBUTES

Pro@imming

STATION

A-m

PROGRAMHING

(Cont’d)

Step5

Description

!/cMIlwlNMPlin~
IllimmnoAl~
1. Press the BUTION ASSIGN flexible buttnn
(Page B. Button #lo). The following message is shown on the display phone:

2. Enter the two-drgit button number IBB] to
be programmed
followed by the desired
button function as follows:
where: BB= Button number (0 l-24)

MULTk To assign a button
button tuner programmable)
BB [O] HOLD

a5 amulti-firnctfon
enter:

BUTTON ASSIGN. Each 33-button
Digital terminal ha5 24fltible
buttons
which can be
individually
programmed.
Each 8-button Mgital terminal has 4llexible button5 which can be
individually
programmed.
One of the following
five operations can be selected in programming
for each button.

BKKZI. When a button is assigned a5 a multifunction button IO]. the user then has the a&lity to program any features or function5 on the
buttons
that the user has access to. For a
complete list of user programmable
code (f&ctions and features), refer toTable 730-2 Flexible
Button Display Designations.

CO KJNEz To assign a button as a CO Line
button, enter:
BB (11 IIL HOLD (I& CO Line 01-28)

CO. Buttons assigned a5 spectic CO lines wiI1
provide direct access and appearance of the CO
line at the station. The station wfll receive all
call status indications such as LED flash rates
for incoming ringing, when the line has been
placed on HOLD, etc... CO Line ringing is programmed in CO line Attribute Progmmming.

LOOP: To assign a button
enter:
BB (21 HOLD

LOOP. Used for a station without
a direct CO
Line appearance to answer the line ringing in
or transferred to the station. It is recommended
that alI stations be given a loop button so they
can receive a transferred call on a line for which
they have no button access.

as a Loop button,

POOL: To assign a button as a pooled group
button, enter:
BB (31 G HOLD (G= Line Group # 1-7)

POOL. Some or all outside CO Line5 may be
grouped together and accessed via a POOL button for the purpose of placing an outgoing CO
call. Pressing this button accesses the highest
nuxnbered
unused CO line in that CO Line
group. When programmii
a button as a pooled
group button. refer to CO Line group programming. Pooled group numbers mat& CO Line
group numbers.

STATION

AmUTES

PAGE 93” STATION

pro-

PROGEUMMING
ATTRIBUTES

Digital

infinite
DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

[Cont’d)

Steps

7JNASSIGN: To unassign a button, enter:
BB [#I HOLD
If SLT stations are to be programmed
for OffHook Refmence, it is necessary to program the
desired CO line. or CO line group, the SLT is to
acce.ss when going off-hook.
To assign a CO Line for a SLT with Off-Hook
Preference. enter:
00 111 LLHOLD
(LI= CO Line 01-28)
To assign a CO Line group for an SLT wtth
Off-Hook Preference, enter:
00 (31 G HOLD [G= Line Group # l-7)

Description

UNASSIGN (looked out). Specific buttons may
be designated as unused or locked out. When a
button is programmed
as unused, the button
may not be programmed
by the station user
using flex button programming
procedures.
D&a&;
By default, Station 100 will ring on a
line. However, if Station 100 is not given button
access to a tie. another station must be programmed to ring on that line.
Rclstted pro&ramming:
When programming
a
buttonasaCOLinebutton,
refertoScc.
720.1,
CO Line Programming.
CO Line Ringing
Assignments:
and Sec. 730.1,
Station
AtMbutes
programming
,Off-Hook Preference
programming.

@jWte
Dw&l

DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Spstcms

PAGE ‘B” STATION
K.

Display

Flexible

ATTRIE)UTBS

STATION
(Ckmt’d]

Description

Steps

BUTTONS. Any time a display of button programming
(default
or changed)
is
needed, press the DISPLAY BmNS
button
(button 17) on Page B and it will display four
buttons’
programming
assignments
(starting
with the lowest button number). With each
subsequent
depression of the DISPLAY BUTTONS button,
the next four buttons will be
displayed.
When a button is assigned as a multi-function
button
[O]. the user then has the ability to
program any features or functions on the buttons that the user has access to. When the
buttons
are programmed
with user programmed
functions.
the display WLll show the
function that has been assigned to the button.
For a complete list of user programmable
code
~functions and features). refer to Sec. 400.37,
klexible Button Assignment.
DISPLfLY

If the flexible buttons are to be viewed:
1. Press the DISPLAY BUTTONS flexible button (Page B, Button # 17). The programxning assignment on four buttons will be
displayed starting with the lowest button
number. With each sub-sequent
deprcssion of the DISPLAY BUTTONS button, the
next four buttons will be displayed. The
following message is shown on the display:
1

BBTYI

PFtOGRMkMIiUG

Buttons

Programming

; ,%BWY

ATTRJBm

RBYYY

Where:
- XXX= Station number
- BB= Button Number
- WY= Button function
Iowl

(see table be-

Table 730-2
MUIU Fmctlon
butmn.
CO Ltnt button Ifor CO line ILL11
LOOP Button
POOL Button with CO MC group
number
= station DSS/ELF
button
= Hum Group With p&It number
=CdlRUkWItbptkloEatIOn
= ACD Group titb pilot numbers
= UCD Group with pllot number
= VM Group with pllot number
= Pworralhxd
Mcasagc with mcsaagc
- speed W button with btn number
= ~~~tNumber~&H
buttnn
~savcNumbcrRcdMbut%m
= tntemal Page With zanc
= Internal M call Page button
= Edcrnal
Ragcwkb
Zone
= aernalW
Cd button
=AUCallPagebutton
= Meet Me paBe button
f &r~~~dant Ovcrrlde
button (ati]
= Camp-On
button
= Line Queue button
= LCR Queue Cancel
= Call Back Button
= pick Up button
p ~cssage Wtit button
= call Forward
button
= Do Not Disturb
button
= Conhence
button
= Untverssl
N&lx Answer

Flexible

t
=
=
=

Button

Diqlay
ACC
Mu8

wmbcr

Desl@atiops
= Account
Code cntcr button
= BackGround
Music button
= Headset mcx5c button
= Pasonal
Park button
= ACD or UCD Available/Una-ztillablc
=ACDorUCDCaU~tnqueucbuttan
= Ekccutlve
Ova-tide button
= UIRAccess
=Agent Logout
=Agent wm
=Agcnt Member Display
dgattnelp
\
TSupervisor
Logout
dhqavbor
Logh
=.SupavIsm
Status Display

=-lay”-

credcdls

-D&t.incttve
RLnglng
c0fiJiook
Volcc &5UlEbutton
z.FLASH button
=Rcleasc bum

button

f$lXTION
PAGE ‘8”

ATTRIBUTES

STATION
DIlsftal

750.3

PROGRAMMING

ATIWBUTES

Data Interface

Prog

Hey Telephone

Systems

(Cont’d)
Unit (DDIU)

* 2 steps

To program a DigitaI Data Interface
(DDIU)
unit:
a. Press FLASH and dial 1511. The foUowing
message is shown on the display phone:

where:
- ?VWW = Station

Number (100-155)
- XXXXX= Baud Rate
- Y=DataPariiy
- 2% Data Stop Bits
b. Enter the three-digit station number of the
DDIU unit.
c. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
The display w-ill now update.

Digital

Description
The Data Feature offers the ability to transmit
data information
between personal computers,
printers. plotters. modems. CRT terminals, and
main frame computer ports. To estabtish a data
cdl. a Digital Data Interface Unit (DDIUI is
required to be connected to each data cornmunications
device. The DDIU allows any seriaJ
data communications
device (which conforms
to RS-232C)
to be connected to the Infinite
Digital system.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when enterihg the Digital Data
Interface Unit (DDIU) programming
area:

E%audRatcoptiolu4
Programming

steps

1. Press the BAUD RATE ff exible button (Button # 1).
2. Enter a one-digit number for the desired
baud rate:
- 1= 300 Baud
- 2= 1200 Baud
- 3= 2400 Baud
- 4= 4800 Baud
- 5= 9600 Baud
- 6= 19.2KBaud
- 7= 38.4K Baud
3.Fress the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confkmation
tone is heard and the d.lspIay
will now update.

730-22

Description
BAUD RATE: Datainfonnation
canbe switched
through
the system at speeds of 300, 1200,
2490.4800,9600,19.2K
and 38.4K baud asynchronous.
D&ultiBy
default, the DDIU Baud Rate is
9600 Baud.
R&ted
Prognlmmhg:
Refer to See. 730.2,
Page “El” Programming,
Station Identification
for associating a DDlU to a station. ’

Issue 1, January

1-3

STATION
Digital

Data Interface

Unit DDIU)

ATTRIBUTES

PROGRMKMiNG

[Cont’d)

B. cbaracttr Lengthoption
J?rogrammir@

Steps

1. Press the CHARACTER LENGTH flextble
button lsutton #2).
2. Enter a one-digit number for the character
length of the digit string.
- 8= 8 character kngtb
- 9= 9 characterlengtb
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confiiation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Description
CHARACTER
=NGTFk
Eght bit characters
are typically used. without the need for parity.
The important point is that the character length
settings match those of the attached computer
or terminal. If the computer is set up for 8-bit
data characters with parity, set the printer the
same way. Otherwise, the data may be garbled
due to incompatible
formats.
Default: By default, 8-character
length is selected.

Stop Bit(s) Option
Prow

steps

l.Press the STOP BD’S flexible button fButton #3).
2. Enter a one-digit number for the number
of stop bits desired.
- 1= 1 StopBit
- 2= 2 Stop Bits
3.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Con&nation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Issue 1, January

1993

Description
STOP BIT@): The stop bit indicates that alI the
data bits have been sent and the transmission
of the character is complete.
Dctiultz By default. 1 stop bit is selected.

730-23

iqfinike
sgXf’ION

ATi-RifBm

ATTRIBUTES

730.4

PORT ASSIGNAUENT

Pl-ogm

--::::-,,,.,.,,,j

buttons

through

1 through
7 indfcate cards 1
7. When the relocation program is

initially entered, Button # 1 will be lit indicating that the user is programming
the
Station numbers on tie first card (Station
Ports 1 through 8). The LCD will display
the Station numbers presently assigned to
the fmt eight ports.
To change the Station number

lgty T&phone

Systems

Description

steps

If the Station numbers need to be relocated to
different ports:
a. Press FLASH and dial [52). The following
message is shown on the display phone:

b.The

and DVX’

[Cont’dI

PAGE “B” STATION
FLExfBLE
FEATURE

Dtgttal

PRGGRAMMIIW

DVX’

assigned to any

port:

a. Dial the position number on the display (01
&rough OS), follawcd by the Station number desired. For example: if 01105 were
dialed. the station number of the first entry
on the display would be changed to 105. In
addition, since 105 was shown as the sixth
entry on the display. that entry would be
blank (###I.
To select another card in the system:
a. Press the button assocfated with that card.
For example. ff Button #3 were pressed
(Station ports 17 through 24). the station
numbers assigned to the third catd would
- be displayed. Station numbers on the third
card are changed in the same manner by
entering the position number (01 through
081, followed by the station number desired.

The Flexible

Port Assignment

feature WLll pronumbers to any
Station port in the system. This provides complete fiexibility in determining station numbers
wftbin the system as long as they stay within
the system numbcrfng
plan. A Station can be
assigned any number between 100 and 127 on
the infinite DVX ’ system and any number between 100 and 155 on tbe infintte DVX ’ systern. This restriction
is required to minimize
memory requirements
on th: smaller systems.
The buttons on the key telephone are defined
as shown below when entering the Flexible Port
Assignment feature prm
area:

vide a means to assign Station

p%qy#gq~~
~pic@qh-;-;-l
All Station numbers entered are stored in a
temporary database area whtch is uploaded to
the main database when the system is reset.

i@ite
D&&al

DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

AUTOMATIC
740.1

AuTOM&TIC

SECTION 740
CALL DISTRIBUTION

CALL DISTFUMJTION

(ACD)

ACD GROUP ??ROGmG
Pro@axnming

If the system is in the programming
mode,
continue using the program codes. If starting to
program here, enter the programming
mode.
Refer to Sec. 700.2, Program Mode Entxy (Key
Station).
lf ACD Groups are to be assigned:
1. Press FLASH and dial [SO]. The fokwlng
message is shown on the display phone:
.~!

WhfflT:
- X= ACD Group Number [O-71
- A= Page A Parameters
- A&k Alternate ACD Group Assignment
- Bl3B= ACD OverflowAssignment
- CC= ACD Announcement
Tables
- DDD= ACD Supervisor F’rogramrnmg
2.The top left button in the fl&ble
button
ACD group
field wih be lit for programmk#
0 (5501. To change ACD groups or er&r
fu.rtherACD groups (550 to 557). press the
appropriate
flexible button and perform
the following procedures.

Issue 1, January

1993

Descriptton

steps

This feature f.s ONLY available when the ACD
Software Package is purchased
separately.
There can be eight ACD groups of no more than
eight stations each. The ACD groups use a pilot
hunting technique. Ifthe pilot numberis dialed,
the assigned stations in that ACD group are
searched for the station which has been fn an
idle condition for the longest period of time.
Each ACD Group may have an assigned Alternate ACD Group, an Overflow station and up to
eight stations as ACD members. The two system RAN ports (tables) may also be referenced
on a per ACD group basis.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering
the ACD
Group(s) progmmming
area:
pzq~.~Lfzj

~~pz&ggcr;-l
Dcfanlt:
By default,< ACD Group Tables are
empiy.
Related Rogrsmmiq:
Refer to Sec. 740.2.
ACD Timers for setting the ACD Ring Timer,
ACD Message Interval Timer. ACD Overflow
‘Inner. ACD No-Answer Recall Timer, and ACD
No-Answer
Retry ‘Dmer: Also refer to Sec.
740.3. ACD RAN Announcement
Tables for assigning FUN device ports and message times.

740-l

AmOBdAmc

CALL DISTRIBUTION

(ACD)

AUTOM&I?C

CALL. DISTRIBUTION

[Cont’d)

Alternate

ACD Overflow

Description

steps

To program an alternate group:
1. Press the ALTEXNA~
ACD GROUP flexible button putton
#Q).
2. Enter the three-digit
pilot number (550 to
557) of the desired alternate ACD group.
3.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
witl now update.

Station

Programmirq!

ALTERNATE
ACD GROUP. An alternate ACD
group can be programrued
so that if no station
in one group is availabie. the alternate group
will he checked for an available station. This
provides a means to chain or link ACD groups
togetbcr.

To delete an Alternate ACD Group, press the
pound key three times [###I and press the
HOLD button.

Assignment
steps

To program ACD Overflow station:
1. Rcss the OVERFLQWASSlGN
fltzdblebutton IButton # 10).
2. Enter the three-digit
station nuznber (100
to 155) to designate the ACD Groups overflow station.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Cor&rmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

740-2

i#nite
DVX’andDVXn
Key Telephone
Systems

ACD Group &siggament
Prog-rq

Digital

Description

ACD OVERFLOW ASSIGN. When an overflow
station is assigned, callers that have remained
in queue for a specffied amount of time will be
routed to the assigned overflow station. The
overflow statfon may not be one of the ACD
group stations. Only CO calls transferred
to a
ACD group will overflow to tie overflow station
when RAN tables have not been assigned.
To delete an Overflow Station, press the pound
key three times [###I and press the HOLD button.

Jssue 1, Jmuary

1933

@#i&e

Di@al

DVX’~dDl%Xn
Fky Telephone

AUTOMATfc

Systems

CALL DISTRIBUTION

ACD Recorded

Assig--tb)

AUTOMATXC
(Cmt’d)

steps

To program a Recorded Announcement:
1. Press the ANNOUNCEMENT
TEKS flexible
button (Button # I 1.
2. Enter one of the following digit sequences:
- 1# = RAN port speciiied in Table I
wiIl be used.
- through
- 8# = RAN port specified in Table 8
will be used.
Example:
- 1.2=Port1wiIIanswert.hecall:port
2 will provide a subsequent message.
- 8.1 =Port8wiIIanswertheeaII:port
1 will provide a subsequent message.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
wiIl now update.

ACD Supe~r

Description
ACD ANNOlJNCEMENT
TABLES. An optional
Recorded Announcement
device(s) may be connected
to the system
to provide
an announcement
if alI stations in a ACD group are
busy. Up to eight ports in the system may be
assigned to provide a path to Recorded Announcement
devices.
Incoming CO Callers will only be answered and
routed to the Overflow assignment
if a RAN
Table is assigned.
To erase Recorded Announcement(s).
press the
pound key two times [##)‘and press HOLD.
Related
m:
Refer to Sec. 740.3.
ACD RAN Announcement
Tables programming
for further information regarding each RAN Table.

Pro@am~~@

Pr-

steps

To program an ACD Supervisor:
1. Press the ACD SUPV flexible button (Button # 12.
2. Enter the three-dfgit station number of the
desired ACD Supervisor station.
*
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Issue 1. January

(ACD)

Announcement
IRAN]

Proprammirlg

CALL DISTRIBUTION

1QQ3

IkscrliptioIl
ACD SUPERVISOR
‘l%e ACD Supervisor Station assignment
feature provides a means to
assign each ACD group a supervisor. This Supervisor Station can ‘ixxeive the calls in queue
display in real time, receives No Answer/Out
of
Service conditions. ‘HELP” displays from the
groups that the supervisor is assigned to and
can barge-in on active caIls in his ACD Group
or groups.
A supervisor can be assigned in ADMIIU to a
group or groups to receive the help request and
out of service (00s) messages. If a supervisor
station is assigned in ADMIN, it is considered
logged in. In addition. a supervisor can dial a
supervisor
login code followed by the ACD
group that the supervisor is low
into and his
four-digit
ID number. For maximum
compatibility with the inj?szi& PC-ACD Reporting package, the supervisor assignment should be left
blank and the supervisor login-logout
feature
used.

740-s

iqfinite?

Digital

Atomic

CALL DISTRIBUTION

(ACD)

Atomic

CALL DISTRIBUTION

[Cont’d)

ACD Station

Spetems

l&d@Imcnt(e]

Prog

* g steps

Description

’

To program stations into a ACD group:
I.Press the Page “B” fl&ble
button [Button
# 191. The folIowing message is shown on
the display phone.
i EO5533

DVX’andDV2C”

Key Telephone

###

##I##

####

###

Where:
- X= ACD Group Number (l-8)
- B= Page -B” parameters
- ###= ACD Station assignments
2.The top left button in the flexMe button
ACD group
field will be lit for progmmming
0 (5501. To change ACD groups or enter
further ACD groups (550 to 557). press the
appropriate
flexible button and perform
the following procedures.
3. Enter the three-digit
station numbers of
the stations in the ACD group in the order
in which they will be checked, A maximum
of eight stations may be entered,
4.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

ACD STATION ASSIGNBUENTS. Any type of
station (exclucbng DSS/DLS Consoles) may be
entered as valid ACD stations. Calls wiIl be
routed to station in the order they are entered
for the first round of calls only. After that the
calls are routed to stations based on On-Hook
time. The station with the longest On-Hook time
will receive the next call.
If a specific station number is dialed, only that
station is rung; no distribution
will be done if
that station is busy.
The buttons on the digital twminal are de&red
as shown below when enter&g the ACD Station
Assi#lments
programming
area:

To erase all stations, press the pound
times [###I and press HOLD.

key three

~~-J&----s$xJJ$~=
toentmundadtmtAwgmupother.thun
his
own
awigncd
group.
the
dutubuae
prrrgruming
foi
AW
8Mtian~~zuill
automaticully
changed
to rqflcct
dW”:gmrr~.

7404

Iaaue 1, January
.

the

1993

imite
D@tal

DVX I and DVX u
FSey Telephone
Sy8tems

AUTOMATIC

740.2

DXSTRIBUTION

AUTOMATXC

DISTRIBUTION

[ACD)

(Cont’d]

ACD TIMERS

Programming

Description

Steps

Six timers for ACD operation are programmable
on a system-wide
basis. The ACD timers include: A RingTimer, Message Interval Tier,
an
Overflow Timer, a Auto Wrap-Up
Timer, a
No/Answer Recall Tiier. and a No/bwer
Retty Timer. Each timer is descrfbed helm
R&ted
Rognunming:
Refer to Sec. 740.1,
ACD Group Programukg;
and ACD Recorded
Announcement
Assignment(s):
Also refer to
SlX.
500.1~
Installation,
Backgrouny
Music/Music-On-Hold
Connecttons
for DVX
and DVX ’ systems, andJnsfxdling
Recorded
Announcement
Device (RAN).
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the ACD ‘Ikmrs
programming
area.

are to be changed:

I~ACD thmrs

a. Press FLASH and dial [6l]. The folkwing
message is shown on the display phone:

CAU

ACDRingThner
Prof$Yamag

steps

Description

To make a change to the ACD Ring Timer:
1. Press the RINGTlMERflwcible
button [Button # 1). The following message is shown on
the display phone:

IME
II

awaw
I

ACD RING TIMER The ACD Ring Timer determines how long a calI will ring into a busy ACD
group before being presented to the first recorded announcement
13tfsult: By default, the ACD Ring Timer is set
for SO seconds, and is variable from 000 to 300
seconds.

2. Enter the three-digit

timervalue on the dial
pad which corresponds
to 000-300 seconds.
3.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confkmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

I68ue

1. Janutuy

1993

740-b

AUTOMATIC

ACD TIMERS
B.

CALL DISTRIBUTION

(ACD)

iqjinite
DVX’andDVX”
Mgital
Key Telephone
Systems

(Cont’d)

ACD Mefaage
FrogI

Interval

T+zr

Description

- gsteps

To make a change to the ACD Message Interval
Timer:
1. Press the MIT TIMER flexible button (Button #2). The following message is shown on
the display phone:

ACD MXT TIMER The ACD Message interval
Timer (MllJ determines
the length of time a
caller remains in queue (‘listening to MOH, if
provided) between recorded announcements.
Dcfhk
By default, the ACD Message Interval
Timer is set for 60 seconds and is v&able from
000 to 600 seconds.

2. Enter the three-digit timervahxe on the dial
pad which corresponds to 000-600 seconds.
3.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

tierflow

Timer
gramminfS

Tomake a change to the ACD Ov&low Timer:
1. Press the OVERFLOW lU4ER fl&bE button [Button #3]. The followfng message is
shown on the display phone:
pij-Tiy

2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad
which corresponds
to 000-600 seconds.
3.FRss the HOLD button to save the en-.
Confxmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

740-6

Dfzscr@tion

steps

The ACD overflow
the tot& kngth
of time a
caller will remain in queue for a particular AC0
group. When the timer expires, the dier will
be routed to the designated overflow station.
The timer starts when an incomjng call is answered and presented to the first recorded announcement.
Transferred
CO callers will
overflow at the expiration of the Overflow Timer.
Default:
By default, the ACD Ove&wTlmer
is
set for 60 seconds and is variable fmm 000 to
600 seconds.
AW OVERFZOW
Tfmer determines

TIMER

Issue

1, January

1983

iqfidte

DVX’andDVXn

Dj@d

Key Telephone

System8

AUTOIktb%-l’IC CALL DISTRIBUTION
ACD TIMERS
D.

A~oI~~~A~I-IC

CAu

DISTRIBUTION

(ACD)

(Cmt’d)

(Cont’d)

ACD Auto

Wrap-Up
Progl

Timer
Description

’ n Steps

To make a change to the ACD Auto Wrap-up
Timer:
1. Press the AUTO-WRAP TIMER flexible button (Button #4}. The follcMng message is
shown on the display phone:

AUTO-WRAP TIME& After completion of
a ACD call (on-hook) the agent will not be
subjected to another ACD call for the duration
of the Auto Wrap-Up timer allowing the agent
to finish call related work or access other facileties. This will allow agents to remove themselves from the group (i.e.. DND. Call Forwatd)
or originate another call.
Default:
By default, the ACD Auto Wrap-up
Timer is set for 04 seconds,and is variable from
000 to 600 seconds.
ACD

2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad
which corresponds to 000-600 scads.
3.F’ress the HOLD button

to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

ACD No-Ar.wwcr

Recall

Pro-

Timer

steps

TomakeachangetotbeACDNo-AnswerRecall
Timer:
l.Press the NO-ANSWER RECALL TIM33R
flexible button Wutton #5). The following
message is shown on the display phone:

Description
ACD

NO-ANSWER

RECALL

TIMER.

lfacall

routed to a station via ACD is not answered by
the ACD Agent/Station
before the No-Answer
Recall timer expires, the call will be returned to
ACD Queue with the highest priority. In addition, the station that failed to answer the ringing ACD call will be placed into an out of service
@OS) state.
Defautt: By default, the ACD No-Answer Timer
is at 000 (disabled) and is variable from 000 to
300 seconds.

2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad
which corresponds to 000-300 seconds.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entq.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Issue 1. January

1993

7443-7

AlJTOMATIC

CALL DISTRIBUTION

(ACD)

AUTOB&WIC

CALL DISTRIBUTION

(Cant’d)

ACD TIMERS
F.

@~nt*d]

ACD No-Answer

Retq

F?rogramdng

Timer
Steps

To make a change to the ACD No-Answer Retry
Timer:
l.PresstheNO-ANSWERREXRYTMERfiexible button mutton #61. The followmg message is shown on the display phone:

2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad
which corresponds to 000-999 seconds.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the enn-y.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

740-8

itlfnite
DVX’andDvx”
Digital 3ey Telephone
Systems

Description
ACD NO-ANSWER RETRY TIMER. When the
No-Answer Recall timer expires. a station that
faUed to answer the ringing ACD call is placed

fnto an out-of-service
(00s) state. The station
that was taken out-of-service
(00s) wilI be
placed back in service if the agent hits his
available flex button or dials the availatlle flex
code. In addition, the agent wiIl be placed back
in semice if the No-Answer Reby timer expires.
If the agent does not answer his next ACD calI,
he will again be taken out-of%ervice. This cycle
will continue until the station answers calls,
logs out, or goes unavailable.
Defiaulk Ry default. the ACD No-Answer Retry
Timer Is set for 300 seconds and is variable from
000 to 999 seconds.

Issue 1, Janaarg

1993

f@&e

IWX’andDVXn

D&im

IKey Telephone

AuTohfA~c
740.3

AUTOMATIC

Systems

CALL DISTRIB~~N

CALL

DISTRIBUTION

(ACD]

(Cont’d)

ACD RAN ANNOUNCEMENT
BLES

TA-

Description
If Recorded Announcement
devices are installed to operate with ACD. these tables must
be programmed:
a. Press FLASH and dial (621. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

b-The top left button in the fkible
button
field will be lit for programming
ACD RAN
Announcement
Table 1. To change to ACD
RAN Announcement
Table 2, press fltible
button
#2. Repeat above for Tables 3
through 8.
c. Enter a string of six or seven digits on the
dial pad. The order of data entry will be:
Type Number:
- 1= CO Port interface
- 2= SLT Port interface
Index (port) Number:
- Ol-28=

CO Line Port

- 1 OO- 155= SLT Station Port
Message Time:
- CKIO-300 seconds
d. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confimafion
tone is heard and the display
wilS mm update.
WhenaWporti8ddgnatdosuRANpprt,
a

relay

programmed
drurou-

and/or

sensor

as a RAN
Table 1 &hnmgh

shorrld
start

To clear entries in a Table:
a. Press the pound key once I#] followed
the HOLD button.

168ue 1. January

lBB3

ftw

Determines the type. index (port) number and
message length for the eight available Recorded
Announcements
@UN). There are eight RAN
tables that can be programmed.
Table 1 can be
the answer port for unanswered
incoming calls
to a ACD group. Table 8 can provide the secondary message or vice versa.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the ACD RAN
Announcement
Tables progmmming
area:
m&qqmF]
RWiWF/
The lype can be either a CO line port, or a SLT
port. The index number specifies which circuit
for the type of interface.
The message length is used to match the maximum leq$h of the message to the device that
is used.
Example:
To program a table for CO line port:
a. Press the TABLEX flexible button (Buttons
l-8).
b. Dial [I ] for CO port inter&we.
c. Dial [Ol to 281 for CO line used.
d. Enter message duration {OOO-300 sec.)
Example:
:

To program a table for an SLT port:
a. Press the TABLEX flexible button (Buttons
l-81.
b. Dial 121 for SLT port interface.
c. Dial [lo0 to 155) for SLT station used.
d. Enter Message duration (000-300 sec.)
Related
Rognunming:
Refer to Sec. 740.1,
ACD Group Progr
- g; 740.2. ACD Timem;
Also refer to Sec. 500.9. Installing
Recorded
Announcement
Device (FUN).

740-B

imite
Digital
A~o&%i@f’Ic

CALL DISTRIBUTION

PC/ACD

740.4

INTERFACE

Programming

aad DVX”

Key Telephone

Systems

(Cont’d)

TRACE

Description

Steps

To enable PWACD

Interface Trace options:
1. Press FL4SH and dial 163). The following
message will be shown on the display
phone:

- X= Port for PC/ACD

DVX’

lnterfaqz

The fature
is ONLY available when the Basic
ACD software package is purchased separately.
The PC!/ACD Interface Trace feature provides
an event trace output which is compatible with
the PC/ACD Reporting package
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the PC/ACD
Event Trace feature programnkg
area:

?kace

- YYYY= Baud Rate of desired port.

Event

Trace
Prop

En2hlt/Dis2ble
* L-Jsteps

1. Press the PC/ACD EVENT TRACE flexible
button (l3utton # 1). It will toggle on and off
with each depression.
l
LED on = Event trace is enabled
l
LED off = Gvent trace is disabled
2.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confxmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

740-10

Description
This feature is only available when the Basic
ACD Software package is purchased
separately. The PC/ACD Interface mace provides a
series of events trace output which is compatible with the in@-& PC/ACD Reporting package.
Dthult:
By default, the PC/ACD Event ‘Ikace
is disabled.

Xssnc 1. Jannarg

1993

i-&e
Digftal

DVX’andDVX’
Key Telephone

Amoh’IAmc
Pc/ACD
B.

Systems

AUTOMATIC

CALL DIWFUBUTION
INTERFACE

TRACE

CALL DISTRIBUTION

(ACDI

(Cont’d]

Hhnt’d)

T-race Port Assignment.
Prop-

Steps

Desctiption

I. Press the PC/ACD PRINT POW flexible
button [Button #2) to determine which port
is to be used for the PC/ACD interface
Trace.

2. Enter a one-digit number for the PC/ACD
Event Trace Port number:
- 1= Port # 1 (“On-Board”
RS-232C)
- 2= Port #2 (“On-Board” Modem)
- 3= Port #3 0/O Expander Module
RS-232C)
- 4= Port #4 (If0
RS-422)

Expander

Module

#I refers to the standard RS-232C “On3oard” connector on the DVX ‘Basic KSU or the
CPB board on the DVX Ii System.
Port #2 refers to the ‘On-Board”
300 Baud
modem provided with the system.
Port #3 refers to the RS-232C connector on the
I/O Expander Module.
Port #4 refers to the FtS-422 connector on the
same I/O Expander Module installed in either
infiniteDigital
system.
’
&far&
By default, Port #1 is used for Basic
ACD SMDR purposes.
Port

The LCD displays the current baud rate based
on which Port number is assigned to the ACD
SMDR Port number.
3.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
W-U now update.

Baud Rate Display

Steps

The PC/ACD
Port’ Baud Rate is programmed using Flash 15 Baud Rate Assignments. The LCD displays the current
baud rate based on which Port number is
assigned to the ACD SMDR Port number.
ThefoIIawingmessagewiIlbeshownonthe
display phone:

Description
Ihe infinite Digital Key Telephone Systems can
provide PC/ACD Reporting output to either the
standard RS-232C ‘On-Board”
connector on
the DVX I Basic KSU or DVX’ CPB board or to
the optional RS232C/422
i/O Expander Module connector(s). The Baud Rate wiU be displayed as either 300 baud, 1200 baud, 2400
baud, 4600 baud, or 9600 baud.
Related

Pro@unmiq-

. Refer

to Sec. 710.8.

Baud Rate Assignments.

Issue

1, January

1893

740-11

iqfutite
Dma

745.1

DVX I and DVX Ii
Key Telephone
sy8tCIIiS

UNIFORM

SECTION ‘745
CALL DISTRIBUTION

CAU

DIST2ZlBUTIoN

(UCD)

UCD GROUP PROGRAMMING
FYogrixmdng

Steps

lf the system is in the programmhg
mode,
continue using the program codes. If starting to
program here, enter the programming
mode.
Refer to Sec. 700.2, Program Mode Entry (Key
Station).
If UCD Groups are to be assigned:
1. Press FLASH and dial [601. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

Description
There can be eight UCD groups of no more than
eight stations each. The UCD groups use a pilot
hunting technique. Iftbe pilot numberis dialed.
the assigned stations in that UCD group are
searched for the station which has been in an
idle condition for the longest period of time.
Each UCD Group may have an assigned Aiternate UCD Group, an Overflow station and up
to eight stations as UCD members. The two
system RAN ports (tables) may also be referemed on a per UCD group basis.
The buttons 011 the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering
the UCD
Group(s) programming
area:

Where:
- X= UCD Group Number ll-8)
- A&%= Afternate UCD Group Assignment
- EMS= UCD Overflow Assignment
- CC= UCD Announcement
Tables
2.The top kft button in the flexible button
field wizz be Ilt for progranm&g
UCD group
0 (550). To change UCD groups or enter
further UCD groups (550 to 557), press the
appropriate
fkxfble button and perform
the fokwing
procedures.
DefkuW EIy default., UCD Group Tables are
empty.
RdattdRo
Refer to Sec. 745.2,
@&W&g:
UCD Timers for setting the UCD Ring Timer,
UCD Message Interval Timer, WCD Overflow
Timer, UCD Answer Recall Tkner, and UCD
No-Answer
Retry Timer; Also refer to Sec.
745.3. UCD RAN Announcement
Tables for assigning RAN device ports and message times.

Issue 1, January

1993

745-l

~C3~bl

CALL DISTRIBUTION

rVCD)

UNIFORM

CALL DISTl3IBU’l’ION

(Cmt’d)

Alttrnnte

UCD Group Assignment
Programming

Steps

To program

an alternate group:
1. press the ALTERNATE UCD GP flexible
button (Ektton #9).
2. Enter the three-digit pilot number (550 to
557) of the desired alternate UCD group.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

&finite
DVX I and DVX II
DigitaI &v Telephone
Sy&ems

UCD Overflow

Station

Pro)Y$zmag

Description
ALTERNATE
UCD GROUP. An alternate UCD
group can be programmed
so that if no station
in one group is available. the alternate group
will be checked for an available station. This
provides a means to chain or link UCD groups
togetkr.
To delete an Alternate UCD Group, press the
pound key three times [###I and press the
HOLD button.

Assignment
steps

To program UCD Over&w station:
1. Press the OVERFLQWASSIGN
flexible button (Button # 101.
2. Enter the three-digit station number (100
to 155) to designate the UCD Groups overflow station.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the en@.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Description
UCD OVERFLOW ASSIGN. When an oveflow
station is assigned, callers that have remained
in queue for a specified amount of time will be
routed to the assigned overflow station. The
overflow station may not be one of the UCD
group stations. Only CO calls transferred
to a
UCD group will overflow to the overflow station
when RAN tables have not been assigned.
To delete an Overflow Station, press the pound
key three times [###I and press the HOLD button.

uulm .A m lm E!5
LWJEBB@i

745-2

fsstle

1. Januarg

lass

infinite

DVX’ and DVX’

D@tal

Key Telephone

ARM

CALL DXSTRIBUTION

UCD Recorded
~~cntbl

@ED)

[Cont’dI

Description

steps

a Recorded Announcement:

flexible
(Button # 11.
2. Enter one of the following digit sequences:
- l# = RAN port specified in Table 1
will be used.
- through
- 8# = RAN port specified in Table 8
will be used.
Example:
1. Press the ANNOUNCEMENTTBLS

button

CZ.AIL DISTREKJTION

Announcement
mm

Pxgrammir*

To program

UNIFORM

Systems

1,2=Port1wiIlanswe.rthecall;port

2 will provide a subsequent
message.
- 8.1 =Port8wihanswertheca&port
1 will provfde a subsequent message.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry,
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

UCD ANNOUNCEBUENT TABIZS. An optional
Recorded Announcement
device may be connected
to the system
to provide
an announcement
if all stations in a UCD group are
busy. Up to eight ports in the system may be
assigned to provide a path to Recorded Announcement
devices.
incoming CO Callers will only be answered and
routed to the Overflow assignment
if a RAN
Table is assigned.
To erase Recorded Announcement(s).
press the
pound key two Wnes [##I &nd press HOLD.
Related

Pm~mmm3.q:

R&r

to sec.

745.3,

UCD RAN Announcement
Tables programming
for f&her
information
regarding each RAN Table.

.
‘..

fsauc 1, &mum-y

1983

745-S

iqjinite

WORM
D.

CALL DISTRIBUTION

UCD Station

(Cont’d)

Assignment(s)

Pro@

Desctip tion

* g Steps

To program stations into a UCD group:
1. Press the Page “B” flexible button (Page A
Button
# 19). The following
message is
show-n on the display phone.

ul3l3913 #### #Hi@ #I## #I##
H# ### ### ###
Where:
- X= IJCD Group Number (l-8)
- B= Page -B” parameters
- ###= UCD Station ass~ents
2.The top l& button in the flsdble button
UCD group
fieldwillbelitforpro&rammlng
0 (550). To change UCD group5
or enter
further UCD groups (550 to 557). press the
appropriate
ffexible button
and perform
the following procedures.
3.Enter the three-digit
station numbers of
the stations in the LJCD group in the order
inwhicktheywill
be checked. Amaximum
of eight stations may be entered,
4.Fress the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

7484

DVX ’ and DVX’

UCD STATION AssIGNBUEm.
Any type of
station (xcluding
DSS/DLS Consoles) may be
entered as valid LJCD stations.
Calls will be
routed to station in the order they are entered
for the first round of calls only, After that the
calls are routed to stations based on On-Hook
time. The station with the longest On-Hook time
will receive the next call.

If’ a specific station number is dialed, only that
station Is rung: no distribution
will be done if
that statin is busy.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when ente&g the UCD Station
Assignmentfs)

programming

area.

To erase all stations. press the pound
times [###I and press HOLD.

key three

fssue 1, January

1993

UNJFoRM

745.2

CALL DISTRIBUTION

(Cont’d)

UCD TTBBEKS
Programming

Desc ription

steps

If UCD timers are to be changed:
a. Press F-H
and dial [61]. The follawing
message is shown on the display phone:

Six timers for UCD operation are programmable
on a system-wide basis. The UCD timers include: ARingTimer,
Message IntervalTimer,
an
Overflow Timer, a Auto Wrap-Up
Timer, a
No/Answer RecallTimer.
and a No/Answer Retry Timer. Each timer is described below:
Related
Pro@ammix@
Refer to Sec. 745.3.
UCD Group Progmmming;
and UCD Recorded
Announcement
Assignment(s);
Also refer to
Sec.
500.1,
Installation,
Backgrauncj
Music/Music-On-Hold
Connections
for DVX
and DVX ’ systems. andrInstaIhng
Recorded
Announcement
Device @AN).
The buttons on the digital tenntnal are defined
as shown below when entering the UCD ‘Doers

pmE$i

UCDRiqTimer
B

steps

To make a change to the UCD Ring ‘Inner:
1. Press the FUNG TIMER flexible button (Button # 1). The following message is shown on
the display phone:

Description
UCD RING TIMER The UCD Ring Timer determines how long a call will ring into a busy UCD
group before being presented to the first recorded annoullcemmt
Dtfault:
By default, the UCD Ring Timer is set
for 60 seconds, and is variable from 000 to 300
seconds.

2. Enterthe three-digit tfmervalue on the dial
pad which corresponds
to 060-300 seeonds.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Con&nation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

hue

1, January

1993

746-5

iqfinite
FORM

CALL DISTRIBUTION

(UCD)

-RM

CALL DISTFEIIXJTION

(Cont’d)

UCD TIMERS
B.

a&&al

DvX’andDVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

(Cont’dl

UCD Message

httd

FYogEmming

Timer
steps

To make a change to the UCD Message Interval
Timer:

1. F’ress the MITTIMER flexible button (Button #2). The following message is shown on
the display phone:

1’
:.

Description
UCD MIT TIMER
The UCD Message Interval
Timer (MIT) determines
the length of time a
caller remains ti queue (listening to MOH. if
provided] between recorded announcements.
Default:
By default, the UCD Message Interval
Timer is set for 60 seconds and is variable from
000 to 600 seconds.

2. Enter the three-digit timer value on the dial
pad which corresponds to 000-600 seconds.
3.Press tie HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
wilI now update.

UCD Chmflow
Prom

Timer
steps

To make a change to the UCD Overfiow Timer:
1. Press the OVEFFL0W TIMER flexible button Button
#3). The following message is
* shown on the display phone:

2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad
which corresponds to 000-600 seconds.
3. Press the HOLJJ button to save the entry.
Coufh-rnation tone is heard and the display
w-ill now update.

745-6

Description
UCD OVERFLOW TIMER
The UCD Overflow
Timer determines
the total length of time a
callerwillremain
in queue for aparticular
UCD
group. When the timer expires, the caller will
be routed to the designated overflow station.
The timer starts when an incoming call is answered and presented to the first recorded aa
nouncement.
Transferred
CO callers WiIl
overflow at the expiration of the Overflowtier.
I)tfarift:
By defauk the UCD Over&w Timer is
set for 60 seconds and is variable from 000 to
600 seconds.

fe8Ut

1, th.mu&ry

1993

imite
Dj&d

DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

UNTF-ORM CALL DISTRIBUTION

UNJPORM

CAL% DISTRIBUTXON

(UCD]

(Cm&d)

UCD TIBXERS (Cont’d)
D.

UCD Auto Wrap-Up

Timer

I?4-ogramdng

Description

steps

To make a change to the UCD Auto Wrap-up
Timer:
1. Press the AUTO-WRAP TIMER fiexible button (EMton #4). The following message is
shown on the display phone:

TIME& After completion of
a UCD call (on-hook) the agent will not be
subjected to another UCD call for the duration
of the Auto Wrap-Up timer allowing the agent
to fir&h call related work or access other facilities. This will allow agents to remwe themselves fimn the group (i.e. DND. Call Forward)
or originate another call.
Default:
By default, the UCD Auto Wrap-up
Timer is set for CM seconds and is variable from
000 to 600 seconds.
’

UCD AUTO-WRAP

2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad
which corresponds to OCG6OO seconds.
3Jres-s the HOLD button to save the enhy.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

UCD No-Answer

Recall

Progra

Timer

* 2 Steps

To make a change to the UCD No-Answer
Tier:

Description
Recall

l.Press the NO-ANSWER
RECAP
TlMER
flexible button
[Button #5). The following
message is shown on the display phone:

Rl%ZiLL TQdERIfacall
routed to a station via ACD is not answered by
the ACD Agent/Station
before the NW&rower
Recall timer wqires, the call will be returned to
ACD Queue with the highest priority. In addition, the station that failed to answer the ringing ACD ca.U will be placed into an out of sewice
UCD NO-ANSWER

(00s)

state.
Default: By default.

the LJCD No-Answer Timer
is set at 000 [disabled) and is variable from 000
to 300 seconds.
2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad
which corresponds to 00&300 seconds.
3,Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Issue

1, January

1883

748-7

irlfinite
Dd
and DVX”
Di&it&I key Tclephonc
Systems
~xlkI

CALL DISTRIBUTION

UCD TIMERS
F.

(Cont’d)

(Cotit’d)

UCD No-mer
Pro-

Retry

Timer
Steps

To make a change to the UCD No-Answer Retry
Timer:
1. Press the NO-ANSWERRElR’Y~~Rflcxible button (FJutton #6). The followlngmessage is shown on the display phone:
71

2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad
which corresponds to 000-999 seconds.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confhxnation
tone is heard and the dispIay
wIll now update.

745-8
-

Description
UCD NO-ANSWER RETRY TIMER. When the
No-Answer Recall timer expires. a station that
failed to amwer tie ringing ACD call is placed
into an out-of-setice
(00s) state. The station
that was taken out-of-service
(00s) will be
placed back in service if the agent hits his
available flex button or dials the available flex
code. In addition. the agent will be placed back
in service if the No-Answer Retry timer expires.
If the agent does not answer his next ACD call,
he will again be taken out-of&mice.
Th% cycle
will eor&inue until the station answers calls,
logs out, or goes unavailable.
Default: By default, the UCD No-Answer Retry
tier
is set for 300 seconds and is v&able fi-om
000 to 999 seconds.

Issue 1. Januruy

1983

; :1
I :
.-:
!Z
[I:
:;

i+ite
D&i&l

DVX’ md DVX”
Key Telephone
Systcme

I~NI~$GN~I CALL DISTRIBUTION
745.3

UNJJFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION

(UCD)

(Cont’d)

UCD RAN ANNOUNCEMENT

TA-

BLES
Rograrmning

Description

Steps

lf Recorded Announcement
devices are instalied to operate with UCD. these tables must
be programmed:
a. Press FTASH and dial [62]. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

-nj

b-The top left button in the flexible button
field will be tit for programmmg
UCD RAN
Announcement
Table 1. To change to UCD
RAN Announcement
Table 2. press flexible
button
#2. Repeat above for Tables 3
through Tables 8.
c. Enter a string of six, or seven digits on the
dial pad. ‘Ihe order of data entry will be:
ppe Number!
- l= CO Port interface
- 2s SLT Port interface
Index (port) Number:
- Ol-28= CO Line Port
- 100- 155= SLT Station Port
Message Time:
- 000-300 seconds
d. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confimation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Determines
the type. index (port) number and
message length for the eight available Recorded
Announcements
Irwu]. There are eight RAN
tables that can be programmed.
A table can be
incoming calls
the atlswer port for unanswered
to a UCD group, while anotlxer table can provide
the secondary message.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the UCD RAN
Announcement
Tables program.mW
area.
~~gygygq~~
p$qgf+q~{p+q
The type can be either a CO line port, or a SLT
port. The index number specifies which circuit
for the type of interface.
Tbe message length is used to match the maximum length of the message to the device that
is used.
Example:
To program a table for a CO line port:
a. Press the TABL;E “X’ flexible button (Buttons l-8).
b. Dial (I] for CO port interface.
c. Dial 101 to 281 for CO line used.
d. Enter message duration (000-300 sec.)
Example:
To program

emmi

To clear entries in a Table:
a. Press the pound key once [#I followed
the HOLD button.

a table fd; an SLT port:
a. Press the TABLE “X’ flexible button (Buttons 1-B).
b. Dial [2] for SLT port interface.
c. Dial [ 100 to 1551 for SLT station used.
d. Enter Message duration (000-300 sec.)
Refer to sec. 745.1,
R&tcd
Pro l3--yG
UCD Group Programmmg;
745.2, UCD Timers;
Also refer to Sec. 500.9, Installing
Recorded
Announcement
Device (RAN).

mite

wtfd

DVX’andDVX’
Key Telephone

ICIJD

Systems

PROGRAMMING

SECTION 750
ICLID PROGRAM-G
INTRODUCTION
750.1
The ICLID @ncoming Calling Line IDenticaiion) feature has been added to the infinite
DigkaI Key Telephone System. The operation of
this feature is dependent
on the feature first
being activated kom the central office so that
the numbers of the calling party will be delivered over the individuat tip and ring of the CO
Itnes during the first siknt interval between
ringing. The features implemented
are:

Calling Numhtr/Harne Msplap
This feature is intended as the basic off&
ing of the ICLID service when associated
with the infinite
DigitaI Key Telephone
system. Essentially.
whenever an incoming call is received at the system, the number received along with the ringing signal
wiI1 be stored in the line control tables and
used at various points in the processing of
the call.
The primary function will be that the calling number is displayed (if available) at any
point at which the “LINE RINGING” message is displayed in the system.
In addition, with the avaikbility
of the cu.&
ing name feature. if the calIing name is
provided, the system will deliver that to the
display instead of the calling number.
000000000111111111122222
I23456789012345678901234

bbbbbNbbbb

III’

Note that although the Central Oiiice deliveryofthecallingnameis15characters,the
internal table used to store the name for
translation
of a received number is 24characters in length. If the Central Office
delivers a name , it will be positioned left
justified in the 24-character
field on the
display. If a number
is received which
matches a number/name
tianslation,
the
translated name will be used and the name

Issue 1. Januarg

1993

delivered fi-om the Central Offke will be
effectively discarded.
E no name is available. either supplied
from the Central Office or internally from
the translation table, the delivered number
will be positioned centered in the display
as shown above for the 14 N’s.
Incoming
Number/Name
SMDR
When this feature is implemented,
the system will operate normaI@ in the absence of
1CLID information
of the failure of the
ICLID equipment. If the information
is present at the time that an SMDR record is
generated for a call, it will alter the content
and format of the SMDR output record.
l If the caIIing
number is available, the
number will be output in the SMDR record in the same location as the dialed
number is located in the outgoing calls.
l
If the calling name is present, an additionaI line will be output in the SMDR
identi@ng
the name. This record w-Ill
immcdiateIy follow the normal SMDR record. The normal SMDR record will include an indicator which identities that
a foIlowing record with name identifimtion is present.
Unanswered caUs will be recorded on the
SMDR for incoming as a system option to
allow the identification
of cakrs for statistical and call-back purposes. These calls
will be identified’ with an indicator
in the
SMDRrecord.
unanswered
cdl Management
An Unanswered
Call Management
Table
with 50 entry capacity for the infinite
DVX I System, and 100 entry capacity for
the tn.
DVX ’ system is maintained
in
the system. The calling number/name
Information pertaining
to any unanswered
call wiU be placed in this table at the time
the system has determined
that the call
has been abandoned.
This table may be administered
from appropriately
privileged phones so that the
unanswered
calls may be reviewed
and
handled by the customer. Upon entering
into the review process, the functions
available to a phone are:
7su-1

iqjinite

D&&al

ICLJDPROG-G

FUlCtiOIl

1. GO to be&min~

of list

DVX’andDVXn

Key Telephone

Systems

Function
3utton
) DialCode
635

2. Review next item in this

HOLD
FLASH
5. Delete entire list.
1 Note’
.
ON/OFF
6. Exit list review function.
7. Step to previous list entry,
TRANS
:
18. Call Back.
1 SPEED
1
’ This feature
is only available
to the
Attendant(s)
st.aUcm[s) to clear the list one
entry at a time.
3. Step to next list en-.
4. Delete this list entry.

760-2

Issue

1. January

1993

i@i.te
D&&al

DVX’andDVXn
kzcy Telephone

ICLID PRoG I~AMMING
ICIJD

750.2

RINGING

ICLID

Systems

PROG~G

(Cunt’d)
ASSIGNMENT
Description

If ICIJD Ringing Assignments
need to be assigned or changed:
1, press
FLASH and dial [43]. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

where:
- OO= ICUD Route Number
00-09 for DVX I System, 00-20 for
DYX ’ System
- XxXY= ICLID De&nation
@OR) and
Rixghg Assignment Kl
2. Press the RING ASSiGNMEWT flexible button (Button # 1). LED #l is lit indicating
Route 00 is ready for programming.
3. Enter the three-digit destination clear] and
the one-digit ring Q-pe (YJ.
- O= Unassigned (to delete a station)
- I=DayRinging
- 2= Night Ringing
- 3= BothDay&NightRh@ng
Deleting a station [entering a 0 for ring type)
only removes that station from the ring assignment.
4.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confiiation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
5. Press Button # 17 to display ring assignments. Assignments
wiIl be displayed in
sets of 8 up to the number programmed.
Press Button # 17 additional times to cycle
to the next group of 8 ring assignments.
The foIIowing
format is used to display the
assignments:

1CLID Ringing Assignments
will provide a
means to change the ring assignment based on
the incoming number received. This feature
permits the user to select one of 20 ringing
routes for each entry in the name to number
transIation
table. For example,
this feature
could be used to re-route selected customers to
a specffk ACD or UCD group and bypass the
general attendant.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entening the ICWD Ringing Assignment pro@amming
area:
Rh;;-lhr;-lh;-;-l
jGGsl~~{~j
H

Fr;;;i

&El

GiGI

Keysets designated to ring on an incoming CO
line but not designated to ring on the fCWD
ring, may receive a ring cycle before the call is
moved. The same ringing restrictions applied to
CO line ringing will be applied to ICLJD rIngin&
The same ringing types applied to CO line ringing will also be applied to ICLID ringing.
DcfimItz By default. no destinations
or ringing
assignmeRts exist.

where:
-

DDD= Destination
R= D for Day
N = Night
B=BothDay&Night.

Issue 1. JanuaIy

199s

760-S

iqfhtite
DVX’andDVXn
Digital Key Telephone
Systems

Propnnning

Steps

Description

ping assfgnments witl be continuous
and w-ill
be displayed in order of the destination number
f?om 001 to 557.
&Repeat Step 3 to program additional stations and rIngi.ng ass@ments.
A maximum of eight stations wilS &splay on the
LCD display. Additionat stations and ringing assignments
can be displayed using
Button # 17.
To advance to the next Route:
1. Press the NEXT flexible button (Button
#l$) to advance to the next ICLID Route
number,
To go to a previous Route:
1. Press the PREVIOUS flexible button (Button #19] to go to the previous ICLID Route
number.
To select a different Route:
1. Press the SELECT ROUTE NUMBER to
select the desired route number.
2. Enter the two-digit ICLJD route numba.
- 00-09 for DVX ’ System,
- 00-19 for DVX’ System.
3.Press the HOLD button to change to the
difXerent route entered. Conflrmatlon
tone
willbe heard.

750-4

rssuc 1. January

1993

XCLID PRoG RilNMXNG

ICLID

7so.3

[Cont’d)

FEkmmEs

Programming

Description

Steps

If ICLID is to be used:
1. Press FLASH and dial [SS]. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

2. To program ICLJD features, use the flexibie
button(s) as defined in the following procedures. The ICLID. NAME buttons toggle on
and off.
3.After all entries are made, press the HOLD
button to accept the data.

The in-@&e Digital Key Telephone Systems can
provide ICLID output to either the standard
Ezs-23% connector on the DVX I Basic KSU
motherboard
or DVX II CPB board or to the
optional -2326/422
l/O Module cunnectar(s). When ICIJD is desired. the following
system-wide parameters w-ill determine how the
ICLID inform&ton
will be distibuted.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the ICLID Features programming
area:

Related ProgWlIY&lg:
local

Prow

steps

1. Press the ICLID ENABLE flexible button
(Button # 1). This feature will toggle on and
off with each depression, and the display
wiU update with each depression.
l
LED ON = ICWD is enabled
l
LED OFF = ICLID is disabled
2.Press the H0I.D button to save the entry.
Confkmation
tone is heard.

Number/Name

Refer to Sec. 710.14,
Translation
Table.

Description
The ICLID (Incoming Calling Line IDentifkation) feature has been added to the infinite
DigitalKeyTelepbone
Systems. However. these
features are not available unless the Basic
ICIJD Software package has been purchased
separately. In order for this feature to operate
properly, it must be activated kom the central
office
so that the numbers of the calling party
will be delivered over the indMdual
tip and ring
of the CO lines during the ik-st silent intenrdl
betweenringing.
D&uIt:
By default, ICLID is disabled.

Name in Display
Pro@

- g Steps

1. Press the NAME flexible button [Button #2)
to determine whether the name will appear
In the LCD display instead of the incoming
telephone number. This feature will toggle
on and off with each depression and the
display will update with each depression.
l
LED ON = Name will appear in display

Description
The 5ystem can be set to display either the
ticomlng
telephone number
or the person’s
name on the LCD display,
Default:
By default, the system will show the
telephone number on the LCD display.

LED OFF = Telephone number will appear in display
2.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confkrnation
tone is heard.
l

Issue 1, January

1893

750-K

iqfiniie
DvX’andDVX”
DQfiM Key Telephone
Systems
ICIJD

PROG RABUMING (Ccmt’d)

ICUD

Features

{Ckmt’dI

prog

- g steps

Baud Rate Display
The ICLJD Baud Rate is programmed using
Flash 15 Baud Rate Assignments.
Button
#3 will return error tone when pressed. The
LCD displays the current baud rate based
on which Port number is assigned to the
iCLID Port number.

Port Atmi@mcnt
prO@3Imliq~

steps

1. Press the PORT flexible button (Button #4)
to determine which port is to be used for
ICLID information.
2. Enter a one-digit number for theICIJD Port
number:
- I= Port #l (“On-Board” RS-232C)
- 2= Port #2 (“On-Board” 300 Baud
Modem)
- 3= Port #3 (I/O Expander Module
RS-232C)
- 4= Port #4 (I/O Ekpander Module
RS-422)
The LCD displays the current baud rate based
on which Port number is assigned to the ICLID
Port number.
3. Press the HOLD button to accept the data.
The display will now update.

750-B

Description
The infintte Digital Key Telephone Systems can
provide. ICLID input to either the standard RS232C ‘On-Board” connector on the DVX’ 3KSLl
or DVX I1 CPB board or to the optional RS232C/422
I/O Expander Module connector(s).
The Baud Bate wU.l be displayed as either 300
baud, 1280 baud. 2400 baud, 4800 baud,, or
9600 baud.
Related
Progmx:
Refer to Sec. 710.8,
Baud Bate Assignments.

Description
Port #1 refers to the standard RS-232C “OnBoard- connector on the DVX’ Basic KSU or the
CPB board on the DVX n.
Port
#2 refers to the “On-Board”
300 Baud
modem provided with the system.
Port #S refers to the FS232C connector on the
I/O Expander Module.
Port #4 refers to the RS-422 connector on the
same I/O Expander Module fnstalled in either
infznite Digital system.
Dcfimlt:
By default, Port #l is used for ICLlD
operation.

Ismle I, January

1993

irtfirrite
DVX’ and DVX’
DQ$tal Key Telephone
Systems

VOICE I&AIL GROUPS (VMj

SECTION 755
VOICE MAIL GROUPS m)
VOICE

755.1

MAIL. PROGRAM?HING

Pro@ammin~

Description

Steps

If the system is in the programming
mode,
continue using the program codes. If starting to
program here, enter the programming
mode.
Refer to Sec. 700.2, Program Mode Entry (Key
Station).
If Voice Mail Groups are to be programmed:
1. Press FLASH and dial (651. The following
message is shown on the display phone.

‘31
W-ha:
- G = Voice Mail group number (O-7)
- AAA = Alternate group W404-47)
- L = ‘Leave” mafl index from outpulsing table for leaving messages (O71

Up to eight Voice Mail groups can be confgured
in the in$r&k Digital Key Telephone System.
Each group can contain up to eight Voice Mail
designated ports, each ofwhich interfaces with
a port on an SLT or OPX card.
An externally provided Voice Mail system or
Auto Attendant
must be connected to the in&
r&a Digital Key Telephone System forvoice Mail
or Auto Attendant
opera&n.
Voice Mail automatirdy
handles unanswered
calls. Station
user can then retrieve messages left at their
stations. Auto Attendants can handle incoming
calls and route callers to station users without
intervention
from the systxxns attendant.
Direct incoming ring to Voice Mail/Auto Attendant groups can be done directly through CO
Line Ringfng AssigTlments.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the Voice Mail
progmmming
area:

R = ‘Retrieve” maLl index from outpulsing table for retrieving messages
(O-7)
- XXX = Voice Mail station numbers
(po*).(up
to 8 maI
2.The top lefk button in the flexiile button
field will be lit for programming
voice mail
group 440. To change Voice Mail groups or
enter fW-&er Voice Mail groups, press the
appropriate
fltrdble button 1-8 (440447)
and perform the following procedures.
t.xeain~tnsrlx~inm
VoictMUil~
ctnzmedtotheirlfinite
~cItp-~mprqpa

Issue 1, January

1SBS

.~g: Refer to Sec. 755.2,
Izclatcd Plugi
Voice Mail Outpulsing
Table, Voice Mail InBand Signaling for incoming CO calls: 720.1,
CO Line Programming,
CO Line Ringing
l

AsSignmelltS.

755- 1

infinite

VOICE MAIL GROUPS W

ANnnate

Voice

Mail

Profpmming

Mail
l?rof$

Index

Description

Steps

an alternate group:
1. Press the ALTERNATE VM GP flexible button (Button #9).
2. Enter the three-digit pilot number (440 to
447) of the desired group.
3. Aess the HOLD button to save the entry.
Con&mat&m
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

‘leave”

and DVX”
Systems

Group

To program

DVX’

D&~&II Key Telephone

VM GP. An Alternate Voice Mail
Group may be programmed
so that if all Voice
Mail ports are in use. the call can be routed to
an alternate group. This is useful whin more
than eight ports are required for Voice Mail
ALTERNATE

tXl.EiC.

To delete an Alternate Voice Mail Group assignment, enter three pounds [###I on the keypad
and press the HOLD button.

Entry
* g steps

To specitjr the “Leave” mail index (outpulsing
table) to be accessed by a Voice Mail group:
1. Press the LEAVE flexible button (Button
#IQ).
2. Enter the one-digit outpulsing table numher [O-7) on the dial pad.
3.Press the HOLD button to save the en-.
Confmnation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Description
LEAVE, The “Leave” mail index specifies the
outpulsing
Table where the “in-band”
digits
required
to connect a caller, forwarded fnto
Voice Mail, to the called stations mail box are
stored. Refer to Sec. 755.2 for programming
enties into an outpulsing table.
To delete a “Leave” mail index entry, enter one
pound I#] on the keypad and press the HOLD
;
button.

VOICE

VOICE MAIL

GROUPS (VB%l

GROUPS (Cont’d)

“Retrieve”

IYUUL

Mail Index
Prom

Entry
Steps

To program
the ‘Retrievti”
mail index [outpulsing table) to be accessed by the Voice Mail
group:

1. Press the RETRIEVE flexible button (Button #ill.
2. Enter the one-d&It outpulsing table mnnber (O-7) on the dial pad.
3.Pres.s the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confiiation
tone is heard snd the display
will now update.

Description
RETRIEVE. The “Retrieve” mail Index spe&es
the outpulsing table where the In-band”
digits
required to connect a station user to their own
mail box are stored. Refer to Sec. 755.2 for
prom
entries into an outpulsing
table.

To delete a “Retrieve” maiI index entry, enter
one pound [#I on the keypad and press the
HOLD button.

St&ion

hsi@mcat@)

prog-mmmbg

steps

To program the stations in the Voice Mail group:
1. Press the STATION ASSIGN flexible button
(Button # 121.
2.Enter
the three-digit
station
numbers
(100-155). A m-urn
of eight SLT stations may be entered.
3. Press the HOLD button to save the entryConfirmation
tone is heard and the dispIay
wiIl now update.

IBSUC 1, January

1893

Description
Up to eight SLT or OFX port extension numbers
may be programmed
into a Voice Mail group.
The ports wilI be designated as two-way ports
by directing &Is to any one of the ports and
alIowing any one of the ports (or all ports) to be
used as VM out dial and/or VM not@ ports.
A flexible button may be programmed
with a
Voice MaiI group pilot number. This button will
then act as a DSS for that Voice Mail group
when pressed and also serves as the message
waiting inckation
ior that VM group.

756-3

Digital

VOICE

MA=

VOICE

hTA= GROUPS Wnt’dl
VOICE WUL OUTPULSING

755.2
k

GROUPS WW

Voice Mail In-Band
ProJip3mdg

iqjinite
DVX’andDVXn
Key Telephone
Systems

TAB-

SQpa.lbg
Description

steps

If Voice Mail In-Band signaling is to be used:
1. Press FLASH and dial [66]. The following
message is shown on the display phone.
Li

Entries into one of the eight Voice Mail OutpulsingTables
determine the In-Band signaling
required for “R&-kvin~
messages Iallows for
stations to pick up mail) and ‘Leaving” messages (allows stations to leave messages in voice
mail].
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the Voice Mail
Outpulsing Table prom
area.

Where:
- y = Table index (O-7)
- x = Entered digits 09, #, *, F’ausesj
2. The TABLE 00 flexible button (Sutton # 1
led is lit. To change tables, press the- appm
-_
priate flexible button (Buttons 2-W and
perform the following procedues.
3. Dial one of the following. if requited;
- O=ifapretlxisrequired
- l=ifasuf&cisrequired
- #=ifen~istobedeleted
4. Enter up to 12 digits required including y’
and I#‘. TFWN button = pause,
5. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

pg&gq

~pqgqpig
p!TxGKJh;;;i
Build a table (‘0” for example) for any additional
digits other than the Station Exknsio~ Number
(Voice Mail Box Numberlneeded
for a caller to
leave a message in a station’s mailbox. [“Leave”)
Build another table (‘1” for example) for any
additional digits needed for a mailbox holder to
retrieve a message (“Retrieve”).
To clear enties in aTable. press the pound
once I#]. followed by the HOLD button.

key

mm]

Related
Rogramming:
Refer to Sec. 755.1.
Voice Mail Groups IVM): Sec. 755.2. Voice Mail
In-Band Signaling on incoming CO Calls.

7564

Lesue 1. January

1993

ifiite
~igitd

DVX I and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

VOICE

MAIL

VOICE

B5AIL OUTKKSING

Voice

GROUPS Wont’4

Mail Dfeco~nect

Prog

TABLE (Cont’dl
Table

* :! Steps

1. Press the DISCUNNECT TABLE 8 flexkble
button (Button #9). This is the table number used for the Voice Mail disconnect sigla.
2. Enter up to 12-digits which will be used for
the disconnect sQm.l. i.nclu~
‘W and W.
TRAN button = pause.
S-Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Description
To avoid Voice Mail ports from being tied up as
a result of CO line callers abandoning
the call
or not exiting the VM system properly, a d&connect signal can be programmed
into the infinite
Digital Key Telephone System to noufv the VM
system that a call has been abandoned.
This is
accomplished through ‘in-band* signaling. If a
CO disconnect signal is detected, the ir@~f@
Digital Key Telephone System will send a series
of M’MF digits programmed
in the Voice Mail
disconnect table (outpuklng
table #8) to the
Voice Mail port. This can be any digit stream up
to 12-digW.sinch~Ung”~”
and V’. This tablewill
serve all eight voice mail groups. These d@ts
are not used as a result of an internal station
disconnecting
fmm Voice h&x& In this case
silence is provided for a short period followed
by busy tone. This method is also used for CO
lines when the VM disconnect table is empty.
The infinittz Digital Key Telephone System will
provide Loop Supervision
monitoring
while a
CO call is connected to a port designated
as
Voice Mail.

Default: l3y default programmtng
there are no
entries in the disconnect table mable #8).
,

Issue 1, Janunry

1993

IS&S

iqjhdte
D&&al

VOXCE MAIL GLOW

IVM]

VOICE MAIL

(CcM’d)

GROUPS

VOICE

765.3

&SAIL IN-BAM)

Programming

DVX’

Key Telephone

and DVX”
Systeme

FEATURES
Description

Steps

1. Press FLASH and dial [67]. The following
message will be shown on the display

voiec

Mail In-Band

Mgtte

Fframming

Description

steps

If Voice Mail In-Band Digits are to be enabled
or disabled for Incoming CO callers;
1. Ffress the INCOMING
ID DIGl’IZ flexible
button (Button # 1). It will toggle on and off
with each depression.

ID digits are enabled
. LEDon=
l
LED off = ID digits are disabled
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is hesrd and the display
will now update.

The infintte Digital Key Telephone System allows the system to be programmed
so that if a
station programmed
to receive incoming
CO
line ringing is forwarded to Voice Mail they may
have direct incoming callers muted directly into
their stations voice mail box through the use of
‘In-Band”
signaling.
Alternately,
when disabled, callers willbe answered by the Voice Mail
or Auto Attendant
Main greeting.
Incoming
CO callers can be Station Call Forwarded into voice mail only when the ringing
CO line is programmed
to ring at one station.
Additionally
CO lines programmed
to ring at an
attendant
station will station call forward into
the Voice Mail. system (if programmed
to ring
only at one attendant station) and be presented
to the main greeting (noi%be attendant stations
mail box) even when ID digits are enabled.
Default:
By default, ID digits for incoming CO
calls is enabled.
Related
Pro gramming::
F$&-;
&755;Z;
VoiceMaill%-ogr

Mail Cutpulsing

mwi
-

- *

Table

Xsmte 1, Janaarg

1993

iq@ik
D@taI

DVX’andDVXn
Eey Telephone

VOICE

MAIL

GROUPS (Cont’d)

VOICE

MAIL

IN-BAND

FEATURES

Pro&p-

- gsteps

VOKZ

System

Description
This feature allows Voice Mail calls, upon
reaching a forwarded to VM station, to forward
back into fhe Voice Mail unit. The fowarded
station can be foxwarded
to the same or a
different Voice Mail group thm the calling VM
group. This is usefkl when VM ports are being
used as both Auto Attendant
and VM ports.
This feature can be enabled/disabled
for allVM
groups.
Default: By default, the V$‘l ‘I’hnsfer/Fomard
feature is disabled.

hkil Outpulsing

1993

GROUPS (‘VW

(Cont’d)

If Voice Mafl CalI Forward is to be enabled or
disabled for Incoming CO callers:
1. Press the CALL FWD ff exible button (Button #2]. It will toggle on and off with each
depression.
l
LED on = call Forward is enabled
l
LED off = CaU Forward is disabled

fssue 1, January

MAIL

Table.

7m-7

@‘i&e

~j&al

DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

EXCEPTION

EXCEPTION
760.1

EXCEFl!lON
MING

SECTION
TABLES

TABLES pROGR4kC

Fkogrammiry!

Steps

The in.
DigitaI Key Telephone System offers
a flexible means of applying toll restriction
to
stations or Mlividuals.
Dialing privileges (or toll
restriction} is determined through assignment
of station and CO line Class Of Sendce (COS).
Several types of restriction can be derived simply by programming
cos assignments and co
line accessto stations. This may, in some cases,
be all that is necessary. However, when a more
complex or spec%ic @pe of restriction is destred
the system offers two allow and two deny tables
along with four special tables. These tables can
be programmed
in a variety of way%!?to handle
applications
that are stxaight forward or applications that require a more complex an-angement.
The allow and deny tables are assfgued to stations based on their station Class of Service
(COS) assignment. The Station (COS) interacts
with CO Une COS assfgnments to p-de
several different types of dialing privileges (Refer to
CO/Station
COS mat& below).
The Albw and Deny tables allow entries of
either general or specific allow and deny codes
such as all&g
all [l-800] type calls. and/or
den~anIll+or[O]+calls.?heattowanddeny
Tabie

760-l

TABLES

PROGRAMMING

760
PROCZMMMING
tables allow a maximum of eight digits to be
entered as allow or deny digits. This allows for
entry of certain area codes or office codes or a
cornbinstion
of area code plus office code that
can specifkally be z&wed or denied. For example the code [1555-12121 maybe entered in the
deny table to deny Jocal toil information
calls.
Each ahw table contains 20 bins for entry of
aIlow codes. Each deny table contains 10 bins
for e&y of deny codes.
The following
rules should be remembered
when setting up the Allow/Deny
tables. Refer
toTable 760-I Class of Service (COS).
1. If both tables (allow and deny) have no
entrfes, no restriction fs applied.
2. If entries are made in the allow table and
only there, then only those numbers are
allowed. All other dialing is denied.
3. If entries are made in the deny table and
only there. then only those numbers
are
denied. All other dialing is allowed.
4. If there are entries in both allow and deny
tabkss. the aliow table is searched fit
and
ifamatchisfound.itisallowed.Ifamatch
is not found, the deny table is searched and
ifamatchisfoundthere,thecaIlisdenied.
If the number does not match an entry in
either table, it is allowed.

class of service [COSI

Unrestricted

DVX’ and DVX”
Key Telephone
Systems

infinite

EXCJ@TION

TABLES

Digital

PROGRAMMXNG
760.2

Table 760-2

Allow/Deny

AND

RJ.ZSUL7-S
/D’

2 I
R

I
’

[ FOUND

Iuj
!R!

I.-E
4

j A

FOUND

1 D

NOT

FOUND
LFOIJND~AI

FOUND
I

! D
I

NOT

‘I

l--TNm
FOUND

A special YWYt Care” I’D”) character may be
entered as a digit to either allow or deny any
digit dialed in that digit sequence. For example
a code (1 -D” 01 and [I “D” I) may be entered in
the deny table which would allow local long
distance calls [numbers dialed with a I followed
by a seven-digit local number), but would deny
long distance calls (numbers
dialed with a 1
followed by an area code).
The iTsfinite Digital Key Telephone System also
offers four special tables that can be referenced
from witi
the two allow tables. Three of the
special tables can be assigned to specific area
codes that require further toll restriction
definition. The fourth special table is reserved for
use as a home area code table (numbers within
the same area code as the site where the system
is in&&d).
This provides expanded &ility to
apply toll restriction on numbers that are dialed
within an area code. Each special table wiIl
allow up to 800 entries (200-999). This offers
the ability to allow every office code on an
individual basis

780-2

ll’EMS

TO TOLL RI%

STRICMON

Toll Table

; CONDITIONS

CO/Pl3x Lines
When CO lines are marked as PBX lines
(refer to Sec. 720.1, CO Line Programming)
the system w-ill first check the PBX code
table [refer to Sec. 710.5. PBX Diahug
Codes) for a valid match. If the frrst digits
dialed do not match the entries in the PBX
code table the call is considered an attempt
to call another PBX extension and no toll
restriction
is applied. If the first digits dialed are found in the PBX code table then
toll restriction will start with the next dia.led digft.
B. Forced Amount
Codes
The system can optto&
force the use of
account codes on ah restricted calls. When
forced account codes are enabled (see Sec.
710.2, Account Codes-Forced), an account
code must be entered to place a call that is
otherwise restricted Umn.gh toll restricUon. By entering an account code the stations effective class of service becomes that
equal to class of service 1 (unrestricted).
When account codes are forced on a system
wide basis selected users may be instructed on how to enter account codes
from any station and be allowed to dial
unrestricted
from a station that may othenvise be restricted. Use of account codes
in this manner, as a traveling class-of-sewice, is however not controlled by the system. Any station user with lmowledge of
how to enter account codes to override a
stations toll restriction wUi be allowed to do
so.
C. SLT DTMF Receivm
When single line telephones are connected
to the tnfiniteDi@aI
Key Telephone System
and toll restriction is enabled, the DTMF
receivers located on the station board(s)
will monitor the call for a programmed
period of time [refer to Sec. 710.1. SLT
DTMF Receiver timer). WNle the DTMF
receiver is monitoring
the digits being dialed by a single line telephone. it is considered busy and not available for monitoring
another SLT attempting
to dial. When all
DTMF receivers are busy, an SLT attempting to go off-hook will not receive dial tone
until a rece.iver is available. The system
allows up to four DTMF receivers to be
installed in the infintte DVX’ System, and
up to 13 DTMF receivers on the ti$nUe

Iseue

1. January

1993

irlfinite
D@m

DVX * and DVX ’
fzey Telephone
Sy8tcma

DVX ’ System. for monitoring SLT dialing.
lfa system has heavy SLTusage toll restriction may inhibit dialing by SLT stations.
TWO options are available to help alleviate
this problem; 1) shorten the SLT receiver
timer (refer to Sec. 710. I, SLT DTMF
Receiver timer). This will free up DYlMF
receivers faster, however, may not provide
the desired toll restriction for SLT stations;
or 2) Enable LCR and force LCR on SLT
stations. when the LCR database is set up
the 3-d$jlt table allows for entry of the
number of digits to be expected. When a
SLT dials the appropriate number of digits,
LCR will release the D’IMF receiver and
then be av&JaMe for another SLT call.
LCR vs. Ton Rc&xiction
LCR is not intended to be an alternaffve to
toll restriction
nor is toll resirMion
intended to be a alternate to LCR In fact they
both work best when programmed
together. Toll restriction provides the dialing
privileges that stations are allowed and
LCR provides the routing of calis onto the
proper type of lines. LCR can e&ance toil
restriction
in that LCR provides a ‘Store
and Forward” operation that allows the
system to analyze the digits befng dialed
before a trunk is seized. This prevents users from by-passing toll restiction
by taking advantage of the time it takes for a
central office line to provide dial tone. Because of this it is recommended
that LCR
be considered when toll restriction fs desired.

Issue 1. January

1993

Digit&l
760.3

ir@li.t@ D= I and DVX I1
Key Telephone
Svsttms

TOLL RESTRICTION
PROGRAMMlNG
Entering
Td Table Prom
Projpammhg

Description

Steps

If the system is in the programming
mode,
continue using the program codes. If starting to
program here, enter the programming
mode.
Refer to Sec. 700.2. Program Mode Entry (Key

1. Press FLASH and dial 1701. The folkxvlng
message is shown on the display phone:

program allow/deny
tables, press the
appropriate
Table button and enter information as outlined in the followSng proce-

2.To

dUrC3.

3. To program Special Tabks 1-3. it is necessary to associate an area code to the table.
This is done by pressing the appropriate
“AREA-CODE TBL” button and assign the
area code.
speciaiTobIt4fs

All toll tables have been conveniently
placed
under one program code to allow entry of all toll
restriction data.
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the Toll Restriction progmmming
area.

When the systtm searches the albw and deny
tables, the entries are checked starling with Bin
01 and proceedfng
sequentially
through
the
table to the last bin. In addttion The allow table
is always searched before looking at the deny
table. Therefore the order of entry is important.
Enties that are specific (i.e. [I 716)) should be
placed ahead of entries that are more general
(usually include “Don’t Care” digits i.e. [l ‘KY
111.
Once a match is found, in the allow table. that
references a special table the number dialed will
be checked for an allowed code in the special
tabIe. If a mat& is not found in the special table
the system will continue to check for a match
in the next alkw or deny table that is to be
checked. The system will not retumto
the table
that sent the call to the special table.

-furtheiwme

anzacodeanddoe5notrtQubc~arUiCOdC

entry.

display entries ln any of the tables.
press the DISPLAY TAELES button (button
# 12). Entries in the allow/deny
tables will
display two at atime. Entries in the special
tables wiIl be displayed six at a time in
ascending order.

4.To

760-4

Issue

I.January1993

EXCEPTION
EX~~ION
&ont’d)
FL

TABLES

Allow

TABIJW

FROG-0

FROG-G

Table Rogrammj%
Descrintion

1. press the ALlxlW TABLE A or ALLOW TABl,E B flexible button (Button #l or #3).
The following message is shown on the
display telephone:

The fkst two bins locations are displayed.
2. Enter the two-digit bin number (0 1-ZO} of
the bin to be programmed.
Ittsrrcanmcndsd~~37knstrcrad
fbranmkythordIr6snsro#
sptdor-k
n-r
3; Bin 38 bc rrsapsdfbrrmantry
thatwarr;fe~spedol.doMenrmrba3;

nstfisafor~qpecirrI
tabb?Yulmbers:Bin20k-~r

the

_
.?.

Borne

0-a

code

tab&,

3. Enter the allow code:
where:
- 0 to 9, l . # = corresponding
allow digits (numbers)
- MUTE = Don’t Care digit CD”)
- TRAM = search special table (YY)
4.FVess the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
5. When all entries for one table are complete,
press the flexible button for the next table.
The foIlowing rules should be applied when
making entries that will reference the special
-tables:
1. For entries referencing the first three special tables a sped&
area code must be
identified (one for each table needed). Then
make note as to how the numbers will be
dialed when dialing numbers to this area
code (i.e. with a leading digit II] or no
leading digit [l]] , The entry into the allow
table would be entered as follows:
Leading digit (11 - BB 1 XXX DDD (S) or
Non Leading [l] - BBXXXDDD
{S}
WI-El-C
- BB = Bin number (reeomrnended
1719)

Issue 1, Jallllaly

1993

Allow Table - Each AIIow table contains20 bin
numbers. Each bin number may be up to eightdigits in length including (Don’t Care) digits and
{Search Special Table) commands. Entries into
the azlow table represent exceptions to numbers or codes that are to be allowed only if they
would otherwise be restricted by an entry in the
deny table. For example if f 1 555 12121 is to be
aIlowed but [ 1+] numbers are denied. by an
entry into the deny table, then 11 555 12121
should be entered into the allow table as an
.
abwed number.
l
Allow table A is referenced and searched
first (before the deny table A) when Station COS is 2 and-CO line COS is either
1 or2.
l
Allow table B is referenced and looked at
first (before the deny table B) when Station COS is 3 and CO line COS is either
1 or3.
Q When station COS is 4 and CO line COS
is 1 both allow tables are looked at first
(allow table A first then allow table B)
then both deny tabIes (deny table A &t
then deny table 33)).
Don’t
Care digits specify that the system
shoukl consider any digit dialed in that position
as a match. Don’t Care digits should not be
enteredastbelastdigitinanentxy,asthis
would be an unnecessaq
or meaningless command.
scatch Special Table commands must be entered in a specific manner and should always
be placed as the last enties in the Auow table.
It is recommended
that the Iast four bins (1720) in the allow table be reserved forreferencing
the four special tables w&b the reference to the
home area code (special table 4) always being
located in bin number 20. Search Spedat table
commands can only be entered into the allow

t&kS.

To erase a bin. enter tie two-digit bin number
fokwing
by pressing the HOLD button.

760-8

=mlYMON

TABLES

PROGRAMMING

EXCEPTION
(Cont’d)

TABIS+

FROGIUMBUING

Auow Table Pru@unming
Prog$xmmbg

injkite
DVX ’ and DVX I’
Digital Key Telephone
Systems

(Cont’d)
steps

Description

- XXX = Area code (must match

AREAX entry)
- DDD = “Don’t Care” dfgit (three enMes, DND button)
- {SI= Search Special Table Command
(TRAM button)
2. For an entq that fs to reference the Home
Area Code table (specfal table 41 the entry
may also be entered to expect or not expect
a leading digit [I]. In fact fn some cases it
may be desirable to enter both of the followhg entrks:
Leadfng d@it (11~ BB 1 DDD IS) and/or
Non Leading [l] - BB DDD (S}
Where:
- BB = Bin number (recommended bfn
201

- DDD = uDon’t Care- digit (three ent&s, MUTE button)
- IS)= Search Special Table Command
(TR#WS button)

760-6

Isme

1. January

1993

EXCEPTION
RxCEPTION
(Cont’d)

TABLES

I’ROG~G

TABLE-8 PROGWUDIING

Deny Table Programmiq!
Pro@mmin.g

Steps

1. Press the DENY TABLE A or DENY TABLE
B flexibfe button (Button #2 or #4). The
following message is shown on the display
phone:

The first two bin locations are displayed.
2.Enter the two-digit bin number (01-10) of
the bin to be programmed.
3.Ent.er the deny code:
where:
- 0 to 9, *, # = corresponding
deny digits (numbers)
- hRlTi3 = Don’t Care digit
4. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
5. When all enlrks for one table are complete.
press the flexible button for the next table e

Ifumc 1. Jatnaary

1993

Description
Deny Table - Each Deny table contains ten bin
numbers. Each bin number may be up to eight
-digits in length including
{Don’t Care] digits.
Entries in the deny table represent numbers or
codes that are to be denied or restricted. Common enties would be [l] for restricting all Il+l
type of calls. Exceptions
to this restriction
would be entered into the allow table.
4 Deny table A is referenced and searched
only after the allow table A is checked
when Station COS$2 and CO line COS
is either 1 or 2.
l
Deny table B is referenced and searched
only after die allow table B is checked
when Station COS is 3 and CO Line COS
is either 1 or 3.
a When station COS is 4 and CO line COS
is 1 both allow tables are looked at first
(allow table A Crst then allow table Bl
then both deny tables [deny table A first
then deny table B) .
Don’t Cane digits specify that the system
should consider any d&it dialed in that position
as a match. Don’t Care digits should not be
entered as the last digit in au a&y.
Search Spedal table comma-n ds can not be
entered into the Deny tables.
To erase a bin, enter the two-digit bin number
followed by pressing the HOLD button.

7430-7

i@zite
EXCEPTION
,

TAB-

PROG-G

=CEPTfON

TABU3S

PROG-G

Digital

DVX’

and DVX”

Key Telephone

Systems

(Cont’d)
D.

Special

Table

Programminq

F?rog-

steps

To program a special table, it is first necessary
to assign an area code to the table (except for
the home area code).
To assign an area code to a special table:
1. Press the appropriate
AREA CODE TABLE
f 1-4) flexible button (button #9-l 1). The
foliowing message is shown on the display
phone:

2. Enter the three-digit

area code.

3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confkmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
To enter ofike codes into the special table:
4. Press the SPECIAL TABLE (14) fkkble
button (button #5 - #8) that corresponds to
the area code programmed
above. The following message is shown on the display
phone:

Description
The special tables provide greater flezdbility in
designing a toll plan for a particular site. Each
special table allows en&y of up to 800 threedigit office codes (200 - 999). Three of these
tables must be assigned an area code by which
they are referenced. The four-& table is reserved
for the home area code and requires no area
code entry.
The special tables are referenced through entries in the allow tables. Four area codes, including the home area code,,can be referenced
to these special tables for further def%ition,
When a speciai table is referenced, entries must
be made in the spedal table specking
what
office codes will be allowed. By default no codes
are on the allow list.
Codes can be added to the allow list or removed
horn the list. When a special table is checked
for a match, to a three digit code, but not found
thesystemwlllthencontinuetosearchthenext
allow deny table that is to be cl-recked. The
system does not return to the allow table which
routed the call to the special table.
The buttons on the digital terminal are deftned
as shown below when entering the Special Table programmmg
area.

WhfZlX:

- xXx= Area Code
5.Enter the three-digit
of%e codes that are
- to be allowed followed by a [ 11 which means
to allow this code. To remove a code from
the allow list enter the three-digit
office
code followed by a [ 01 which wiu remove the
code from the allow list.
- Xxx Ill = Allow code
- Xxx [O] = Remove code from the list
Where XXX = an officf2 code from 200 to 999.
6. Press HOLD after every code entered. Conbation
tone is heard and tbe display will
nowupdate.
Multiple codesmay be entered
in a row. The display will update showing
the first six codes ti ascending order.

760-S

Issue

1, January

1993

iqfmite
D&id

DVX’ and DVX’
Key Telephone
Systems

EXCEPTION
[Cont’dl
E.

EXCEPTION

TABtEs

PROGRAMMING

TABLES PROGRAAlMlNG

Displfqing

Toll Table Entries
Programming

Steps

To display entries in either the Allow/Deny
tables or the special tables:
1. Press the DISPLAY TABLES flexible button
button
#12) while entering inform&ion
into a table.
2.WhiIe viewing entries made into an allow
or deny table, two entries at a time will be
displayed on the bottom line of the display.
By pressing the DISPLAY TX&ES button
again. the next Mgher bins will be displayed. When the last entries are displayed
pressing
the DISPLAY TABLES button
agatn will show the fh-st two entries.

mere:
- X= Allow or Deny Code
- E= End of Entry
While viewing entries in a special table. six
three-digit codes, that have been allowed. will
be displayed in ascending order starting with
the lowest entry. By pressing the DISPLAY TABLES button @in, the next six entries will be
displayed. This will continue until all codes
have been displayed.

- m=AreaCode
- YYY= Allowed 0ffice

Issue 1, January

1993

Code

Description
It is possible to view enties in the toll tables
using the display on the Executive telephone.
To view aTi entries, the DISPUXY TABLES flexible button
(Button #12) is pressed multiple
times to scroll through the entries.

irlfinite
mgital

DVXrandDVXn
Key Telephone

LEAST

!3pttms

Route L&t Table
. Insert/Delete
Table

l
l

COST RODTING

&CR) ~OGRAIKMINE

SECTION 765
COST ROUTING (LCR) PROGRANLMlNG

785.1
INTRODUCTION
Least Cost Routing &CR) selects the most economical programmed route for an outgoing calI.
when a station user dials an outside number,
the LCR feature analyzes the number and then
automatical@
chooses an outside line from the
group that has been programmed
as most economical. The LCR feature puts the responsibility of choosing the least expensive route for
each area code and exchange code on the system administrator,
not on the station user. In
order to make a routing de&ion, the K!R feature is programmed
in the system database.
The successful operation of this feature 3s completely dependent
on the accuraq of the programming.
There are eight different tables which are set up
to monitor the dialing of digits and to select the
best route for the call depending on time of day
and day of week.
‘These tables are:
l
3-Digit Area/Office Code Routing Table
* &Digit Office Code Routing Table
l
Exception Table

LEAST

DaiIy Start Time Table
Weekday (Weekly) Schedule
Toll Information
Table

A. LcRopel-atioll
The system first checks to see if the number
dialed is more than two digits. If it is two digits
or less, the call is processed according to instructions in the Exception Table. If the number is not found in the Exception Table, the call
is denied.
If the number is more than two digits, it goes to
the 3-Digit Table. If the first digit dialed is a * 1”
the leading 1 table will be checked with the
following three digits. If the first digit dialed is
not a ” 1”. then the i?r-st th&e digits are checked
against the Non-Leading
1 3-Digit table. The
lirst three dtgits (either oRice code or area code)
are then checked to see if’ they are in the 3-Digit
Table. If they are not found there. the calI is
denied. If the digits are found in the 3-Digit
Table, the system then checks for an entry to
see if the S-Digit Table must be refenced.
If the 6-Digit column is marked Lyes] inthe three
digit table entry, the number is then checked in
the 6-Digit Table.
There are 20 6-Digit tables, Each S-Digit table
is programmed
and becomes associated to a
specific area code with a selected route. Office
codes are entered into the S-Digit table that wiIl
be routed to a specific route list table. This
allows the system administiator
to split area
codes for routo different lines connected to
the system. This helps when Foreign Exchange
lfnes (F?I Lines). Banded WATS lines. or ‘Dcdicated” Lines (OPXs fro.m another system) are in
use.
If the office code is not found in the 6-Digit
Table, the call is referred back to the 3-D&$
Table for selecting a route list table. And then
goes through the same procedures as described
below.
Before actually selecting a route list table, the
number is checked against the toll resixiction
tables (station COS). When LCRis enabled, only
station Class of Service is referenced. CO line
Class of Senice is no longer applicable. AU CO
lines are considered Class of Service 1.
Ifthe call is not allowed through the toll restriction tables, the calI is denied. Ifit is allowed. the
caIl then goes to the Route List Table as specified by either the 3-Digit or 6-Digit table.
The Time of day and Day of week is determined
and the call is presented to the corresponding

ml”

COST ROUTING

&CR) PROGRAMMING

Di@td

&finite
DVX1andDVXn
lCey Telephone
Systems

me period route within the specified route
table. ~ch of the 16 Route Tables contain four
me sensitive routes. Routes are determined by
the me of day and day of week as specified in
the Daily Start T3me table and the Weekly
Schedule table.
After the appropriate
route is selected, LCR
Class of Service becomes applicable. A station
can use only those line groups programmed
with a priority number equal to or higher than
the station’s ICR Class of Service.
If a line is not available in the first choice line
group, the system advances to the next choice
line group and search= for a free line. This
process continues
until an available he is
found,
or the last available
line group is
searched ,or unti a line group is reached with
a priority assignment lower than the station’s
LCR Class of Senrice assfgnment.
When a line is avaJlable the system will se&
that line and wait for dial tone. Then before
dialing. the system checks the Insert/Delete
table for digits that should be deleted from the
fkont of the number or digits that should be
inserted either before or after the number dtaled. Fjnahy the system begins to dial the number out over the selected line. All of this
analyzing
and manipulation
of the number
takes only a fraction of a second from the time
the station user begins to dial until the number
is dialed out over the public network lines.
If no lines are available in any of the CO line
groups programmed
for that route and allowed
to that station, the cali can be automatically
queued on to the first choice (least mstly) line
group. If the user waits three seconds after
dialing the number, theywfll hear mAinnation
tone which m&c&es
that an automatic
LCR
Queue Callback has been actfwated on the first
choice line group. When a CO line becomes
available in the fkst choice line group the system will ring the calling station. When answered
by the station
the system
will
automatically
sefie the line and redial the number.

765-2

tsuc

1, Jrum3ly

1995

iqjinite
Digital

DVX’andDVXn

Telephone

LCR PROGRAMMING

Systems

PfDgr

COST ROUTING

&CR) PROG~QIMMING

(Cont’d)

LCRTABLE%

765.2

IzLAsT

PROGRAMMING

a.rmag

Description

steps

If the system is in the programming
mode,
continue using the program codes. Ifstarting to
program here, enter the programming
mode.
Refer to Sec. 700.2. Program Mode Entry (Key
Station).
To program the system for Least Cost Routing:
1. Press FLASH and dial [75]. The following
message is shown on the display phone:

The Least Cost Routing &CR] feature allows for
the automatic selection of the most economical
trunk according to the number dialed and the
time of day and day of the week. There are eight
different tables which are set up to monitor the
dialing of c&its of a station and to select the
best route programmed
for the call. These tables are:
3-Digit Area/Ofbce Code Routing Table
6-Digit Of&x Code Routing Table
Exception Table
*

are efght tables which can be programmed here for LCR (you must also pmgram L+CR Class of Service in Station
ProgrammingI.
Use the procedures Listed
below to program these LCR tables.

2.There

extnmely

wirrorkshsetb

pTQfpllM~ihULCRtUbkil.

.importPnt
.compXcted

Urat

:the
b4for-e

Route List Table
lnsert/Deleti
Table
Daily Start Time Table
Weekday [Weekly) Schedule
Toll Information
Table
The buttons on the digital terminal are defined
as shown below when entering the LCR Tables
proarea:

Default: The 3-Digit table conkins
a default
where all Long distance (numbers requiring an
area code) with a leading digit ‘1” are muted to
Route List Table 00. Route List Table 00 will
mute calls on lines in group 1 for ah time
periods. AU Local Cans ~numbers that are dialed
without an area code) with or without a leading
digit ” 1” are muted to route hst table 01. Route
Table 01 also routes calls using lines in Line
Group 1 for all time periods. Refer to Figure
775-8 DB Prlntout of ICR Default for a complete listing of the ICR default data.
Related Programm+lg:
Refer to Sec. 710.2.
System Features l?ro@mg,
LCR Enable :
730.1,
Station
AttrIbutes
Programming.
Station Class of Service {COS); and Sec. 730.1,
LCR Class of service &OS).

Issue I. Jan-

1993

LEAST COST ROUTING
,

&CR) PROGRAWHING

G (Cont’d)

LCRPROG-

iqjinite
DVX’ apd DVX I1
Digital Eey Telephone
Syetwpe

s-Digit

Area/Of&t

Code Table

gpimmhg

Description

Steps

s-D&it Area/Of&e
Code Table. This table is
divided into two sections - Leading 1 (a [l] is
dialed before the number) and Non hading
1
(no [l] is dialed before the number). This gives
the system the ability to handle call routing in
areas that require a 111 before a long distance
number, as well as in areas that do not require
the [I].
30th of these tables include all area codes
INpA’s), and oflice codes (NXXs), 6;-om 000 to
999, including such numbers as 911.4 11, etc.
A complete entry into thqe tables include a
route List table to be used, if the s-D&it Table
is to be checked and the number of digits likely
to be dialed (example 7 digits or 10 digits).
AII local oflice codes must be entered in this
table even flthey do not require long distance
calling.
The number of digits to expect entrywill aid the
system in identifying
when the last digit is
dialed and to begIn routfng the call. This also
helps to free SLT IXMF receivers if SLT traf3c
in the system is heavy.
For international
calls, use YW as number of
digits to expect. This causes the. system to wait
five seconds after user dials last digit before the
system accesses a CO line and dials out.

1. Press 3-DIGIT TABLE flexible button (Button # 11. The following message will be
shown on the display phone:

- L = 101for non leading 1 [,l” not dialed)
I11 for leading l(“1” is dided)
- NNN = area/office code
- RR-routelistnumberU0-15
- Y = [O) do not go to 6-Digit table
[ 11 go to 6-Digit table
- PP = number of digits expected to be
dialed.
2. Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.

Appendfx
NON-LEADING (0) CODE
LEADING (I)
{NNN)
0

RTE
(RR)

6 DIG(6)
(Y/N)

#
DIG

1
0

0
1

0
1
0
1

-m--m

0
1
0
1
n

Fi@ve

7654

A-13 3-Dlglt ArealOttice

NON-LEADING (0) 1CODE
LEADING (1)
! (NW)
I
0
,
1
0
1
0
I
I

0
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
ln

1
1
I

765-l

f
I

Ex: SD&it

Code Route List Table

i
1

Arca/OfEcc

RTE
(RR)

6 DICi(6)
W/N)

#I
DIG

I
1

t
1

I
I

I
I
I

Code Table Pgm Farxn

h8ue

1, January

1993

i@ite
DVX’ and DV?L’l
Dj@tal Key Telephone
systems

LE.+ST

COST ROUTING

&CR)

PROGRAMBEING

Description
S-Digit Ofike Code Table. This table is used
to determine a route for one or a group of
individual
office codes within
an area code.
Certain office codes within
an area code can be
given unique or special routing. Ifthe office code
dialed is not found in the 6-Digit Office Code
Table, the caII is then routed according to the
route list tabIe as was entered in the 3-Digit
Table.
The system aBows for 20 6-Digit Area/Office
code tables that may be used to route speciik
office codes within an area code. Each table will
route calls foracommon
a&a code to a specified
route. AII entries made into a table wiU route
those offke ccsdes~to the sped&d
route list
table. An area code may be entered into more
than one MXgit
table with Merent
routes
specified.
To delete all entrks in an Area Code/Route
table. enter IO AAA RR ###I.

1. Press the 6-DIGIT TABLE flexible button
(F5utton # 21. The following message is
shown on the display phone:

Whm:
- S = 101 to remwe codes
[lltoaddcodes
- Akw=areacode
- RR=routenumberCMJ-15
- NNN=officecode
2. IVess the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
3.Enter additional
of&e codes to be programmed into the same Area Code/ Route
Table, pressing hold after each of&x code
erhy.
4. Press a flexible button to program a different table.
Appendfx

Fi@rt

Issue I. January

1993

765-2

A-14 6-Diglt Office Code Table

Ex: B-D&it

Oiflce

Code Table Pgm R.wzn

785-b

LEAST COST ROUTING
L-CR PROG FtAMMlNG
c.

exception

&CR)

@finite
DVX I and DVX ’
D&ital Key Telephone
Systems

PROGRANMING

(Cont’d)

Code Table

Prog;ramminR

steps

Descriution

1. Press EXCiFlION
TABLES flexible button
(Button #3). The following message will be
shown on the display phone:

Exccptiw
Table. This table is used for operator calls and any other calls which would use a
one-digit cartwo-digit enfry. rather than a threedigit area code.

Where:
- S = IO] to remove code from table,
[I] to add code to table
- XX= exception codes for single d@.tt
codes, press MUTE button as 2nd
digit).
The digits [+E]and I#] may be entered
as valid digits.
- RR= route table number. 00-15
2. Fkss the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
3. FIXSS Button #3 again for further entries.
Up to 20 Exeption
codes may be programmed in this table.
Appendix

Pygare 765-3

765-6

A-15 LCR Exception Cock Table

EXE Exception

Code Table

Pgm Farm

I6sue 1, Jannarg

1983

irVfinite DVX ’ and DVX ‘I
Digital Key Telephone
Spsteme

LCRPROG FunWING
D,

Route

LEAGT COST ROUTING

&CR) PRCIGRAMlywG

(Co&d)

List Table
Description

1. Press the ROUTE LISTTABLE flexible button (Button #4). The following message will
be shown on the display phone:

Where:
-

RR = Route List Table number 00-15
T = Time Period Route list l-4
G = CO Line Group l-7
DD = Insert/Delete
Table reference
00-19 (## for none)
- L= LCR Class of service (LCOS)
2.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confkmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
3.To enter additional CO line groups in the
same time period route kt number: Dial G
DD L HOLD
To enter data for a different time period route
list:
1. Press program button 4 and enter alI data
(RRTGDDL).
2.Repeat
above to program a new Route
Number 00 to 15 or press a flexible button
to program other ICR fnfonnation.
The following message will be shown on the
display when the Call Cost feature has been
enabled in Flash 05. Button #Il.

where:

Route List Table. Up to 16 different Route kt
tables can be programmed. Each route list table
contains four time period routing lists. one for
each of the available (four) daily start time
periods. Within eaoh time period route list up
to seven CO (outside] line groups and their
corresponding
Insert/Delete
Table if any and
LCR class of setice priority are programmed on
a per line group basis.
When routirrg a CO caIl through LCR CO Line
groups are accessed in sequence so that the
first line group entered Fpresents
the least
costly (and fust selected) and the last line group
entered represents the most costly (and last
selected).
The Route List Table references many other
tables when processing a call for routing. First
of all, the Daily start time table is referenced to
determined
what start time entry shouId be
checked in the weekly schedule table. The corresponding entxy in the weekly schedule table
depending on the day of the week then determines which Time Period Route list should be
used within the Route List Table.
The system then begins to check for idle lines
in the first entered CO hne group and will
proceed until an idle line is found. While it is
searcbhg for an idle CO line the Station LCR
COS fs checked against the entries for ICR COS
Priority of the specific CO line groups (see LCR
COS Priority explanation below). Once an idIe
CO liue is found with a LCR priority equal to or
higher than the stations I.JCR COS then a fti
cheek is made to determine if an Insert/Deiete
table should be referenced. Once all of the
tables and entries are oheeked the system then
processes the eaIl on the outside CO line.

- RR = Route List Table number 00- 15
- T = Time Period Route list l-4
- CCC = Cost for one minute $O.OO$9.99
- G= CO Line Group 1-7
- DD = Insert/Delete
Table reference
00-19 (## for none)
- L= LCR Class of Service (LCOS)

h3sue 1. January

1993

System
Display

Pr~grammLng:

Refer to Sec. 710.2,

Features
Programming,
Feature prog
* 6.

Call

Cost

765-7

COST ROUTING

LCRPROG RAMMING
Route

lht

iq.f;nite
DVX’ and DVX”
D&itaI Key Telephone
Systems

&CR) PROGIXAMMRVG
(Cont’d)

Table (Cont’d)
Pro-

Description

steps

LCR CO5 Pdority.
A station should be assigned a class of service for LCR. Refer to Sec.
730.1. Station Attributes
Programming.
LCR
Class of service (COSI. The LCR COS can be
between 0 and 6. with 0 being unrestricted
and
6 being the most restrictive. Within the time
period route List Table, line groups are given an
LCR COS Priority assfgnment between 0 and 6,
A station using LCR witt be able to use only
those CO (outsfde) line groups with a priority
assignment
of equal or higher value than the
station’s LCR Class of Servkg (i.e. a station wfth
U=OS 3 can use line groups with a priority of
3-6).

Table 765-l

Allowed

Access

to Route

I.4
c

O[Y

of Send&e

Table

LX3R CO Line Group Priority

I
0

S
T
A

L.CR Clam

Y!Y

6
Y

-N’N

‘Y

.. N

c
0
S

N= Cannot

use Line Group

Y= l3as access to tie

Group

i@i.te
~@tal

DVX’andDVX’
Key T&phone

LCR PRffi
E.

RAMMING

Insert/Delete

Systtnm

LEAST COST ROUTING

(Co&d)

Table

programmbg

Descriotion

Steps

l.Press INSERT/DELm
TABLE flexible
button (button #5). The following message
will be shown on the display phone:

Enter the table information
as follows;
Whel-f?:
- ‘IT = Insert/Delete
Table Number OO19
- X = (01 Pm-Delete numbers (fir;st digits dialed in the number).
[l] Pre-Insert numbers [insert digits
in front of number dialed,
(21 Post-Insert numbers [insert digits
behind number dialed)
- DDD = d@t.s (up to l&digits may be
deleted fi-om the beginning of the
number dialed and up to 40 digits
can be inserted [ZO pre and 20 post)].
P.Press the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
will now update.
To add and delete numbers in the same table,
enter the different i.nsertion/deletlon
tables in
step 1 and enter as separate entries using the
same table number.
In the Insert Tables for LCR programming:
1. Press the TRANS button for a pause.
- The [+k] and [#I digits are allowed as
valid digits for inserting di@.s dialed
e
over the network.
- The [S] and [#] are valid entries for
adding digits in both the pre (in front
of) or post (bebind the number) tables.
- The la] and [#] can not be used as delete characters in the Delete Tables.
To delete a Table, enter the Table number
lowed by the WOLD button.

l.mcrt/Delctc
Table. Digits can be either
added or deleted when dialing a number. For
instance, if a user dials a long distance call that
should be placed on a foreign exchange 0?Xl
line, the digit (11 and the three-digit area code
(NPAl dialed by the user must be deleted before
the call can be placed on that FX line. An
Insert/Delete
Table can be programmed
to do
this. Dfgits can also be added to a number that
has beendialed by the user. For instance. Other
Common
Carrier
(CCC) access codes and
authorization
(ID) codes can be automatically
inserted by the system eftHer in front of and/or
behind the number dialed.
There are 20 Insert/Delete
Tables and each
table allows for entries into a delete table and a
pre and post insert table. Up to 4cFdigtts (including pauses) can be inserted 20-pre and
20-post) and up to 16-digits can be deleted.
Digits can be inserted before or after the number dialed but can be deleted only fi-om the start
of the number dialed.

fol-

Figure

Issue 1, Jmuary

(LCR) PROGRAMMING

1993

765-4

Ex: In5crt/r.klete

Pgm Form

7659

L-CR==
F.

~afly

Rt3MMING
Start

(@nt’d)

Thnc Tabk

Proj+-mmdng

Description

Steps

Daily Stark Time Table. The daily starttime
table is used to correlate the LAX routing table
to the time sensitive discount stnxzture offered
by the customers carrier. For exxnple in the
most common
situation
the most expensive
rate period is between 8:00 am and 5:00 pm.
often called the day rate. The !Irst discount
period usually starts at 5:00 pm and runs until
1l:OO pm. often called Evening Rates. The remaining time (from 11:OO pm until 8:00 am) in
this example is referred to as night time rates
which usually has the biggest discount. With
the wide selection of Commoh Carriers the least
costly route for a particular area code may be
different at different times of the day. To accommodate this situation. this table and the Weekly
Schedule Table work together, dividing the day
into four possible time periods. By default these
tables are set at the standard divisions of 8AM.
5PM. and 11PM. However. these times can be
changed.
The enties
in the Daily Start Time table are
used to select the time period to reference. in the
weekly schedule. Based on the time a calI is
placed the da@ start time table selects the’ time
period to choose in the weekly schedule. The
weekly schedule is then used to determine the
time period route list in the Route List Table to
use for routing the call for a particular
day of
the week.
The times are entered in the 24 hour format.

1. press the DAILY E3XFS flexible button
(button #6). The following message wifI be
shown on the display phone:

2. Enter times in military form (2400 Bours)
in succe8sioIL
3.FVess the HOLD button to save the entry.
Confirmation
tone is heard and the display
wiil now update. Default times are 0800.
~700,2300(8AM,5PM,and11pM),and
the fourth
time is disabled
[#I###). To
change a start time all times must be reentered. Four Pounds [####I will be displayed if nothing is entered for a specific
time.

Fi@rc

765-10

765-S Daily Start

Time

& We&ly

Schedule

Tables

Iesue 1, January

1993

LEdST
LCR PROG RAMMlNG

(Cont’d)

T&e

Weekly

Schedule

Pro@anunirX

COST ROUTING

Description

Step5

1. Press the WEEKLY SCHED flexible button
(button #7). The following message will be
shown on the display phone:

where:

33~ Day of the Week
- Ck Monday
- 1= Tuesday
- 2= Wednesday
- 3=Thursday
- 4= Friday
- 5= Saturday
- 6= Sunday
T = Time Period Route List (l-4) to use for the
time of day (based on the daily start time table].
Enter values for all time periods spedfied in the
daily start time table for that day.
- 1 st T = Time Period Route list for tbe
FIRST Daily Start TSme.(applies to all
Route List Tables)
- 2nd T = Time Period Route List for
the SECOND Daily Start Time.(applies to all Route Ust Tables)
- 3rd T = Time Period Route Ust for
the THIRD Daily Start Time.(apphes
to all Route List Tables)
- 4th T = Time Period Route List for
the FOURT?-l Daily Start lBne.(applies to alI Route List Tab164
- 2.Press HOLD button after eacb complete
daily entry. Confirmation tone is heard and
tbe display will now update.

Fi@rc

765-6

(LCR) PROGRAMM]iNG

Weekly Schedrtle Table. The weekly schedule
table determines whatTime Period Route list to
use witbin the Route List Table. When a call is
placed and ultimately sent to a route list (call is
not denied) based on the time of day the call is
placed the Daily Start ‘Dme Table selects the
time period to reference in the weekly schedule
table. The time period route entered for the
specified time period, as determined in the daiIy
start the table and based on the day of week
is then selected and the call will be routed
according to the spec%kd time period route fist.
u
Example:
- If a call is placed at 5:45 pm on a
Monday then according to the daily
start time table (using default vaIues1
the entry for time period two of the
weekly schedule is checked. Because
it is Monday tbe entry for time period
two on Monday is used and the result is that the Time Period Route
List number two (agatn using default
values) will be used for all routes.
Thus the call is routed according to
the entries in Time Period Two route
list no matter what route (OCk15) is
selected. Refer to FIgure 765-6 Ex:
Daily &Weekly Start Time Tables

Er: DaUy 8~ Weekly

Start

Time Tables

LEAST COST ROUTING
LCR PROG RAlHMlNG
LCR Routing

&CR] PROGRAMMING

irifinite
DVX’ aadDvX”
Key Telephone
Systems

(Cont’d)

for Toll Information
gmmning

Steps

Description

1. Press TOLL IWO fl&ble
button
#8)ThefoIlo~messagewillbeshawnon
the display phone:

2. Enter the two-digit

(button

Route List number (OO15) for the Route to be referenced in the
Route List Table.
3. Press the HOLD button after programming
the Route number. Conknation
tone is
heard and the display will now update.
4.Enable
ICR at this point. Refer to Sec.
7 10.2, System Features
Programming,
LCR Enable.

TOJLL INFORMATION

FQure

765-12

D&ital

765-7

This feature adds provisions to the LX!R call
processing which will allow common call routing for all toll information
calls. 14XxX)5551212,
(xXx)555-1212,
1-555-1212
and
555-1212 calls will all be intercepted
and sent
to a selected route in the Route List Table.
Numbers dialed will be integx-ated and if it is
determIned
to be a toll information
call. either
preceded with an area code or without or with
a leadjng digit 1 or not. the call will be sent to
the route designated in programn&g,
Default: By default+ Tot1 lnfqmation
Calls will
be to Route List TabIe zero (0) which will allow
toll information
calls to be placed on the system
at default
A Toll Information
route wfll be chosen over a
3-Digit or S-Digit route assignment if both are
assigned.
Entering the pound key twice [W) will deny all
Toll Information
calls.

ROUTE LISTTABLE

Er: LCR Toll Information

DEFAULT
.oo.

Routing

Pgm Form

nmle

1, Januaxy

mB3

LEA2ST COST ROUTING
CCR PROGRAMKiN
I.

Dcfhult

WR1

PROGRAMMING

0 [Co&d)

LCR Database
’ g Steps

pr0g

Description
In an effort to decrease installation
and set up
time, usually associated with LCR, a default
LCR database has been incorporated.
The default LCR database will provide basic routing
for local and long distance dialing. Default entries have been made in the 3-Digit Table for
local offlce codes (lWXs1 and ail area codes
(NPA’s). Tko routes have been established with
the default database for rouling of all caUs
under default. The entire default database is
shoti
in Figure 77543 DB Printout of LCR
Default.
The S-D&it tables con&& a default where all
Lm4gdistancebnd3ersrequiringanareacode)
with a leading digit ‘1” are routed to Route table
00. Route Table 00 will route calls on lines in
group Z for all time ptiods.
All Local calls
[numbers that are dialed without an area code)
with or without a leading digit ” 1” are routed to
route list table 01. Route fist table 01 also
routes calls using lines in line group 1 for all
time periods.

Issue 1, January

1993

743s13

imite

DVX I and DVX

D&ital

Key Telephone

’
Systems

INITULIZE
770.1

DATABASE

PARAMETERS

SECTION 770
DATABASE PARAMETERS

INTRODUCTI0N

ProgITmmhg

Description

steps

If the system is in the programming
mode,
continue usingthe program codes. Ifstarting to
program here, enter the prog
- g mode.
Refer to Sec. 700.2. Program Mode Entry (Key
Station).

If Database Parameters need to be initiafized:
1. Press FLASH and dial [80]. The following
message wU be shown on the display of a
display phone:

This section describes the procedures
and
steps necessary to initialize the system database returning
any programmed
data to its
original or default value. The entire system
database may be initfalized or various portions
of the database may be individuaIly
initialized.
In addition to initialization
of the entire database, a system reset (Button #8) command
is
alsO included in this section for clearing meantime errors without initializing the database.
The buttons on the key telephone are defined
as shown below when entering the initializing
DataEkse Parameters progmmming
area:
p!Fq$!q~~.~
g?qEq~~

lfmlc

1, January

1993

770-l
i

nqn%UZE

DATABASE

JNIT DATAWISE

infinite
DVX I and DVX I1
D@IxI Key Telephone
Systems

PARAMETERS

IZS (Coat’d)

Initialize System Parameters
Programming

Description

Steps

The system parameters may be initialized setting all data fields to their original. default
values. The following data fields are returned to
their default values upon initializing
the System parameters.

If System Parameters need to he initialized:
1. Press the System Parameters flexible button (Button # 11.The following message will
be shown on the display phone:

the system parameters,
press
Cor&mation
tone is

2.To W

the HOLD
heard,
PROGRAM

button.

CODE

SYSTEMTIMEZS
I FLASH01

BEN

’
1

14
15
16
17

FEATrum
System Hold Recall
Exclusive Hold Recall

SLT Hook-flash

‘I3mer

SLT Hook-flash Debounce
SMDR Call QuaUfIcation Timer

1Auto Call Back Timer

DEFAULTVALUE
(after illitializjn~
060 seconds
180 seconds

10 (1 seconds)
010 (-1 second)
i 3osec.

00 sec. (disabled)
I

! SYSTEM

7
8
9
10

I1
12

770-2

I LCREnabie
Forced Account

Codes

Group Listem

Idle Speaker Mode
Call Cost Display Feature
Music On Hold

disabled
disabled
disabled
dimbled

disabled
enabled

Issue 1. January

1993

injidte
D@tal

DVX I and DVX ’
Hey Telephone
By&ems

INIT. DATABASE

PARAMETE

Ini*

P armmeters

syf3tcm

ProgK3mming
i

PROGRAM CODE

INTMUZE

PAR4MJXER3

RS Whnt’d)
(C-ont’d)
Description

steps

iBEN

DATADASE

DEFAULTVALUE
(after initim

FEATURE

1 MISC. SYSTEM
i FEATURES

iFLASH
/FLASH11
IlUSH
FLASH 13

Issue 1, Jamry

1-4

lSB3

j Attendant
Assignment
I Time and Date Format
j PBX Dialing Codes

SIA 100
12 HR M/D/Y
None

770-S

DATABASE

InitiaIizc

PARMBEIERS

PARABEZEFU

INIT. DATABASE

itIfinike
DVX1andDVXn
Dfgital Key Tckphone
Systems

(Cont’d)

co Line Attrihutcs
Pro-

Description

steps

If CO Line Attributes
need to be initialized:
1. Press the CO Line Attributes
flexible button (Button #2). The followingmessagewill
be shown on the display phone:
IllrruLm

The CO Lhe parameters may be initialized setting all data fields to their original, default
values. The followlng data fields are returned to
their default value upon initializing the CO Line
parameters.

Ii0 MS

PEEatm
2.To initialize the CO Line Attributes,
press
the HOLD button. Confirmation
tone will
be heard.
PROGRAM

CODE

FLASH 40

BU’ITON
1
2
3
4
5
6

FEATURE
DlMF/PulseS@nalin~
CO/PF3X Marking

UnWersal Ni&t Answer
DK% TFX-to-m
(ConfJ
Automatic Privaq
hop Supervision

DEFAULT

VALUE

(after initializin@

ALL Lines set for DT?MF
ALL Lhes set for CO
Enabled on alI Lines
Enabled on a.U Lines
Enabled on all Lines
NO (disabled on all lines)

iqfkite
Dilofti

DV2I I md DVX ’
Eey Telephone
Systems

INIT. DATAEASE
c.

Iui-

Station

DATABASE

PARAMETERS

RS (Co&d)
Attributes

Pro@rnming

Description

Steps

If Station Attributes need to be initialized:
1. Press the Station Attributes flexible button
(Button #3). The following message will be
shown on the display phone:

The Station parameters may be initialized setting all data fields to their origiial.
default
values. The following data fields are returned to
their default value upon initializing the Station

2.To initialize the Station Attributes,
press
the HOLD button. Confiition
tone will
be heard.
BUTTON
A/l
A/Z
A/3
A/4
A/5
A/6
A/?
A/8
A/9
A/10
A/11

i FLASH 50. Page “B”

Page Access
, Do Not Disturb
! Conference
Executive Override
privacy Release
System Speed Dial
Line Queuing
Preferred Line Answer
Off-Hook Voice-Over
Call Forwaxd
Forced LCR
Station ID

B/l
B/2
B/3
D/4
B/5
B/6
B/7
B/8

1 Station Class of Service
Speakerphone
Option
pick-up Group(s)
Paging Zone(s)
Preset Forward Desttnation
CO Line Group Access
LCR Class of Service
Off-Hook

Preference

B/9
B/10

ISSUC 1, January

1B-

DEFAULTVALUE
[after 3nitializIn~
Allowed (enabled)
Allowed (enabled)
Allowed [enabled)
D&-allowed (disabled)
Dis-allowed (disabled)
Allowed (enabled)
Ahowed (enabled)
I&-allowed
(disabled)
i
Disallowed
(disabled)
Allowed (enabled)
Not Required (disabled)
AU Key Stations default to
Station ID 0 (keyset)
Au Single Line Telephones
and OPXs default to ID 5
(SLT w/o MSG Wait)
All Stations assfgned COS 1
1 Au Stations assQned option 1
AU Stations assigned into
Group I
Au Stations assigned into
Zone 1
None assigned
All Stations assigned access to
Group 1
All Stations @ven an LCR COS
of0
Is allowed to all stations with
the ability to change the
ZiSS&IYIRCXlt
! See default button assignment
I

Flex Button

Assignment

770-5

@finite

Figure
770-6

770-l

%-Button

Default

Button

DVX I and DVX

Mapping

hnc1,Jantuuy1993

iq#intie
DVX’andDVX’
Dlgftal Key Telephone

Systems

FQum
Issue 1. Januaxy

1993

770-2

S-Button

Default

Button

Mapping

770-7

i@inite

DATAEASE

INIT.

DATABASE

Idtidize

P-RS

PARAlldETE

Di@a3

DV2C’andDVX’

Xcy Telephone

Systems

F& (Cont’d]

Station

a.xLd co Port

h@Umdng

steps

~CiCl-S

Description

If Group Parameters need to be initialized:
1. Press the Staff on/CO Port Parameters flexfble button lsutton #a)-). The following message will be shown on the display phone:

2.To tnftialize the Station/CO
ters, press the HOLD button.
tonewillbeheard.

770-a

Station and CO Port parameters
ized setting all stations and all
to their original, default values.
data fields are returned to their

may be initialCO Lines back
The folIowing
default values

Port parameClmikmation

bsue

1, Jammy

L-3

i@ite
D&$td
MIT.
E.

DVX’adDVX’
Key Telephone
DATABASE

fnltiake

Systems

DATABASE

PARAMETERS

PARAHEWE Fe3 (Cont’d)

Exception

Tables

Proggammhg

Steps

If Exception Tables need to be initialized:
1. Press the Exception Tables flexible button
(3utton #5). The following message will be
shown on the display phone:

Description
The Exception Table parameters including the
AIlow/Deny Tables and the Special Tables may
be initialtzed setting all tables to their original.
default values. The fokwing Tables are cleared
returning to their default value upon initializing
the Exception Tables pammeters:

i lrrrrmmnrMlEs
; lJ3immlm
2. To initiake
the Exception Tables. press the
HOLD button. Confirmation
tone will be
heard.
TABLE
ALLOWTABLE-A
DENY TABLE - A
ALLOWTABLE-B
DENYTiU3LE-B
SPECIAL TABLE
1
SPECIAL TABLE
2
SPECIAL, TABLE
3
1 SPECIAL TABLE
4
tImme area code).

Issue 1, January

mQs

DEFAULTVALUE
(after iniTable Cleared (no entries
Table Cleared (no enties)
Table Cleared (no entries)
Table Cleared (no entries)
Table Cleared (no entries allowed,
I
no area code specified)
Table Cleared (no entries aIlowed.
no area code speclfiedl
Table Cleared [no entries aIlowed,
no area code specified)
Table Cleared (no entries

allowed)

770-9

DATABASE

INIT. DATABASE
F.

l.&i&zt

PARAMETERS

System

Spttd

Pragramming

(Cont’d)

Numbers

Steps

If System Speed bins need to be initialized:
l.FYtss the System Speed flexiile button
(Button #6). The following message will be
shown on the display phone:

the.System Speed bins, press
the HOLD button. Confirmation
tone will
be heard.

2.To initialize

iq#inike
DvX’andDVX’
Digital Key Telephone
Systems

Description
Numbers entered into the System Speed dial
Table may be initialized clearing all bins to their
orig-inal, default value [empty). All bins 20
through 99 are cleared returning
to their default value (empty) upon initializing
the Speed
Dial Table.

@jWte
Mgltal

DK&ndDVXn
Ecy Telephone

INIT. DATARASE
G.

Illi-

Systcme

P ARAMETERS

DATABASE

PARAlWHZRS

(Cont’d)

LcRTablcs
Prog-

Steps

If LCR Tables need to be initiaked:
1, Press the LCR Tables flexible button [Button #?I. The following
message wiIl be
shown on the display phone:

2.To Mtialize
the LCR Tables, press the
HOLD button. Confknation
tone will be
heard.

Issue 1, January

1995

Description
l%e XR Tables may be initialized setting all
tables to their orfgtial, default values. The following tables wiII be reset ta their original default value a&r inMalimtion
of the LCR tables:
l
3-Digit Table
l
6-D&$ Table
l Exception
Table
l Route
List Table
l Insert/Delete
Table
l Daily
Start Time Table
l Weekly
Schedule
l Toll Information
Route

770-11

iqfmiie
DVX’andDVXn
Digital Eey Telephone
Systems
DATABASE

INIT.

P ARAMETEHS

IxMaHze
Entire
paraxn&rs)

System

[Cont’d)

and Reset

(all

steps
If System needs to be kMaIized:
1. Press the System and Reset flexible button
(&&ton #8). l%e following message will be
shown on the display phone:

IkscIipffon

To completely

the database area inparameters held
in Dynamic FUM (DRAM) and reset the system
also clearing any meantime errors that may
exist this command may be used. The system
will require reprogmmming
of any customer
specific data after using this command.
This
cluding

initial&e

all non-programmable

provides an easyway to re-initiake
the system
and clearing any meantime
errors that may

have accumulated
initialize the entire system database.
press the HOLD button. The system will
perform a bard reset.

2.To

770-12

inhibiting

system

operation

or performance.

fssue

1, January

1993

iqjinife
nrgital

DVX I and DVX ’
SeJr Telephone
Systtme

-DATAaAsE

PARAMETERS

RS (Co&d)
INIT. DATAEASE PInitiallzc
ICLID Paranleters
I.
Programmiq

steps

Description

If the ICUD Tablets) need to be initialized:
1. Press the ICLID TABLE fkxlble
button
(Button #9). The following message w.Ul be
shown on the display phone:

The ICLJD Table parameters may be initialized
setting all data fields to their original, default
values.

2.To f.niMke
the KWD Table[s). press the
HOLD button. Confirmation
tone will be
heard.
i PROGRAMCODE

BEN

i FLASH43
I
FlASH 56

Issue 1, Japuarg

FEATURE

1993

1
2
3
4

ICLID Rfnm
1 ICLID
f ICLJD
1 ICLID
i ICLID

Assi@mm-ks

Enable/Disable
Name Entry
Baud Rate Display
PotiAssi@ment

DEFAULTVALUE
.I (after inititid
No stations are assi@ed

Number

Disabled
is shown on LCD
2400 Baud
Port #l

770-13

DVX * and DVX I1
Key Telephone
Systems

infinite

DATABASE

INIT.
J.

DATABASE
IniB

PARAMETERS

PARAbETERS

PDF Vodavi Infinite DVX I & II Installation

Infinite DVX I & II Install Infinite DVX I & II Install

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation